The four chiefyst offices belonging to Horsemanshippe, That is to say. The office of the Breeder, Of the Rider, of the Keeper, and of the Ferrer. In the first part whereof is declared the order of breeding of horses. In the second how to break them, and to make them horses of service, Containing the whole art of Riding lately set forth, and now newly corrected and amended of many faults escaped in the first printing, as well touching the bits as otherwise. thirdly how to diet them, aswell when they rest as when they travel by the way. Fourthly to what diseases they be subject, together with the causes of such diseases, the signs how to know them, and finally how to cure the same. Which books are not only painfully collected out of a number of authors, but also orderly disposed and applied to the use of this our country. By Tho. blundevil of Newton Flotman in Norff.  
¶ Imprinted at London by William Seres dwelling at the west end of Paul's church, at the sign of the Hedgehog. Cum privilegio ad imprimendum solum.   

TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE AND HIS SINGULER GOOD LORD, THE Lord Roberte Dudley, earl of Leycester, Barron of Denbighe, Knight of the honourable order of the Garter, Master of the Queen's majesties horses, and one of her highness privy council. Thomas Blundevil wisheth perfect felicity.  
AFTER THAT I had put forth the Art of Riding, and saw how thankfully it pleased not only your Honour, but also the most part of the jentlemen of this Realm, to accept the same: I was so much encouraged thereby as I sought to make the said book more periecte, by adding thereunto three other books, whereof the first should treat of the breeding of Horses, the second of their diet, to preserve them long in health, and the third of their diseases: declaring therewithal the causes, signs, and cures of the same, which books how necessary they be, and how meet they are to accompany the Art of Riding, the matter itself (being well handled) would evidently show. For than it should be a perfect work, comprehending the four chiefyst Offices belonging to Horsemanshyppe, that is to say: The office of the Breeder, of the Rider or Breaker, of the Keeper, and of the Ferrer. For as touching the Bitmaker & Saddler their offices, the first is indifferently well declared already in the Art of Riding: & the Saddler his office, shallbe taught hereafter in another little book of additions, which I intend God willing to join to this volume, briefly comprehendyng all the good precepts of a later Writer, now being your honours most excellent rider, called master Claudio Corte: Not only touching that office, but also touching diverse of the other Offices before recited. Which Book shall supply to all the wants of such necessary things, as either Gryson in his book or I perhaps have negligently omitted. And truly, your Honour deserveth no little praise, for procuring so singular a man into this Realm: For besides his perfection in riding, he is so well learned, wise, courteous, and modest withal, as his acquaintance, company, & friendship ought to be right dear unto all civil gentlemen, and specially to those that delight in Horsemanshyppe. But now to return unto my purpose, for that I saw it lay not in me to perform this work, so as it might answer every man's expectation, and specially of such as are more ready to find faults, then to amend them, I did almost repent me of mine enterprise and good desire: and the rather, for that I had no one certain Author to follow, that either wrote of these matters to the full, or in such order as did satisfy my mind, but should be driven to deal with a great number of Authors, whose sayings and experiences, together with mine own small knowledge gotten by traveling in foreign countries: I must not only orderly dispose: but also apply the same to the use of this our country. Which thing being more laborious (than some perhaps take it,) I had clean given it over if your good Lordship had not been, by whom I was so much hearted, as I could not chose but to take the same in hand, and to go thorough withal so well as I could: And therefore if any man receiveth any commodity thereby (as I doubt not but he shall, if he will vouchsafe to read all that I have written from the beginning to the ending) he shall have most cause to be thankful to your Honour for the same. And I believe your thanks and praise should be so much the more, if it would please your Honour to be a mean that the queens highness may not only cause such statutes as were made in her noble Father and dear Brother's time, (both of good Memory) touching the breeding of horses upon commons to be put in execution: but also that all such parks within this realm, as be in her highness hands, and meet for that purpose, might not wholly be employed to the keeping of Dear, (which is altogether a pleasure without profit) but partly to the necessary breeding of Horses for service, whereof, this realm of all others at this instant hath greatest need. The lack of which, if any invasion should chance (which God defend) would quickly appear (I fear me) to the great peril & danger of this her highness realm. And her Majesty giving this good example, I doubt not but that the most part of the noble men and gentlemen of this realm having parks or grounds impaled meet for such use: would follow the same. And to the intent that no covetousness might hinder so good an act: I would wish the covetous mind & desire of all men to be bridled by a law & discipline. Whereby it would be provided that not only a sufficient number of able Horses may be bred within this Realm: but also that the same horses may be broken, kept maintained, and exercised accordingly. Monsieur de l' Angeay in his book of war, would have no man to keep a hackney or easy horse to ride on himself: unless he kept also a horse meet for service in the field. Which thing I fear me would not please us English men at all, which of late days are more given to private ease & singular commodity, then to a wealth public or common profit. Notwithstanding, if a good law (as I said before) were made aswell for the breeding, as exercising of great horses, and Gueldinges meet for service: and the same straightly executed by uncorrupted officers, which in mine opinion would be skilful Surveyors for the breeds and expert muster masters for the horses of service. And also that such surveys be made twice a year at the least, and that the Musters of the horses of service be taken throughout the whole realm four times in a year, that is to say quarterly, and all in one day, for the avoiding of false Musters: I believe that in short space we should not only have plenty of good horses, but also that the gentlemen of this realm would so far pass the Frenchmen and all other nations in this exercise, as they now excel us: whereby this realm should be of such force, as our enemies would always be afraid to attempt any enterprise against us. Wherefore me thinks your honour cannot by any one way deserve more praise or better gratify all true English hearts, then by seeking to bring to pass so needful a thing as this is: whereunto because I know your Lordship to be of your own good nature & disposition so ready and prone, as no man more: I leave therefore to trouble your Honour any further, praying God long to prosper the same.  
Always priest to serve your Lordship. Th. Blundovill.   

¶ A short Preamble declaring in what points the knowledge of a Horsebreder chiefly consisteth, whereon dependeth the order of this book.  
WHO so is desirous, and therewith able to have a good race or breed of Horses (for to have skill in this matter without good will, and ability, to execute the same, would little prevail) ought first to know, whether his ground be meet for that purpose or not, and how to sever the same accordingly. secondly it behoveth him to know the diverse kinds of Horses & Mares, to the intent that he may provide himself of such as are most worthy to be kept, & will thrive best in his ground. Thirdly how to use them when he hath them, as well at, and before the time of engendering, as after that the Mares have conceived and foaled. And also how to use their offspring, as well during their foleage, as at their full age: so as they may redound to his most commodity, & with least labour and charge. Of which three general points, with what order I treat in this book: the contents of the chapters hereafter following, do plainly declare.   

¶ The Contents of the chapters.  
Which grounds are meet for Races, and which be not. Also how such grounds ought to be divided or severed, & to what end such division serveth. 
Cap. i.  O the divers kinds of Horses and Mares, according to the Countries from whence they come, and which be best. 
Cap. two. 

Of the Turkey Horse.  
Of the Horse of Barbary.  
Of the Horses that come from the Isles of Sardygnia and Corsica.  
Of the Napolitan, or Courser of Naples.  
Of the jennet of Spain.  
Of the Hungarian.  
Of the high Almaigne.  
Of the Flaunders Horse.  
Of the Frizelande Horse.  
Of the Swiethlande Horse.  
Of the Irish hobby.    A comparison of the Races above rehearsed, as touching the Climates under which they be bred, and which of them will thrive best here in England: and are most meet to serve every Breders sundry purpose or intent. 
Cap. iii.  How to choose Stallions and Mares, meet for breed, and of what age they ought to be. And finally how the Studs ought to be tame, and not wild. 
Cap. iiii.  At what time of the year it is best for Horses and Mares to engender. And in what sort they ought to be put together. And how to know when a Mare desireth the Horse. Also how many Mares one Stallion is able to cover in one year. And finally when the stallions should be removed from them. 
Cap. v.  What order is to be observed, touching the covering of Mares, when the Stallions do not run with them in the pastures, but are kept in the stable, and how the same stallions should be dieted. Also at what time of the day the Mares ought then to be covered. And finally how to know whether they have conceived or not. 
Cap. vi.  How to make your Mares to conceive either horse fools, or Mare fools, and of what colour you lust to have yourself. 
Cap. seven.  Whether Mares should be forced to abide the horse, though they have no lust, or not. And how to make both horse and Mare, having no lust, to have a lust to engender. Also how to abate their lust if need require. 
Cap. viii.  Which Mares should be covered every year, and which not. And how to do, that those Mares which you would have to bear every year, shall not go barren. 
Cap. ix.  How mares should be used after they have conceived, and are with fool, and what causeth them to cast their fools before their tyme. 
Cap. x.  How to help a Mare that is in danger at the time of her foling. And how you shall cause her to expel her secundine or Clean. 
Cap. xi.  How to make a mare to cast her fool that is not worthy to be bred, or for some other needful cause. 
Cap. xii.  How Mares should be used after they have foaled. Also how long the fools should suck. And how they ought to be used during their foleage. Also how to harden their hooves. 
Cap. xiii.  How to know of what stature, making, and disposition, the fools when they are new foaled, will be when they come to age. 
Cap. xiiii.  Of the growth aswell of Marecoltes, as horsecoltes. And how to know which will continue in goodness, and live longest. 
Cap. xv.  When, and how Colts should be weaned from their dams: and how they ought to be severed according to their kinds and ages. 
Cap. xvi.  Of the gelding of Colts, and for what cause they be guelt, also at what age, and in what time of the year they ought to be guelt. 
Cap. xvii.  At what age and in what time of the year it is best taking up of Colts to break them, & how they ought at their first halteringe to be used. 
Cap. xviii.  How, and at what age a Colts mouth should be cut, or certain of his teeth drawn, when the bit for fault thereof can not have his true resting place. 
Cap. nineteen.  Of the Culling out of refuse Mares and Colts. And also of those that should be reserved for the maintenance of the stud or Stock. 
Cap. xx   
Thus endeth the contents of the Chapters following.   

What things are to be considered in those grounds that should be appointed to the breeding of horses. Also how such grounds ought to be divided, and to what end such division serveth Cap. i.  
AND first as touching the ground, two things are to be considered, that is, the quantity and quality. The quantity for two respects. First to the intent it be not charged with more cattle than it is able to bear, for the cattle not being sufficiently fed can not prosper. The second respect is, for that the greater the ground is, the more partitions are needful, partly for change of pasture sake, for according to the old proverb, change of pasture maketh fat Calves. And such partitions would be made with high pale, rail, or else deep ditch, and very thick quick set. For Horses, Mares, and wild Colts, are not so easily kept in as other cattle is. But chiefly such partitions are needful, aswell for the stallions to run every one severally by himself, together with his own Mares, during the time of engendering, as also for the Colts when weaning time comes, to be severed from their dams, of which two points we shall speak hereafter in their due places more at large. Moreover by such partitions, besides the commodity of the grass and hay that shall be preserved thereby, for winter store, the ground itself being perhaps before very ample, waste, and wild, and thereby enclininge the cattle to be of like nature, shallbe brought to a more formality, and so the beasts themselves shall be made the more domestical, and familiar. And the rather if they be handled and made tame in their youth, whereof we shall talk hereafter more at large. Notwithstanding I would not have the ground so straightened with partitions, but so as they may have sufficient scope to run & travel to & fro therein for their living. For as to much labour, leans, & poverty, depriveth them of lust to engender, even so overmuch rest & fatness, letteth conception, & causeth a dangerous foling. Wherefore I would wish the Mares to be kept in a mean estate until they have foaled, and then to be best fed, to the intent that they may have abundance of milk in their dugs, which matter shallbe talked of hereafter more at full in his proper place. But now to appoint how many acres of ground will serve a mare and her offspring until they are meet to be broken: I think it not needful, sith the goodness of the ground must rule that matter, and partly the discretion of the owner, who by experiens ought to know his own ground best, for all grounds be not of like fertility. Neither do I think that any owner is so ignorant, but that he knoweth an Horse or a Mare to be a greater feader than any other kind of cattle, and therefore had need to have greater allowance. Yet considering that the Horse biteth nearer the ground then any other cattle (the sheep, and the Coney only excepted) whereby he gathereth more food out of one acre of ground, than any other beast can do almost out of an acre and a half: methinks that a third part more than will serve a Cow and her offspring, should also feed a Mare and her offspring, so that they be well provided for in winter season. For at hard meat they be to hard for all other cattle, by reason they have sharper teth, and do both Chowe, and also swallow down their meat with more speed. And therefore of winter meat they had need to have double allowance. And such winter meat for Mares and Colts would be good sweet hay, and well stacked up in the dryeste & warmest places of those grounds where as they should be wintered. nigh unto which stacks would be built houses meet to harbour as well the Mares with their fools as the weanlynges, (but severally by themselves) in time of snow and such like stormy and cold weather, or else to avoid that cost and charge of building, the hay may be laid upon hovels made with great forked posts and strong rafters, in such sort as the cattle may both stand, and lie dry underneath the same, within which hovels may be placed either standing or hanging racks at such height, as the fools together with their dams may reach unto the hay, that shall be cast therein. And if such hovels were enclosed with high hedge or hurdle, they should be so much the warmer, and defend the cattle the better from the cold wind. Nigh unto which hovels, or houses, let there be one pasture always kept untouched, & not fed on until Shroweftide, betwixt the which time and the midst of May is always most danger of hunger bain. Thus having talked sufficiently as touching the quantity and division of the ground, let us also speak somewhat of the quality thereof. The quality chiefly consisteth in four points. The first is to have plenty of short and sweet grass for common feed, and also of long and rank grass as well for have, as for the Mares that give suck. The second is to lack no good water and fresh springs. The third to have dry layer. The fourth to have shade and shelter, either of trees or of high bushes, to defend the Son, the wind, and stormy weather. And the drier, the harder under foot, and the higher that such ground is, the better, yea, and it is as very needful that some part thereof might be craggy and stonnye, (so as it be not barren of grass) and specially for the Colts to run in when they be weaned from their dams. For to travel to, and fro, in such grounds for their living, shall make them to have strong legs, and hard hooves.  
By this means you may perceive that neither rank, marryshe, cold, or wet grounds be meet for the purpose, for such kinds of grounds, partly for lack of sweet, and firm food, the grass thereof being rank, sour, and waterish, and partly for lack of dry layer, most commonly, do bring forth no other but slow, heavy, dull, gross headed, side bellied, and gouty legged jades. And therefore I would wish him that would have a good race, to foresee that his ground be endowed with such properties as are before rehearsed.   

¶ Of the divers kinds of Horses and Mares according to the countries from whence they come, & which be best. Cap. two.  
I Mean not here to treat of all the kinds of Horses, that be in the world, for that were an infinite work, and never attempted heretofore by any writer that I could read. For as Oppianus sayeth, there be as many kinds of Horses, as there be divers countries and nations. And to say the truth it would be to small purpose. For what would it avail you to hear (unless it were for novelties sake) that in some countries there be horses no bigger than Rams, and in some countries horses be made like Unicorns, in some Country again Mares to conceive with the western wind, without the help of any Stallion, whose Colts do not live above three years. Wherefore leaving all such strange kinds apart, I will only talk of the most worthy, and specially of such as have been known of late days by good experience, to prosper very well in this land, and be not unknown to the most part of the jentelmen of this Realm, which kinds be these here following. The Turk, The Barbarian, the Sardynian, the Napolitan, the jennet of Spain, the Hungarian, the high Almain, the Frizeland Horse, the Flanders Horse, and the Irish Hobby. Of which kinds, whilst I speak, I must needs also make some mention of the best kinds that have been either in Asia, Africa, or Europe, from whence these be descended, though perhaps more bastardly than I would wish, and all for lack of that industry and diligence which hath been used by our forefathers in times passed in bredinge them, in so much as we can assure ourselves in this our age of no certain race, yea it sufficeth now to believe the seller that saith, the horse is of such a country▪ or race, and therewith be somewhat fair to the eye, and then all is good enough, though he be never so stark a jade.  

Of the Turkey Horse.  
BUt now beginning first with the Turk, because he cometh farthest of, me thinketh it were not amiss to consider that as Turkey itself is of long time since, become a great Empire extending very far into all the three parts of the world abovesaid, comprehending divers kingdoms and countries, and yet altogether, is commonly called by the name of Turkey: Even so, the horses that come from any of the Turks dominions, or frontiers of his next neighbours, be called Turkey horses. & therefore I think it good here to declare unto you the opinions of the old writers, touching the razes that have been in those countries, now subject to the great Turk, or thereabout, to learn thereby (if it may be,) whether those that we call Turkey horses, be so in deed or not, & of which of those razes, they seem most likely to descend. And first we will begin with the chief razes of Asia, which be the Parthians, the Medes, the Armenians, the Cappadocians, and many others. The Parthians (saith Absirtus) be great of stature, bold, courageous, and sure of footemanshyp. Vegetius also saith, that they be very well reigned, and have an easy ambling pace. But the Medes do excel them in comeliness of shape. The Armenians and Capadocians, do descend of the Parthians, and be like them in all points: saving that they are somewhat more heavy headed. The horses of Greece, as A sirtus saith, have good legs, great bodies, comely heads and be of an high stature, and very well made forward, but not backward, because they are pin buttocked, notwithstanding they be very swift, and of a bold courage. But of all the razes in Greece, both the horses and Mares of Thessalia, for their beauty, bygnes, bounty, and courage, of all Authors are most celebrated. For which cause Xerexes at his coming in to Grece made a running of Horses in chariots to be proclaimed only in Thessalia, because he would have his own horses to run with the best Horses in Grece. julius Cesar also, being dictator of Rome, knowing the courage of these Horses, was the first that ordained them as a spectacle before the people to fight with wild bulls, & to kill them. The Pelleians and Magnesians are also very well commended. The Pelleians be so named of a town in Thessalia called Pella. And the Magnesians of Magnesia, a regiou of Macidonia next adjoining to Thessalia. The Epirotes be froward & disobedient to the bit, notwithstanding Paulus iovius making mention of the last great wars which the venetians had, not only with the Turks, but also in a manner with all Christendom, giveth the Epirotes great praise for their swiftness and nimbleness. In so much as the venetians (as he saith) esteemed their horses more, and waged their riders better than any other horsemen that served them at that time. But the Horses of Tracia which is now the chiefest part of Turkey in the which Constantinople the head city and seat of the great Turk standeth, be accounted worse than all the rest. For the most part of the writers do describe them after this sort. The Thracians be foul and evil fashioned, having rough bodies, great shoulders, and rising backs like unto camels, crooked legs, and go roulinge and unseemly, as well in their pace as running. notwithstanding, the Horses that I have seen come from Turkey as well into Italy as hither in to England, be indifferent fair to the eye, though not very great nor strongly made, yet very light and swift in their running and of great courage, and therefore seem to descend of the Grecian race, before dyscribed by Absirtus, But their travailing pace is neither Amble, Rack, nor Trot, but a certain kind of easy train. Albeit for the most part they be evil mouthed, by reason that in Turkey they be never ridden (as I have learned) until they be x. or xii year old, whereby they wax so head strong, as they be not easily brought to make a good stop. yea, if when you will run him at his setting forth, you say but this word (Bray) unto him he will never leave running so long as his breath will serve him, shonning nothing that shall stand in his way, if he may go over the same by any means possible, for they be of nature very courageous, and will do more by gentle means then by stripes or great threatenings, for that maketh them more desperate, and bringeth them clean out of order. Thus much of the Turk.   

¶ Of the Horse of Barbary.  
THe Barbaryan is a horse that comes out of Barbaria a Country in Affrycke, containing under it the two Regions of Mauritania, lying against Spain, whereof the one is called Mauritania Tingitana. And the other is called Mauritania Cesariensis. It containeth also the country of Numidia, and that part which is called Africa Minor, that is to say, the lesser Africa, so that Barbaria stretcheth very far. And there be many good Races within the same, & in the frontiers of the regions there about, as the Mauritanians, the Libyans, Cireneyans, the Numidians, and many others. The Mauritanians be much commended of the writers, not only for their good shape and swiftness in running, but also for that they be excellently well breathed, & thereby are both able to maintain a very long career, and also to abide any kind of labour & travail, yea and beside that they will abide the sight and roaring of a Lion, whereof there is great store and plenty in that country. next unto these are the Libyans, which be of like goodness and of like shape, saving that the Libyans be stronger made, longer bodied, thicker rybbed, & brother breasted, & of all Horses, as Aelianus saith, they do require less tending and keeping. For their masters in that country when they travail by the way, do neither wipe their legs, courry them, nor litter them, nor pair their hooves, & as soon as their journey is done they turn them forth to the pasture, and make no more a do. Again the Mares of this kind or race, as the auctors write, be so delighted with Music, as the herdsman or keeper, with the sound of a pipe: may lead them whither he will himself. The Cireneians (as Absirtus sayeth) be great of stature, and have small & gaunt bellies, they be swift in running and sure of footmanship, and in labour good at length, for which causes they were much used in the old time to run for wagers in chariots. But those horses that we commonly call Barbarians, do come out of the king of Tunnys land, out of Massilia and Numidia, which for the most part be but little horses, but therewith very swift and able to make a very long Career, which is the cause why we esteem them so much. And it should seem by Vigetius, that this race came first from Spain: who affirmeth them to be very swift in running, and meet for the saddle. Thus I end with the razes of Barbary.   

¶ Of the Horses of Sardygnia and Corsica.  
THE Horses that come out of the Isles of Sardignia and Corsica, as Uolateranus saith, have short bodies, and be very bold and courageous, & unquiet in their pace, for they be of so fierce and hot choleric complexion: and therewith so much used to running in their country, as they will stand still on no ground. And therefore this kind of horse requireth a discrete and patiented Rider, who must not be over hasty in correcting him, for fear of marring him all together.   

¶ Of the Courser of Naples.  
THE Napolitan which we commonly call a Courser of Naples, is a trim horse, being both comely and strongly made, and of so much goodness, of so gentle a nature, and of so high a courage as any horse is, of what country so ever he be. He is easily known from all other horses, by his no less clean, then strong making, his limbs are so well proportioned in every point, and partly by his portlynes in his gate, but chief by his long slender head, the neither part whereof, that is to say from the eyes downward, for the most part is also somewhat bending like a hawks beak, which maketh him to rain with the better grace, and yet the Italians do both write and say, that these Coursers be nothing so strong now as they have been in times past, partly perhaps for that like industry of late days hath not been used in breeding them, as in times past, and partly for that nature doth decay every day more and more, aswell in man as in beast. But how so ever they be, in mine opinion, their jentle nature and docility, their comely shape, their strength, their Courage, their sure footemanshippe, their well reigning, their lofty pace, their clean trotting, their strong galloping, and their swift running well considered (all which things they have in manner by nature) they excel numbers of other razes, even so far as the fair greyhounds the foul mastiff Curs.   

Of the jennet of Spain.  
THe jennet of Spain is finely made both head, body, and legs, and very seemly to the eye, saving that his buttocks be somewhat slender, and for his fine making lightness and swiftness withal, he is very much esteemed, and especially of noble men, as Camerarius saith, which Oppianus also affirmeth, saying: that the jennet in swiftness passeth the Parthians and all other Horses what soever they be, even so far as the Eagle exceedeth all the birds in the air, and as the Dolphin passeth all the fishes in the sea, but therewith he sayeth that they be but small of stature, of small strength and of small courage, all which things seem to agree very well with those gennets that be brought hither into England, unless it be the last point. For I have heard some of the Spaniards to set such praise on their gennets courage, as they have not letted to report that they have carried their riders out of the field, I can not tell how many miles, after that the jennettes themselves have been shot clean through the bodies with harquebusshes. Which report I have hard to be true by divers of our own Soldiers, which if it be true in deed, it doth the better countervail their small stature and little strength, which is manifest to all men's eyes that do behold them, and yet Absirtus seemeth to be of a contrary opinion: who writeth of them in this sort. The horses of Spain (saith he) be great of stature, having fine heads, and right up bodies, very well compact together in all parts, saving that their buttocks be somewhat to slender. They be strong & able to endure great labour, and commonly they be neither to fat nor yet to lean, & in their travail they need not to be quickened with the spur, and yet they be nothing meet to run or to pass a career, because their hooves be not good. And as from their Foleage unto their full age, they be very obedient and tractable, so from thence forth they wax to be cursed and froward. All which things perhaps might be truly said of the Spanish horse, in Absirtus time, for the most part of his sayings are verified by good experience even in these our days, unless it be as touching his greatness of stature and strength, which may be decayed sense his tyme. And perhaps those horses whereof he writeth were of another climate than ours, which may cause much alteration, both in stature and strength. For Albertus saith, that those Horses which are bred betwixt the third clime, and the end of the sixth, are always of greatest stature, & specially those that are bred in Spain. Notwithstanding those that be bred in the seventh climate which is more towards the North, though they be not fully so great, yet they be stronger and also will endure much more labour. The pace of the jennet is neither trot nor amble, but a comely kind of going, like the Turk. Thus much of the jennet.   

¶ Of the Hungaryan.  
THe Hungarian by Vegetius is described thus, the Hungarian saith he, hath a great & hooked head, and his eyes stand almost without his head, his nostrils are narrow, and his jaws broad, his neck is long and rough, with a mane hanging down beneath his knees, he hath a large bulk, a right back, a long bush tail, his legs be strong, his pastournes small, & his hooves full and broad, his guts are hollow, and all his body is full of empty corners, his buttocks are not half filled with fat, neither do the brawns or his muscles appear, of stature he is more in length then height, and therewith somewhat side bellied, his bones are also great, he is rather lean then fat, which leanness is so answerable to the other parts of his body, as the due proportion observed in his deformytye maketh the same to be a beauty. And as touching his inward disposition, he is as Vigetius sayeth, both temperate and wise, and able to abide great labour, cold and hunger, and therefore very meet for the war. Camerarius also saith, that they be very swift, and if they be provoked by some injury, they will both bite and strike, otherwise not. Their pace is a hard trot.   

Of the Almaigne Horse.  
THe Almain is commonly a great horse, & though not finely, yet very strongly made, & therefore more meet for the shock then to pass a career, or to make a swift manage, because they be very gross and heavy, yet by industry they are made lighter behind than before, for their riders do use in their managing to make them to turn always with their hinder parts, and not with their fore parts: like jacke anapes, when he is made to come over the chain, whereby they keep their Horse's head always upon the enemy. The disposition of this horse (his heavy mould considered) is not evil, for he is very tractable and will labour indifferently well by the way, but his pace for the most part is a very hard trot.   

¶ Of the Flanders Horse.  
THe Flaunders horse in his shape, disposition, and pace, differeth in a manner nothing from the Almaigne horse: saving that for the most part he is of a greater stature and more puissant. The Mares also of Flaunders be of a great stature, strong, long, large, fair and fruitful, and besides that, will endure great labour, as is well seen, for that the flemings do use none other drawght, but with those Mares in their wagons, in the which I have seen two or three Mares to go lightly away with such a burden, as is almost uncredible.   

¶ Of the Fryzeland Horse.  
THe Fryzelande Horse is no very great Horse, but rather of a mean stature, being therewith strong and well compact together, and hath very good legs. And Vigetius saith that the Fryzelande horses be very swift in running, and able to maintain a long course. And in deed I have seen of them myself that would make a good career, and manage very well, and also do the Coruetti so truly as any jennet of Spain. But then the disposition of this horse is so devilish, so stubborn, and so froward, as unless the Rider which first breaketh him be very bold, and therewith circumspect to correct him in time, he shall never bring him to any good, for he will do nothing without stripes, which also being given out of time, will make him so restiefe, that neither fair means nor foul means, will ever win him from that vice again. The pace of this horse is a good comely trot.   

¶ Of the Sweathland Horse.  
THe Sweacian or Sweathland horse, so far as I can conjecture, by those that the King his ambassadors have of late days brought with them into this Realm, whereof I am sure there be divers here yet remaining, is no great or strong Horse, but of a mean stature and strength, and I fear me scant well conditioned. And I am induced to think so the rather, for that they be most commonly pied, and of two sundry colours: or their legs at the least be all white, even up to the belly, their bodies being of another colour, which as Gryson saith, is a sign of small force: all be it the ientilmen in that country delight much to have their Horses of divers colours, & to wear as it were diverse lyvereiss. Besides that, many of them be wall eyed, which is also a token of a shrewd and a stubborn disposition. notwithstanding I have seen of them with good handling, to make an indifferent good manage, whereby I take them to be docible, and also because they come out of a cold Country, I believe they will abide much hardness.   

¶ Of the Irish Hobby.  
THe Irish Hobby is a pretty fine horse, having a good head, and a body indeferently well proportioned, saving that many of them be slender & pin bottocked, they be tender mouthed, nimble, light, pleasant, & apt to be taught, and for the most part they be amblers, & therefore very meet for the saddle, & to travel by the way, yea and the Irish men both with darts & with light spears, do use to skirmish with them in the field. And many of them do prove to that use very well, by means they be so light and swift, notwithstanding I take them to be very neashe and tender to keep, and also to be somewhat skyttishe and fearful, partly perhaps by nature, and partly for lack of good breaking at the first.    

A comparison of the razes above rehearsed as touching the Climates under which they be bred, and which of them will thrive best here in England, and are most meet to serve every breders sundry purpose and intent. Cap. iii.  
Hitherto we have talked of divers kinds of Horses and Mares, and therewith declared to you their shapes, natures, and disposition. Now it resteth that we briefly compare these kinds together, that we may not only know those that be most meet to be bred within this Realm in general, but also that the desire and intent of every breader in particular may be satisfied. For some man perchance would have a breed of great trotting horses meet for the war, and to serve in the field. Some other again would have a breed of ambling horses of a mean stature, for to journey and to travail by the way. Some again would have perhaps a race of swift runners to run for wagers, or to gallop the buck, or to serve for such like exercises of pleasure. But the plain countryman would perchance have a breed only for draught or burden. And first you shall understand that generally those horses and Mares will thrive best in this Realm that be bred under a climate, being of the like temperature, that this our clime is, or at the least not much differing from the same. Wherefore naturally me thinks, the Turk, the jennet of Spain, the Barbaryan, and the Sardignian, being bred in far whotter countries than this is, should not be able to endure the cold of this Country: nor to like here so well as there, from whence they come. For though I have seen them to breed here, and their offspring to grow to a perfect stature, and to be like in shape to their Sires and Dams, yet for the most part they be but neashe and tender, and do require more attendance and fine keeping than others do. And yet I will not deny, but that in continuance of time their natures may be altered, and such tenderness may wear away well enough, and specially those that come out of Island, sooner than thothers, because they are more able to endure both heat and cold, and their nature doth agree the better with this Country, being also an Island. The Napolitan although he be bred under a hotter climate than ours is, yet that Region is very temperate of itself: and therewith so fruitful as it is called the garden or paradise of Italy, and the Horses there bred be of so strong and healthful complexion, as they will not quail wheresoever they go, and that they prosper so well here in this land, as in any other foreign Country: not only the Queen's majesties race, but also other men's razes, and specially Sir Nicholas Arnoldes race doth well testify, from whence I have seen so far colts to come, and to prove so well in their doings as ever I saw in the Realm of Naples, who for his industry and diligence showed in that behalf, as he is worthy to be much commended and praised, so I wish that all gentlemen having ability would do the like: So should they neither lack good Horses to serve their country in time of need, nor yet to serve themselves in their own affairs. Now as touching the rest of the razes before mentioned, as the Hungarian, the high Almain, the Flaunders horse, the Fryzeland Horse, and the Irish hobby. Daily experience teacheth that they do prove very well here, because either they come out of colder countries then this is, or at the least not out of much whoter: yea and some of them do prove better here then at home, and specially such as come from sour grass and wet grounds, as the Flaunders horse and mare, both which do wax here to be finer limined, cleaner made, and therewith lighter and more nimble, than they be at home. But now to answer the divers intentes of the breaders, I would wish him that seeketh to have a race of good Horses, meet to serve in the field, to get a Napolitan Stallion if it be possible, if not, let him take the high Almaigne, the Hungarian, the Flaunders or the Fryzeland horse: so that he be of a convenient stature, well proportioned, and meet for the purpose. What things are requisite in a Stallion shallbe declared hereafter in his place, & let those Mares that shallbe put to such stallyons be of an high stature, strongly made, large & fair, and have a trotting pace, as the mares of Flaunders & some of our own Mares be, for it is not meet for divers respects that horses of service should amble. But if any man seek to have a race of fine ambling Horses, to traaile by the way: then I would wish his stallion either to be a fair jennet of Spain, or at the least a bastard jennet, or else a fair Irish ambling Hobby, & the mare to be also either a bastard jennet, bred here within this realm, having an ambling pace, or else some other of our ambling Mares, so that she be fair and well proportioned. And if any man desire to have swift runners, let him choose a Horse of Barbary, or a Turk to be his stallion, and let the Mares which he shall put unto him be like of stature, and making unto him so nigh as may be: for most commonly such Sire and Dame, such Colt. And sith all writers do so much praise the Horse of Barbary, not only for his swiftness in running, but also for his hardness, in that he needeth small attendance and keeping, and will not surfeit upon every little sweat or cold, as some others do: He therefore that delighteth in hunting and hawking, had need as me thinks, to choose this Horse above all others to be his Stallion, to the intent he may have such Colts of him as will be able to continue in such extreme exercises, as to gallop the buck, or to follow a long winged Hawk. Either of which excercises, killeth yearly in this Realm many a good gelding. But now to content the Countryman his desire, which seeketh to breed horses for draft or burden, where should I wish him to provide himself of Mares and Stallions, better than here in England, whereas he may easily find a number of strong jades, more meet for that purpose then for the saddle, and all for lack of good order of breeding, which if it might be once observed in this realm I believe there would be so good and so fair horses bred here, as in any place in Christendom. But as for the Cart horse, so that he be great of stature, deep rybbed, side bellied, and have strong legs and good hooves: & therewith will stoop to his work, and lay sure hold on the ground with his feet, and stoutly pull at a pinch, it maketh no matter how foul or evil favoured he be. Notwithstanding I have known some Carriars that go with Cartes, to be so exquisite in their choice of horses, as unless they had been as comely to the eye as good in their work they would not buy them, in somuch as I have seen sometime drawing in their Cartes better proportioned horses than I have known to be finely kept in stables, as jewels for the saddle. The horse that is meet for the Cart, may serve also for the burden, because he is strong and able to bear much, but the packman requireth besides strength, three other things in his horse. First, that he be a good traveller, secondly, that his hooves be so good as he need not to be often shod, thirdly that he be no unreasonable feader, for the avoiding of expenses, for which cause I think our packemen here in England, do most commonly go with geldings, which lacking the fervent heat that stoned horses have, cannot consume so much meat as they do, but chief perhaps because the geldings are more easy to rule by the way than horses. Thus having sufficiently talked of divers kinds of Horses and Mares, and which be meetest for this Realm, aswell in general, as to serve divers uses in particular, I will now show you how to choose a stallion or mare meet for breed.   

How to choose Stallyons and Mares meet for generation, and of what age they ought to be. Also how to know their ages aswell by their teeth as other wise. Cap. iiii.  
Sith it is naturally given to every beast for the most part to engender his like, aswell in conditions as in shape of body, it is very requisite therefore for him that would have a good race, to be very circumspect in choosing the first Stallions and Mares, from whom he would have his race to descend, to the intent he may reap thereof both pleasure and profit, & not bestow his cost & labour in vain. In chousing then a stallyon, three things (as me thinks are chief to be considered) that is, his beauty, his goodness, and his age. And first as touching his beauty, it consisteth only in colour and shape, of which two things because I have already according to Grysons' opinion sufficiently treated in the book of the art of riding, I shall not need therefore now to trouble you with many words, but only to make as it were a brief resital of the same. Of all colours than these be the best, the brown bay, the dapple grey, the bright bay, the rone, the white lyard, the pure black with a white star in his forehead. And in any wise let the Stallion be all of one colour, and that very clear and bright, and not pied, or of divers colours, albeit to have some white or black mark in place convenient, is very beautiful, as to have a white star in his forehead, or the outermost parts of his body black, as the tips of his ears, his main, or his tail, or else some of his feet to be white, according as his colour doth most properly require, of which things we have talked at large in the book of riding. Now as touching his shape it would be in this sort, let him have a short and slender head, a wide mouth, & wide nosethriels, slender jaws, great eyes and black, bolting outward and not hollow inward, short ears and sharp pointed like a mouse, a neck rather long then short, great towards his breast, slender towards his head, the crest whereof would be rising in the mids, and therewith neither to thick nor to thin, having a crisp main, and hanging naturally on the right side, a broad breast, and full of apparent muscles or brawns of flesh, also broad shoulders, a large bulk, & gaunt belly, a strait and sharp pointed withers, a short and plain back, great round buttocks, a long and bushy tail, a yard and stones of a mean size, one stone not hanging cider then another, but trussed up round together, large thighs, and long hawnches behind, strong legs, & great joints, aswell before as behind, short pastournes with long fewterlockes, also round, smouth, black, hard, hollow, and sounding hooves: and finally let his whole body together, have roundness according to his length, and be in all points so well proportioned, as he may seem both high of stature, strong of limb, and also lively to the eye. Thus much of his shape, and now of his goodness. His goodness may be partly natural, and partly artificial, neither of which can be thoroughly known but by his doings. His natural goodness chief consisteth in his healthfulness of body, in abundance of good seed, in his strength, agility, swiftness, good disposition, and aptness to be taught, yea and in his pace, galloppinge, running, bearing of his head and ears, all which things may be also much helped by art. But to rain well, to bear his head steaddely, to be ready of turn, and light of stop, to handle his feet orderly, to keep his ground, and to obey his Riders will at all assays: proceedeth rather of art then of nature, which artificial goodness, whether he hath or not, the book of riding doth plainly teach you how to judge. Albeit for a Stallion which should chiefly serve to cover Mares, such artificial goodness is not so material as the natural good things before mentioned, amongst the which there is one chief point, and yet cannot perfectly be known, unless you might see him to cover a Mare, & that is to weet, whether his seed be good or not, which at that time may very well be known in this sort. Take of it betwixt your thumb and your finger, or in a lock of will, and if in your feeling or tousing of the will it seemeth to be firm, fast, and slimy, it is good, but if it be over lyquyd or waterish, it is nought, and if the horse be slow in covering, or doth it not with a lively spirit and courage, or hath but one stone, or great warts growing on his stones, or have naturally any white speck in any of his eyes, he is not meet to be a Stallion, for all the Colts that he shall beget will have the like defects. Wherefore so nigh as you can let your Stallion be without all faults Now as touching the age of the Stallion, although most men in these our days make no matter thereof: because he may get fools until he be twenty or xxx years old, yea and so long as he liveth, so that he be helped, and therefore in most places of this Realm they appoint no horses to that use but such as be very old, and therewith perhaps both lame and blind. Yet the men in the old time made a great matter thereof, and allowed no Stallion to be very good, but from .v. years to xiiii. affirming that as one perfect thing doth bring forth another perfect, so that which is unperfect bringeth forth his like. And as a Horse is accounted unperfect until he be .v. years old, for that his joints before that time be not thoroughly knit, neither is he grown to his full strength, so at xiiii years he beginneth again to wax unperfect, because that nature in him by that time is sore decayed, insomuch as decrepit age and death itself by nature doth then shortly follow after. Albeit I will not deny, but that good keeping and a strong complexion may cause one horse to continue in lust and courage much longer than another. For Albertus writeth that he knew a Soldier, which served in the field on a horse that was lxx year old, and yet was counted an able horse. Niphus also saith that the Emperor Ferdynandus the first, had in his stable a horse that was lxx years old. And I myself have seen stallions that have been twenty years old and above, that have gotten vere fair Colts to the eye. And yet I believe not like in perfection to those that the same Stallion might have gotten in his more lusty age, for the Colts of old stallions for the most part, be dull and slow, and have tender hofes, and are more subject to diseases and surfeites then others. Wherefore I would wish all you that would have a perfect race, not to admit any horse to be your Stallion, that is as I said before, under .v. or much above xiiii unless he be very lusty and strong, and therewith be very hail of body and limb. And whilst I talk here of the horses age, it is meet that I show you also how to know the same. Some seek to know a horses age in this sort, they pull his skin with their hands from his flesh, holding it so a pretty while together, and then let it go again, marking whether the skin returneth immediately to his place or not, without leaving any sign or wrinkle where it was touched, for than they judge the horse to be young. But if the skin will not fall down quickly again of his own accord, they take him to be old, and to lack that natural heat and warm blood, which should nourish his outward parts. But most men use to judge a Horse's age by his teeth, taking that to be the most certain way of knowledge, specially until he be full seven years old and upward, for every Horse when he is two years old, doth cast his two former teeth, aswell above as beneath: and every year after until he be vi. years old he faileth not to cast other ii in like manner. Then in the sixth year, those which he first cast be closed, but in the seventh year all his teeth be full closed, so as the mark goeth clean out, whereby a man should judge his age. Notwithstanding after the Horse beginneth to enter into old age, his temples will wax hollow, and the hear of his brows hoar and white, his teeth also willbe greater and thicker in substance, fowler in colour, and one standing further out, or higher than another, which they do not so long as the horse is young, but stand even and round together. Thus much of the Stallion. Now let us speak somewhat of the Mare, which would be also good in her doings beautiful and young. For as Absirtus sayeth, the Mare that should be for breed, would be of a comely stature, and broad set, aswell behind as before, and well knit together, having a slender head, and a large body, so as she may be sightly to the eye, and not to be les than three years old, nor much more than ten. Notwithstanding some write that it maketh no matter though she be covered and do conceive immediately after that she be two years old and upward, so that she be full three years old at her foling. For the Female kind in all beasts, as they be colder of nature, so they come sooner to their perfection then the Male kind, and likewise decay sooner, wherefore some hold opinion, that their foling after ten years of age is unprofitable, affirming such colts to be naturally dull & slow, albeit I have seen Mares of twenty years old and above, that have brought forth very fair and lively Colts to the eye. yea Aristole sayeth that a Mare may bear fools all her life long. And also that she doth live longer than a Horse, who as he sayeth, may live until he be xxxiii but the Mare may live till she be xl Affirming her to be inclined to the act of generation asmuch as any beast living. Notwithstanding I would wish you to keep for breed no mare that is much above ten years, unless you have good experience of her Colts, and be well assured of her continuance in courage and lustiness. And in any wise let your breeding Mares which you keep for studs be made so tame and domestical as may be, so shall you not only easily drive them, and remove them from place to place, but reap some commodity of their work: which if it be moderate, it can not hurt their teeming, whereas if they should be wild, they would be very cumbrous to keep, yea and many times through their rashness destroy the fools in their bellies: neither can you bring them to the horse, nor take their fools from them, when you would wean them without great trouble. At what age it is best to tame them we shall show you hereafter in his proper place.   

¶ At what time of the year it is best for Horses and Mares to engender, and in what sort they ought to be put together: And how to know when a Mare desireth the Horse. Also how many Mares one Stallion is able to cover in one year. Finally when the stallions should be removed from them. Cap. v.  
AFter that we have taught you how to choose both Stallion and Mare meet for breed, it is requisite that we show you now in what time of the year it is best to put them together, that they may engender, and what order is to be observed therein. Most writers do affirm that the best time is the spring, or as Palladius saith, from the xxii of March, until the xxii of june. Because the mare going a full year, or at the least eleven months, and ten days shall by this means fool in such time of the year as grass is most plenteful, whereby she shall have the more abundance of milk, to feed her fool, and the air shallbe so temperate as the fool shall neither be perched with the hot son, nor pinched with cold weather. But forasmuch as our mares for the most part here in England go not with fool above eleven months, and also for that the coldness of the Country will not suffer the grass to spring & grow so soon here as in Italy, or such like hot countries. I would not wish the mares to be covered before the beginning of May, so shall the fools fall in April, before which month, there groweth but little grass. Again the Mares of themselves before may will have little lust to the horse, for fault of full bit, and warm weather, which should engender lust. And yet as I said before, according to Aristotle, there is no kind of beast more inclined to that act then the horse and mare, insomuch as if they may not be suffered to engender when lust provoketh them, they will run mad. It is easy to know when they lust, by their inordinate running and flinging here and there, and that as some write, not towards the east or West, but most commonly towards the south or north, setting the tail bolt upright. Again one mare will woo another, and they will piss often. The time then of the year meet for generation, being come, it is requisite that these two beasts be put together which you may do diverse manner of ways. The first and best way, and specially for him that hath many Mares and stallions, is to put every one of his Stallions by himself (being before rested and well fed for the purpose) into a several pasture, full of grass and well fenced with high pale or rail, as I said before in the first Chapter, in which pastures would be either some good shade, and shealter to defend them from the son and rain, or else some house or hovel made of purpose, and so to let them run there from the beginning of May until the midst of june, during which time you may turn into every one of those Stallions so many Mares as he is well able to cover, which ability is to be measured by his youth, strength, & lustiness. For if he be young & lusty he may cover ix. or, x. mares very well & if he be old and feeble, he had need to cover the fewer, for to cover many is a great feblishing to the Horse: Albeit in Italy, to a young Horse they will not let to appoint xii or xv Mares. And Aristotle sayeth, that a Horse may Cover xxx Mares in one year. Also Herodotus writeth that the king of Babylon, having (besides his horses of service,) viii. hundredth Stallions, did appoinete every year unto those stallions xvi thousand Mares, so that every stallion had for his singulall share .xx Mares. Yea and some let not to write, that in Syria there was some times a race of xxx thousand Mares, to whom were appointed but three hundred stallions: so that every horse had to cover an hundred Mares. Whereby it seemeth that horses in times paste have been of a far stronger nature, than they be now in these our days. But in any wise when ye let the stallion and the mares thus run together, have always a good eye to the fence, that it be strong & sure, for fear that none of your own stallions or strange horses break in, to disturb any of them, for they will fight together in such time most cruelly. Neither is there any beast more jealous of his mate then the horse of his wives (if it be lawful so to term them) insomuch as he will not suffer them to feed out of his sight, nor to stray one from another, but will keep them always together, and nigh unto himself, which running and keeping together breadeth such a mutual love betwixt them, as thereby they are on both sides the more inclined to generation. And the Mares by this means do more naturally, more speedily, & also more easily conceive, then if they should be served out of a stable, for there many times of ten that be served, five do not take, of which kind of serving I will speak in the next Chapter following. notwithstanding so soon as the mares have all conceived, which you shall know by such means as shallbe showed you hereafter. I would wish you to remove the Stallions from them and not to suffer them to run with the Mares all the year, as some do, for that is not good for two. considerations. For first you should lose the use of your horse, which being after covering time somewhat rested and well meated, may serve you in your other affairs: secondly it were very dangerous for the Mares that be with fool: For Arystotle saith, there be three kinds of beasts more lecherous than all others: That is to say, the Mare, the Sow, and the third I dare not name, for fear of offending, for where as all other beasts when they be with young will abstain from thact of generation, these iii kinds (as he saith) do not refuse it even in that time. And though the mares do refuse it, as most commonly they will, whatsoever Aristotle saith, yet the horse perhaps when provender pricketh him will force them, and so perchance by striving with them make them to cast their fools: Wherefore I can in no wise consent that they should run all the year together, but only until such time as the Mares have conceived. Thus much for great razes, where as be many Mares and Stallions, for those that keep but one Stallion and a few Mares do like better to have their Mares severally served one after another then to run all together with the stallion, affirming that by this means the stallion shall not beat himself so much, nor spend more seed upon one Mare then upon another, and for this purpose a very small portion of ground might serve to keep the stallion, so that it be a battling ground, full of grass and well fenced, with high pale or rail, as some large orchard or pond yard, nigh unto the mansion house, of which kind of grounds, as I have seen diverse, so did I never see any that pleased me better than one which I saw in Darbishire, in a town nigh unto Derby, called Marketon, whereas a very honest gentleman & a good householder, named master Mondey dwelleth, who keepeth a good strong stallion and half a dozen fair mares, whose Colts do prove very well, whereof your lordship hath one called Markhan, so named according to the name of his old master, Master Thomas Markham of Olerton which horse as he is indifferent well proportioned, so was he once made by Abraham, master Astle is man as ready a horse in all points, as any was then about the Court, the piece of ground which I liked so well at this Gentleman's house, was a pond yard, environed about with a high and strong pale, and also with a very thick quickset without the pale, the quantity of which ground the ponds deducted, is scant iii acres, but the quality and goodness thereof is such, as it doth not only keep his Stallion, all the Summer, that is to say, from the midst of April until hallontyde (before which time he doth not take him in, unless it be betwixt while to work him, as in harvest time, and so to put him forth again) but also ii milk kine, and twenty sheep (as he sayeth) all the year long, besides the feeding of his mares, whilst they tarry with the Stallion to be covered, whereof every one coming severally, one after another, tarrieth iii days with him at the least, and than be turned into a park which he hath hard by, the ground whereof is veri meet for that purpose, neither doth he bestow any provender on his Stallion during the covering time, for to say the truth he is so full fed with sweet grass as he hath no need thereof. And in mine opinion there lacketh nothing, but some little hovel or house to be placed in some meet corner, for the stallion to shrewd himself therein in the heat of the day, and when it raineth, for the hot son, or piercing rain doth greatly feblish a horses back. Thus much I thought good to write of this piece of ground, to th'intent that every man, minding to have a race, might enclose a like piece of ground in quantity at the least, though not altogether in quality, to keep his stallion in the summer season, the commodity whereof in short time will countervail the charges.   

¶ What order is to be observed touching the covering of Mares, when the Stallions doth not run with them in the pastures, but are kept in the stable. And how the same stallions should be fed. Also at what time of the day the Mares ought then to be covered, and finally how to know whether they have conceived, or not. Cap. vi.  
BUt if ye have no such several ground as is both able to feed your Stallyon and Mares during the covering time, as also to keep them from breaking out. Then you may keep your Stallion still in the stable, & bring the mares thither to be covered, which is a more chargeable and troublous way of covering then the other before mentioned. For first your stallion against that time must be well fed, with sweat hay and provender, yea rather during the covering time with sweat grass, if it may be gotten, and his provender as some write, would be either dried wheat or dried pease, mingled with wheat bran, or else fitch's which be much praised of all authors to be given in that time, and now and then he must have a good mashe made of water and wheat meal, and that shall be to make him lusty. Also he may not be laboured by the space of six weeks or two Months before: but suffered to rest, and yet I mean not to rest all together without any kind of excercise, but rather to be ridden now and then moderately, to get him a stomach to his meat. For as over much labour drieth up his moistness, and maketh his spirits and power feeble: so overmuch rest and fatness breedeth superfluous humours, which on the other side will asmuch weaken him, by quenching his natural heat, and cause his seed to be cold and moist, which seldom or never taketh, or if it take, it engendereth rather females than Males, but moderate exercise preserveth his natural heat, and sweet nourishing food increaseth good blood, & causeth his seed to be perfect, that is to say, hot and moist, and in substance neither to much, nor to little, to thick, nor to thin, but in a mean, and that is best, and will soonest take. The less he drinketh when he hath to cover any Mare, the better, for if he drinketh over much, it will put his wind in jeopardy. More over behind your stable, or else behind some other house not far from your stable, would be some pretty close yard or court made of purpose, into the which the Mare would be first brought, and that very year lie in the morning, when the son riseth, or else in the Evening at the sons going down. For those ii times are thought by the writers most meet for generation, and will do the horse less hurt then to cover in the heat of the day. Albeit Aristotle sayeth that the mare for her part is more desirous to be covered about the midday, because perhaps she being the colder beast of the twain, heat doth then most chief provoke her lust. Well, the Mare then being thus brought in, ye may cause your horse keeper to bring forth the Stallion, who if he hath been well fed, and moderately exercised, as I said before, so soon as he seeth and smelleth the mare, he will immediately fetch three or iiii. faults, and bound aloft with all four for joy, even in your horse keepers hand, who must not be afraid but rather ready to help the horse in his business, so soon as he shall leap the Mare, by putting his yard with his hand into the right place, whereby the Mare shall be the more speedily, the more easily, and also the more substantially served, by means that the horse shall spend no labour in vain, nor waste any part of his seed. And after that the mare hath been covered once: let your horse keeper lead the Stallion a little a side, and walk him a while fair and softly behind some house or wall clean out of her sight to breath him. And when he is well breathed, bring him in again, and let him cover the mare the second time, and then lead him out again, and so the third time if ye will, continuing to do this every Evening or morning the space of ii or iii days, until you think that she be sped. Betwixt which times, see that your horse be well rubbed and fed, and to the intent that the Mare cast not out the seed which she receiveth, it shall not be amiss in the end of every last covering, immediately to bestow one pail of water on the reins of her back, and to cast another into her tail, and that shall make her to hold. You shall know whether she hath conceived or not, as Absirtus saith, best within ten days next after following. For if you offer the horse again at ten days end, & she refuseth, it is an evident sign of her conception. Her coat also as Pliny saith, of what colour so ever she be, will show more full and bright to the eye, immediately after conception, than it did before.   

¶ How to make your Mares to conceive either Horse fools, or Mare fools, and of what colour you list to have yourself. Cap. seven.  
BUT now whilst we are about the covering of Mares, me think it were not amiss, to show you what pretty means, and sleights, men in the old time used, to have Colts of such kind and colour as they themselves have desired. And first as touching the kind, Democritus affirmeth that if ye tie the left stone of the stallion with a threaden late, or point, or such like thing he shall beget a horse fool, and if ye teye the right stone, he shall beget a Mare fool. And this rule (as he sayeth) is general to all other beasts. Affricanus also saith, that if ye cause your Horse to leap the mare, when the wind bloweth in the North, he shall beget a horse fool, and if in the South, a mare fool. Again some writ, that if the mare be covered the third day before the full moan she shall bring forth a horse fool, and if the third day after the full moan, a mare fool. And I take this to be a very good rule, and seldom to fail, and specially if the mare at that time have lately foaled. Again some hold opinion, that if the Mare be covered with in v. or vi. days after her foling, and in the springe of the moan, that she shall bring forth a horse fool, and the rather if the horse be suffered to woo her, and to stand in her sight sonewhat tofore he cover her, which order, master Garret lieutenant of the Pensioners doth diligently observe, when he causeth his mares to be covered, who affirmeth that in observing this rule, he never failed to have a horse Colt at his pleasure, who I assure you is no less expert in bredinge then skilful in riding, and therewith so desirous to have good horses, as he letteth not to higher a great deal of ground, paying by the year forty pence for the acre, to feed his mares and colts, in which his doing me thinks, he deserveth much to be commended. But to know what kind the mare hath conceived, the Authors write that if the horse after he hath covered the Mare cometh down from her back on the right side, it is a sign that she is conceived with a horse fool, and if on the left side with a mare fool. Now as touching the colour, they write that if the stallion be clad with a covering of such colour as you desire the fool to be, at such time as he doth cover the mare you shall have your desire. Some again write that it is better to die or stain the hear of the Stallion with such colour as you like best and then to make him to continue in the mare's sight whilst she burneth in lust, before he leap her, to th'intent (as I take it) that thimpression may be the more fervent. And as this saying is grounded of a good natural reason, so it may be proved by a most true & unfeigned example, recited in the Bible, in the thirty chapter of Genesis. Whereas you may read how jacob after that Laban his master and father in law, had given him in recompense of his service, all the black Lambs and speckeled kids, that should come of the Ewes, and Goats, which he kept: By putting streaked rods in the sight and face of the Ewes, when they went to Ram, and of the she Goats when they went to buck, made all the offspring of Laban's flock to be black and spotted: whereby in short space he became as rich in cattle, as Laban his father in law. For truly at the time of conception, all the powers of the beast are so open, and the matter itself so tender, as it is apt to receive every light impression.   

¶ Whether Mares should be forced to abid the Horses though they have no lust or not, and how to make both Horse and Mare, having no lust, to have a lust to engender. Also how to abate their lust if need require. Cap. viii.  
IF the mare will not suffer the horse to leap her, some have used (as both Varro & Pliny writeth) to force her thereunto whether she will or not, by tying her to a post, set up in the midst of such a close yard or Court as is talked of before, which thing is used even at this present day at Tutbery, whereas the Queen's majesty hath a race. And though I know that some of them do conceive, and prosper well enough after it, yet I can not praise it, because it is both dangerous and also unnatural: for the act of generation ought to be with pleasure, and not with pain, neither doth that which is peinfully conceived, thrive for the most part, so well as that which is conceived with pleasure. Wherefore I would wish all men, rather to follow Camerarius advice, which is not to force her: but to make her first to desire the Horse, by putting a little stoned nag unto her, to woo her four or five days before you would have her covered, which nag would be so fettered, as he may not cover her, though she would perchance incline unto him: which when you perceive she doth, remove the nag from her, and put the Stallion unto her: so shall she stand still of her own accord, and receive the stallion the more willingly. But the reddyest means to make a mare to desire the horse, is (as Columella saith) to anoint her matrixe with the juice of a certain herb called of him Scylla, and of Palladius Squilla, which some of our physicians do call a sea Onion, because it groweth as well in the sea, as on the land, and hath a head or root like an onion. It is very good also to rub her matrixe with nettles, which as Russius saith, will not only cause the mare to suffer the Horse to leap her, but also to engender with him. Which otherwise many times perhaps she cannot do, for want of natural heat in her matrixe. That the nettle is a provoker of venery, it is not unknown to the plain wives of the country: which when their hens will not lay, nor suffer to be trodden, do use to nettle their tails, & that maketh them (as they say) to desire the Cock, and also to lay. Again, Anatolius saith, that to anoint her matrixe with hens dung and turpentine mingled together, will marvelously provoke her lust. But if you see that your horse hath no lust to engender, then make as though you would drive the mare from him, and that will make him the more desirous of her. It is good also to wipe the matrixe of that mare which desireth the horse, with a sponge, and to put that to the Stallions nose, the savour whereof will provoke his courage. Also the pyssill of a Stag being bourned, and made into fine powder, and put into strong wine, will provoke his courage, if his yard & stones be washed therewith. But I have been taught by men of experience, that if a good quantity of the powder aforesaid, together with these powders following, that is of Annisesedes, of a root called Satyrion, and of basil, of each like quantity, be given the horse to drink in a warm mashe made of water and wheaten meal, the night before you would have him to cover any mare: it will not only provoke his courage, but also make his seed of such force, as it will hold and not quail. And the less that either horse or mare drinketh whylste they attend to generation, the better it shallbe for them: for over much drink, will not only make the seed thin and watery, and so as it shall not hold, but also as I said before, make the horse pursye: yea, and put his wind in jeopardy. But if you see, that after the time of covering the stallion continueth still to full of lust and courage, than it shallbe good to anoint his stones with a little salet oil, and that will abate his courage, and the sooner, if you stepe a little lettuce in the oil somewhat before. The same medicine also will abate a Mare's courage (if her matrixe be anointed therewith. And some writ, that the cutting of her main doth abate her courage. These medicines perhaps will offend the delicate ears of some persons, that are more nice than wise. But I trust, the discrete man will not be offended to hear them: but rather learn discreetly to use them as need shall require. For I assure you, they were no fools that wrote them, but learned, wise, and men of great experience.   

¶ Which mares should be covered every year & which not. And how to do that those mares that you would have to bear ever year, shall not go barren. Cap. ix.  
PAlladius and Columella would have those Mares that be very beawtyful and fair and therewith have not only been well horsed, but also have horse fools sucking on them: not to be covered every year, but every second year, or rather third year, to th'intent that their fools may suck the longer time, & also be fed with the more pure milk. And as for all other mares, they would have them to bear every year, and to be covered again so soon as their fools are .v. or vi days old so that they be in good lust, and not to poor. And to the intent that none such should go barren, it shallbe necessary not only to enforce them, by such ways as have been showed you before, to the horse in the spring time, but also about Laminas or in the beginning of August, and to suffer a Stallion to run with them three weeks or a month to th'intent that if any of them chanced not to conceive at the first covering, they may now be served. But be sure that some one of the Mares be ready to be covered, when you turn the stallion into them, lest perpaps he beat aswell those that be with fool as the others, and so do more harm then good. And by using this order you shallbe sure to keep no Mare barren all the year, unless that the Mare be barren by means of some sickness. Whereof I shall treat hereafter when I come to the diseases of horses, & there show you how to cure the same.   

How Mares should be used after they have conceived and are with fool, and what causeth them to cast their fools before their tyme. Cap. x.  
AFter that your Mares have conceived, you must beware you labour them not over much, and specially that they bear no heavy burdens, for fear of killing their fools in their bellies. Also you must see that whilst Summer lasteth, they go in a good pasture, not having over rank grass, but short and sweet, & that they lack no good water. And in winter when the grass faileth, that they be fed with sweet hay, and that they lie dry and warm in some bushy close, wood, or grove, or else under some hovel, but so as they be not scanted of room, nor thronged up together, for that is dangerous, and may cause aborsment, that is to say, to cast their fools before their tyme. Anatolius also saith that the change of strange pasture or water will cause aborsement. Again Russius saith that if they chance to eat the mast of Cerre trees, they shall be in danger of aborsement. Or if any of them be covered with an Ass after that she hath conceived by a horse, or chance to tread upon a wolf, or where a wolf hath trodden it will cause her to cast her fool. Also all stinking savours, as the snuffing of candles, or torches, or such like, will cause aborsement, as some authors write, aswell in Mares, as in women. Wherefore all such things would be foreseen, and in any case keep your Mares whilst they go with fool, neither to lean nor yet to fat, but in good plight, for if they be to lean, they will either cast their fools, or else bring forth starvelings. Again if they be to fat, every place of their bodies will be so filled, as the fools within their bellies cannot have room sufficient to grow, and to prosper, by means whereof, either the fools shall be but little ones, or else the Mare's themselves shall be in great danger, at the time of their foling, by reason that their cundittes be overmuch strayghtned with fat. And therefore the Scythians which is a people of the North, used (as Aristotle writeth) moderately to journey, and to travel their Mares, after they were quickened, to the intent that they might have the easier foling. For truly moderate labour and exercise, at that time must needs do them much good. But to travel them immediately upon conception, or when they be very great and ready to fool, is dangerous. For the fruit of the womb in all beasts, maybe well compared to the fruit of the Apple tree, which at the first blossoming, and also when it is through ripe, and mellow, will be blown down with every light wind, but in the middle time betwixt both, it cleaveth so fast unto the branches of the tree: as it will scant be thrown down with coudgelles.   

¶ How to help a Mare that is in danger at the time of her foling. And how you shall cause her to expel her secundyne or clean. Cap. xi.  
BUt if it so happen that a mare by any mischance, be in danger at the time of her foling, than it is needful to help her, causing one to hold her nostrils in a gentle manner, close in his hand, and so to stop her breath, and it shall make her to fool with more ease, and also the sooner, which is not very painful for any man to do, for somuch as the Mare foleth standing, whereby he shall not need greatly to stoop. Again if the secundine, which is the skin wherein the fool is wrapped, doth not come all out naturally of the own accord, then use this remedy. Take a good handful or two of Fenell, and boil it in water, then take half a pint of that, and another half pint of old wine, and put thereunto a fourth part of oil, and mingle them altogether over the fire, and being but lukewarm, pour it into the mare's nostrils, and hold her nostrils close with your hand, to keep it in a pretty while after. And that shall force the secundine to come forth, which for the most part, both she and all other beasts do immediately eat, and swallow up again into their bellies. Which thing the plain folks of the country (if they can prevent it) will not suffer their milche kine to do, in their time of cauluing, saying: that it will make them sick and unlusty. And truly I believe it doth the mares no great good. Some Authors write, that when the mare doth eat up her secundyne or clean, (for so the plain folks term it) she snappeth away also with her teeth a certain peace of flesh, growing like a fig upon the fool's forehead, called of the Greeks and Latins, Hippomanes. Of the virtue whereof, in matters of love many monstruous tales, by many learned Authors are recited. Whereof I think it not good to make the unlearned partners. And therefore I leave to speak of it any further.   

¶ How to make a Mare to caste her fool that is not worthy to be bred, or for some other needful cause. cap. xii.  
IF a fair mare in old time had been covered with a foul roil, or had been with fool out of season, or at such time perhaps, as she must run for some great wager, than they would use means to make her cast her fool before her time, & that was done either by force of hand, or by medicine. For if the fool were so far grown that it had hear, they would cause one to thrust his hand into the Mare's womb, and to take the fool by the head, and to crush it in pieces. And if it had no hear, than they would destroy it with medicines not needful here to be written. Notwithstanding in mine opinion the surest way (if greater cause do not otherwise require) were to tarry till she hath foaled of her own kind, and then to kill the fool.   

¶ How Mares should be used after they have foaled. Also how long the fools should suck, and how they ought to be used during their foleage, also how to harden their hooves. Cap. xiii.  
IT is needful immediately after the mares have foaled, or rather a seven-night or a fortenight before they be ready to fool, to put them into the warmest, sweetest, and rankest pasture that you have, to the intent they lying warm and dry, and faring well, may have plenty of milk to feed their fools. For nothing doth hinder the growth of the fools more than cold, and penury. Moreover Anatolius saith, that it is very necessary about two or three months after their folinge, to chase them about the ground to and fro, or otherwise to exercise them with some moderate labour, to make their milk come down into their dugs. And to th'intent that the fools may be fair and fat, all the writers with one consent would have them to suck ii years, and specially if they be horse fools, yea some would have them to suck till they offer to cover their dams, and less than one year though they be Mare fools, none that ever I could hear or read of doth allow. And yet here in England they will scant suffer them to suck vi months, but will wean them before they be full half a year old, which truly I cannot commend, for though many of them do prove to be great of bone and tall of stature, yet the pith within is not firm nor sound, neither can they be so strong, so healthful, or live so long, as those most commonly do, which suck a long tyme. For that sweet and most natural moisture and nutriment, whereof they be deprived in their youth, will never be gotten again so long as they live. Wherefore I wish those that seek to have strong and healthful Colts, to let them suck one year at the least. In old time as it appeareth by Varro and Columella, they used for warmeth sake to house both Mares and fools, until their fools were ten days old, and then to put them forth into the pasture. Also when the fools were five Months old, they used now and then to bring them into the house and there would give them ground barley mingled with wheat bran, and such other soft kind of food. And being a year old, they would give them firmer provender, as dried Barley, and Bran, continuing so to do, until they were ii years old. All which time the colts also sucked, and chief they did this to make them domestical and familiar, and partly to make them fat and lusty, and partly again to acquaint them with all kind of meats, but therewith they would touch them or handle them so little as was possible, for fear of hindering their groweth. And among the rest of their diligent cares, in bringing up this necessary beast, they had a special regard to his hooves, that they might be tough, firm and hard, and therefore whensoever they stood in the house, they would suffer no dung to remain any while by them, for fear of burning their hooves. And if they saw they were any thing inclined to have tender hooves, they would make an ointment of the ears of garlic, of swines grease, goats grease and brimstone, that had not been tried in the fire, and so anoint their hooves therewith, both without and within, which ointment did make their hooves very tough and hard, and to that intent they would strew stones under their feet, whereas they stood. Moreover when they fed abroad in the pasture, they would drive them up to the highest and most stony grounds, which as Russius saith, doth not only harden their hooves, but also make them to have strong legs, and to tread surely upon the ground. But as touching the hardening of hooves, we shall talk more thereof when we come to treat of the diseases of horses.   

¶ How to know of what stature, making, and disposition the fools when they are new foaled will be, when they come to age. Cap. xiiii.  
THe fools that have very long legs, even from their birth, do prove most commonly to be tall of stature, for the legs of all iiii. footed beasts, be almost so long at the first day of their birth, as they will be ever after. Again those will be both strongly, and finely made, which in their very youth have great bodies, and well knit together, little heads, black eyes, short & sharp ears, broad nostrils, wide mouths, broad necks, with good thick creastes, broad breasts, plain backs, gaunt bellies, brawny thighs, nimble knees, that will easily bow in their going, strong legs, short pastourns, round, hard, and hollow hooves, so as they may sound again when they tread upon the ground, and the harder & the fuller they tread upon the ground, the better hooves they seem to have. Now the signs of their disposition and courage as Varro saith, be these, to be lively and sturringe, not to be afraid of every noise, or sight, to run wanton before their fellows, and to strive to be foremost, also to offer to leap over every hedge and dyke, or to go over a bridge, or to pass the water, again if they will be quickly stirred, and therewith soon pacified, it is a sign that they will be tractable, and easy to be broken in time to come.   

¶ Of the growth aswell of mare Colts, as horse colts, and how to know which will continue in goodness, and live longest. Cap. xv.  
I Think it good here also to let you understand th'opinions of the writers, touching the growth aswell of mare fools, as horse fools, for though that horse fools be fashioned in their dams bellies, sooner than the mare fools, yet the mare fools being once foaled, do arrive to their full growth of height and length in .v. years, whereas the horse fools be not at their full growth of height and length, before they be full six years old, from which time forth as Arystotle saith, till they be ten years old, they grow only in largeness and thickness. And Absirtus saith, that those which have white or bald faces, do not wax old so soon as others. Again the same Author saith, that those Colts which have tender hooves, do not continue in their vigour and strength, above viii. years after that they be at their full growth of height and length, neither are they meet any more to be journeyed. Because the Crowns of their hooves will fall down so low, as they shall scant be able to stand on their feet. But if they have good hooves, than they will continue in their vigour ten years after their full growth and above. Moreover the said author saith, those horses which have from their youth upward hard hooves, will live until they be xxviii or xxix. years old, but they seldom arrive to xxx but those that have soft hooves do not live above xxiiii years. But as touching the lives of horses we have talked already sufficiently before in the fourth chapter.   

¶ When and how colts should be weaned from their dams. And how they should be severed according to their kinds and ages. cap. xvi.  
WHen your Colts have sucked ii years or one year at the least. And specially if they be horse colts, (for mare colts may suck a lesser time, according as you yourself shall think it good to have your mares covered again the next year following or not,) then about shrovetide it is good (as some men writ) three days before the full of the moan to take them early in the morning from their dams, and to shut them up all that day, and all that night without meat, in a house appointed for that purpose, and standing clean out of their dams hearing. The next day in the morning to put them again to their dams, and to let them suck their bellies full, yea, even until they swell again, that done, take them away for all a do, and to keep them in thaforesaid house the space of xiiii days, nigh unto which house would be some pretty sweet pasture reserved of purpose, to the intent that from the end of the xiiii days until the month of may, (before which time there is little grass growing) the colts may feed and play themselves therein every fair day. But when may is once come, than put them forth into some good pasture, whereas they may have plenty of short & sweet grass, for over rank grass will hurt their reins, and make them thick necked, and in any case see that therewith they lie warm and dry, and lack no water, for if waynlinges suffer either hunger, thirst, or cold, and specially in the first year whiles they mourn for their dams, they will never prove to be good, but will be small of stature, of small strength, and full of diseases. But after that the colts be two years old and upward and have clean forgotten their dams. I would wish them to run in a large, hard, and hungry ground, but so as with their traveling, and taking pains for their living, they may fill them full once in the day at the least, for fear of hindering their growth. your Colts being thus weaned and kept, shall prove to be light, nimble, hard, and strong horses, & to have strong legs and hard hooves, and not to surfeit of every little cold, as those do which be fed in summer season with rank grass, and lie cold and weate in winter. More over to the intent there may be no disorder amongst your colts: see that ye sever them, according to their kinds and ages, that is to say, to put horse fools by themselves in one pasture, and mare fools by themselves in another pasture. Again, put yerelinges, two yerelings, and three yerelings, every age by itself severally, so shall not the greater wrong the lesser, for among equals is altogether love and fellowship without any discord. Wherefore you see that partitions, as I said in the beginning of this book, are so needful in that ground which should be appointed for breeding of horses, as nothing more.   

¶ Of the gueldinge of Colts, and for what cause they be guelt, and also at what age, and in what time of the year they ought to be guelt. cap. xvii.  
THe Colts that do naturally amble, or may easily be brought to it, either by traverse, or else by hand without traverse (which in mine opinion is the better way) most men in this realm do more delight to have them guelte then stoned, for they love not only to ride easily by the way, but also very fast, and therewith to have their horses so quiet, as they may be easily governed, which things are not commonly seen in stoned horses, for their abundant heat will not suffer them to be so quiet, nor yet to labour so far in a day as Gueldinges may, because the gelding lacking his stones hath no such hot blood in his body as he had before he lost them. Yea to be guelt (as some authors writ) is such a Cooler, as it tameth both man, and beast, in their greatest madness, and clean healeth them of that disease, when nothing else will. Moreover, gueldinges do not neygh so often nor so loud as stoned horses do. For the which cause, the Sarmatians in all their secret enterprises and exploits, do use to serve upon gueldinges and not upon stoned horses. And also our light horsemen here in England do in like manner serve upon geldings in the wars, and for that cause they do not only guelde ambling colts, but also trotting colts, which they think partly meet for that purpose, and partly for their servants to ride on, and to carry their males and cloak bags after them. Of both which sort of gueldinges I believe this realm hath so fair and so many, as any one country in all Christendom. Wherefore I think it good here to show you the age, and at what time of the year and Move it is best to guelde such colts. And first as touching the age, it is best doing when the Colt is almost ii years old, for to guelde him younger will hinder his growth very much. Again if he be much elder his neck will wax great, and the strings of his stones will be so hard and strong, as they will not be broken, but must needs be cut, which as Russius saith, is very dangerous. Albeit our gueldours here in England be so cunning and expert in that faculty, as they make no matter thereof, for they will cut both old and young, at what age soever they be, and warrant them to do well enough. And some I assure you do evil enough, and specially if the meetest time for that purpose, as well of the year, as of the moon be not duly observed. Wherefore I would wish you to suffer none of the gelders to take your Colts in hand unless it be in the spring, as in May, or in the beginning of june, or else about the fall of the leaf, as also when the moan is in the wane. For those two seasons are most temperate, that is to say, neither to hot nor to cold, the excess of either of which qualities, is very noisome to those that be newly guelt, and causeth many to peak out of the way. And therefore after that they be guelt, you must see that they go in a warm pasture, and that they be not overmuch chased to and fro, or otherwise disquieted, but moderately exercised until they be perfectly whole.   

¶ At what age, in what time of the year it is best taking up of Colts to break them, and how they ought at their first haltering to be used. Cap. xviii.  
THey use in most parts to take up their Colts when they are but ii years and the vantage, or iii years old at the most, whereby their joints not being knit, if they be not the more discreetly used their backs may be soon swayed or pinched, and besides that their legs will grow full of splentes and wyngalles, and become crooked and lame, before they be half old. Wherefore I wish that according to Federico themperors order, no horse Colt might be taken up to be broken, before he were four years old and the vantage, and that would be done in some cold season of the year, when they may best endure to travel, as about Octobre, to th'intent that after they have been broken in the winter season, when extreme heat cannot annoy them, by driving them into faint sweats, they may be suffered, when spring time comes, and plenty of grass is upon the ground, to rest in the stable certain days, whilst they be scoured and fatted with grass, and so to get up their flesh that they lost whilst they were in breaking, of which scouring and fatting, we shall treat hereafter more at large, when we come to speak of the dieting of horses, for the preserving of their health. In some places, as at Tutburye, the Colts are so wild as after they be driven into a house they are fain to be snared with a snare made of a strong halter, coming through a ring of Iron, and put upon a long pole, and so cast about that Colts neck, which should be taken up, and strained so hard, as it may strangle him for the time, before they can fasten any halter or collar upon his head, which wildness partly perhaps cometh for that the ground is waste and wild, for lack of pertitions, as I said before in the first Chapter. But chiefly for that they be never housed, handled, nor made familiar with man in their youth, which is very needful, and was not omitted by the mean of old time as I showed you before in the xiii Chapter, and for lack thereof many a good colt at his first taking up, through his own striving is utterly marred, and maimed for ever. Wherefore I wish them to be made domestical in their youth, in such sort as is in the Chapter before declared, so shall they not need to be forced by any such extremity when they should be taken up, and the first collar or halter that you put on a Colts head, would be made as Russius saith, of woollen yarn, or else of horse hear, and that very gross and broad braided, to th'intent it may not cut his head when he striveth withal. Moreover unto that halter would be fastened ii strong reanes, on each side one, that the Colts head may be fast teied unto the manger on both sides, whereby he shall not rear nor hurt his legs. And until he be some what gentle and tame, it shallbe needful also to set another Colt by him that is already tamed, that his keeper may have the safer access unto him, who must use all gentle means possibly, to win him, and show him no manner of cruelty, using often to struck his back and neck with his hand, whereunto he shall bring him the sooner, if he let him eat no meat, but that which he shallbe content gently to receive at his hand, for hunger will tame the wild tiger, and for iii or four days let him not go out to drink, but make him to drink in the stable, and when he will suffer to be touched, then struck all the other parts of his body, and specially his legs, to th'intent he may suffer to be courried, and that his keeper may lift up his feet, and knock him first fair and softly with a stone upon his hones, and then harder and harder, whereunto if he be often used, it shall make him very easy to be shod, & also when his keeper leadeth him to water, let that tamed Colt which standeth with him, always accompany him, going somewhat before him, to th'intent that the other may follow, and so learn to be led in hand, which once had, then bring him with fair means to suffer the Cavetsane or headstraine to be put on his head, and to be sadeled and guirded, and use to lead him to water being so saddeled, to th'intent it may not seem strange unto him, neither within the house, nor abroad. And when he is brought to this tameness, than it shall be good to put a pair of soft pastorns on his forefeit, and also as Russius sayeth, to tie one of his hinder feet with a woollen chord, so as he can not much stir any way, and that shall preserve his legs (as he saith.) Nigh unto which, no dung must be suffered to lie, for fear of burning his hooves, but see that he stand clean, warm, and dry▪ and that he be well meated, often courryed and clothed. And in any case let no shrewd boys or unruly persons come into the stable, to tick or toy with him, or otherwise to fray him, for if he chance to get any evil property at the first, it willbe very hard ever after to bring him from it. And after that he is brought to such pass, as he will suffer to be handled, haltered, saddeled, shod, and also to be led where a man will, then let him be ridden, broken, and schooled, according to Grisons precepts, declared unto you in my last book entitled the art of riding. But now as touching the mare Colts, it were best to take them up, when they are ii years old, and the vantage, to th'intent that they may be handled and broken, either by working them, or else by riding them moderately, but rather by working them until they be iii years old. At which age, as I have have said before, they are most meet to be covered, and being made tame before, you shall have the less trouble with them, at such time as you would have them to be covered.   

¶ how and at what age a colts mouth should be cut, or certain of his teeth drawn, when the bit for fault thereof can not have his true resting place. Cap. nineteen.  
OUr common breakers of horses, when they chance upon a colt that hath so narrow a mouth, as it is not able to receive a bit high enough, they use to cut his mouth wider in riding him, with a veri sharp square broke, made of purpose which is not good, for it maketh him ever after either to have to tender or to hard a mouth, and for the most part rather to hard then to tender, by means of the hard and cornye flesh which afterwards groweth on both sides of his mouth, where he was so raggedly torn, cut, and gawled. Wherefore it were much better to cause an expert horse leech to slit his mouth equally on both sides with a sharp knife or razor so high as shallbe needful, and then to sear it with a hot iron, and to heal it in such sort as the sides thereof may grow no more together, but appear to be a natural mouth, and of that wideness even from the colts birth, & before his mouth be perfectly whole, I would wish him not to be ridden with any manner of bit at all, but only with a head strain. Yea, in mine opinion it were so much the better if his mouth were cut and healed up again before he were taken up to be broken, for the sooner it is done, the lesser it shallbe seen, so that it be not done while he sucketh, for then perhaps the soreness of his mouth would let his sucking, and so hinder his growth. Now as touching the drawing of certain teeth which may also be a great impediment that the bit can not have his true resting place, you shall hear the very words of Laurentius Russius, writing in this sort. Because it is very hard, yea, and almost unpossible (saith he) that a Horse can have a perfect good mouth, unless the ii tusshes, and also other two, called of him the plain teeth, & of us the cheek teeth, or wange teeth, be clean pulled out: (for after that a horse is thoroughly warmed, if he hath the said teeth, his rider shall hardly hold him.) It is very requisite therefore that the foresaid iii teeth, that is to say, on each side of his neither jaw ii after that the horse is iii years & a half old, be clean drawn out by an expert hand, with instruments meet for that purpose, so as his jaw may not be hurt, and so soon as they be out, let the sore gum be rubbed well with salt, somewhat brayed or broken before, that done, see that his mouth be not touched for three days after, look also that the stable where he standeth be close shut, so as the wind may not annoy him, and until he be whole. Forget not every day after that he hath drunk, first to cleanse the sore places from such filth as there remaineth of his meat, and then to rub it a new, with salt as before, for such continual rubbing with salt will suffer no evil flesh there to grow, and if any do grow, than first scarify the same with your nails, and rub it again with salt. Some use to wash the sore place only with warm wine, and some add thereunto both honey and pepper, and rub it after with salt, some again wash it only with wine and honey, and put on no salt. But truly if it were first washed with wine, and after rubbed with salt, it were so much the better. Moreover until the place be perfectly whole, forget not when soever you put any bit in his mouth, to cleanse first the sore place, fair & softly with your finger. Thus far Russius hath spoken, whose words do sound with good reason, and are confirmed by divers learned Authors, albeit I myself never saw horse teeth drawn in all my life, and yet I must needs confess that I have seen some horses though not many, which have had their tusshes standing so high, as it hath seemed unto me very necessary, either to draw them, or else to file them hard down to the gums, which some men take to be the surest way for saving of the horses jaw. Notwithstanding in mine opinion, the best way (if the horse's mouth be not already to wide) were to slit his wickes higher, and to make room for the bit that way, but to say the truth, few colts or none being well bred in this realm have need of either of them both, neither have our colts for the most part, any tusshes come up at that age whereof Russius talketh. And truly I can not but marvel at that he appointeth two tusshes to be drawn on each side of his neither jaw, (if I understand him aright) whereas every horse hath but one beneath, & another above, and I do no less marvel to read in Aristotle, that a horse should have in all xliiii teeth, sith, I could never see any horse that had above xvi that is to say, in the fore part of his mouth vi. beneath, and vi. above, and on each side of his mouth ii tusshes, one above and another beneath: nevertheless I thought good to let you understand the writers opinions herein, committing the execution of all things unto your own discretion.   

¶ Of the culling out of refuse mares and Colts, and also of those that should be reserved for the maintenance of the stock. Cap. xx.  
ALthough a man have never so fair stallions and mares, yet by some evil aspect of the planets, or else by some other unhappy by chance, or by the negligence of the keepers, the Colts do not always come to such proof as a man would have them, and therefore I would wish the owner, though he dwell far of, twice a year at the least to survey his ground, and all the cattle therein, to the intent that if there be any not meet to be kept, either for barrenness, for age, or for deformity, they may be made away, and sold at those fairs & markets which best serve to such purposes, yea, and if the cattle be well used, his increase willbe such, as once in iii or iiii years after the first iii years be past, he shall be fain either to sell or to give away of the fairest that he hath, for otherwise his ground would be quickly surcharged, & not able to feed them. Albeit I would wish him to sell or give so, as he need not to buy himself to maintain his stock, unto which he must have always a special regard, in choosing out from time to time the fairest and largest bodied colts, as well of males as females, that he can find amongst the whole race, to be reserved for the maintenance of his stud or breed. For as I said in the beginning, unless the parents be well chosen, the offspring can never be good. Moreover, it is necessary that such survey be often made for the shifting of the cattle, according as both kind and age of the cattle, and also the time of the year requireth, lest otherwise perhaps they may be pinched, both with cold, and penury, which be the greatest enemies that Colts can have. Again, many contagious sicknesses do often chance amongst this kind of cattle, at which time, if the infected be not removed from the whole: the one infecteth the other, and so they die all.  
For fault of which severing sir john Birron of Notinghamshire, a very good knight & a notable housekeper, told me this last summer that not long since he lost in one year, as many mares and Colts as were worth a M. marks. But to say the truth in such a contagious time, it is not only necessary to sever the sick from the hole: but also very needful, that medicine be ministered aswell to the whole, as to those that be not to far gone, for the safeguard of their lives, whereof I shall speak hereafter more at large, when I come to treat of the curing of their diseases, and in the mean time, I shall desire you to take all that which I have hitherto written touching the breeding of horses in good part, so shall I have cause to think my labour well bestowed.  
FINIS.   

THE ART of Riding.  
Newly corrected and amended of many faults escaped in the first Prynting: as well touching the matter, as the Bits: Whereof many were evil drawn, and as evil cut: but now made perfect through the diligence of the first Author. Tho. blundevil of Newton Flotman in Norff.  
¶ Imprinted at London by William Seres dwelling at the west end of Paul's church, at the sign of the Hedgehog.  
Cum privilegio ad imprimendum solum.   

TO THE RIGHT HONOURABLE AND HIS SINGULER GOOD LORD, THE Lord Roberte Dudley, earl of Leycester, Barron of Denbighe, Knight of the honourable order of the Garter, Master of the Queen's majesties horses, and one of her highness privy council. Thomas Blundevil wisheth perfect felicity.  
IT is now (my singular good Lord) almost two years sithence I determined with myself, to have translated into our vulgar tongue, the four books of Grison, treating in the Italion tongue, of the art of riding & breaking great Horses, and to have given the same unto your L. as M. Secretary Cicill can well testify. Who I thank him of his goodness vouchsafed to peruse my first draft, and misliked not the same. But after that I had translated two books thereof, and saw to what inconvenience I was bound: having to follow so doubtful phrases, & manners of speaking, and so confuse an order of writing, as in my judgement he useth, (being in deed a far better doer, than a writer) by means whereof he is constrained to make many repetitions of one thing, and to use more words than need: I could not satisfy myself therewith. And therefore leaving to translate any further. I sought how to bring so good a matter as that is, into a new form & better if it might be, and thereby to make it the plainer and also the briefer, in which my doing I trust, if Grison himself were living, I should not offend him at all. For sith it was his intent to make other men partakers of his excellent knowledge in this art, so necessary to be learned, and therefore of right to be published: it would not grieve him then to have his meaning so plainly expressed in an other tongue, as the readers might easily understand the same. Which whether I have so done or not, I refer that to your L. judgement, who hath no small skill, not only in both tongues, but also in the art self, wherein your H. is a chief master, aswell by knowledge as also by office, and therefore most meet to be both judge and patron of this book. Which if it shall please your H. to receive with a willing hand, and seem to allow my doing therein, by encouraging the esquires and riders of the stable in breaking the Queens Ma. horses, sometimes to follow thinstructions thereof (and the rather for that old Alexander their first master, was himself as I understand, sometime Grysons scholar) and so give an example to all others in like manner to follow the same: And specially now whilst the queens Majesty mindeth so graciously to provide for the breeding and keeping of great horses, which no doubt should be to the great profiting of this our common weal: In the most parts whereof, partly for lack of art, and partly for lack of exercise, chivalry is sore decayed: I shall not only think my labour well bestowed: but also to have received the greatest reward that I could possible wish or desire. Yea, and shallbe encouraged thereby, to attempt hereafter some other thing of more weight. Wherein I may show myself thankful to your L. for so courteously accepting this my labour & good will, which is and shallbe always bend to do your H. such poor service as I can.   

¶ A Chapter to the Reader, touching the order observed in this book: very necessary to be read and well considered before he enter any further.  
endeavouring myself gentle reader for your better understanding to reduce Grysons book, which in the Italion tongue doth treat of the art of riding, and of breaking great Horses, into a more brief and compendious way of teaching, than he to my judgement hath therein observed: I sought first to what end such labour was chief to be employed upon great horses. And I found that either it was to make them horses of service, or else horses of pleasure, called Stirers. Then I considered what things were incident to an horse of service, and what to a horse of pleasure or Stirer. And of those things which were common to them both, and which were appertaining to each one particularly. And first I found that to a horse of service belonged these chief points here following. That is to say, to troth clean & lustily, to stop lightly, to turn on both hands readily, to gallop strongly, to maneg with single turn surely, and last of all to pass a carire swiftly. And in all his doings from the beginning to the ending, to reane well, and to bear his head steddely. All which things are also common to the stirrer, but than it is requisite that the stirrer besides all this, learn to bound aloft with all four, & to yark withal, to gallop the gallop galliard, to fetch the Capriole, to do the Coruetti, and such like kind of salts. But yet this sufficeth not, unless I might also know the nighest means for a horse to attain to these feats, & what order was therein to be observed, which whilst I sought, behold the rider's office wholly discovered, whereby I might well perceive that unless the rider were first instructed in all those things that appertained unto his office: the horse could never be well broken. Wherefore minding to comprehend all things in three books, I thought it most meet to begin with the rider in teaching him first how to know a good horse, and apt to be taught, aswell by his colour & marks, as shape, to th'intent he bestow not his labour upon a jade, or Roil. Then how to tame him, and to make him so gentle as he may suffer to be ridden. After that, how to sit him and to behave himself in the point like a horseman. Then I proceeded further, declaring the three chief points, wherein the perfection of a horseman consisteth. That is to say, in knowing how to help, to correct, and to cherish his horse, and with what instruments, and generally how and when to use them, and so I end the first book. That done I come to the horses lessons, which he hath to learn for his part, declaring what order is to be kept therein: to which soever of those two. ends beforesaid. he be broken. And to every lesson I join such helps and corrections, as are meet to be used for redress of such faults, as most commonly chance therein: which faults for the most part I call errors making a distinction between errors and vices, attributing errors to the lack of knowledge, and vices to nature, or evil custom. As these be vices, to be restif, to be rammege, to lie down in the water, to be skittish, which for distinction sake I do otherwise call general faults, because they may chance in every lesson. Of the most part, of which faults I do treat severally in the third book, declaring therewith the corrections of the same. For otherwise I shoulbe be driven to make many digressions, and to interrupt the tenor of my talk which I love not to do. And I say here of the most part, because there be some vices so peculiar & so incident to certain of the horses lessons, as I am forced to mingle the correction of the same, even amongst the errors, as occasion requireth, and yet thereby no order broken at all, as any man of judgement, I am sure will easily confess. Then the horse being thoroughly broken in all points, meet for him to learn: be he horse of service or stirrer: I finally teach you how to ride him to the best show before a prince. And there endeth the second book. In the third book I treat only of the corrections of the general vices aforesaid, and of the diversity of bits, and to what purpose every one serveth. The order of all which three books shall more plainly appear unto you, by the contents of the chapters hereafter following. And though Gryson seemeth to use the like order, that I do in the very beginning: yet he doth not continue the same, but immediately maketh so many dygressions, and interlaceth so many and divers matters together, as were enough to confound the memory of a very discrete reader. And yet Gryson not to be blamed, for not observing that order or Metheode in writing, which perhaps he never had learned: But rather much to be praised and commended of almen, for uttering in the best manner he could, that his assured knowledge which he had gotten with great labour and continual exercising himself in riding, the space of xl. years and above. Of which knowledge what lack we Englishmen have had, & specially have at this present, is best seen at a muster, when the Queen's Majesty hath need of horse and horsemen, where ofttimes you shall see some that sit on their horses like wind shaken reeds, handling their hands and legs like weavers. Or if the horseman be good; then the horse for his part shall be so broken, as when he is suffered to go forward, he will go backward. And when his rider would have him to turn on the right hand, he will turn clean contrary. And when he should stop, he will arm himself, and run away, or else stop sooner than his rider would have him or use such like toys. For redress of which faults, both in man and beast, this book is chief set forth, with the rules. whereof, if you that lack knowledge shall vouchsafe to acquaint yourselves, not only by reading, but also by exercise of riding, I doubt not but by your speedy profiting therein, you shall have just occasion to be thankful, both to Gryson for the first invention of the matter, and also to me for disposing and reducing the same into a plain form and order of teaching. And you shall have very good cause also to be thankful unto my dear friend M. john Asheley M. of the Queen's majesties jewel house. For by the daily practising of the rules of Gryson his book, I saw him without the help of any other teacher, bring two of his horses, and specially that which he calleth his ball, unto such perfection, as I believe few gentlemen in this realm have the like. Which evident proof together with his encouraging me unto it, made me the more willing to take the matter in hand. In hope that other men would with like diligence use the like exercise, wishing all gentlemen lacking his qualities, to be his like indeed. And that not only in this exercise, but also in many other his virtuous exercises, as well of mind as of body. To th'intent they may deserve as he doth the love, favour, and commendation of all men, whereof I have no doubt at all, because I myself do know a number of young gentlemen that be given in these our days, to such civil, and commendable exercises, (as God giving them grace to continue therein,) in time to come they will be no small ornament unto this realm. Which I pray God to grant, and there I end bidding you well to far.   

A Table declaring the contents of the three books following. The first book treateth of the riders office and is divided into these Chapters.  

OF the colours of horses, and which be best 
Cap. i.  Which horses be well marked, and which be not. 
Cap. two.  What shape a good horse ought to have. 
Cap. iii.  How to tame a wild horse or Colt, at what age, how to make him come to a block, and what kind of bridle, or rather halter, and saddle, you shall first put upon him. 
Cap. iiii.  What the rider ought to do, before he take his horse back, and being mounted, how he ought to sit in his saddle. 
Cap. v.  Of the three chief points wherein consisteth the perfection of a horseman, and how many kinds of helps and corrections there be. 
Cap. vi.  To what end such helps and corrections serve. 
ca seven.  Of the voice, of the tongue, and sound of the lips. 
Cap. viii.  Of the rod. 
Cap. ix.  Of the bridle and reanes. 
Cap. x.  Of the Caulfes of the legs, and of the heel's. 
Cap. xi.  Of the stirruppe. 
Cap. xii.  Of the Spur. 
Cap. xiii.  Of the musroll and the martingale. 
Cap. xiiii.    


The second book treateth of the horses lessons, and is divided into these Chapters.  OF the horses lessons and order thereof in general. 
Cap. i.  Of treading the ring, and to what end it serveth. 
Cap. two.  The helps and corrections meet to be used whilst he treadeth the rings. 
Cap. iii.  Of stopping. 
Cap. iiii.  Of going back, and whereto it serveth, and how you shall teach your horse to do it. 
Cap. v.  Of advancing before, whereto it serveth, and how, where and when you shall teach him to do it. 
Cap. vi.  Corrections to be used when your horse advanceth to high, and out of order, or when you would not have him. 
Cap. seven.  How to make him yark, & to be light behind. 
Ca viii.  How to teach your horse to turn readily on both hands. 
Cap. ix.  How to correct your horse, when he is harder to turn on the one side then on the other. 
Cap. x.  Six other corrections for the same fault. 
 Of the whole turns and double turns, how and when to teach your horse to make them. 
Cap. xvii.  Helps and corrections meet to be used for the redress of such errors, as most commonly do hap in making the double turns. 
Cap. xviii.  Of the Chambetta, what it is, whereto it serveth, and how you shall teach your horse to do it. 
Cap. nineteen.  Of maneginge, and how many kinds of manages there be. 
Cap. xx.  th'rder of managing with half rest, whole rest, and without rest, all three with single turn, or half turn 
Cap. xxi.  Of managing with double turns. 
Cap. xxii.  Of the helps and corrections which are meet to be used for redress of such errors and faults, as commonly chance in managing. 
Cap. xxiii.  How and when to teach your horse to pass a Career. 
Cap xxiiii.  Of thorder of leaping and bounding aloft, and how and when you shall teach your horse to leap, and yark withal, and also to gallop the gallop gallyarde. 
Cap. xxv.  How you shall teach your horse to do the Capriole, and to dance the Coruetti, and also to go sideling, either with his whole body or with his rump only. 
Ca xxvi  How to ride a horse to the best show before a Prince, and where best standing is for him to see. 
Cap. xxvii.    


¶ The third book treateth of the corrections of vices, and of the diversity of bits and is divided into these Chapters following.  Of the corrections of vices in generalll. 
Cap. i.  OF the vices of the head and neck, and first how to correct your horse when he beareth his head or neck awry. 
Cap. two.  How to correct your horse when he beareth not right the lower part of his head, called of the italians Mustacchio, and may be called of us, the mosel, which comprehendeth both nose and mouth. 
Cap. iii.  Certain causes, why it is better for a horse to bear his head under then right out, or to cast it up aloft. And then how to correct him, if he will not bring in his head, and reane as he ought to do. 
Cap. iiii.  How to correct your horse when he ducketh down his head, and beareth to low. 
Cap. v.  How to correct that horse which doth over reach in his going, that is to say, doth smite his forefeet with his hinder feet. 
Cap. vi.  How to correct that horse which when he is chastised for any fault with the spur, useth to shake his head, or ears, also how to know by the moving of his ears when he is maliciously disposed, and how to correct him for the same. 
Cap. seven.  How to correct your horse when he whyneth, intending to strike with his heel's, or to do some shrewdness being in the company of other horses. 
Cap. viii.  Of restiveness, of the kinds and causes thereof. 
Cap. ix.  Remedies against restiveness, proceeding of vile courage. 
Cap. x.  Remedies against restiveness, proceeding of stubbornness, and stout courage. 
Cap. xi.  Other corrections to be used against restiveness, when the rider lacketh art, and knoweth not by order of riding, how to get the mastery of his horse, and to make him to know his fault. 
Cap. xii.  Of the contrary vice unto restiveness, which is to run away, of the causes thereof, and how to correct the same 
Cap. xiii.  How to correct that horse that will rear right up when he is corrected for any fault with a stick upon the head. 
Cap. xiiii.  How to correct that horse that will fall down to the ground, when he is a little weary or provoked to do any thing which he would not willingly do. 
Cap. xv.  How to correct that horse which passing through any water, will lie down in the same, & what is the cause of such vice. 
Cap. xvi.  How to correct that horse which is skittish or fearful and will start at every thing, and whereof such vice proceedeth. 
Cap. xvii.  How to embolden your horse, and to make him hardy against other horses. 
Cap. xviii.  How to make your horse to abide both staff, sword, great noise, gun-shot, or any other thing. 
Cap. nineteen.  OF the vices of the mouth, and causes thereof in general. 
Cap. xx.  How to correct that horse which will either draw up the bit with his tongue, or defend the same with his neither lip. 
Cap. xxi.  How to correct that horse which will mow or wry with his mouth, and the causes whereof such vice doth proceed. 
Cap. xxii.  Of the kinds of bits, together with their names, and parts belonging to the same. 
Cap. xxiii.  Of the cheeks and eyes of bits, and also of the kirble and how they ought to be made. 
Cap. xxiiii.  Of close bits, and for what mouths they are most meet, and also what vices they do correct. 
Ca xxv.  Of open bits in general. 
Cap. xxvi.  Of broken ports, and upset mouths, how they ought to be made, and what vices they do correct. 
Ca xxviii.  Of whole ports, how they ought to be made, and what vices they do correct. 
Cap. xxviii.  Of whole ports with trenches above, how they ought to be made, and for what mouths they are most meet. 
Cap. xxix.     

EXAMPLES RECITED BY GRIson aswell in his preface, as in the latter end of his book, not only commending the aptness of a horse to learn his stout courage, and long continuance in his goodness, but also the worthiness of the art itself, whereunto is also adjoined, who first found out riding, and who invented the bits, and who first used the service of horses in the field.  

Aptness to learn.  
THere is a city within the kingdom of Naples, called Sibarye, in the which sometime horses did learn to dance at the sound of a Simhpan.   

Stout courage.  
ALexander the great, had a horse called Bucephalus which being decked in royal ornaments, would suffer no man to ride on him, but king Alexander himself. Which horse being sore hurt at the taking of Thebes, would not suffer Alexander to leave his back, for to mount upon any other. Such was both his courage and also love towards his master, who did not forget to recompense the same. For when the horse died the king caused him to be solemnly buried: and for a perpetual memory thereof, builded even there, in stead of a sepulchre, a fair city, and named it after the horse's name, Bucephalia. julius Cesar also had a horse which would suffer no man to take his back, but Cesar himself.   

Long continuance.  
king Charles the viii. departing out of italy, only with v. C. horsemen, encountered the duke of Milan, being united with the Venetians, with Ferara and with Mantua: And until he came unto Furnovo, he knew none otherwise but that he was so strong as his enemies, which were in all a. m.u. C. horsemen, whereof though the king was advertised, and therewith hard all men say, it was meet to give place, and to save himself: Yet he trusting in the great knowledge and valiantness of his horsemen, and specially of his general called Il signor Giovanni, Giacomo Friulzi, a Gentleman of Milan, would not so do, but said: he would through, whatsoever became of it. And therefore having sent before his carriage (the spoil whereof, brought many of the greedy italians into disorder) he himself being mounted upon a great black Spanish horse, which had but one eye, and was xxiiii years old, followed with his band immediately after, and gave the onset, whereas both he and the horse did so valiantly, as in that conflict, there were slain and taken on the contrary part xvii of the chiefest conductiers. Whereby his enemies being discomfited, he quietly from thence passed on, in his journey. And the king would afterward many times say that the valiant courage of his horse, was the occasion of that victory. Which horse after that he came unto the city of Molina beside that he was no more traveled, but well fed, and tenderly kept, so long as he lived, he was also solemnly buried, when he died, by the appointment of the Lady of Bourbon, sister unto the king.   

Another example of continuance.  
WHen the great captain came to the Exploit of the kingdom of Naples (the camp lying then at Cerignola) it chanced that whilst the Vicerov of France, being there with many barons, prepared himself to fight with the spaniards: The next day following, there came a knight of Naples called ill signor Giacomo Guindazzo, who not having his horses there, went to the signor Troiano Carracciolo, prince of Melfe, praying him to lend him a horse, only to serve in the filled that day. To whom the prince, being of his own nature very courteous, and liberal withal, gave him leave to go into his stable, and to take his chose of all the horses ther. Whereupon the said Giacomo went thither: And having viewed them all he chose out a great bay horse, which lately came from the covering of mares, and was xxvii years old. And though the prince persuaded him to take a younger horse, yet he being expert in that faculty, and knowing which horses were best in deed, would not so do: neither was he deceived in his choice. For the battle being fought the next day, the horse did his part notable well. In so much, as though he were sore hurt, & had many grievous wounds: yet he would never give over, but continue to the end, and thereby saved his rider's life: So as both horse and man, after many valiant acts showed: departed the field with the great admiration of all men, that did behold them. And finally Grison attributeth so much honour and praise to a horse, as he sayeth, that the worthy state of knighthood, took his first beginning of this beast, which in the Italian tongue is called Cavalle: And thereof cometh Cavaliero, which is so much to say in English, as a horseman or knight. Wherein I believe, Gryson took his example at the latin word, having also like derivation. For a horse in latin is called Equus, whereof is derived this word Eques, that is a horseman or knight. But then most commonly they join this word auratus unto it, saying: Eques auratus, that is a golden knight, for that he was wont to wear gilt spurs, as I take it. Or else Eques torquatus, that is a cheaned knight, for that he weareth a chean. With which kind of ornaments, horsemen deserving well in the field were sometime rewarded in sign of honour due to their virtue. And though in these days rewarding of virtue beginneth to cease: yet the self same names of honour do still remain.   

The worthiness of the art.  
Moreover to prove that the art of riding and of breaking great horses, is no vile art: Gryson useth the authority of the noble Poet Virgil: Who in his Eneidos, calleth king Picus, for a more excellency and greater praise, a tamer or breaker of horses. He giveth also the like title in divers places of his book to Mesaphus, the son of Neptune the god, of the sea, who as Poets feign, begot upon Medusa the winged horse, named Pegasus, which fleeing up to the heavens, was transformed into those stars that be now called after his name. The poets feign also that Bellerephons' the son of king Glaucus, was upon this horse back, when he slew the monstrous Chimaera.   

¶ The first inventors of Riding and of bits, and also of the serving with horses in the field.  
THis Bellerophon's, as some men say, was the first that invented riding on horseback. And the Pellitrones a people of Lapithia, found out afterward the manner of bridles, bits, and rings, to guide horses withal. But they of Thessalia were the first that used the service of horses in the wars, which as Gryson saith, proceeded of a judgement, no less profitable than divine.   
Thus endeth the examples of Gryson.   


Of the colours of horses, and which be best. Cap i.  
A HORSE for the most part is coloured according as he is complexioned, and as he is complexioned, so is he also well or evil conditioned. Again he is complexioned according as he doth participate more or less of any of the four Elements. For if he hath more of the earth then of the rest, he is melancholy, heavy, and faint hearted, and of colour a black, a russet, a bright or dark dun. But if he hath more of the water, than is he phlegmatic, slow, dull, and apt to lose flesh, and of colour most commonly milk white. If of the air, than he is a sanguine, and therefore pleasant, nimble, and of colour is most commonly a bay. And if of the fire, then is he cholorique, and therefore light, hot, and fiery, a sterer, and seldom of any great strength, and is wont to be of Colour a bright sorrel. But when he doth participate of all the four Elements, equally and in dew proportion, then is he perfect, and most commonly shall be one of these colours following. That is to say, a brown bay, a dapple grey, a black full of silver hears, a black like a moor, or a fair rone, which kinds of horses, are most commendable, most most temperate, strongest, and of gentellest nature. And next to these are such as be most like in colour to them: as the bright bay, the dark bay, that hath neither learinge look, mealy nose, nor white flank, The bright sorrel, the flyebitten white, the white liard like silver, having his outermost parts black, as the tips of his ears, his main, his tail, or all four feet. And if he hath a list from his main to his tail, he is so much the better. To these also may be added the ashy grey, having all his four feet striped. And note this, that as all well coloured horses, are so much the better for having some sign of adustion, that is to say, some black mark, at the least in their nethermost parts: So of all evil coloured horses, those are best which have their outermost parts black. But if he be a bright sorrel, a brown bay with red flanks, a perfect black, or of any other colour, betokening Colour adust: Then to mittygate his fierceness, he had need to have some white mark. Wherefore sith good marks be as necessary as good colours, I will treat of them particularly in the next chapter following.   

¶ Which horses be well marked and which be not. Cap. two.  
THe horse that hath any white mark, is called of the italians Balzano, but specially when he is white footed, And of white feted horses there be iiii. good, and vii bad.  

¶ The good be these.  
The first is he that hath a white forefoote on the far side.  
The second, that hath a white hynderfoote, on the near side.  
The third, that hath both his hinder feet white.  
But note that such white must not mount above the pastorns, for that were an evil sign, betokening debility, and such horses be not called Balzani, but Calzati, which is so much to say in english, as hosed.   

¶ The seven bad.  
The first is he that hath a white forefote on the near side.  
The second, that hath a white hinderfoote on the far side, and is called of the italians Arzeglio.  
The third, that hath both his forefeet white.  
The fourth, that hath his forefoote and hinderfoote both on the farside white, and is called of the italians Travato, that is to say, traversed.  
The .v. that hath his forefoote and hinderfoote both on the near side white, and is likewise called Travato.  
The sixth, that hath his forefoote on the neareside, and his hinderfoote on the farsyde crosswise both white, and is called of the italians Trastravato, cross traversed.  
The vii that hath his foorefoote on the farreside, and his hinderfoote on the neareside crosswise both white, and is also called Trastravato.  
And note, that if any of the white feet betokening either good or evil, be mingled or sprent with black spots, it confirmeth so much the more, the good or evil signification thereof. It is an excellent good mark also for a horse to have a white star in his forehead, or a white list or fillet, coming down on his head, without touching his brows, and not fully arriving to his nose.  
The horse that hath a white rump or tail, is called of the Napolirans' Rapicano, and is most commonly a good horse, but if he have any white therewith before: that signifieth him to be of small force.  
The horse that is flyebitten only on the shoulders, or on the flanks, can neither be strong, nor able to endure any hardness. For such a horse most commonly is foaled in the heat of summer, betwixt july and August, when flies are stirring, from the stinging whereof he is not able to defend himself, neither with head nor tail, and therefore is called of the italians Attaffanato that is, flyestong or fliebitten.  
And besides that, his dam can have no plenty of milk to feed him with, the grass being burnt up with heat. The white horse that is altogether black fliebitten, or red fliebitten, is a good horse.  
But if he be a Lyard and marked with a few red or tawny flyebitinge, only on his cheeks, or on his nose, that is a sign of a stubborn jade and headstrong. The whale eyed horse called of the italians Gazzo, is most commonly wily, and full of shrewd toys.  
The horse, whose balls of his eyes are white, saith not well in time of snow.  
The horse that hath no kind of white mark, is most commonly tractable, but then he is ramege, that is to say, he will keep no just pace, in his going, but fareth as one that goth with ii minds, twixt going and not going.  
And though to have no white mark may chance to all colours: yet it chanceth most to the black and dark bay. And note that when such blackness proceedeth of choler adust: the horse is furious, bold and wily, and is called of the italians Zaino. But if of melancholy natural, than he is fearful, dull and slow, which things are more easy to be known by his doings then by his marks.  
The horse that hath an Ostrich feather either on his forehead, on both sides of his main, or on the one side, or else behind on his buttocks, or in any place where he himself can not see it, can never be evil horse.  
But though the horse be never so well coloured and marked, yet is he little worth, unless his shape be accordingly. And therefore I will show you what shape a good horse ought to have, beginning at his neither parts, whereon a good horseman ought first to fix his eye and mind.    

What shape a good horse ought to have. Cap. iii.  
A Good horse than would have a black, smooth, dry, large, round, and hollow hoof, and if it be soft or tender, and broad about the heel, it is the greater sign of lightness.  
The reason is, for that the horse from the day of his foling, treadeth light upon the ground, for he is afraid to trust to his hooves, being as yet very tender, and therefore straineth his forelegs, and his back the more. The crowns above his hooves would be small & hairy. His pastors short, and that neither to low, nor yet to high, so shall he be strong beneath, & not apt to founder. His joints great with long feawter locks behind, which is a sign of force.  
His legs strait and broad.  
His knees great, lean and plain.  
His thighs full of sinews, the bones whereof would be short, equal, just and well proportioned, and the brawns thereof when he standeth with his legs together, must be much more distant one from another above towards the breast, than beneath.  
His shoulders, long, large, and full of flesh.  
His breast, large and round.  
His neck rather long then short, great towards the breast, bending in the midst, and slender towards the head.  
His ears small or rather sharp, and standing right up, being of a just length and largeness, according to the stature of the horse.  
His forehead, lean and large.  
His eyes, black and great.  
The hollowness of his brows well filled and shooting outward.  
His jaws slender and lean.  
His nostrils so open and puffed up as you may see the read within, apt to receive air.  
His mouth great.  
And finally, his whole head together would be like a sheapes head.  
His main would be thin and long, albeit I do not mislike the opinion of those that would have it to be thick, so that it be not overthycke, for as the thinness betokeneth aptness to be taught, so doth the indifferent thickness betoken strength.  
His withers or walleys would not only be sharp pointed, but also right and strait, so as a man may plainly see from thence the departure of his shoulders.  
His back would be short, and that neither rising nor falling, but even and plain, so shall it be strong. Which you shall soon try, if you ride him.  
For the horse that hath a strong back, either in his going, or galloping, will continually gather his body round together, advancing himself behind, and lifting up his rump, which the italians call Aggruppiggiare: yea, and will do the like when soever you shall require it, or at the least will not shrink or distend his back, but will keep it always at one stay. Whereas if he hath a feeble back, either he will go rolling behind, or else if he advanceth himself for a while at the first setting forth, yet he is not able to continue withal. His sides would be long and large, with a small space betwixt the hindermost rib, and the hucklebone. His belly long & great, but orderly hidden under his ribs. His flanks not gawnte, but full, having natural freezeled hears growing on both sides, and the higher that such hears mount, the better.  
His rump round and plain, with the fall of a little gutter, and with a large space betwixt the ii hucklebones. His thighs large and long, with bones well fashyned and full of flesh on either side. The hams whereof if they be lean, dry and straight, and the houghes large and crooked like a Hart, it is a sign of swiftness. But if the hams be crooked, & the houghes strait, it is a sign that he is good for travel.  
His tail would be full of hears, and long down to to the ground, the tronchen whereof must be of a measurable bygnes, and well couched betwixt his thighs, notwithstanding, some do say that a thin tail and crisp is as good.  
His stones & yard would be small. And finally all his members would be corespondent to the greatness of his body, which altogether would be fashioned much like a stag, somewhat lower before, then behind, but not overmuch, for that were dangerous in running. And the greater and stronger the horse is, the meeter for the war, and the lighter and more nimble he be, the metre to make a styrer.  
Thus having showed you how to know a good horse and apt to be taught, aswell by his colour & marks, as shape: It resteth now that I teach you how to break him, and to handle him, and first if he be wild or a Colt, how to tame him.   

¶ How to tame a wild horse or Colt, at what age, how to make him to come to a block, and what bridle and saddle you shall first put upon him. Cap. iiii.  
ALthough you may begin to handle your horse when he is full ii years old, and upward, yet it were better to tarry until he be iii years and a half old, so shall he be the better able to endure travel, the joints of his body and legs being then somewhat knit together. For which cause the Emperor Federico, would not have a horse to be ridden before he were full four years old. And at the first handling of him, you shall put on his head a certain collar or halter, called of the Napolitans Cavazana, made in such sort as is hereafter expressed in the first figure of the third book, which I caused to be cut of purpose, because that Grison would in no wise have a young horse to be ridden at the first with any bit, for fear of marring his mouth. In stead of which Cavetsane, our Riders in England use a Chain not much unlike in effect unto the cavetsane, but yet in my judgement not so meet for a young horse, for that it straineth the tender gristle of his nose to sore, which kind of halter or Cavetsane, partly for shortness of speech, and partly for likeness of signification, I will call from henceforth a headstraine. And in putting the head strain on, you must use your horse so gently, as he may not only be content to were it, but also to be quietly led thereby. Whereunto, with gentle handling you shall quickly bring him. Neither must you use any other kind of bridle than this, or any other saddle for fear of hurting his back, than a soft pad of straw. Until your horse can troth clean, keep the ring, stop and turn roundly on both hands. And in learning to sit close in the pad, you shall also sit close in your saddle, but whatsoever saddle you put upon his back, see that it stand always more forward then backward, unless the horse be overlow before. For the more forward that the saddle doth stand, the horseman shall sit therein the more right up, and with the better grace. The horse than being thus bridled and saddled: Cause him to be brought forth to some block, whereas if he will not stand still whilst you take his back, then let him that bringeth him make much of him, and sometime threaten him with his voice, & thrust him with his hands on the right side towards the block, whereupon you shall stand, continually cherishing him with your hand, to th'intent he may suffer you to get up. But if he be so froward and so stubborn, as he will not come nigh the block: Then all to rate him with a terrible voice, and beat him yourself with a good stick upon the head betwixt the ears, not leaving him until you have made him to come to the block, whether he will or not. Remembering always to make much of him when he showeth himself obedient unto you. Or if you will, you may observe this manner following.  
Lead him into some new ploughed ground, and there take the reanes of the headestraine by the outermost end in your right hand, and cause some other man to take a stick in his hand, & by beating the horse therewith upon the rump, to force him to troth, or gallop, so fast as he may drive, turning still round upon the right hand, during which time, you shall not remove forward your right foot from the place where you are. But only go round with your left foot, towards the horse, accompanying him in every turn, so as you yourself may remain always in the midst of the Circle, which the horse maketh. And immediately after the horse hath been well tossed, and wearied, with continual turning on the right hand: you shall change foot and hand, and keeping still your place, cause him to make as many turns on the left hand. And thus you may turn him and toss him on both hands, until you have gotten the mastery, and wholly subdued him. But if the horse be so stubborn, and so froward, as one is not sufficient to make him to go turning so oft about: Then besides the help of more persons, with wands in their hands, you yourself may have also in your left hand, a longer wand than any of theirs and changing turns, you shall also change the rod into your right hand. By means whereof, it is possible that you yourself alone, by beating him sometime with the one hand, and sometime with the other, shall make him without the help of any other, to go freely about. For this kind of correction is so grievous to any horse, of what age so ever he be, but specially to a Colt, that it will make him so gentle as a lamb, and to suffer you to do with him what you list. Thus having taught you how to tame your horse in such sort, as he shall suffer you to take his back: It is requisite that before you mount upon him, I put you in remembrance what you have to do. And than being mounted, how to sit him, and how to behave yourself in all points, like a horseman.   

¶ What the Rider ought to do, before he take his horse back, and being mounted, how he ought to sit in his saddle. Ca v.  
FIrst than see that your horse be surely guirded, and if he be come to wear a bit, see that the kurble thereof be fastened as it ought to be. And when you are mounted, make the reanes of your bridle even, and of a just length, without stirring your horse, until you have sattled yourself and your clothes about you. That done, make him to go forward about ii paces fair and softly, and then stay again. After that, place him or troth him to the place where you mind to break him. But after that he cometh to wear a bit, and is throughly broken: then to keep him in ure with the double turns hereafter taught: you shall in the end of the foresaid two paces, give him also two whole turns, that is to say first ii on the right hand then ii on the left, and last of all ii on the right. Or else if you will but iii whole turns, that is for each hand one, so as the first and last be on the right hand. And see that you do not only sit him boldly, and without fear, but also conceive with yourself that he and you do make as it were but one body. And that you both have but one sense and one will. And accompany him with your body in any moving that he maketh, always beholding his head right betwixt his ears, so as your nose may directly answer his foretop. Which shallbe a sign unto you to know thereby, whether you sit right in your saddle or not, and whether your horse beareth his head right or not. And let the ridge bone of your back be even with his. And let your left hand holding the reanes of the bridle, be even with his crest, and in any wise keep your thighs and knees close to the saddle, holding down your legs strait like as you do when you are on foot. And let your feet rest upon the stirruppes in their due places, both hele and toe standing in such sort, as when you shall turn your head, as far as you can on the one side, without moving your body, and looking downward to your stirrup: you shall perceive that your toe doth directly answer the tip of your nose. And according as the saddle is made, so shall you ride long or short. But always let your right stirrup be shorter than the other by half a hole, and keep your stirrup leathers always under your knees: albeit to ride with the stirrup leather above the knee, was thought by men of old time, more comely, being partly then constrained thereunto, for that their horses were barded after such a sort, as unless they did ride so, and that with very long spurs besides, they could not reach their bellies. Notwithstanding, to ride as we do now a days is a great deal more sure. But to sit a horse well, or to ride both sure and clean is not sufficient to make a perfect horseman, and therefore it is necessary that here I also declare unto you, wherein the perfection of a horseman chiefly consisteth.   

¶ Which be the things that make a perfect horseman. Cap. vi.  
GRison sayeth, that besides the help of a good Constellation, inclining you to follow continually, with a fervent zeal the school of Mars: to make you a perfect horseman, three things be requisite. first, to know how and when to help your horse. secondly, how and when to correct him. And thirdly, how and when to cherish him, and to make much of him.  
Which three things being as general kinds, have many specialties and particularities belonging unto them. And though they do seem wholly to appertain to the office of the Rider, yet can I not make you throughly to understand them, until I come to entreat of the Lessons, which the horse for his part hath also to learn. Because in deed they must go both together. notwithstanding to th'intent I may use fewer words hereafter, (you being somewhat instructed before) I will treat of them here in so good order as I can. For though I can not show you, when and how to use these things in time, until I come to the horses lessons, yet I may show you which they be, how many there be, to what end every one serveth, and generally the use of the same. And first you shall understand, that you may help your horse vii manner of ways. That is to say, with your voice, with your tongue, with your rod, with the bridle, with the caulfes of your legs, with your stirruppe, and with your spurs. Again you may correct him seven. manner of ways, that is to say, with your voice, rod, calves of your legs, bridle, stirrup, spurs, & with treading the ring, in such sort as shallbe hereafter expressed: but you can cherish or coy him no more but ii manner of ways, that is to say, either with your voice in speaking to him gently, or else by clawing him on the neck with your hand, or with the neither end of your rod. And though that helps and corrections in the doing, seem in a manner all one: yet are they diverse, having respect to the time, for the one goth before error, and the other cometh after. For you help your horse to th'intent he should not err: But you correct him for that he hath already erred: But it is not so easy to know the due time and measure of helping him, as it is to know when and how to correct him. And therefore I would not wish you to be to busy in helping him, until you can keep time and measure, with both hand and heel, lest your horse not understanding your mind, grow to some disorder. But rather use for a while, only to correct him, when he erreth, so shall he be afraid to do the like again. And in the mean time, by exercise, you shall learn as well the time of helping, as of correcting, and so much the sooner, for that you see the instruments wherewith you help or correct, be all one.   

¶ To what end such helps and corrections serve. Cap. seven.  
THe voice is that which any horse feareth most, and is needful in all disorders. The wand or rod serveth to correct the disordering of his head, and to drive shrewd toys out of his mind.  
The bridle correcteth both head, neck, and mouth, and maketh him to reane well, and doth help much to embolden, or to man him.  
The caulfes of the legs, and likewise the stirrups, ordereth aswell the hinder parts, as foreparts the of horse The Spurs do not only make him steady and just, but also subject and quick to understand his rider's mind. The correction of treading the ring, maketh him just, aswell in his manage, as in every other feat.   

¶ Of the sound of the voice, tongue and lips. Cap. viii.  
BUt first as touching the voice, you shall understand that according as the signification of the noise or word is: So is it either a correction, a help, or a cherishing. For if you would correct him for any shrewd toy or obstinacy, you must all to rate him with a terrible voice, saying to him. Ah traitor, Ah villain, turn here, stop there, and such like. But if you would help him at any time, than you must use a more mild and cheerful voice, as when you run him, to say hay, hay, or now now. Likewise if you would have him to go back, you must say with a low voice, back boy, back I say. Also if you would help him to advance at the stop, you must say cheerfully hup, hup, likewise to make him light behind, you must say darier, darier, or use such terms as you shall think good. But if you would cherish your horse or coy him for doing well, than your voice must be most mild of al. As when you say, hola, hola, or so boy so, or use such like coying words. And whilst we talk here of the voice, it shall not be amiss also, to show you that the sound of the tongue is a very necessary help, and meet to be used, aswell at the stop, as in the turns, both single and double, I mean that sound which you commonly make, by turning up the typ of your tongue almost into the middle palate of your mouth, and then suddenly losing it again from thence with a Chirke. There is also another sound of the lips as necessary to be used as any of the rest, at such times as shall be hereafter taught, and that is made by closing your lips hard together, and then in opening them again somewhat wide, pronouncing as it were, this word powgh.   

¶ Of the rod. Cap. ix.  
THough some think that the correction and help of the rod, or cudgel, is not needful, and that it maketh the horse to fearful, yet experience teacheth the contrary. And specially if it be used as it should be, that is to say, if you correct him not therewith, out of time, but even in the self same instant that he erreth. And assure yourself that to correct a stubborn horse, it hath no fellow. For if you beat him but once well, and surely therewith betwixt his ears, and upon any part of his head, (his eyes excepted) you shall need to give him the less correction ever after. But touching the rod, diverse things are to be considered. As first, when to bear a rod, secondly how to take it, when it is first offered: thirdly, how to bear it at all times: fourthly, to what end it cheiflye serveth: and finally how and when to use it as a help, correction, or cheryshinge to your horse. And as touching the first ii points, I say that if you break a young horse which was never handled before, you shall bear no rod in any wise, until he come to be ridden with a bit, and then at the first time that the rod is offered you, you must take it gently, for not making him afraid thereof: and having received it, you must coy him on the neck therewith, either by clawing him on the withers with the neither end thereof, or else with the middle of the rod, lying cross upon his main, and that shall make him to abide it the better ever after. Now to the other ii points. In learning how to bear your rod, as well when you pace or troth your horse, as also when you manage or run him: you shall also learn thereby how to handle both spear, and sword, to which end the bearing of the rod chiefly serveth. Wherefore it shall not grieve me here to show you the order thereof. And first when you do but pace or troth your horse, you shall bear the rod in your right hand, with the point right up, towards your right shoulder, holding the neither end thereof betwixt your thumb and your other fingers, distended and not clsosed. And when you would occupy it, you shall let the point fall either on the left side, or on the right, according as occasion shall require.  
But when you manage your horse, you shall stretch out your arm towards your right thigh, and couch your rod crosswise overthwart the horses neck, and when he hath made his first course, and turned on the right hand: Then a little before the end of his second course, when he is in a manner ready to turn on the left hand, you shall lift your rod from thence, and hold it with the point right forth, on the right side of his head, not far from his eye, or else somewhat lower towards the eye of the bit▪ and as he changeth turns to and fro, so shall you change the placing of your rod either of the one side, or of the other. Which be the ii chief warding places of the sword.  
Or if you will, you may hold your rod as you would do a spear, when you run, that is with the point upward, and the neither end low towards your thigh, but not resting upon your thigh, & a little before that ye come to the place of turning, you may let the point fall on that side, which is requisite, and so soon as your horse hath made his turn, to hold it again, with the point up as before, whereby you shall learn to charge and discharge a staff.  
Now as touching the usage of your rod in helping or correcting your horse, (for the way of cherishing him therewith is before taught) because I cannot as I have heretofore said, teach you the particularities thereof, until I come unto the horses lessons: Let it suffice you therefore in the mean time, to learn these general rules here following. First if your horse will not turn on any side that you would have him, than beat him with your rod on the contrary side. As for example, if you would have him to turn on the right side, then beat him on the left shoulder, and if you would have him to turn on the left side, then strike him on the right shoulder. Likewise if he be harder or heavier, or go more disorderly on the one side then on the other, bear your rod for the most part on that side, to th'intent the sight thereof may put him in remembrance of his fault. Again, when you would have him light before, strike him on the foreparts, as on his shoulders, and forelegs, and when you would have him light behind, strike him on the flanks, rompe and haunches. In what time, and how much, shall be taught you hereafter.   

¶ Of the Bridle and reanes. Cap. x.  
GRison compareth the bridle unto the stern of a ship, for as the ship is wholly guided by the stern, so the horses head is only ruled by the bridle, and therefore this is an instrument which requireth many considerations, not only for the divers fashions of bits, together with the members thereof, as the cheeks, kurbles, ports, trenches, and such like, meet to serve diverse mouths, and to correct divers vices, as hereafter shall be declared in the third book at large, and set out with figures: but also for the knowing how and when to use the same. For it is the rider's part, first to know when to ride his horse with a bit, then with what manner of bit, and how to use the same, at the first putting of it in to the horses mouth, and in what part of his mouth the bit hath to rest. Then how to hold the reanes, when even together, and when one shorter than another, and what measure he shall keep with his hand, in bearing hard or lose, high or low, when to use false reanes and when to leave them, when and how to correct him with the bridle, and when to help him: of all which things I intend here to speak briefly, and so plainly as I can. First therefore when your horse can troth clean, and keep the ring, yea, and stop and turn indifferently well on both hands.  
Then take a plain Cannon with right cheeks, such a one as hath been somewhat worn before, and put it on with the headstall over his headstraine, making him with the reanes thereof by little and little to feel it in his mouth, and see that the bit lie upon his neither gums a little above his great teeth or tusks, which is the due resting place thereof. And if the bit were first anointed with a little honey and salt, it would make him the more to delight in it, and to be always champing thereon, and to stay his mouth upon it the more temperately. For if his mouth be distempered at the beginning it is not afterward so easily helped, which thing is little considered of our english horsemen, that use to ride their young horses even at the first, with so rough a brake or bit as may be gotten, which is one of the chiefest causes why we have so many headstrong jades. Now as touching the holding of the reanes, you must hold them in your left hand, so as your little finger and ring finger may be betwixt the two reanes, and that your thumb may lie close upon the reanes, with the brawn thereof turned towards the pommel of your saddle, and if you have no rod when you manage him, or run him, then you shall take the overplus of the reanes that hangeth down, by the midst in your right hand, holding the same hard by your right thigh. And the more that you turn the neither end of your left fist inward and the the upper end outward, the more you shall bring in your horse's head, but therein you must use discretion, according as occasion shall serve. And in deed to say the truth, that point appertaineth not so much to the holding of the reanes, as to the bearing of your bridle hand whereof there be iii manner of ways. The first is to bear it low beneath the pommel of the saddle, even upon the withers, and that is to correct him. The second is, to bear it somewhat higher about the middle of the pommel, and that is to maintain him. The third is to bear it upon the uppermost edge of the pommel, and never much higher, and that is to be used only when you would manage him, or make him to do any thing. For to bear the bridle hand over high, as the unskilful Numidians in Afrique use to do, is disallowed for divers respects. First for that it wearieth the arm: Secondly, if need were, you could not have so much power to stop your horse when you would. Thirdly, being in the field against your enemy: the bearing of your hand so high, would be a trouble unto your defence, and a commodity to your enemy, for that he might easily cut your reanes a sunder. finally, you can have no steaddy hand upon your horse, any time together, whereby your horse shall never reane well, nor yet have a steady head. For who so will have his horse to bear his head steadyly, and to reane well: let him bear his hand rather low then high, so shall he be able to keep it always at one stay, which is one of the chiefest points of horsemanship. Notwithstanding, if your horse be any thing headstrong, then when you manage him, or otherwise handle him, bear not to stiff a hand, but rather somewhat light and temperate, for the more you force him, the less he will yield. But if he hath no such fault, then do always as I told you before. And remember always when you turn your horse, to draw neither your arm nor hand, more of one side then of another, but to keep it even with the horses crest, and only by turning your fist a little inward, or outward, to signify unto him on what hand you would have him to turn. And note, that for a while it shall not be amiss, when you ride you ride your horse, to let him wear his bridle, and his headstraine both together, until he be somewhat acquainted with the bridle, for than you may take away his headstraine, and in stead thereof, put on a pair of false reanes, which are very necessary for a young horse in the beginning, to make him bear his head right, for bearing the ordinary reanes, always just and even, you may shorten the false reanes, on any side at your pleasure. Which false reanes, when your horse begin to wax somewhat perfect in his doings, you may also take away, & ride him only with the ordinary reanes, and if he happen afterward for lack of them to hang more of one side then of another, or to bear his head or neck awry: you may correct it by bearing the contrary reane shorter than the other, as for example: if he wrieth more on the left side, then on the right, then holding the bridle, as I taught you before, pull in the right reane with your forefinger, and so hold it just betwixt your forefynger and your thumb, and if need be, you may also join your long finger unto your forefinger, to hold it the faster. But if he wryeth more on the right side, then on the left, than you shall shorten the left reane by putting ii or iii of your neythermost fingers betwixt the reanes. But as touching the true order of correcting, and helping your horse with the bridle, in time and measure. It shall be declared unto you hereafter, as occasion shall serve: and therefore in the mean time let these general rules suffice you.   

¶ Of the caulfes of the legs, and of the heels. Cap. xi.  
I May well show you how to correct or help your horse, with the caulfes of your legs, and with your heel's, and where to strike him, together with the diversity of the strokes, and the names thereof, and to what end every one serveth. But to tell you exactly in what time, and with what measure, until I come unto the horses lessons, I can not. But of one thing I will advertise you in any wise at the first, not to be to rash, but to use such temperance & moderation, as you may cause your horse, by little & little to understand your meaning, without any disorder or confusion. And therefore it were best doing with him whilst he learneth his first lesson, which is to tread the ring, as shallbe hereafter declared unto you at large: in the which, according as you shall see occasion, you shall help him, or correct him, by striking him somewhat behind the foremer girt, which is the right spurring place, either with the one Calf alone, or with both together, with the one heel alone, or with both even together, or together not even, or else with one immediately after another. For so many kinds of strokes there be, serving sometime to divers purposes, and therefore have divers names accordingly. For the first is called the single stroke of the contrary leg, wherewith you must help him to turn, on which side you would have him. As for example, if you would have him to turn on the right hand, than you must touch him with your left leg. If on the left hand, then with your right leg. And likewise when he hangeth more on the one side in his going, then on the other, or be stiffer necked of any side, or bear not his head right, you must correct him for the most part with the single stroke on the contrary side. The second is called the double stroke, or even stroke, because you must strike him in the spurring place with both legs even together, which properly and chiefly is to make him to go forward. Notwithstanding, it serveth also many times to make him to turn, to stop, to advance, and for many other purposes, as you shall perceive hereafter. The third may be very well called the closing stroke, because it maketh the horse to close his turn, round and just. And the order of it is thus. When you would have your horse to close his turn well (as for example on the right hand) then in his turning, touch him with both legs together, but not even, that is to say, with your left leg in the true spurring place, and with your right leg somewhat more behind, towards the horse's flank, which manner of striking Grison calleth in his language Attondare. The fourth serveth only as a correction for sundry vices hereafter to be declared, and then you must strike your horse in the spurring place iii or four times together with one leg after another, so fast as your legs may walk, which kind of strokes Grison calleth Botti roris pondenti, but in our tongue, methinks it were not amiss to call it the bonching stroke, because your legs must go like ii bonching beetles. Or else the clinching stroke, fetching a similitude from the botewrightes, whose hammers when they clinch the nails, do answer one another. In all which four kinds of strokes, if you can learn to keep time and measure, with your legs and heels, you shall be the better able to keep time also with your spurs, when you come to ride your horse with spurs. For there is none other difference betwixt them, but that the stroke of the one toucheth the quick, and the other not. Because the one is blunt, and the other sharp.   

Of the stirrup. Cap. xii.  
Though the correction or help of the stirruppe be seldom used, yet it is a good help to a young horse in the beginning, until he be somewhat broken. For if he carrieth his head or neck awry, or hang of one side more than of another. By striking him with the stirrup under the shoulder on the contrary side, you shall make him to amend his fault.   

Of the Spur. Cap. xiii.  
Having declared unto you in the beginning (when I showed you how many kinds of corrections & helps there were) to what end the spur serveth, & also now in a manner last of all, in speaking of the using of your legs and heels, in what part of his body, you should spur your horse, and how many kinds of strokes there were and when to be used: it resteth now that I show you when it is time to make your horse both to abide the spur, and also to know the spur, and all the helps thereof, and where, and how you shall do the same. And first you shall understand that in old time men were so ignorant, as they would never spur their horses until they were not only staid of head, but also perfect in all such orders, as were used in those days. So that though their horses were vi or vii years old, yet could no man assure himself of their goodness. For most commonly when they came afterward to be spurred, either they waxed so stubborn and so devilish, as they would not abide the spur, but fall a leaping and flinging, and trying of masteries to cast their riders: or else they became so restife, and so dull therewith, as they would abide it to well; and stand even still, not once moving for it, & the more they were spurred, the worse they would be. And although that those riders had extraordinary means, to make a horse to abide the spur, whether he would or not, as by forcing him when they spurred him to plunge into some great water or sea, or to behange him with spurs made of purpose to molest him, or else perhaps as I have seen some riders do, to behange him with a pair of stuffed boots or with sand bags, having spurs or pricks to grieve him whilst they chase him to and fro: And so to weary him that way: yet they had no ways to make him to know the help of the spur, & thereby to understand the rider's meaning, and all for lack of knowledge and good consideration. They lacked knowledge, for that they would never almost spur their horse but when they ran him, so that the spur served them in a manner to none other purpose. Again, they lacked consideration, in that they suffered their horses to go so long before they spurred them. For they might well think that it was not so easy to make a horse either to abide or to know the spur, when he is grown in age, strength and lusty courage, as when he is young, simple and fearful, and apt to rule, as a man will himself. And therefore▪ I would wish you not to diffarre the time so long but after that your horse hath worn the bridle half a score of times, let him learn to know the spur, be he never so young, lean, or feeble. Which would be done, either whilst you cause him to troth the ring in some new deep ploughed ground, in helping him therewith as hereafter shallbe taught, or else when you trot him in the like ground right out. And though you may give him therewith a Career if you will: yet to avoid all disorders that might thereof ensue, the surest and readiest way is only to troth him: for otherwise you must tarry until he can run a Career well, and stop as he ought to do, which perhaps would be to long. And of whatsoever disposition or metal the horse be, dull, or quick: Forget not in any wise, in the self same instant that you put spurs unto him, to help him with your voice, or else with the sound of your lips, and that shall put buy all shrewd toys, whereof perhaps he might otherwise show you some, as to leap, to fling, to cast his head betwixt his legs, to lie down, or such like. And if you see that the spur doth make him to springe forward, and to amend his pace, then make much of him, & so by little and little, you shall bring him acquainted with the spur well enough, and in time to know all the helps and correctyons of the same.  
But if you have to spur a horse that is somewhat in years, and of nature ramege or restyffe. Then see that in any wise you spur him not at the first, either when you troth him, or run him, but only whilst you place him fair and softly, through some town or City, and so going, suddenly put spurs unto him, helping him in the self same instant, with your voice, or with the sound of your lips, and force him therewith to fall into a swift trot, the length of twenty or xxx paces, which if he doth, make much of him, and for a while use him thus half a score times in a day, until he be perfect in that, which when you see he is: Then you may go into the field, and there whilst you troth him in some new ploughed ground, spur him and help him as before, making him to gallop as hard as he may drive, a pretty way together, and then stay, making much of him, if he did well: Thus proceeding from soft pace to troth, and from trot to gallop, by continual exercise, you shall make him both to fear the spur, and also to know the help thereof. Notwithstanding there be some horses of nature very lively and sensible, which through evil breaking at the first, and afterward by sufferance, have been so evil accustomed, as they will never yield to the spur, but so soon as they feel it, they will leap and fling, and take on like Spirits. Wherefore if any such horse chance to come into your hands, first for a while, ride him without spurs, and use him to tread the rings, until he hath learned to go quietly in the same, and to keep the true path. Which when you see he doth, then ride him both with spurs, and also with a good wand in your hand. And whilst he treadeth the ring in some new ploughed ground with deep furrows, when time is, touch him with your spurs at sundry times thrice, and if he will then play his vagary, beat him forwith with your wand upon the head on both sides, and betwixt the ears, and upon his forelegges, all to rating him at the self same present, with a terrible voice, & never leave him until you have made him to yield unto the spur, without making any resistance at all, and to th'intent that he may suffer the pryche of the spur the better, it shallbe necessary to weighed him, sometime with continual turning & trotting him round, and overthwart the furrows, and sometime by trotting and galloppinge him right out, in one path to and fro. By means of which travel, and often spurring him together, he shall fall into such a sweat and heat, that the strokes shall grieve him the less. By means whereof, he shall not only be content to abide the spur, but also learn by the stroke thereof, to know your will, and to obey the same, and so much the more, if you shall not forget when he doth well, to make much of him. But note by the way, that this last order belongeth to a horse of a great courage, or if you should in such sort molest or weary a horse of a dull spirit, he would give over, and for faintness become restive: and therefore a good consideration must be had as well to the horses strength, as to his vice.  
But now though I showed you in the last Chapter before, how many kinds of strokes of the spur there were, and generally how and when to be used, yet let it not grieve you that I repeat here some part thereof once again with some little addition not to be left out. First then when soever your horse will not turn, as you would have him, or be stiffer necked of one side than of an other, or will not carry his head right, nor continued his trot, you shall correct him always with the single stroke of the contrary spur, but if he wax slow in his trot, bearing his head and neck right, than you shall correct him with the even stroke of both spurs together, for that stroke properly serveth to quicken him, and to make him go forward, and unproperly for tother purposes in the former chapter rehearsed. It is requisite also that I show you somewhat more plainly how to correct your horse, with one spur after another, which I called before, the clinchinge stroke, the order whereof is thus. When your Horse committeth a fault of any side, as for example on the left side, then give him with one spur immediately after another, three strokes. Whereof the first and last must be on the right side, but if he erreth on the right side, than the first & last stroke must be on the left side. And note that after your horse will abide the spur, and also knoweth the helps thereof it shall not be good to spur him often, but only when you see it very needful, as to direct his head and neck, when he raineth not well, or to help him in his single or double turns, when you manage him, or else to give him swiftness when he passeth a Career, for overmuch spurring will make him swing tailed, and specially if he be a Jennet or Turkey horse, whose tails be always lose, and at liberty, and are not tied as the Coursers be.   

¶ Of the musroll and the martingale. Cap. xiiii.  
TO these foresaid kinds of helps and corrections, I think that Grison would have also added the musroll & the martingale, but that they seemed perchance unto him extraordinary things, and not meet to be used, but at certain times, and specially the Martingale. Which though it was first invented by evangelista, an excellent rider, and a great horsemaister of Milan, not only to make the horse to have a steady head, but also to make him light before in his advancing, and in his going to gather his body round together: yet Grison seemeth not greatly to allow it: albeit he sayeth, it may be used, when the horse is very heavy before, and marvelously unstaid of head, neither would he have the horse to wear it above xu days together at the most. Thinking it in deed, a great deal better, to bring the horse from such faults, by such means, as are by him hereafter taught. But he praiseth much the musroll, saying that if the horse do naturally keep his mouth close together, that then it can not hurt him: but if he hold it open, than it doth not only help him, but also correct him of that fault in such sort, as after that he hath been used a little thereunto, it will make him steady, both of mouth, head, and neck, and to reane as he should do.    

THE second BOOK OF THE ART OF RIDING.  

¶ Of the horses lessons in general, and order thereof, and in what time of the day he should be taught. Cap. i.  
THus having declared unto you, with what instruments you should help or correct your horse, and generally how, & when to use them, & also how and when to cherish him, as things only appertaining to the Rider's office: I think it therefore now meet to show you what your horse hath to learn for his part, and also what order you shall keep in breaking him, for if a horse be taught unorderly, he shall never be perfect in any thing. As for example, if you (as some men do for lack of skill) would use to gallop your horse before he can stop well in his trot, or to run him before he can stop well in his gallop, or to manage him with a swift gallop, before he can stop, advance, and turn readily on borh hands: you should mar him for ever. And therefore take heed that ye duly follow this order hear following.  
First you must use great diligence in making him to tread loftly, to keep one path, and to troth clean, which is one of the chiefest points of all, because it is harder by nature, for a Colt to trot well, then to go softly, to run, or to gallop.  
Secondly, you must teach him to be light at stop.  
thirdly, to advance before, and to yark behind.  
Fourthly, to turn readily on both hands, with single turn and double turn.  
Fiftly, to make a sure and ready manage.  
sixthly, to pass a swift Career.  
And finally if your horse be nimble, and apt thereto by nature, you may make him a sterer, by teaching him to bound aloft, & to yark withal: to gallop the gallop galliard, to featch the capriole, to do the Coruetti, and such like kind of sawltes: and in all his doings from the beginning to the ending, you must see that he reane well, and bear his head stedilye, which is the foundation of all the rest.  
And by observing this order, with all the rules thereto belonging, in such sort as shallbe hereafter taught: ye shall within the space of four or six months, make your horse perfect in all points. notwithstanding there be some young horses, so slow of growth, as although they can do their things orderly, yet they show no strength or force in their doings, until they be five or two years old, because their joints before that time are not full knit, nor their mouths thoroughly stayed. And note that from six years to fifteen a horse being not maimed nor hurt, may very well continue in his goodness: yea and some horses perhaps will continue until twenty years and above as the examples before recited, do well testify.  
Moreover see that you teach your horse early in the morning, before you give him his provender, not failing in the beginning of his breaking, until he be somewhat perfect, to ride him every day once. And afterward to ride him twice in a week shall suffice, unless you see that such rest doth cause him to forget his lessons, for then until he hath gotten that which he had lost, it shall be requisite to ride him again every day one hour at the least, or so long time as he is able well to endure, leaving him always with a good mouth. For to take overmuch of a horse at once, is the next way to make him faint hearted, and restive.   

¶ The order of treading the ring, and to what end it serveth. Cap. two.  
TO th'intent than that your horse may have a lofty pace, trot clean, and learn to keep one path, you shall first cause him to be brought into the field, nigh unto some new ploughed ground, and the deeper the furrows be, the better to make him lift his feet. Whereas after that you have taken his back, you shall troth him right out, about the length of a C. paces. That done, you shall enter a good way into one of the furrows, in such part of the land, as you may have space enough, and mould enough, round about you, and there on the right hand overthwart the furrows, make him to tread out twice together, a round ring, containing in Circute about xxv. or xxx paces: and being come about at the second time to the place where he began: cause him to tread out the like ring on the left hand. About the which, after that he hath also gone ii times, let him begin again on the right hand, and so to shift from ring to ring, treading every one still twice about, until he hath gone about the left ring four times, and about the right ring two times, for as he must begin with the right ring, so must he end with the same. Whereby he shall always make two turns more on the right hand then on the left.  
That done, troth him right out in the self same sorrow where he began first, or in some other forrowe on the out side of the right ring, the length of xxx paces, and there, by pulling in your bridle hand stop him, and stay a good while together, making him to stand still, and to keep his head and body right in the path. And when you have so done, then turn him fair and softly on the right hand, taking room enough at the first, for fear of making him soft necked▪ and being come again into the path: trot him back again to the place from whence he came, and there you shall light of on his back. And to encourage him the more against the next time, you may if you will, take of his pad. Neither shall you use him any otherwise than thus, for the space of eight days together. But after that the eight days be expired: Let him go, increasing every day his ring turns, by ii & by ii until he come to xxii. that is to say ten for the left ring, & xii for the right. Which numbered as Grison saith, maketh .v. large turns and a half, appointing four goings about, to every such turn, and he calleth them large turns, in respect of the narrow turns, whereof we shall speak hereafter in their place. Neither would he have this number of ring turns for a certain space, to be either augmented or diminished. But though you see here, that the horse by this means learneth iii lessons at once, that is to say, first to tread the ring, secondly to stop, and thirdly to turn: yet to avoid confusion, I will not treat of them all at once, but of every one particularly by himself. And first to th'intent you should the better understand, of what sort the rings ought to be: behold here this figure following, lively expressing both rings together, with the forow, and place of stopping and turning.  
THere is also another fashion of a Ring, which because it serveth only as a correction when your horse is harder to turn on the right hand then on the left, I will not therefore speak of it here, but reserve it until I come to treat of the correction of that fault.  
If your horse be weak and feeble, you may cause the rings to be trodden out before with some other horse, to th'intent that he may have the better will to follow in a way ready beaten to his hand, and also if he chance to serve out of the path, he shall the sooner perceive his error, & thereby the quicklier return in to the right path again. And though your horse be not weak: yet it shall be best at the first, not to tread out the rings with a trot, but rather with a soft pace, until the path be somewhat beaten, that he may see his way where he goth, and then to follow on with an indifferent trot, yea and if your horse be overlivelye, or to quick, you shall not suffer him to trot the rings at all. But only to place them fair and softly for a certain days together, until he be somewhat stayed and acquainted with them. For otherwise he will bear to hard upon your hand, and seek to flee out.  
And when the ring paths, through continual treading wax somewhat hard: you may shift into a new place, where the ground is newly eared with deep furrows, and that as I said before, shall make him to lift high. Albeit Gryson in his fourth book, doth not allow often changing in the beginning, unless that necessity so forceth, saying that the horse being continually taught in one place, shall the better remember his lessons: yea and also his corrections, whereby there shall be bred in him as it were an habit of well doing. notwithstanding when you come to manage your horse, or to pass a Carrier, I would not wish you to use always one place, or one length, lest he be to seek when you change places, thinking that he should not do it any other where, or if he do it, not to pass his accustomed length, and so perchance stop before you would have him.  
But there be some which will not use their horses to two rings, but to one only, which is very evil for a young horse, because it will make him faint hearted and fearful, for when he cometh to the place where he is wont to be turned, he will strive to go forth right, and so perhaps become restive, or at the least, not go in the ring so evenly and so justly as he should do. Notwithstanding to a horse of some years, & of a lively sprite, it may sometime be very well allowed, and specially if he be stiff necked, and hard to turn: yea, and also to show, that though the form of the rings be thereby somewhat altered: yet he should always keep in one tewne. After that your horse have worn the bridle a while, and is well acquainted therewith, you may increase your ring turns every day, by two for each ring, until ye come to xlvi which make a xi. large turns and a half, that is xxii. for the left ring, and xxiiii for the right, according as your horse shallbe in breath and able to endure it, otherwise a less number may suffice, for overmuch labour doth weaken a young horse, which weakness doth not appear in some, until they be four or .v. years old, for at the first the fear that he hath of his rider, maketh him to unite his force together, and to bear it out the more stoutly. But after that he is well acquainted with his rider, he will not show so much force in his labour and travel as he did before, but his natural weakness will then appear, and so much the more, as he shall grow in greatness, and be laden with flesh. Notwithstanding the number of turns above said, is convenient for any horse of an indifferent strength, for lxii. turns may suffice any horse, be he never so strong or good of breath unless he be to unreasonablely strong, in age, evil broken before, and used to liberty: for than, to break him of his stubbornness it shall not only be requysit to give him lxii turns, but also Cxxii. But that seldom for fear of weakening his back, yea and perchance every member beside. But most commonly after the wearing of his bridle, observe the number of xlvi, which you shall not increase, but upon such occasion as is afore said, nor yet diminish the same, unless it be when you troth him and turn him to and fro in manage wise, after that you be come out of the rings, whereof we shall treat hereafter in his place.   

¶ The helps and corrections meet to be used whilst he treadeth the rings, also when you shall gallop the rings, and to how many purposes it serveth.  
IF your horse in treading the ring, trotteth not fast enough, or be ramege, that is to say, not keeping a just pace, but fareth as one that were in two minds, not caring whether he went on, or not: or if he will suddenly stop before his lesson be ended, then quicken him often with your voice, or with the sound of your lips, before mentioned, and by little and little, make him to know the help of your leg and heel, by striking him sometime with one leg or heel, and sometime with both, according as his fault shall require. The order whereof is before declared in the first book the xi ch. & to make him go the juster it shall be good for the most part to hold your contrary leg in his sight, and likewise your rod, when you come to bear one, as for example, if he be stiffer on the right side then on the left, then hold out your left leg, & lay your rod cross over his left shoulder. But if he be harder on the left side, then hold out your right leg, and hold your rod right out, not far from the horses right eye, remembering alwares to hold the rains of your bridle, th'one shorter than the other, in such sort as I taught you in the first book the ten chapter. But if he be ramege either by nature or by evil breaking, then make him to tread the rings first with a swift trot, and than with so hard a gallop, as he can drive, helping him in due time with your voice, rod, or spur, as occasion shall require, and that shall make him to forget toys, and to attend his way, but see that you gallop him not first, for fear of making him restive. And this way serveth to correct a great meinie of other faults, as the lightness and playing with his head, and when he draweth up his tongue, and will not stay his mouth upon the bit as he ought to do. Or if he go jumping without order, or slinging with his heel's, likewise if he be to hasty or furious, this will stay him, and cause that he shall afterward stop the better in his Career, and not run away. Also if he use to piss always when he is handled, this taken in time will correct him. And finally if he be slow and dull, this will quicken him. But if he be very lively and quick of himself: than you shall do clean contrary to this, that is to say, you shall neither give him swift trot nor gallop. And whensoever you gallop your horse, remember always to help him more or less with your voice, rod, or spur, according as the quality of the horse shall require, and when he doth well, to cherish him. But though the galloping of the ring, serveth to so many good purposes as you have hard, yet for the most part, let him tread the rings with a good round trot, and not to gallop them at all, unless some of the foresaid occasions do so require.   

¶ Of stopping. Cap. iiii.  
HItherto we have spoken of treading the rings only, now we will show you how you shall teach your horse to stop. I told you before, that having ended your number of your ring turns, you should troth your horse right out in the middle forrowe betwixt the rings, until you come to the place of stop, and there to stay a good pretty while together, keeping his body right in the path, which if he will not do, but stand overthwartly, either with his foreparts, or hinder parts, or else perchance with his whole body, clean out of the path: Then see that ye touch him at the first, neither with heel nor rod, lest he not knowing the one nor other, be distempered, and perchance fall a running away. But you shall appoint a footman to stand at the place of stop, who shall direct him into the right path, by thrusting him with his hands on that side, which standeth out of order. And this way is not only good for a young horse, but also for any other horse, that is in age, and by means of evil breaking, hath been accustomed to stop wrong, but than the footman besides thrusting him with his hands, may also chastise such a horse with a rod, by striking him therewith on that side that he erreth, or if you will not so do, you may cause your horse to go still in the same path a yard or ii further forward, and there stop him, holding the reane of his headstrain straighter on that side, whereon he most forceth your hand, then on the other, and that shall keep him whether he will or not, in the right path.  
And after that he beginneth to be somewhat obedient unto you, you may direct him into the right path when he stoppeth wrong, with the overplus of the reanes of his headstraine, by beating him therewith moderately, upon that shoulder or romp that standeth farthest out of order. But beware in any wise that you strike him with no rod, before he come to wear a bridle.  
It is very good also to troth him to some hanging ground, called of the italians Pendino, and there to stop him somewhat down the hill, but therein you must use good discretion in choosing such a ground as shallbe meet for the purpose. For a young horse many times will be afraid to stop down the hill, and specially if it be over steep, yea, and it may do him more harm then good, being an occasion perchance that he shall never after be light of stop. Wherefore at the first it shallbe best to stop him in such a ground as shallbe neither to step nor yet to plain, but betwixt both, as that is, which something falleth, and riseth immediately again. So shall not the horse be afraid of it. And afterward when he is grown in age, and hath more force & strength, you may be the bolder to stop him upon a sleeper ground, according as you shall think it needful. And let this suffice you for this time, because we shall be forced to speak more of stopping in the chapters next following.   

¶ Of going back, and to what end it serveth, and how and when you shall teach your horse to do it. Cap. v.  
AFter that your horse hath worn the bridle, and knoweth the rod and spur, you shall teach him when he hath stopped, be it upon a hanging ground, or otherwise, to go backward three or four steps, which will not only stay his mouth, and make him light of head, but also to lift his legs, and to be the more apt to advance before. For the which cause it were necessary to talk of this before I proceed any further.  
To teach your horse then to go back: you must so soon as he hath stopped, pull in your bridle hand moderately, according as the horses resistance shall require, and so keeping your hand steady without giving him any liberty, strike him fair and softly upon the bowing of his neck with your rod, saying unto him with a soft voice in that instant, back, back I say, and solicit him in that sort a pretty while together: for the which if he will not move his legs, or doth make any resistance, then spur him in time, first with one spur, and then with another, but most on that side whereas you see his hinder parts to stand most out of order, to the intent that he may go right in the path. And besides this, you may have a footman to stand at the place of stop, with a rod in his hand, who in the self same time, that you pull in the bridle, shall knock him fair and softly with his rod upon the knees, and seldom or never upon the snout. And sometime let him only threaten him without beating him at all, but if this will not suffice, then let the same man take the cheeks of the bit in his hand, and so force him to go back, not leaving to molest him, sometime one way, and sometime another, until at the least he hath made him to pull back one foot. And when soever he doth well, be ready immediately to cherish him for the same, and then let him stay a while. That done, cause him to do the like again, by pulling in the bridle only and none otherwise. For the making much of him before, will cause him to go back of his own accord with both legs, if not, than by correcting him in such sort as is aforesaid, you shall force him to go back whether he will or not.   

Of advancing, whereto it serveth, and where, how, and when, you shall teach him to do it. Cap. vi.  
TO advance, is a term used of our horsemen, signifying that which the horse doth, when at the stop he lifteth up both his forefeet, even together somewhat above ground, and letteth them fall again twice or thrice together, which the italians call Far le posate and it is so necessary a thing, as without it the horse can never manage well nor turn readily, as hereafter you shall well perceive, wherefore when your horse can stop well, and will also go backward when you would have him, it is meet to teach him to advance.  
And as it is not amiss to teach it him, when you stop him in the sorrow betwixt the two rings, so is it very good also to go into some long sandy way, which is even and plain, and there after that you have trotted him right out with a very swift trot, the length of xl foot, or thereabout, to stop him, helping him immediately with your voice, and also with both spurs even together, and sometime with your rod, by striking him therewith on the right shoulder, but seldom on the left. And if he will not advance for that, no not so much as with his right leg: Then keeping still a steady hand upon him, correct him immediately twice or thrice together with the even stroke of your spurs, or else with one spur after another, helping him always with your voice, as by saying unto him huppe, hup, or such like word. And immediately after, troth him out again the like distance with a swift trot, and at the stop do as you did before, continuing still the same, until you have made him to lift his feet from the ground, and to advance thrice, or twice together at the least, which when he doth, though it be but meanly, yet make much of him, and coy him with your right hand, or with your stick, by claweinge him therewith on the neck, nigh unto the withers, suffering him there to stay a while: That done, troth him forth again, and at the next stop, you shall see that so soon as he heareth your voice, he will advance of his own accord, not only with one leg, but with both, yea, and so many times together, as you will have him. And in so doing, you shall seldom help him with your spurs, orrod, but only with the calves of your legs, and with your voice, which must always be one. And if the ground where he stoppeth be somewhat hanging, it shallbe so much the more easy for him, but after that he can advance, and doth understand the helps of the voice, rod, and spur, beware that ye use not to give him such short stops one after another, lest he take a custom to stop sooner, and therewith to advance higher than you would have him: but rather troth him right out the just length of a Career, towards the knoll of some hill, and there stop him upon the brow thereof, or steper down, according as the quality of the horse shall require, helping him as is aforesaid. For assure yourself, that a hanging ground is very necessary, and specially when the horse is not apt of himself to bow his houghes behind, for the horse that is naturally light, hath not so much need of a hanging ground, because that he with a little help in a plain ground will learn to stop even upon his buttocks, which is the chiefest grace of the stop, for unless the horse in his stop doth bow his houghes orderly, & run sliding on his hinder legs, neither stop, nor advancing shallbe praise worthy.  
When your horse can stop and advance well in his trot: than you may teach him in the like grounds to do the same upon a gallop, using the self same order, helps and corrections, that are above written. And forget not in any wise to make much of him when he doth well, but for the most part let him continue the doing thereof upon a trot, for that shall make him so light and so perfect, as when you come afterward to gallop him, or to run him, he shall not be to seek therein.   

¶ Corrections to be used when your horse advanceth to high, or out of order, or when you would not have him. Cap. seven.  
IF your horse advanceth to high, or lifteth not up his feet even together, and with such grace as he ought to do, correct him immediately with the even stroke of your spurs, & sometime with your rod also, striking him therewith upon the flanks, that done, put him forward again the length of a short maneginge course, and there stop, helping him to advance with your voice, and if need be, with the caulfes of your legs, or with your spurs, or else with your rod upon his right shoulder, and sometime with altogether, according as you shall see it needful. Or after that you have corrected him you may if you will, without putting him forward, turn him and go back again in the self same path a good pretty way, and then to return from thence with a good round trot, and to stop him upon the same knoll, where he stopped before, and so to continue returning still to and fro, until he hath amended his fault, and advanceth as you would have him, which when he doth, make much of him, and let him slay a good while after, for the longer that you stay him the more perfect you shall make him.  
If your horse hath gotten an evil custom to stop, and to advance withal, suddenly, or oftener than you would have him, which fault most commonly is incident to young horses. Then correct him immediately with your voice, and also with your rod upon his flanks, and sometime upon his forelegges, yea, and if need be, with your spurs every manner of way, forcing him to go forward, and not to advance, but when you shall provoke him thereunto, either with voice, spurs, legs, or rod, or with all together, according as the horses quality shall require, for some horse is so vile of courage and so dull of understanding, as if you always use to help him with your spurs at the stop: Then so often as you shall spur him, to make him to go forward, he will by and by stop and advance, and the more you spur him, the worse he will be, and so perchance become restive, wherefore you must use great diligence, and good discretion, in making him to know by the hard or lose bearing your bridle hand, when you help him with your spurs to go forward, and when to stop. And until he be perfect therein, it shall be best to help him at the stop, only with your voice, and not to use your spurs or rod, but when you do correct him else or when you would have him to go forward.   

¶ When and how to teach your horse to yark, and to make him light behind. Cap. viii.  
IF your horse be of a convenient age, and grown to his full strength, and therewith have a good back, and able to endure, (for otherwise it should do him more harm then good): Then having taught him to stop, and to advance before, you may teach him also to yark behind, by helping him in his advancing, with your voice, and with your rod, beating him therewith behind, sometime on the one side, and sometime on the other, and if need be, you may also help him with the even stroke of your spurs, not leaving to molest him in such sort, until you see that he beginneth to gather up his rump, and to lift his hinder legs, which doing, you shall leave beating, and make much of him, and afterward you shall see that with a very little help, he will fall unto it of his own accord, you may also if you will, appoint a footman that hath some skill, to stand behind you, with a long rod in his hand, who at the stop whilst your horse advanceth, may help him with his voice, and by beating him on the haunches, and on the romp, cause him to yark, which way is very good, so that your horse be not over lively, and therewith also naturally headstrong, for than perchance it will make him to spring forward, and to fall a running, wherefore until he hath a staid mouth, it were better to use the first way, or else to bring him unto it in the stable in this sort.  
When you come into the stable, stand behind him with a long rod in your hand, and beat him therewith on the mid rompe, helping him in that instant with that voice wherewith ye use to make him light behind not ceasing to molest him in that sort until he gather up his rump, and cast out both his heels even together, and that of a just height twice or thrice together, which doing, you shall leave beating, and make much of him, suffering him to rest a good while after. Thus soliciting him twice or thrice a day, you shall make him so light and so ready of his heels, that he will yark so soon as he shall but hear your voice, or the whisk of your rod, and when he can do it well in the stable, then to make him the more perfect therein abroad, you may when you ride him, cause a footman to stand behind you with a long stick in his hand, who by threatening him, and beating him on the Rompe, may cause him to yark so often as you shall think it meet, and if your horse be very light and nimble of himself, you may teach him also to leap at the stop, and to yark withal, but sith that leaping is more meet for a stirring horse, than for a horse of service, and also for that there be divers kinds of leaps, I will not therefore treat of that here, but diffarit, until I have showed you the order of turning and managing.   

¶ How to teach your horse to turn readily on both hands. Cap. ix.  
I Intend to speak here of the narrow and straight turns, and not of the large tourns, otherwise called the ring turns, for we have talked of them sufficiently before. And first you shall understand, that of the narrow turns, there be three kinds, that is to say, half turn, whole turn, and double turn. The half turn is when the horse turneth on the one side, & that setteth his head that way that his tail before stood, and is called the half turn, for the horse maketh but half a circle, but if he doubleth the same, and setteth his head that way it stood at the first: then it is called a whole turn, for in turning round about he maketh a circle complete. And ii such whole turns make a double turn, which Gryson calleth Voita rad doppiara who appointeth to every such turn four half turns, which may be otherwise called single turns. And note that in turning, diverse things are to be observed. First that he bring in the contrary leg upon the other, and that he carry his legs neither to high, nor to low, also that he keep his ground, neither pressing forward, nor yet reling backward in his turning, also that he keep his body in one stay, writhing neither head, neck, nor any part of his body, but to come in whole and round together, and to close his courne in so narrow a room as may be. But first you shall teach him to make the single or half turns in this sort and order here following.  
When you are come out of the rings, troth your horse right out in the middle forrowe unto the place of stop, and there, after that you have stopped, turn him fair and softly on the right hand, taking room enough at the first, as I showed you before, for fear of making him soft necked, that done, give him the like turn on the left hand, and then turn him again on the right hand, remembering always to begin with the right hand, and to end with the same, and see that in every turn he bring in the contrary forefoote, upon the other forefoote, as for example, when you turn him on the right hand, cause him to lift up his left forefoote, and to bring it in over the right forefote, which you shall do by helping him with your voice, or with the sound of your tongue, before taught in the first book the viii Chapter in saying to him, turn here, and by striking him with your rod moderately upon the left shoulder. And when you turn him on the left hand, help him with your voice or tongue, as before, and with your rod on the right shoulder to bring in the right forefoote over the left forefoote. Which act Grison calleth Incavallare, which is so much to say, as to lap one thing over another.  
And note that though your horse at the first doth not bring in his contrary foot over the other orderly, but perchance under the other, yea, and that with knocking his legs together: it maketh no matter, for the grief thereof shallbe a good correction unto him, and in time shall make him to amend his own fault. But if he be harder to turn on the one hand then on the other, than you shall help him with the contrary leg or Spur, or with your rod, by beating him upon the contrary shoulder, and sometime to make him to close his turn truly, it shallbe needful to help him with the closing stroke of your heels or spurs. Which kind of help is necessary for two causes: First, for that it will make him to turn roundly as well with his hinder parts, as with his foreparts: Secondly, because some horse is so quick and so lively, as when he is touched, but only on the contrary side, he will turn perhaps with to stiff a neck, looking the contrary way, or contrariwise, he will wry his head or neck to much on that side that he hath to turn, or else turn beyond the place, and out of the right path, in which he should close his turn. Albeit such help is not commonly to be used, but at certain times, when some great necessity requireth it, for the first helps are more kindlye, and therefore aught to be more ordinary. But if he be so hard of any side, as the foresaid helps can not make him to turn when you would have him: than you may use these corrections here following.   

¶ How to correct your horse when he is harder to turn of the one side then on the other, which fault is called of the italians Credenza. cap. ten  
BUt first I think it meet to show you the causes of that fault, and then how to correct it, & you shall understand, that there be divers causes, whereof one, may be the natural inclination whereby every horse is more apt to turn on the left side then on the right. secondly, the hardness of the bit pynchinge his mouth on the one side: may so grieve him, as he dare not turn on that side. thirdly, lack of knowledge how to handle his legs, and to reane with his neck, may cause him to turn so frowardly and so unwillingly, as he feeling himself never so little weary, will turn no more at that time, for any thing that ye can do. But to say the truth, weariness and lack of breath, may cause any horse be he never so well broken, to do the same. fourthly the ignorance of the Rider in helping him otherwise then he should do, may make the horse so amazed, as he knoweth not what to do, understanding not the Rider's intent. Fifthlye, the horse may be evil broken, and thereby made harder of one side, then of another, for than if he be angered never so little, he will not turn perhaps on that side that you would have him, and the worse, if he shall perceive that you be afraid of him, and that you will suffer him to have his own will, and to turn which way he list, for that shallbe an occasion to make him more stubborn, & to continue still in his fault. But now, though Grison here according to every one of these causes, could appoint proper corrections (which in deed were the best order of teaching) yet to avoid confusion as he saith, he will not so do, but rather teach you such general kinds of corrections as may amend that fault, of what cause so ever it proceedeth. And because that every horse, as I said before, is more apt by nature to turn on the left hand, then on the right, he showeth you first how to correct the hardness of the right hand in this sort here following.  
Make your horse in some new ploughed ground to tread out ii rings, like unto these here after figured, which differ not so much from the ii rings before described, in shape, as in the order of treading of them. For whereas you were wont before to go twice about in the right ring, following still the right hand, and then to go twice about the left ring, following than the left hand: Now you shall go about each ring three times, following still the right hand, in both of them. And where as before four goings about made a large turn, now six goings about shall do no more than make a large turn, and the reason is this, for if you should go out of the right ring at the second turn for to enter into the left ring, and would follow still the right hand (as you must do) than you should lack a good deal of closing the second turn, as you may easily perceive by a little cosidering of the figure in the right ring, whereof I have marked the place where you should go out, for to enter into the left ring, with this letter A, and the place of closing your turn with B, betwixt which two letters is contained that portion of the Circle, which should be wanting, wherefore you must needs go thrice about, to th'intent the second turn may be fully ended, & as for the overplus, it shall make no matter. To these rings is also added a middle forrowe with two places of stopping and turning, meet to manage your horse therein, to and fro, whereof we shall treat hereafter in his due place more at large.  
THus you may continue shifting from ring to ring, and following still the right hand, until you see that he beginneth somewhat to yield, which I believe he will do, by that time that you have trotted him about xlv times, which make vii large turns & a half, that is to say xxi times about the left ring, & xxiiii times about the right ring, or if that sufficeth not you may troth him xxvii times about the left ring, and xxx times about the right ring, which maketh ix large turns and a half, and that is a convenient number for any horse having that fault, though he be right good of breath. And when he hath ended his ring turns, you may troth him right out in the middle forrowe, the length of a good Career, and there after that you have made him to stop, and to advance, you shall make much of him, and suffer him to stay a good while, holding as well than, as at all other times (until he hath amended his fault) the right reane of his bridle shorter than the other, and after that he hath so paused and is quiet, you shall cause a footman that hath some skill to stand right against him with a stick in his hand, and whilst you move your fist to turn your horse on the right hand, the footman in the same instant shall strike him with his stick on the left side of his nose, and not leave beating him until he turn, not forgetting always whilst he beat him, to use that sound of the tongue, which I taught you before. And to th'intent that the horse at such time rear not right up, he may beat him sometime upon the legs, by which so molesting him, doubt ye not, but that you shall make him to turn as he ought to do, and having turned, you shall first make much of him, and then trot him back again in the same path or forrowe, even hard to the edge of the rings, from whence ye came. Whereas you shall appoint another footman to stand with a rod in his hand, to th'intent that when you have stopped your horse again there, and are ready to turn him (which must be still on the right hand) the footman may rate him by saying turn villain, or such like words, yea, and if need be, also beat him in such sort as the other man did before. But if your horse be very hard to turn, then to make him do it the more easily, you may at every end of the path after that he hath stopped and advanced, make him to go back about ii paces, and in his going back, turn him, but after that he beginneth to fall somewhat unto it, beware that ye use not then to make him go back, lest he get an evil custom to make his turns altogether abandonate, and to much upon his hinder loins.  
Thus by trotting him up and down and turning him to an fro vi or vii times together, when you come out of the rings, you shall in the space of three days thoroughly correct that fault, which fault, if it were not overmuch, I would not wish you in his going to and fro, to turn him every time on the right hand, but first on the right hand, and then on the left interchangeably, but so as the first & last turn may be always on the right hand, using always such helps and corrections as are abovesaid. But if your horse be harder to turn on the left hand then on the right, then begin first with the left ring, observing order mere contrary in all things to the first, which I am sure that you can do of yourself without any more words.   

¶ sire other Corrections for the fault abovesaid, whereof the first here followeth.  
YOu may also correct that fault without riding him in any ring, or otherwise in this sort.  
First cause him to be brought into some long narrow way, enclosed on both sides with hedge, dike, or wall, and there after that you have reaned up his head, by staying the reanes of the bridle with the button upon his neck, if he be hard to turn on the right hand, fasten the one end of a good long cord or thong to the middle of the bit on the right side, & tey the other end unto his surcingle on the same side, straining it good and hard, for to make him bow his neck: that done, let him so remain alone in the midst betwixt you and him that brought him, or some other whom you shall think meet, having each of you a rod in your hand, with the which rods you shall chase him betwixt you from one to another, by striking him always when he cometh towards either of you, upon the left side of the nose, and no where else, & that shall make him turn on the right hand, not forgetting always when you beat him, to help him with the sound of the tongue before declared, and you shall see that in a veri little while, the only sound of the tongue & the sight of the rods, will make him to turn of his own accord without any beating at all. Yea the sound of the tongue itself is so good a warning unto him, as if he be once accustomed thereunto he will not tarry the beating, and though sometime, he hap to fall down in his turning, it maketh no matter, for he will rise again alone, yea, and that shallbe a very good correction unto him. And when you see that he beginneth to wax somewhat weary, lousen the thong from the surcingle, but not from the bit, and immediately get up on his back, taking the louse end of the thong in your right hand, which shall serve in stead of a false reane, and troth him forth the length of x or xii paces, and there stop him, where as one must stand with a rod in his hand, ready first to threaten him, and then if need be, to beat him therewith upon the left side of the nose, for to make him turn. And in the same instant, you shall not only help him with your tongue, but also by straining a little the thong which is in your right hand. And having turned, troth him back again to the place from whence he came, whereas may stand also another footman to help him at the stop, as the former did, to turn again on the same side: or for lack of another man, you may turn him the second time on the left hand, and so troth him forth towards the first man.  
Thus trotting and turning him to and fro, you shall correct him quickly of that fault, neither shall you need to use the help of straining the cord or thong in his turn above twice or thrice at the most. For the sound of the tongue, the fear of the footman's rod, & the holding of the right rean of his bridle, shorter than the other, shall suffice. And note that as the thong being put on the right side of the bit doth correct the horse's hardness on the same side: so likewise if it be put on the left side it will correct the horse that is hard to turn on the left side, for sides and places of correction only changed, the order is all one in both.   

The second correction for the same fault.  
YOu may also correct that fault by teying a Cord unto the headestraine on that side that the horse is hard to turn, so as it may run through the ring thereof, to th'intent that when you pull the cord, it may strain the horses head, and being let go, it may slack again: the louse end of which cord, let some footman hold in his hand, and whilst you being on his back do help him with your tongue to turn, let the footman pull the Cord, whereunto if the horse be used a while, he will afterward turn of himself, so soon as he shall hear the sound of the tongue without the help of the cord.   

The third Correction for the same.  
TAke a cord about a yard long, & tey the one end thereof unto the uppermost eye of the bridle on that side that the horse is not hard to turn, and let it come betwixt his neither lip, and neither gums, and so pass through the uppermost eye of the bit on the other side, being strained so hard as the horse can well endure it, and there stay it by making a knot only upon the cord, hard by the cheek of the bit, without casting the cord about the iron, so as it can not slip: the louse end of which cord, when you ride your horse, you shall hold in your hand in stead of a false reane, and so often as you pull that cord, and help him with your tongue, you shall force him to turn whether he will or not. And lest a Cord perhaps will gall your hand, you may if you will, make it all of leather, saving that which must be in the horse's mouth, for otherwise it would not grieve him.   

The fourth correction.  
THe fourth correction is by putting the kirble hook on that side that the horse is most hard to turn: on the back side of which hook next to the horses lip, would be made ii little sharp pricks, fashioned like cocks spurs. Which kind of hook, Grison calleth in his language, Guancietto, or if you will, you may set those pricks on the back side of the link, whereon the said hook hangeth, which link is made like an. s. in this sort . S. so shall they prick him higher towards the mouth. And though some horse is corrected by having those pricks placed on the contrary side, yet it is more kindly to have them placed where I have showed you before. Or in stead of both these ways, you may cause iii little nails to be set on the back side of his portsmouth, and it shallbe as good. But beware in any wise that ye seek not to correct this fault by putting any Iron engine within the horse's mouth, as some men do, which will cause a bit to be made of purpose, having the one side rougher than the other, which is the high way to distemper the horse's mouth, and to make him so as he shall never stay well upon any bit. notwithstanding a scache welted on the inside is very necessary sometime for such purpose, as I will show you hereafter when I come to speak of the diversity of bits, and whereto they serve.   

The fift correction.  
IF he will not turn on that side that you would have him, then let him turn on tother side, as he will himself: and after that he hath begun, let him not leave. But beat him upon the head betwixt the ears, and all to rate him with your voice, forcing him to turn continually on that hand, so fast as he may drive, even till he be almost out of breath, and ready to give over for very weariness, and you shall see that with a little help, he will be easily entreated to turn on tother side: which done, you shall make much of him, and being once well corrected after this sort, it is possible that he will never have that fault again.   

¶ The sixth Correction.  
GO into some soft ground newly ploughed with deep furrows, and there first pace him fair and softly to and fro, the length of a maneging course, then follow on with a good round trot, and when he will not turn on that hand that you would have him, all to rate him with a terrible voice, and beat him with a Cudgel upon the head, betwixt the ears, and upon both sides of the head, and most upon that side whereof he is most easy to turn, provoking him to turn tother way, which if for all this, he will not do, then without any respect, sometime run him, sometime troth him, and sometime gallop him, as fast as he may fling, now right out, now overthwart, and now round about, as you yourself shall think it most needful, not leaving to beat him, nor suffering him to rest in any place, until you have gotten the mastery. And though he chance to arm himself to run away with you, whether ye will or not, never care for it, but rather correct him so much the more with your voice in rating him and crying out unto him, and afterward stop him, provoking him in that your anger once again to turn, which if he will not do, then renew again the self same correction, not leaving him until you have made him to turn as he should do. And to th'intent that in his turning, he rear not right up, you shall beat him with your rod, from time to time betwixt the forelegges, but if he turn freely about with out stop or stay, then make much of him, suffering him to pause a while, that done, you may place him to and fro fair and softly, and so often as he will not turn orderly, use such hasty correction as before. And in so doing, I doubt not, but you shall break him of that fault the first day that you shall so ride him, yea, perchance in less than one hour. For there is no way to be compared unto this, but when you begin to take this way, you must determine with yourself, not to departed the field, though you tarry there from morning until night, until you have clean broken him from that fault. For otherwise you shall confirm him in his stubborness, and make his fault incurable. Thus we have spoken hitherto of single turns: it resteth now therefore that we talk somewhat of whole turns and double turns, for we shall have occasion to talk more of syngle turns when we come to treat of the order of maneginge.   

Of the whole turns and double turns, how and when to teach your horse to make them. Cap. xvii.  
AFter that you be come out of the rings, and that your horse hath stopped, advanced, and paused a while, in such place and order as is aforesaid: Then whilst he is quiet, and standeth even with his body, give him ii whole turns on the right hand, one immediately after another, helping him with your tongue, or with your rod upon the contrary shoulder, or else with the calf of your left leg, and seldom with your spur. That done, give him other ii whole turns on the left hand, using like helps, and then ii turns again on the right hand, and then stay a while, making much of him. And see that in his turning, he bring over the contrary leg orderly, and that in closing his turn, he set his head even where it stood at the first. And note here that you may begin the double turns ii manner of ways, for you may choose whether you will have him to turn at the second or third bound of his advancing, or else at the first bound, which in deed requireth not so much observance of time and measure as the other doth.  
But if your horse be not very apt unto the double turns, it shall not be amiss to ride him into some long lane or way, and at the hither end thereof, immediately upon his stop, to give him one or ii whole turns fair and softly on the right hand, that done, to put him gently forward about ii paces, and there to give him the like turns on the left hand, and then to go ii paces further, and there to turn him again in like manner on the right hand, and so to follow on in turning him still at every ii paces end, helping him always with your tongue, with your rod, with the contrary leg or spur, yea, and if need be, with the closing stroke of both spurs. And when you are come to the farther end of the lane or way, give him iii whole turns, whereof the first and last must be on the right hand, and so leave of for that time. But note this by the way, that when soever he faileth, in so going, to turn well on any side, that than you must turn him again, at the next ii paces end on the same side, and also correct him with the contrary spur, continuing still so to do, until he hath amended his fault, which if he do, you shall make much of him. And if the way or lane be short where you break him, than being come to the farthest end thereof, you may turn back again in the self same path, using the former order in making him to turn at every two opaces end, so long time together as you shall think meet. After this, you must seek to make him swift in his double turns, for it is not enough to bring over the contrary leg orderly, and to turn truly and decently, but also he must turn swiftly and roundly, for which intent you shall use this order following. Make him to trot or gallop the length of a short Career, and there stop, causing him to advance once, twice, or thrice together: that done (helping him with your voice and left spur, yea, and if need be, with the closing stroke) first turn him loftelye on the right hand, setting his head that way his tail stood, which shall be half a turn, and there stay a while, then close it up with another half turn on the same hand, setting his head and all his body in the same path, even as it was at the first, and then make him to do as much on the left hand, and so to change from hand to hand, ending always on the right. And by often soliciting him in this sort, you shall not only make him to turn swiftly, but also loftelye, or of an indifferent height, even as you list yourself. And when you see him ready enough in this, than you may cause him to close the whole turn roundly together, without making any stop or stay at the first half turn. If your horse know how to handle his forelegs, then give him on each hand ii hole turns allowing two half turns to one hole turn, and at the end of every third half turn, help him with your tongue, rod, or contrary spur, and if need be, with the closing stroke, so shall he close the last half turn, both quickly, roundly, and comely: but as the ii last half turns would be done speedily, so would the ii first half turns be done leisurely. For in those it sufficeth that the horse go orderly with his legs, and keep the right path. And by observing this order a while, you shall see he will be so swift & ready in the first turns, as in the last. notwithstanding for a good time you shall not use to hasten him, but only at the closing of every hole turn. And when he can once make all the turns in such order and so swiftly as they should be done, then ordinarily, give him on each hand iii hole turns, whereof let the first be so fair and softly as may be, so shall he carry his forelegs orderly, & be better able to keep a swift time & measure, in accomplishing tother two. turns. And though that any of these ii ways heretofore prescribed, is marvelous good to make any horse be he never so dull, to be ready and nimble in the double turns, yet must you be able to discern by your own discretion which of them is most meet for every horse, & for what purpose. For if you would have your horse to yark in making the double turns, this way is not so meet for that purpose as the first, for in every half turn, you must help him to yark once. So that in every whole turn he shall yark twice. That is to say, once forward, and once backward, which he can not do, unless he pause somewhat at every half turn, according to the first order before taught. But if your horse be hard and dull of the spur, and unapt to the double turns, then if he can bring over the contrary leg, ride him into some strait way, or else into the plain field, and there make him to turn so fast as he can, and help him continually with your spurs, beating him therewith in such sort, as he may have bloody sides, by the girths, and give him on each hand vii whole turns or there about, observing alway that number wherewith you first began, helping him also with your rod on the contrary shoulder. And though he seemeth as then to care but little for it, yet in riding him again the next day following, when his sides shallbe sore, by means of the foremer pricks, being then cold and tender, and not hot, as they were the day before: you shall see that the spur will quicken him after another sort, and make him to remember wherefore he was last corrected. And so by using afterward the ordinary helps, you shall make him so ready in the double turns, as you will desire. And you may use like order also, when the horse is very lively and sensible of himself: saving than you shall not need to ride him again the next day following. For the first time shall suffice to make him obedient to your will, and make him keep such measure and time in his turning, as he ought to do. It is good also if the horse be slow, sometime to trot him out the length of a short managing course, and when he cometh toward the end thereof, to gallop him, and at the stop cause him to turn the first half turn, and then immediately upon the same, to close the other half turn on the same hand, and then make much of him suffering him to pause a while, yea, and it is possible that without pausing at all, you shall perceive such readiness in the horse, as you may follow on with another whole turn, and so to give him on each hand ii whole turns, remembering alway to hasten him with your tongue, so much as you possibly may, which shall not only make him ready in his turns, but also to know the very meaning of the help, which after that he hath once obtained, you shall need no more to give him these maneging courses, for than he will turn at any time that you will have him.   

¶ Helps and corrections meet to be used for the amending of such faults, as most commonly hap in making the whole or double turns. Cap. xviii.  
IF your horse at the closing of any turn useth to serve of any side, than a little before he stop, or else in his very stopping, strike him with the Calf of your leg, on the same side, and if need be, with your spur, pricking him more or less as you shall see it needful, and that shall force him to make a just stop, and to keep the right path. So as afterward he shall need no such help, being in deed than superfluous. But although he can stop well, and be very ready of turn: yet when soever he doubleth, help him always with your tongue, and sometime with your rod, and leg: and that shall hasten him, and make him to go swiftly about, and to close well.  
If your horse foltereth with his legs in his turning, for fault of not bringing over the contrary leg, or lifteth not his feet orderly, or turneth not fast enough about, than every time that he hath ended his turn: stay there, and so soon as he is stayed, if his turns were not well made of any side: first strike him once or twice with the spur on the contrary side, then give him asmuch with the spur on the other side, and last of all, on the same side, that you struck him first, and keeping him still in the same path, turn him again as you did before, & at the last you shall see by that this correction, he will amend his fault, and so doing, you shall make much of him.  
But if your horse in his doubling, maketh his turns to much forward, and you can by no ordinary means bring him from it, then ride him with his head toward some wall or tree, and when you are within a very little of the said wall or tree, stop him, and turn him, forcing him always to close his last turn towards the wall or tree, so shall he be forced to keep still one place in his turning. Or you may if you will, without any wall or tree correct that fault by bearing a stiffer hand on him than you were wont to do, but so as you distemper not his mouth, and look how much ground that he encroached in closing of his turn forward, when he hath done, make him to go asmuch again backward. Or you may correct him thus: Ride him into some were ground, new ploughed with deep furrows, and there pace, trot, or gallop him the length of a maneging course, until such time as he hath made a plain path, and beaten out evident marks of stop, and there cause him to double,, and you shall see that after the first time, he will not be so hasty in pressing forward, because it will grieve him to leave the beaten path, to plunge into the mire. And look as the making him to go backwardly, will correct him of his stealing forward, so you may correct his reling backward in his turning, by making him in th'end to go asmuch forward. You may also correct both faults thus: If he gird forward, then make him to double in a plain ground, at the foot of some hill, and to close his turn upward toward the hill. And if he reel backward in his doubling, then cause him to close his last turn from the hillward.   

Of the Chambetta. Cap. nineteen.  
BUt besides all this, there is one other point belonging to the turns, as well single as double, but specially to the single turns of a manage, which giveth a better grace unto them then any thing else. And that is when the horse holdeth up his forefoote on that side that he should turn. Whilst he bringeth over the contrary leg, and setteth it not down again until he hath closed his turn: which act Grison calleth, La ciambetta, for by this means he shall carry both his forefeit clean above the ground, and turn a great deal better than when he traileth his feet upon the ground. For which feat, for that in our tongue we have no proper name, I will therefore call it from henceforth the Chambetta, and you shall teach your horse to do it in this sort: Ride him into some narrow way, or cause a dyke to be made of purpose, in manner and form following, first let it be so long as a common maneginge course, not above ix inches deep, and in the bottom one foot and a half broad, from which bottom the two sides, and the two ends of the dike must rise shoring: So as it may be a great deal broader above at the brinks then beneath, having the very fashion of a Trow boat, or punt: Or if you will, you may make it of a greater depth, but than it must have breadth in the top accordingly: And the Rider must be the more circumspect aswell in bearing his bridle hand, as in timely helping of his horse. The dike then being thus made: Ride into it, and there give your horse on each hand ii or iii turns, whereof always let the first be fair and softly to th'intent that he may close the others more speedily, according to the order of doubling, as I taught you before, and you shall see that in closing his turns, the narrowness of the room shall so trouble him, as for fear of knocking his contrary leg against the other, he shallbe glad to lift up the other leg, and so to come aloft with both legs together, above ground. But you must beware that in stead of lifting up his legs, he reeleth not backward, nor in his turning goeth clean out of the dyke, for that were a foul fault, and much against your purpose, and therefore you must bear a temperate hand, and be ready to use such kind of helps, corrections and cheryshinge, as are meet and necessary in that behalf, and have been heretofore taught. And to make him the more ready therein, you may often pace or troth him to and fro in the dike, and turn him at each end on both hands, or but on one hand only, changing hands at every end. Yea and sometime it shallbe good to turn him in the same dyke at every ii paces end, as I taught you before, speaking of the double turns: and hereby the horse will take such a custom, as he will do the like whensoever you shall provoke him thereunto, by helping him either with your tongue, or contrary spur, or with both spurs together. And in stead of this dike, you may if you will, seek out some narrow golled way by rage of water, which willbe as good, so that it be neither to deep nor to shallow, the sides whereof would be somewhat shoring, yea, both such golled way, dike, and every other way, where you pace or troth your horse to & fro, should be the better, if the ground at the stopping place were somewhat hanging down the hill: So should it keep him from going either forward or backward in his turning. Also if your horse have been somewhat broken before, and know what correction is (otherwise it willbe to hard for you to do) you may teach him the Chambetta standing still in the Stable in this sort. Take a stick in your hand, and go and stand on the right side of the horse, hard by the manger to the which he is tied, and knock him with your stick on the right fore-leg, sometime under the knee, sometime in the mids of the shank, sometime on the neither joint, and sometime behind on the bowing of the ham of the same leg, helping him continually with your tongue or voice, in saying unto him, hup, hup, and never leave him until you have made him to hold up that leg, which when he doth, beat him no more, but only threaten him by wagging the rod, to th'intent he should not set down his foot, but hold it up still, so long as you shall think it good. And so often as he setteth it down unbidden: help him and correct him as before, never leaving until he hold it up again, which whilst he doth, you shall do well to make much of him, by clawing him with your rod on the withers, for that shall encourage him to do the like another time. And if you would have him to do the like with the left leg, then stand on his left side, and use the self same order. And when you see that he will do it with both legs only for fear of the stick: Then you may also teach him to do it for fear of the spur, in this sort: stand you on his right side with the rod in your hand, and cause another to stand on his left side with a spur, nail, sharp stick or goad in his hand, and in the same instant that you do beat him with your rod on the leg: let the other prick him in the common spurring place, with his spur, helping him with the sound of his tongue, or with his voice, as before, you holding your peace, and so soon as the horse shall hear that sound or voice, and feel the stroke both of rod and spur, he will lift up his right leg, which when he hath done, you shall change sides, and in the same sort, make him to do as much with his left leg. And thus using him a while, you shall make him to lift up which you will, so soon as he shall hear but the sound of your tongue or voice, and feal the spur on the contrary side, without the help of any man to stand by him with a rod in his hand: yea, and to hold it up still a quarter of an hour together. And perhaps many times he will do the same without the help of the spur, being afraid to set it down, so long as you are there present. But if (as it happeth many times) the horse when you prick him so with the spur, will not lift up the contrary leg, but only the leg of the same side that you spur him: then in the same instant that you spur him, if he be not cursed and shrewd, strike him with your foot on the contrary leg, which warning will make him to remember himself. Or else for a more surety, you may have a stick in your other hand, and knock him therewith on thinside of his contrary leg: and beside that, every time that he so erreth, either in not lifting up the contrary leg: or else in lifting up tother, remember always to double the stroke of the spur, and that shall so correct him, as afterward if you do but make an offer to touch him with the spur, it shall suffice to make him to hold up the contrary leg, so long time together as you will yourself. Neither care you for the frowardness of any horse, but the more froward he is, the more roughly correct him. But though your horse in this sort may learn the Chambetta in one day, yea, and perchance in less than iii hours: yet to keep him in ure withal, & that he may do it afterward, the more readily in his maneginge, it shallbe necessary to spend every day one hour with him in the stable, in making him to hold up first one leg, and then another. Thus when you have taught your horse to do the Chambetta in the stable: You may also teach him to do it abroad, being upon his back, in this sort. When you are mounted, cause him to stand still a good pretty while together, and bear a steady hand upon him: making him to reane truly with his head, and appoint a footman to stand on your right side, with a stick in his hand, and in the same instant that you help your horse with your tongue or voice, let the footman beat him upon the right leg with his stick, not leaving so to molest him until he lifteth up his foot, which doing, you shall make much of him, by clawing him on the withers. That done, let the footman change sides, and make the horse to do as much with his left leg, and when the horse understandeth those helps, than besides the help of your tongue or voice, you may touch him also with your contrary spur, which if it doth make him to hold up the true leg, then spur him no more, but make much of him, and when he knoweth once the help of the spur, you shall need no more the help of the footman with his rod, for than if he erreth at any time, by helping him with your tongue or voice, and by doubling the stroke of the spur, you shall quickly make him to amend his fault. And besides these helps, for a more surety if need be, you may have a rod in your hand, and correct him therewith yourself like as the footman did before, but I believe that after a little exercise (if the horse be not to dull) the help of your tongue, and the moving only of your contrary leg will suffice without any more business. And to keep him in ure withal: remember always whensoever you take his back to make him hold up first one leg, and then another, so shall he afterward be perfect when he cometh to be managed, either with single or double turn, but he shall do it the more readily in the double turn, if he be used to do it first in the single turn. It shallbe very necessary also to troth him or to gallop him, and to turn him to and fro in some such way as is before described, by means whereof if the horse be of any gentle nature, and therewith somewhat stayed of head, he may quickly learn the Chambetta without the help of any of the former inventions, which notwithstanding are necessary for shifts sake, to answer the diverse qualities of horses: for all horses will not learn alike. Thus having taught you the order of treading the ring, of stopping, of advancing before, of yarkinge behind, of turning, with single turn and double turn, yea, and that with the Chambetta also: I think it meet now to show you the order of managing, and how many kinds of manages there be.   

¶ Of managing, and how many kinds of manages there be. Cap. xx.  
THis Italion word Maneggiare is as much to say in English, as to handle with skill, as when we say, he can handle his horse or weapon very well, and amongst the italians it is taken as a general word, comprehending four especial kinds of maneginge: whereof one is, when they make their horse to double his turns, which they call Raddopiare: an other is, when they make him to gallop the field, going in and out, as they do in skirremishe: the third is, when they make him to leap a fit, and to fetch divers saultes: the fourth is, when they pace, trot or gallop him a good while to & fro in one self path, the length of twenty or xxx paces, or there about, turning him at each end thereof, either with single turn, whole turn, or double turn, which Grison calleth Maneggiare a Repolom, But we English men do only call this last kind a manage, and that absolutely without any other addition. For amongst our horsemen this word manage or maneging signifieth none other thing, but only that foresaid kind of galloping and turning to and fro in one self path. And therefore we use commonly to say, this horse can manage well, or make a good manage, whereof there be also three kinds. That is to say, manage with half rest, manage with whole rest, and manage without rest. Which Grison termeth thus, Manegio a mezzo tempo, a tempo, & contra tempo. The manage with half rest is when you cause your horse at the end of every maneging path, after he hath stopped, to advance twice together, and at the second bound to turn. Whereby you rest always one bound. The manage with whole rest is, when you turn him at the third bound, and so you rest two bounds. The manage without rest is, when you turn him immediately upon the stop, without any tarriaunce at all, which only kind of manage our english Riders most commonly do use, & not tother two. Notwithstanding, they be very necessary and meet to be used, according as the horse is strong or weak. For the very strong horse requireth the manage with the hole rest. And the horse of an indifferent strength, the manage with the half rest. And the weak horse the manage without rest. But the manage with the half rest is most necessary of all, & the best mean to make a horse perfyght in tother two But note that in all iii kinds of manages, you must observe well those general precepts that I gave you before, touching the single and double turns. That is, to see that your horse keep always one path, and one place of stop, and in his turning that he keep his ground and carry his head, neck, legs, and whole body orderly, without pressing forward, or reling backward, or swaruinge on either side: and also that he close his turn roundly, and in so narrow room as may be. And finally, to see that aswell in his turns, as courses, he keep always like time and measure, and that th'one be not swifter than the other, and such like. All which things, by using such helps and corrections as I have partly already, and shall hereafter more at full declare: you shall easily make your horse to do. Thus having showed you how many kinds of manages there be, and which they be, and what you must generally observe in teaching them: I will now declare unto you the order of them all, beginning first with thee▪ manage the half rest.   

Of manage with half rest. Cap. xxi.  
WHen your horse can stop well, advance before, and turn readily on both hands, then being come out of the rings, troth him right out, either in the middle sorrow unto the common place of stop, or else in some other soft ground, the length of twenty paces, or there about, and even as he is ready to stop, help him with your voice, making him to advance twice together, and at the second bound, turn him on the right hand, helping him with your tongue, with the rain of his headstrain or false rain, with your rod, with the calves of your legs, or with your spurs, more or less, according as occasion shall require, & see that in his turning he move his foreparts orderly, staying himself upon his hinder loins, bowing his houghes decently, which is the beauty and chiefest grace of his turn. That done, immediately trot him back again in the self same path, unto the place from whence you came. And there after stop at the second bound of his advancing, turn him on the left hand, & so follow on observing like order, until you have gone to and fro, about xii times, changing hands at every tyme. And at the last stop of all, you shall cause him to advance twice together, and so departed: and this is the order of the manage with half rest. In the which after that he hath been somewhat exercised, you shall not need to help him when he is ready to stop, but only to bear a steady & strait hand, & to help him with your tongue or voice in his turning. And you shall see that he of himself will turn roundly, and with a good grace without any more help.   

Of manage with whole rest. Cap. xxii.  
THAN after that he can make the manage with half rest well, if he be of much force, and very light withal, you may teach him to make the manage with whole rest, causing him at every stop to advance thrice together, and at the iii bound to turn, and at the last stop of all, to advance again thrice together, and so to departed. But unless he be very strong in deed: I would wish you to turn him most commonly at the second bound, rather than at the third, so shall he be able to turn the more readily, and to keep the better time and measure in his turning.   

Of manage without rest. Cap. xxiii.  
BUt if your horse be of no force, or of a heavy mould, than you may teach him the manage without rest, by turning him suddenly upon the stop, wherein also he shall never be perfect, unless he be first used to the manage with half rest, but remember that in the manage without rest, you cause your horse at the last stop to advance once at the least. For it is none error at all but a comely sight in all iii kinds of manages, at the last stop to advance twice or thrice. And note that in all these iii kinds of manages, it is praise worthy, when the horse in his advancing, bow his houghes behind, and turneth round with the Chambetta. For which purpose it were not amiss to manage him sometime in such place whereas the ground si at each end of the maneging path, somewhat hanging. Note also that in managing your horse, it is no small help unto him in every turn that he maketh, to accompany him with your person in this sort following. When he turneth on the right hand, turn you your left shoulder towards his left ear, more or less, as need shall require, keeping your body for all that still right in the midst of the saddle, so as the reins of your back may directly answer the ridge bone of his back. Nevertheless, when you feel him to bend his hinder houghes, then lean you somewhat backward, for that shall make him to close his turn the more roundly and swiftly. And when he turneth on the left hand, accompany him with your right shoulder, toward his right ear, observing like order as before. If your horse be very weak or feeble, either by nature, or by overmuch travel, than it shallbe good, sometime to manage him with a soft pace, and not to troth him, using him for the most part to that kind of manage which shallbe most meet for his strength, lest by often changing, you clean disorder him, and he never become pertect in any of them. When your horse can make all these three kinds of manages, both with soft pace & with trot: Then you may manage him in any of the said kinds with a gallop, giving him on each hand but one single turn, and see that the first and last be always of the right hand. And a little before you turn him, remember to hold your rod on the contrary side, whereby your horse shall know on what side to turn: and at the stop make him to advance, helping him with your voice, or with your rod, or with the even stroke of your spurs, or of the calves of your legs. And in two of the foresaid kinds of maneginge (if your horse be ready of his heels, and light behind, you may also make him to yark aswell at his stop, as in his turn. That is to say, in the manage with half rest, and in the manage with whole rest: for in the manage without rest, it cannot be decent. But in tother ii you may at the first, or second bound of his advancing, help him with your voice, rod or spurs, to yark there once, and at the closing of his turn to yark again. So as at every end of the maneging course, he shall yark twice, once forward and once backward. Or if you will, you may cause him to yark at each end but once and that would be at the closing of his turn, setting his head that way, that his tail before stood. But before you gallop him, it were good to place him and to turn him fair and softly in the same path to and fro, about xii times. Which shall make him the readier when he is afterward managed with a gallop, yea, and if you did the like, after that you have managed him with a gallop, so that you first suffer him to breathe a while, it should do him no harm, as you shall well perceive if you manage him again the next day following. And beware that in managing your horse, ye gallop him not at the first to swiftly, for so shall he never be able to continue with one time and measure, neither in his courses, nor yet in his turns, for after a while every one shall be slower than another, which should be very unseemly, and therefore good respect would be had to the quality of the horse, whether he be able to endure a swift manage or not. For if you perceive that he is naturally strong, and hath a good mouth, and can turn readily on both hands: than you may be the bolder to give him a swift manage. But if he be to lively, or else be laden with great cheeks, or hard of mouth, or if he be feeble of back and legs, then albeit he seemeth to have a gentle mouth, by means perhaps of good breaking, yet you must gallop him with the more respect. notwithstanding if he hath strength in his back and loins, than tother defects be not so much material, but that with good breaking he may be managed any manner of way, but the surest way for all manner of horses is to manage him with a soft pace, or with a trot, and seldom with a gallop.  
Hitherto we have spoken of maneginge with single turns. Now therefore we will talk a little of managing with double turns.   

managing with double turns. Cap. xxiiii.  
ALthough managing with the double turns appertaineth rather to the sterrer, then to the horse of service, yet it shall not be out of time to talk thereof in this place. And note that you may teach your horse to manage with the double turns two manner of ways, whereof the first is in this sort. Place him or troth him right out the length of twenty or thirty paces as you did before. And when you come to the place of stop, let him advance once, twice, or thrice together, according as the kind of manage which you would have him to make, shall require, giving him there a double turn, and half a turn on the right hand, which maketh in all .v. single turns: or if he be very strong, you may give him ii double turns, and half a turn on the right hand, which amounteth to ix single or half turns. That done, troth him back again in the self same path, and give him the like number of turns on the left hand, & so follow on still, continuing the same order so long as you think your horse can well endure, & then at the last stop make him to advance twice or thrice together, & so leave. The second way is thus. When you come to the place of stop, give him at the first but half a turn on the right hand, and suddenly changing hands, let him close the double turn on the left hand, that done, troth him back again in the self same path, unto the other end, and there likewise give him half a turn on the left hand, and immediately let him close the double turn on the right hand, and so to follow on with double turn and half turn, mocked through out: and atthend let him stop and advance, as before is said. And note that in both these ways of managing, in the beginning, the turns would be made fair and softly, to th'intent the horse may carry his legs the more orderly. When your horse can double, being managed with a soft pace and trot, than you may make him to double after one of these two sorts, being managed with a gallop, which must be more or less swift according as the horse may endure, and be able to keep like time & measure, so well in his courses, as in his turns. For the double turns, & specially two on each hand do strain a horse, his loins and sinews very sore, if he be week or not very light of nature. Wherefore if your horse have any such defect, and yet you would have him to double in his manage, then for a while, let him use to make on each hand but one double turn: so shall he turn the more roundly, and close his turns the better, yea and with the more strength of his back, which will not decay so soon with that, as with making ii double turns, and in process of time it is possible that you shall make him to turn so often together, as you will yourself. But if he be of so gross a mould, as he is not apt to close his turn well, then use him in no wise to double, least that he neither make double nor single turn as he ought to do.   

¶ Of the helps and corrections which are meet to be used for the redress of such faults as commonly chance in maneging. Cap. xxv.  
ANd first as touching the ordinary helps, I say, that if your horse have been well broken before, and taught to turn readily on both hands (as he ought to be before you manage him) than he needeth the less help. For so soon as he shall hear the sound of your tongue or voice, and feel the staying of the bridle, he will not tarry to be spurred, but turn roundly of his own accord: notwithstanding, according as he is more or less sensible in the beginning of every maneging course that he maketh, it shall not be amiss to help him with the even stroke of your spurs, yea and also to do the like a little before he cometh to the place of stop helping him also with your voice, for that shall make him to close his turn with the better grace. But if he be dull and heavy, than it shall not only be necessary to help him in the beginning of each course, but also in the midst, and likewise at the end of the same, in such order as is abovesaid. And in his turning, remember to help him when need is, with the contrary leg or spur & sometime with the closing stroke of both spurs, as you have been heretofore taught. And when your horse goeth out of the way, and will not keep the right path, then corect him with your rod, striking him upon the flank, or with your spur upon that side the he swerveth. If your horse be young, & not grown to his full strength, it is possible that sometime for his own ease, he being come to the place of stop, will turn sooner than he should. Wherefore you shall do well at the stop to make him advance twice or thrice together, & then to stand still a while, making much of him: that done, help him with your voice to turn, wherein if he also make to much haste▪ and keepeth no time, stay him again upon the same another while, and so you shall quickly bring him from that fault, and make him to manage with what time and measure you will yourself. Also if your horse have that fault, by means that he is overlively, and to rash, there is no better mean to bring him from it, then by using him unto the manage with whole rest, & to stay a pretty while together, after that he hath advanced, making him always to turn low by the ground, & to bring over the contrary leg, or to turn with the Chambetta. Again, there be some horses so froward, & so spiteful, which by means of evil breaking, and overmuch beating, when they come to the turning place, they will make either to large a turn, or else without time or measure. For correction whereof use to manage him with a soft pace until he be almost within his length of the turning place, & then troth him swiftly, or gallop him unto th'end, whereas after you have given him a turn truly closed on the right hand stay him a while, that done, place him forth fair and softly, until he be almost at tother end, and then gallop him to the place of stop, whereas after he hath turned, stay him again like as you did before, & so continue, managing him still after that sort, until you have gone to and fro viii. times, & at the last stop make him to advance, or if you will, you may after his first turn, first place him two. or three steps, then troth him swiftly until he come somewhat nigh to th'end, & from thence gallop him to the place of stop, observing the order in every course from the beginning to thending, & afterward being somewhat amended of his fault, you may after the stay upon his turn, use to gallop him all the way, for a certain season, until he be thoroughly perfect in his turn: which when he is, see that you stay him no more upon his turn, but immediately put him forward. For to stay upon the turn, is unseemly, and not to be allowed, but only for corrections sake. There be many horses which through evil breaking when they are managed, will turn their rumps and hinder loins, before they turn their foreparts. For remedy of which fault, you shall use these ways following.  
Trot him right out in the forrowe of some new ploughed ground, correcting him continually, and that not only in his going, but also when he is ready to stop, and likewise in his turning, sometime with the contrary leg, and sometime with the contrary spur, and if that will not suffice to make him leave his fault, then manage him alongst by some wall or tilt, and ride so nigh unto it as you can. Which wall or tilt in the first course would be on your left hand, and in the second on your right hand: and so changing from hand to hand, help him in each turn, with the contrary leg, or spur, more or less according as need shall require. Or else manage him in such a fashioned dike, as I have before describe, for to teach your horse therein the Chambetta: And by one of those ways, you shall make him to amend his fault, and to turn orderly, as you would have him.  
If your horse in his turning use to wryth his body on that side he turneth, as though he would fall down, which is a very fowl fault, then manage him oft with a swift trot, either in the forrowe of some new ploughed ground, or else in some path overthwart the furrows: and at the first turn him always low by the ground, helping him with such helps and corrections as are before taught, so shall you bring him to make a true turn, and just in every condition.  
You may also correct him for the self same fault, or for making to large a turn, by giving him a chocke with the bridle on that side of his mouth, that he so erreth. And for the most part such wrythinge turns do chance in the manage without rest, wherein as they are unseemly to many men's judgements, so are they much more unseemly in the other two kinds of manages. notwithstanding, if your horse be weak and feeble, then somewhat to ease him, you may suffer him whilst he boweth his houghes behind in his stopping to wry his body a hand breadth on that side that he turneth, so shall he close his turn the more readily, but otherwise see that you use it not.  
But if your horse in any of the manages make a false turn, or turneth higher or lower than you would have him, as for example on the right hand, than so soon as he hath turned even in his going forward, correct him once or twice with your left spur, yea, and if need be, with both spurs at once, and being come to tother place, turn him again on the right hand, and so follow on with your manage unto the place where he turned first on the right hand, & there turn him on the left hand, by which changing of hands, you shall alter the common order of turning in managing: which altering sometime is very necessary not only for the correction of the faults abovesaid, but also to know th'obedience and readiness of your horse. For if he be used always to one order of turning, it is possible that he will not turn sometime on that hand, that you would have him. And if he make a false turn on the left hand, then correct him by observing the contrary order.  
There is some kind of horse, which when you have managed him ten courses to and fro, he will in th'end suddenly force your hand, either by casting up his head aloft, or by chopping it down, and so fall a running, not for that the bridle grieveth him, or for any great desire he hath to run or to travel, but only for that he thinketh so to escape your hands, and that you should trouble him no more, but suffer him to rest. Which fault so often as he useth, see that you sharply correct him for it without showing him any favour at all, not leaving to beat him upon the head betwixt th'ears with a good stick, and to rate him with a terrible voice, shewing yourself fierce and cruel upon him, until you have brought him unto obedience, and made him to know that running away will not help him. Which correction he should remember the better, if it were his hap to deserve it, being managed upon a ground newly ploughed with deep furrows, the travel wherein together with the correction, would be so painful unto him, as he would beware ever after, how he ran away before his lesson were ended. And having thus subdued him, leave him not so: but manage him a fresh, first with a round trot, and then with a gallop, according as you shall see him in breath: and in th'end make much of him, by which so using him, you shall see that afterward he will manage so long time together as you will have him, and likewise be ready to stop at Commandment, yea, and if need be to stop in a Career, being run with an unkerbled bridle.   

¶ how and when to teach your horse to pass a swift Career. Cap. xxvi.  
Until your horse be perfect in all points before taught, and specially that he can stop well, and therewith advance before, aswell in his trot as in his gallop: I would not wish you in any wise to run him, unless it were in the very beginning of his breaking, to give him a Career, or two, only to know his swiftness, and disposition, and so to leave of, until he be better broken, and made meet to be run. Which when he is, you shall use this order following: Ride him into some fair plain sandy way, void of all stumbling stones, and to acquaint him with the way: Place him fair and softly the length of a good Career, which must be measured, according as the horse is made. For if he be a mighty puissant horse, and great of stature: Then the Career would be the shorter. So likewise must it be when you would have him to bond aloft in his Career: But if he be made like a jennet, or of a middle stature: then the Career path may be the longer, yet not overlong. At th'end whereof, let him stop and advance, and at the second bound turn him fair and softly on the right hand, & so stay a little while. Then suddenly saying with a lively voice hay or Now, put him forward with both spurs at once, forcing him all the way to run so swiftly and so roundly, as he can possibly even to th'end, to th'intent he may stop on his buttocks. That done, turn him on the left hand, and place him forth fair and softly unto tother end of the Career path, and there stop him and turn him again on the right hand, as you did before, and so leave.  
And note that the chiefest points to be observed in the running of a Career are these: first to see that the horse gather roundly, and go smoothly away, bearing his head stedely: Secondly, that he run swiftly: and thirdly, that he stop lightly. Whereunto you shall bring him, by no means so well, as by often using him to tread the rings with a very swift trot, which shall make him so nimble of his legs, so swift, and so staid of head, as when he cometh afterward to be run, it shallbe no grief unto him: which was well observed by the great rider M. Cola Pagano. Who until he saw his horse well stayed of head, and throughly broken, he would never run him. For after that he had spent four months or half a year, yea, & perchance a whole year in breaking him, in such order as I have heretofore taught, he would teach him to run in less than viii days, and that so swiftly, so smoothly, so strongly, and with such stedines of head, and lightness at stop: as it could not be amended. Yea and when he would have an horse texcell, and be very fine in deed: he would teach him nothing from the beginning to thending, but that he should do it first perfectly well upon a soft pace, and then upon a trot, & seldom or never upon a gallop, unless necessity so forced. And above all things he would be sure never to manage him with a swift gallop, nor yet to make him pass a Career. But after that he saw him perfect in the rest, he would appoint him to his Rider, who could require nothing but the horse was ready to do it, were it to manage with single turn or double turn, or run as many Carieres as the Rider would have him, with such order and time as it was marvelous to behold. And as I would not have you to run your horse before he be thoroughly broken: so after that he can run, I would not wish you to exercise him therein above once in two months. Yea, and if it were more seldom, the better, and specially if he be naturally hard of mouth.  
For nothing doth distemper an horse's head and mouth so much as often running, and it greatly diminisheth his strength, and if his hinder legs be weak, it maketh him also to over reach, which is very perilous.   

¶ The order of bounding aloft, or leaping, how and when you shall teach your horse to leap. Cap. xxvii.  
Although the rules before taught, do suffice to make a horse of service. Yet if your horse be light, a Stirrer, and nimble of nature, you may besides these, for pleasure's sake, teach him many other proper feats. As to bound aloft, and to yark withal, to gallop the gallop gallyarde, to fetch the Capriole, to do the Coruetti, and such like sautes, whereof I purpose here somewhat to treat, thinking it now meet so to do, and not before, because that unless your horse be first perfect in the foremer lessons, it were in vain to teach him any of the lessons following. And first as touching leaping or bounding aloft, you shall understand, that to do it with a good grace, and as it ought to be done: The horse had not only need to be made light by art, but also to be light by nature, for in his leaping, he must advance himself, gathering his body round together, and rise even from the ground, keeping his head at one stay, and in his due place. And when he leapeth, he must yark withal. Which if you would have him to do at the stop: you shall help him in his advancing, and specially when he riseth aloft, at the second bound, with theven stroke of your spurs, and with your voice, yea and with your rod also, by striking him therewith, sometime behind, on the mid rompe, and sometime on either side of his rump, where he seemeth most to hang, and if he rise not lightly enough before: then beat him therewith upon the right shoulder, by means of which helps, you shall see him immediately to bound clean above ground, gathering his body short together, and to yark withal. And note by the way, that the help of the calf of your legs, will make some horse to rise higher than the help of your Spurs: therefore in such cases your own discretion must be used. But in the beginning, so soon as he hath made one true salt or leap, and yarked withal, forget not to make much of him, suffering him to stay upon it a good while, without molesting him any more for that time, yea rather you shall do very well to light of his back even there. And so cause him to be led from thence fair and softly into the Stable, or at the least, if you will not light of, to departed with a soft pace: So shall you encourage him against the next time to do the like, or else better. For until your horse understandeth your mind, and knoweth perfectly the order of leaping, and how to gather up his body short and round together: it is not good to force him overmuch, but only at th'end of his pace, trot, gallop, or Career, to help him as I showed you before, to make two, three, or four leaps, and no more, so shall they be both lofty and seemly.  
Whereas otherwise in making many, he may hap to do them faintly, layselye, and without any good grace. Yea, and perchance not without danger of rearing right up, wherein a hanging ground would do good service. But then at the first it would not be to much enclininge, or over step down. notwithstanding, if your horse be light and a sterer by nature: you may take the more of him, and increase the number of his lessons as you shall think good. Having then only care that he keep his ground, that he springe out on neither side, nor disorder his head, but bear it stedely. In which things he must be made perfect before, by often trotting the rings in such order as is before taught. And then being staid of head, you may by using the former helps, cause him in a lusty strong gallop at every two paces end, to bound aloft, once or more, as you list yourself, but so as he may do it well, keeping one self time and measure from the beginning to thending, and that the last leap be with no less force than the first, but with more force, if it may be. And therefore the number of his leaps, and the length of his race would be measured according to the Horse's strength, and as he is in breath, and able to endure. And this kind of gallop, is called the gallop gallyard.  
And when your horse is once perfect, you need not to gallop him but seldom, so shall he gallop the more strongly, which would be done when you come out of the rings. In the which for that cause, you must troth him at that time the fewer times about. And so you shall see that at his coming out, he will enter into his gallop with a lusty courage, and bound all the way of his own accord, at every ii paces end, even until he come to the place of stop, or at the least, if he doth not this, I am sure that helping him but only with your voice, he will not fail to fetch ii or iii leaps at the stop, without any more business.   

¶ How to teach your horse to do the Capriole or goats leap, and the corvetti, and also how to make him go sideling so well with his whole body, as with his rompe only. Cap. xxviii.  
CApra in Latin or Italion, is a beast, which we call a goat. Which beast being disposed to play, useth in his running a pretty kind of jumping and doubling with his legs above ground, making a certain semblance of yarking & yet yarketh not indeed. Which kind of sault or leap, because the italians have not only counterfeited in their dancing, but also have taught their horses to imitate the same (for when the horse boundeth aloft, he must advance his rump, and make as though he would yark, and yet do not) it is called therefore by the name of Capriole, which if you will, in English you may term the goats leap: But for so much as Goats be not every where to represent that kind of leap: I would wish you therefore for your better understanding, sometime to behold our little Lambs, whilst they run and play together, and you shall see them lively to do the same.  
The Coruetti is a certain continual prancing and dancing up and down still in one place, like a bear at a stake, and sometime sideling to and fro, wherein the horse maketh as though he would feign run, and can not be suffered. The name is derived of this Spanish word Corua. Which is as much to say as thelbowe or hinder he'll of the horse, because in doing this feat he doth labour much upon his hinder legs. Which kind of prancing, the Spaniards do use most upon their jennettes, and specially when they ride short after the Turkey fashion. Because in that sort it maketh the better show, and they esteem it so much, as they call the horse that can do it well, in their tongue Hazedor, that is to say, a doer.  
Thus for your better understanding, I have thought good to interpret unto you these two terms Capriole and Coruetti, which two feats, because they do not much differ (as Gryson sayeth) there is but one order in teaching to be observed in both, wherefore if you would teach your horse to do the Capriole, use to troth him for a certain days upon some long hill, or hanging ground, and stopping him upon the knoll of the hill, make him to advance twice together: that done, immediately help him with the sound of your lips, to troth two paces further, and to stop, and to advance again twice, as he did before, and so to continue in stopping and advancing twice together, at every two paces end, all the length of the hill downward, and there stay. Thus using him a while, you shall see that afterward in stead of those two trotting steps at every time that he stoppeth and advanceth, if you help him with this word hup, and with your rod, he will gather up his rompe twice together, and so go from stop to stop, advancing both his forefeet and hinderloynes, with time and measure, cariying his forelegges orderly, and so fetch the Capriole so oft times together, as you will, yea and by helping him with your rod a little behind, you may make him at every time that he so advanceth with his rump to yark withal. But note that if your horse be weak and feeble in his hinderpartes, it shallbe best for him to make those two trotting steps low by the ground. Or else in his lifting to observe always one time and measure, advancing therewith orderly, without gathering up his rump, which kind of Capriole is not to be dyspraised. In this sort if your horse be very light, and you yourself therewith accustomed to ride short upon him, after the Turkey fashion: You may teach him also the Coruetti, but if he be great of stature & that you ride long upon him after our fashion, than the Capriole is most meet for him, which Capriole being done low by the ground, doth not differ much from the Coruetti, saving that in doing the Capriole, your horse must always be going forward. But he may do the Coruetti not only in going forward, but also in keeping still one place, whilst he standeth advancing up and down upon all four feet, yea, and sometime going backward, and sideling, and every way. And to th'intent he may do it the sooner, it were not amiss sometime to make him go sideling with his whole body, by helping him with the contrary spur: as for example, when you would have him to draw to the left side, then bearing your bridle hand even and steady, clap your right leg close to his belie, and hold it there still, making him to feel the spur on the right side, for the which if you see that he moveth his body such way as you would have him, then suddenly pull away your leg from thence, and make much of him, that done, make him to do as much on the other side with your left leg, not leaving to molest him in that sort on either side, until you have made him understand the meaning thereof. And so with a little exercise so soon as he shall feel you to stay your bridle hand, and to offer to touch him either with your leg or spur, on the contrary side, he will go sideling so much or so little as you will have him. But if you would have him go sideling with his Rompe only, and not to move his foreparts, which in deed is very necessary, and specially for a horse of service, to make him keep his head always towards the enemy in fighting hand to hand: then besides the foresaid help of the contrary leg or spur, you must also turn your bridle hand somewhat on that side that you touch him. And you may also help him with your rod, by striking him therewith on the contrary flank behind. Note also that you may make your horse to do the Capriole in giving him a lusty gallop, if you can help him at every two steps to keep time and measure. But as I said before, unless your horse be naturally light of his body, and nimble of his legs, it is unpossible by art to make him to do any of these things well, and to say the truth, they be things that may be very well spared, and specially in horses of service, which being once used to such delighting toys, do forget in time of need their necessary feats. For when they are spurred to go forward or to pass a Career, they fall a hopping and dancing up and down in one place, likewise when in their manage they should make a speedy, round, and just turn, either single or double, they will not turn but leysorlye with the Coruetti, and therefore I would wish none of the queens majesties horses to be used unto the Coruetti, but such as are only kept for pleasure, whereof it is sufficient to have in her highness stable ii or iii at the most.  
Thus having declared unto you what is necessary as well for the horse of service, as for the Sterer, and with what order to break them: I think it meet also to show you now in the end, how to ride such a horse, being once throughly broken in all the feats above said, to the best show before a Prince or noble man.   

¶ How to ride a horse to the best show before a Prince, and where best standing is for him to see. Cap. xxix.  
SOme do think it good for those that would see, to stand right before the stopping place, and some would have them to stand on the right hand of the Rider, even with the stopping place, and some on the same hand, not even with the stopping place, but lower down toward the middle Career, distant from the stopping place the length of a maneging course. Of all which three standings, that right before the stopping place, in my judgement is worst, for two causes: First for that the room perhaps may be unmeet to receive any number of men: Secondly, it is perilous. For if the horse be headstrong and should chance to break the kirble, the reins, or porthe mouths of his bridle, he might run headlong upon the lookers on. And therefore I would not wish a Prince or noble man to take view of a horse in that place, unless it were from a house, out of a window, or from some scaffold. But rather to stand on the one side toward the mid Career, and distant from the stopping place the length of a maneging course, so shall he stand without danger, and see the beginning, the middle, and ending. And it should be so much the better if he stand on the right hand of the Rider, for so the Rider at both ends of the maneginge path, in managing his horse, shall turn his face always towards the Prince, and not his back. The place of standing, then being thus appointed, and the Prince there ready to behold what your horse can do.  
Ride first fair and softly toward the Prince, to do your reverence: that done, depart with a good round trot toward the farthest end of the Career path, bearing your rod with the point upward, towards your right shoulder, according as I have taught you heretofore, and being come to th'end, let the point of your rod fall toward the left shoulder of your horse, and make him to turn an half turn on the right hand: & then to stay a little while, that done, pass him forward, first three or four steps fair and softly, and immediately after, put spurs unto him, giving him a lively, swift, and lusty Career, and pass before the Prince unto the place of stop, whereas after that he hath stopped, even upon his buttocks, then at the first, second, or third bonnde of his advancing, according to that kind of manage that you will use, or that the horse can do most readily, and can best endure: You shall turn him on the right hand, and so go back again in the self same path, the length of a maneging course, and there stop him, and turn him on the left hand, and so observing always one time and measure, manage him to and fro, as oft together, as you shall think meet, but let the last stop be at th'end where the Prince standeth, who shallbe then hard by you, on your left hand. Or if you will, when you pass the Career, you may stop him somewhat short of the Prince. And after that he hath advanced, put him forward the length of a maneging course, and there according to the manage that you would have him to make, turn him on the right hand, and so come back again in the self same path, unto the place where you did stop him before, at the end of his Career, and there stop him, and turn him on the left hand, and so give him to and fro four maneginge courses. And if the horse be very strong, you may give him vi And by this means the first and last turn shallbe on the right hand, and the last stop also before the Prince.  
You may also stop your horse when you first run him even right against the Prince, or else ii or iii yards beyond him, and so without putting him any further forward, in his advancing to turn him on the right hand, and then to follow on with that kind of manage that he can most readelye make, not passing the number of two or four Courses at the most, stopping suddenly upon the last turn which must be on the right hand where he stopped first, so shall the Prince be on your left hand. And after that you have stopped your horse, in which so ever of these places it be, make him to double on each hand once or twice together, and immediately after, or else before, intertaigne him with the Capriole and Coruetti. But he should do the Capriole with a livelier courage, if he were put unto it, before he pass the Career and manage, being both done, you may make him to double again as before. But managing and doubling after a Career, belongeth to a horse of great force. Which in deed should represent in all his doings the very order of fight observed in the field, which is but little used now a days, because of the general weakness of our horses: therefore I will teach you an other order of riding your horse, to the show in such sort, as he shall seem to have more strength, than he hath in deed. Which is done only by observing clean contrary order to the first. For whereas you did first make him to pass a Career, now you shall first manage him, not giving above vi or viii courses if you will have them to be swift or of like time, unless the horse be the stronger, for than you may give him ten or twelve courses, and using any of these foresaid numbers, you shall be always driven to make the last stop where you first began. And having advanced, give him either six double turns, that is on the right hand ii on the left hand two, and on the right hand two, or if you will, but three turns in all, whereof the first and last must be on the right hand. And if he can do the Capriole well, you may cause him to do it immediately upon the same: nevertheless, it were more ease for him to do it before he double. That done, go to th'end of the Career path, and give him a lively Career, stopping him a little before you come at the prince, who shall stand then on your right hand, and after that he hath advanced, let him double as before. For it is always more ease for a horse to double in th'end of a manage, or a Career, then at any other tyme. You may also after he hath run, stopped, and advanced, let him breathe a while in the self same place, and then give him what kind of manage you shall think good, wherein good discretion must be used to consider the quality, strength and condition of the horse, to th'intent that order, time, and measure, may be kept accordingly.   
¶ Here endeth the second book.   

THE third BOOK OF THE ART OF riding.  

¶ Of the corrections of vices in general. Cap. i.  
Minding to treat here of the corrections of such vices, as horses have either by nature or evil custom: I think it most meet to begin first with those vices, that be incident to the chiefest parts and members of the horse, that is say, the mouth, head and neck, upon the ordering or disordering whereof, chiefly dependeth the making and marring of the horse. But for so much as the most part of the vices of the mouth, are corrected by the quality of the bit: I purpose therefore to reserve them until I come to talk of the diversities of bits.   

¶ Of the vices of the head and neck, and first how to correct your horse, when he beareth his head or neck awry. Cap. two.  
I Will show you diverse ways, wishing you when need requireth to prove them all, and then to use that as your ordinary remedy, which you shall know by experience to do your horse most good. First use to correct him with the contrary spur, as for example, if he beareth awry on the left hand, strike him once or twice with the right spur, turning inward your bridle hand somewhat towards the right side. And if he beareth awry on the right hand, then use the contrary order. But if he be very stiff necked on the right side, and soft plying or bowing on the left, then use to hold the right reane shorter than the left, in such order as is taught you before in the Chapter of the bridle and reanes in the first book: You may correct him also by giving him suddenly a chocke with the bridle in his mouth, upon his neither gums on the contrary side, and you may give him such chocke two manner ways, that is to say either by choppinge down your bridle hand on that side that he erreth, giving him the chocke on the contrary side, and so to pull up your hand again immediately into his due place: Or else by turning your hand only inward, and straining the bit hard to his neither gums on the contrary side without any chopping down of your hand at all, which kind of correction if it be given with a temperate and staid hand, it is marvelous good to correct the foresaid vice in any horse of what sort soever he be. It is very good also, and specially when he hangeth or boweth with his whole body more of one side then of another, to hold the calves of your leg always close to his belly, on the contrary side, nigh unto the fore girt, to th'intent you may be ready from time to time, not only to prick him a little, with the spur of the same leg, but also when need requireth, to touch him therewith well and surely. Whereof when you perceive that he beginneth to have some fear, and thereby to amend his fault, you shall do well suddenly to remove your leg from that place, and in that instant to make much of him. So that afterward if he doth but feel the calf of your leg coming towards his belly, he will immediately amend his fault, & bear his head on what side you will have him, you may also correct the stiffness of his neck by beating him with your stirrup upon the shoulder, or with your foot under the fore shoulder, upon the same side that his neck is so stiff, which will make him to look that way, to see what is that so grieveth him which whilst he doth, let slack the contrary reane, & suddenly pull away your foot, & make much of him, & using him so a while, you shall make him both to know his fault, & also to amend the same. It is good also to correct him with the rod by striking him therewith on the contrary side, either in the flank or else more forward nigh unto the fore girt. But the correction of the contrary spur is of a more efficacy, and much more commendable, notwithstanding for a need you may use both, and in any wise forget not whensoever he hangeth more of th'one side then of another, to hold always the contrary reane shorter than the other, but otherwise let the reanes be always even. And to the intent you may bear them always even from the beginning: Ride a young horse at the first with false reanes, which you may for the correction of your horse make short or long of any side at your pleasure, and yet hold your ordinary reanes always even together, and of one length, as I told you before in the Chapter of the bridle and reanes, and note, that it is exceeding good to use these corrections, whilst you make your horse to tread the rings, so often about on both hands as you shall think most requisite for his strength. And if he be very hard of neck on the right side, it shall not be amiss whilst he treadeth the right ring to lay your right hand upon the midst of the right reane, and by straining it harder than the other, to make him to hold his neck that way whether he will or not. And if he be harder on the left side then to do the like with your left hand, whilst he treadeth the left ring, making your right hand for that time the bridle hand: Notwithstanding it were more sightly to shorten the left reane without shifting your hand, in such order as I have told you before in the first book. And to th'intent you may force him the more to come wholly on that side that you would have him, it were not amiss in some place where none may see you, to counterpoise him by bending down your body and head on the self same side that the horse is stiffnecked, staying your legs so as ye fall not, beholding always his eye on that side, wherewith also he will look you in the face, and thereby shallbe forced to correct his own fault, in turning his neck that way that you would have him, which kind of counterpaising you may use sometime in riding him in and out, the length of a mile, yea, and also sometime when he treadeth the rings, not forgetting to turn your bridle hand also accordingly. But if you would have him to be just of body, head, and neck, quickly then use to troth or place him to & fro, the length of .v. yards or there about, making him at every end to stop and to turn, helping him with your tongue, spur, or calf of your leg, on the contrary side and sometime with the closing stroke, bearing always a steady hand, which would be moderately turned towards the same side. And if you see that he doth not bring over the contrary leg orderly, bearing his head & neck, even and just, then never leave correcting of him with the contrary spur all the way, until he come at the other end, and there make him to turn again on the same hand, that he turned on before, continuing still to travel him on the same side, until he hath amended his fault: which if he doth, than you may turn him on both hands interchangeably, so as your first and last turn be on the right hand. And travel him in such sort to and fro to the number of thirty courses, or so long as you shall see him able well to endure, to th'intent you may leave him with a good mouth, remembering always to make much of him when he doth well, and not to help him with the spur, but when need shall require, but only with your tongue which must be always one.   

¶ How to correct your horse when he beareth not right the lower part of his head, called of the italians Mustacchio, and may be called of us the Mosel, which comprehendeth both nose and mouth. Cap. iii.  
IF your horse then use to carry his mosel awry: put three little short nails on the inside of his portsmouth, on the contrary side, and ride him with a musroll, having also iii like nails, yea, and if he carry his whole head awry out of all measure, than put iii like nails also on his headstall on the contrary cheek. For otherwise the first two corrections shall suffice. But if such vice hath been long rooted in him, than all three corrections shallbe little enough, And if the headstall and mosel, be made of double leather, you may so fasten the nails betwixt the two leathers, as the pricks shallbe next unto the horses cheek, & the heads of them covered with the upper leather. Or if you will, you may put them in a thin plate of iron, made no brother than the leather which plate being fastened to the inside of the leather, shallbe the greater correction unto him. But let him not wear those nails above ten days, for though you take them away, yet the place willbe so sore, where they stood, as the horse willbe afraid to bear his head any more awry, thinking that the nails be there still to prick him. And note that such nails will correct some horse if they be put on the self same side that he wrieth his head, so well as though they were put on the contrary side: It is good also to put such nails on the back side of the link, sustaining the kurble hook in such order as I told you before, in the xiiii Chapter of the second book. But to some horse which perhaps through the negligence of the rider hath accustomed to carry his nose, yea and also his neck clean awry, so as the muscle of his neck seemeth to be naturally bend and crooked: it is requisite not only to use the remedy abovesaid: But also to tey the one end of a thong unto the middle eye of his bit, or to the ring of his musrol on that side whereon he is so stiff, and the other end unto his surcingle, in such sort as I showed you in the second book in the first correction of the Credenza. And so to let him stand a long while together. And you may also if you will, ride him for a certain days tied in that sort, but then the thong would be strained somewhat straighter. Or in stead of the thong, you may put on his headstraine, and tey the reanes of that unto the surcingle on his stiff side, which shallbe of more force. And until he carry his head just, let but one use to ride him, & such one as hath some skill, for all rider's hands are not like. And therefore often varying of hands, may make his fault incurable. Wherefore all the ways above taught, are invented to help him that lacketh knowledge, or hath not a staid hand. For assure yourself that whoso ever hath a good judgement, a temperate hand, and can observe such rules and precepts of riding, as are before taught, he shall never need any of these inventions, to correct either this vice or any other.   

¶ Certain causes why it is better for a horse to bear his head under then right out, or to cast it up aloft, and then how to correct him, if he will not bring in his head and reane as he ought to do. Cap. iiii.  
Although some do think it good that the horse should have his head always at liberty, and not to be restrained of his natural fierceness: yet I, in no wise can allow it. For first you shall understand that his forehead is the strongest part of his head, and his nose or mosel is the weakest part, and tenderest, the more he thrusteth out his mosel, the more he distendeth his back, and hath the less force therein. And therefore can never make good manage, observe time, keep order, nor continue in breath any while together, whereas by bringing in his mosel, and the thrusting out his forehead, he advanceth himself, and gathereth strength in his back, unitinge his force together: and thereby also showeth lightness and nimbleness in all his doings. secondly, he shall see his way the better, and be in less danger of falling when he runneth. And though he should fall: yet he shall be more able to recover himself again, then when he holdeth his mosel right out. Thirdly in running against his enemy, he shall be able to do or suffer more with his forehead, then with his mosel being the tenderest part of him. fourthly he shall not be so apt to rear right up upon every light occasion, as otherwise he might do. finally the horse that reaneth well, and bringeth in his mosel: shall always be a great deal better stayed both of head and neck, and have a better mouth, that he that beareth his mosel right out. Wherefore if your horse will not bring in his head at any time that you slay him with the bridle hand, then holding your hand still at that stay, correct him sometime with your right spur, and sometime with your left, and sometime with both spurs together. And in the self some instant, it shallbe good also sometime by thrusting him with your right hand upon the neck, to force him to bring in his head, but if he will not yield for all that, than by pulling the bridle towards you, make him to go back about iii paces, and then to return fair and softly to his first place, continuing so to do a good meinie of times together. And every time that he thrusteth out his nose, correct him in manner above said, never leaving him until you have made him to amend his fault. And if he be very hard to be brought thereunto: it shallbe good to strike him sometime with your stirrup upon the shoulder, or with your foot under the shoulder, holding it still there, to make him look that way. But if ye see that the prick of the spur doth cause him to bring in his head: then make much of him without molesting him any more. And by thus using him, you shall make him to reane as you would have him, either going, or standing still.   

¶ How to correct your horse when he ducketh down his head, and beareth to low. Cap. v.  
IF he ducketh down his head whilst you stand still in any place, then stay your bridle hand, and suddenly correct him with one spur alone, or with both together, not suffering him to remove from that place. And also if he useth that toy going, then correct him in like manner, without making him to alter his pace any whit at all, Not failing at every time that he so doth, to use like correction. And if in ducking down his head, he beareth it more of one side then of another, correct him on the contrary side, and not on that side whereon he hangeth. And if he be very hot and furious, then immediately after such correction lay your hand upon his neck or withers: in token of cherishing him, and that shall keep him from running away. And so by suffering, he shall learn to know his fault, and to amend the same. But if your horse use to duck down his head when you stop him: then beside bearing a temperate & staid hand, you must give him the chocke of the bridle with the right reane. And in that instant correct him sometime with one spur, and sometime with the other. That done, return from whence you came: And from thence trot him, or gallop him to the self same place where you stopped before. And there stop him again, holding the right reane in the midst with your right hand, being always ready therewith to give him the chocke upon the right side of his mouth, and by moving the bit fair and softly in his mouth, sometime with the same reane: make him to know that you hold the reane in that hand of purpose. Whereof the horse will be so much afraid, as he will no more cast down his head. And until he leaveth his fault, never fail in this sort, to correct him. And likewise when he doth well, forget not to cherish him. And though a false reane for this purpose would do well, and specially for a Colt, yet it is not so good a correction as to use the ordinary reane. But if to give him the chocke with the right reane will not suffice to correct his vice, then give him the chocke upon both sides of his mouth with your left hand, holding both reanes together. And by using sometime the one correction, and sometime the other, you shall make him to leave that vice well enough.   

¶ How to correct that horse which doth overreach in his going, that is to say, doth smite his forefeet with his hinderfeete. Cap. vi.  
THis fault is most commonly incident to a young horse, and therefore besides making his shoes shorter behind than otherwise they ought to be, you must also favour him whilst he treadeth the rings, not increasing the number of his turns, nor quickening his pace, but according as his strength and breath shall require, which by often riding him a little at once, will increase every day more and more. And then if he overreach, whilst he treadeth the rings, correct him with the spur on the contrary side, to the turn which he maketh. But if he overreacheth in going right out, then correct him on that side of his belly, whereon you see his neck to be most stiff. And sometime you may also correct him with your rod upon the one or other shoulder. It is good also to make him to troth or to gallop in some stony ground. Or else for want of such a ground, to strow the ring paths full of stones, of all sorts, that is to say, both with great, mean, and small. And that will make him to lift his feet in such sort as he shall seldom overreach. notwithstanding, if his hooves be not very sound and good: I would not wish you to use this way, for fear of riving his hooves, which of our horseleeches is called a false quarter. And of the italians Halso quarto. But rather make him to leave this fault by well feeding him, and by riding him moderately without taking overmuch of him at once, to th'intent he may increase in strength and breath, which once had, than the grief of his overreaching, willbe a good correction unto him of itself. Moreover if you caused the ring path to be digged full of stairs or degrees, it would keep him from overreaching, and sometime it were not amiss to make him go a swash overthwhart the furrows in some ground newly ploughed with deep furrows. Thus having showed you diverse ways of correcting this fault, I wish you now to use your own discretion in choosing that which shallbe most meet for your horse, whose qualities you ought best to know.   

¶ How to correct that horse which when he is chastised for any fault, with the spur, useth to shake his head or ears. Also how to know by the moving of his ears, when he is maliciously disposed, and how to correct him for the same. Cap. seven.  
Every time that he so shaketh his head, or ears, when he is corrected, double the strokes on the self same side that you did correct him on before, never leaving him until you have made him to hold his head still, and patiently to suffer such correction as you give him. And in no wise let any fault escape unpunished, but always correct him immediately for the same, sometime with the one spur, and sometime with both together, and sometime with one after another. The order of all which strokes is taught before in the first book in the xi and xiii Chapters. If your horse in his going lifteth up one ear, and holdeth down the other, and fareth as though there were a flay in that ear: then I advise you take heed to yourself. For most commonly when he doth so, he mindeth to play you some shrewd toy, as to plunge aloft, to run overthwart, or to fall down, or to do some like desperate act. Wherefore suddenly interrupt him of his purpose, by giving him two or three strokes with the contrary spur, on the contrary side to that ear, which he most moveth. And serve him so, as often as he shall use that toy: And if it be abroad in the plain field it should not be amiss in the self same instant that you spur him: to chastise him also with a terrible voice: and by giving him a chocke with the bridle on the one side of his mouth. Yea and besides all this, if he be very froward and cursed, let not to correct him also with a good stick by beating him therewith well and surely upon the head betwixt the ears. Which correction though he be never so proud and stubborn: yet being given but once in time, and as it should be, it will so chastise him as he shallbe glad ever after to leave such fantastical toys, so long as you are on his back. And so doing, forget not to make much of him, leaving him always with a good mouth: But note that some time a fly entering in deed, into your horse's ear: or the pricking of his hedstal, may cause him to shake his ear, or to hold it otherwise then he ought to do, meaning no shrewdness at all. And then it▪ shall suffice to correct him moderately with the contrary spur, only to make him that he think no more upon the fly, which perhaps stingeth him, or any other thing that grieveth him, but to forget it, and so to attend his way.   

¶ How to correct your horse when he whyneth, intending to strike with his heel's, or to do some shrewdness, being in the company of other horses. Cap. viii.  
ALso if your horse when you are in the company of other horsemen chance to whine, or if you perceive that he meaneth to do some shrewdness, as to bite or strike, correct him immediately with the single stroke of the contrary spur, doubling the same according as occasion shall require, aswell in his going right out, as in his standing stil. Albeit if he show any sign of shrewdness towards his fellows▪ in marching forward, it were not amiss to correct him with the clinching stroke, and sometime by giving him the chocke of the bridle, on the one or both sides of his mouth. And if that will not suffice, than you may all to rate him with a terrible voice, and correct him with your rod on the one or other flank. Yea, and perchance it shallbe needful also to give him therewith a stripe or two upon the head betwixt the ears.   

¶ Of restiveness of the kinds and causes thereof. Cap. ix.  
IF a horse be restyffe, it proceedeth for the most part through the fault of the rider, & of one of these two causes. For either the horse is to vile, or else to stout of courage. If he be vile, then being over wearied, he will for faintness give over, and go no further. But if he be proud and stout, then feeling himself somewhat weary and out of breath, he will fall a leaping and yarking, thinking to be eased of his travel that way or perhaps will do the like in the beginning immediately after his rider be mounted: And if he perceive that his rider be afraid of him, than he will take such a stomach unto him as he will suddenly stay and stop there, inaugre his rider's head. Of which two kinds of restiveness, that which proceedeth of vileness of courage is the worst▪ But there be some horses not only stout and lusty of courage, but also ramege, that is to say having two minds betwixt going & not going, when they list. Which kind of horses if they chance to become restyffe: they be worse than any of the rest.   

¶ remedies against restyfnes proceeding of vile courage. Cap. x.  
IF your horse's restyfnes proceedeth of vile courage, then ride him into some long way or lane closed in, on both sides with wall, dyke, quickset, or high hedge. But at the one end thereof▪ cause certain men to stand behind your horse with staves and stones in their hands. And if he will not go forward, then let them suddenly strike him with their staves upon his hams, and legs behind, and likewise whorle their stones at the same places, all to rating him in that same instant with a terrible voice. During which time you yourself must sit still, keeping silence. And let them not cease beating and crying out unto him until they have made him to go orderly forward as he should do. Which when he doth, then immediately let them stay both hand and voice, and make you much of him, by clawing him on the neck. That done, make him to go from the one end of the lane to the other, to and fro, about eight times. And then light of his back, or else place him fair and softly to the stable. And for a certain days, see that you use none other order than this, until he be clean rid of that vice. Wherein so often as he doth offend, return you to the foresaid correction. For this is a proved and an infallible way to bring any horse from his restiveness. Which correction you might use also in the plain field, in some new ploughed ground, but for werying of the footmen, whose travel should be greater there to follow the horse every way that he flieth out, then in a lane. And the more that your horse goeth backward whilst he is so corrected, let the footmen lay on the faster, and cry out the louder. And besides that, sometime it shall not be amiss to turn his head towards that way that he would so feign flee out. And so in your anger force him, by beating him all the way upon the head with a cudgel, and by crying out unto him, to gallop so hard as he can drive, the length of a good Career. And then turn him again toward the way from whence you began to gallop him, & make him to go forward, correcting him at that time, more with your voice, then with your cudgel. And if he goth quietly, then leave crying out, and make much of him. For I am sure he will be glad at length to yield, rather than to be so beaten. But if he continue still in his frowardness, and will not go forward, than you may give him half a turn, and immediately by pulling in the bridle, make him to go backward about ten paces in so hasty wise as you can. That done, turn his head again towards that way in the which he would not go forward, and then suddenly put him forward. Which doing for the most part will make him to take his way. And to th'intent he may be the sooner and the more throughly corrected of this vice, you may besides all this tey a good long cord unto his tale, winding it about, like as you do when you trim your horse's tail with a ribbon or lace, the last knot whereof would be fastened together with some of the hears, for fear of slipping, which knot if you can not make, then tey the upper end of the cord unto the hinder buckle of the saddle, serving the crupper, and so it shall not slip away. The neither end of which cord must hang down & trail after the horse upon the ground. And when your horse will not go forward, or goth backward, let one of the footmen pull the cord hard unto him, which when the horse feeleth, the fear to be pulled and hailed will make him to spring forward. And so doing the footman must in the self same instant let go the cord, and (to be sure) besides the pulling of the cord: Let the rest of the footmen also all to rate the horse with their voices, laying on with their staves, and whorling their stones, And by using him thus a while, you shall correct him of this vice well enough.   

¶ Remedies against restiveness proceeding of stubbornness and stout courage. Cap. xi.  
BUT if you perceive that such restiveness proceedeth of to much courage and stubbornness which the horse hath gotten through the fearfulness of his rider: then ride him into some plane field newly ploughed. And there if he (whilst you give him his lesson) chance to stop in deed, or mind to stop, and so to become restive: then immediately all to rate him with a terrible voice, beating him upon the head betwixt the ears, and upon the forelegs with a good stick. And the more resistance that he maketh, in leaping, or going overthwart or seeking to fall down flat, or to lie down on the one side, or to do any other shrewdness, increase you his correction so much the more, aswell in rating him, as in beating him. And to molest him the more, give him the ring turns on the one side, or on the other, or on that side whereon he himself doth most lean. By means whereof you shall so tame him, as he seeing his resistance not to prevail, shall be content from thenceforth to go quietly and orderly. And in so doing, forget not to make much of him, both with your voice, and also by clawing him with your hand upon the neck. That done, troth him even there, to and fro, about ten times. Then gallop him, and last of all, place him. failing not to correct him in like sort so often as he shall offend in the like vice. But note by the way that when the horse once knoweth the correction of the stick or cudgel: it shall suffice to correct him with a terrible voice. And specially if he be ramege, and of two minds. Against which fault, there is no correction of more efficacy. For the voice correcteth without disorder. And it maketh the horse afraid without putting him in despair, whereas the cudgel many times maketh him desperate and faint hearted. unless he be corrected therewith in time. After which correction he must also be cherished, and much made of, to th'intent he may understand that his vice was the cause of his correction. For the rod used in this sort hath no small virtue. And note that though the corrections taught aswell in the last Chapter as in this, may indifferently serve to correct this vice, proceeding of any of the two causes aforesaid, yet they be more kindly used when each vice is corrected with his proper correction according to the order above declared.  
It is possible also that you may correct this vice, by holding a sharp nail in your hand, to prick him continually behind on the rump, never removing the nail from thence, for any resistance or striving that he maketh, until he hath left his stubbornness, and is content to go quietly. Which done, take away your hand, and claw him with the same immediately upon the neck. That done, you may place, trot, gallop, or manage him as you shall think good.   

¶ Other corrections to be used against restyvenesse when the rider lacketh art, and knoweth not by order of riding, how to get the mastery of his horse, and to make him to know his fault. Cap. xii.  
LEt a footman stand behind you with a shrewd cat teyed at the one end of a long pole with her belly upward, so as she may have her mouth and claws at liberty. And when your horse doth stay or go backward, let him thrust the Cat betwixt his thighs so as she may scratch and bite him, sometime by the thighs, sometime by the rump, and often times by the stones. But let the footman and all the standers by, threaten the horse with a terrible noise, and you shall see, it will make him to go as you would have him. And in so doing, be ready to make much of him.  
Also the shirle cry of a hedgehog being straight teyed by the foot under the horse's tail, is a remedy of like force, which was proved by Master Vincentio Respino, a Napolitan, who corrected by this means an old restive horse of the kings in such sort as he had much a do afterward to keep him from the contrary vice of running away.  
The like correction also may be given with a whelp, or some other loud crying and biting beast being teied to the crupper, so as he may hang down under the horse's tail, having a long cord fastened unto him Which cord passing between the horses thighs, the rider shall hold in his right hand to molest the horse therewith, by pulling it, & letting it go as he shall see it needful. Or in stead of such a beast, there may be teied a piece of iron of a foot in length, or more, and three fingers broad, made full of pricks like thorns, with a cord fastened thereunto as before. But note that all these ways rehearsed: are not to be commonly used but only in time of need, and that with great discretion. For otherwise you shall but amaze your horse, and drive him into despair, so as he shall never understand your meaning. And to say the truth, they are of little importance in respect of the remedies taught before in the last chapter. And therefore I would wish you chiefly to use them being sufficient alone. I warrant you to correct any manner of restivenes. Neither do I allow the ways that men were wont to use in old time. To correct a restyve horse by teying a cord with a riding knot unto the horses stones which cord passed under the horse's belly unto the rider's right hand, holding the same, & straining it when need did require. Which in deed is more hurtful than profitable: and therefore not meet to be used but in some extremity, for the correction of a stubborn horse, accustomed to fall down in the water. Of which vice we shall treat hereafter at large.   

¶ Of the contrary vice unto restyvenesse, which is to run away, of the causes thereof, and how to correct the same. Cap. xiii.  
THe vice of running away, doth not only proceed of the hardness & evilness of the horses mouth, but also many times through the fault of the rider, not having knowledge, nor stomach, as I said before, to tame a horse that is of to lively a courage, and therewith perhaps hard of mouth, whereby the horse getteth an evil custom, either not to stop at what time as the rider would have him, or else if he stop, to stop without order. For redress of which vice you may use these remedies here following.  
If you chance then upon an old horse accustomed to run away when he should stop, you must begin to ride him with more respect than you would do a colt. And first ride him into some long way or lane enclosed of both sides. And there teach him to stop, first upon a soft pace, then upon a trot, and afterward upon a gallop. And when soever he stoppeth, make him to advance withal, by helping him in such sort as is before declared in the first book. But because of his evil custom, see that ye run him not of a long season. And to be sure that he shall not fall, or run away at the stop of himself, when you gallop him appoint a footman to stand before him at the place of stopping, with a stick or a cudgel in his hand, wherewith, after your horse hath stopped, and advanced, let the footman by striking him softly upon the forelegges, but seldom upon the snout, make him to go iii or four steps backward. Whereunto if he be used a while, you shall see that afterward so soon as he hath stopped, he seeing the footman standing there, and feeling the drawing back of your bridle hand, he will go back of his own accord, without any beating at all. And when he is once perfect as well in his stopping, as in his going back, then gently give him a Career, forcing him in his running, neither with voice, spur, nor stick. And only when ye come nigh unto the place of stopping, help him with your voice to stop. And for the more assurance, let the footman in the self same instant also help him with his voice, and threaten him with his cudgel. Yea, and if he perceive that the horse will needs pass forward, let him give him a good blow with his cudgel upon the snout, which blow I believe shall not need, if you observe well the order before taught. For the help of your voice, the pulling in of the bridle, & the sight of the footman shall suffice to make him to stop as he should do. And in so doing, see that you make much of him, suffering him to pause a while. That done, make him to go backward, even as you did before, when you did pace, trot, or gallop him. And after that, place him to and fro in the career path, about vi times, staying always at the accustomed stopping place, and so departed, & see that you run him no more of a good while after, but only use the order above declared, upon a soft pace, trot, or gallop, not forgetting always to have a footman at the place of stop, which footman besides his cudgel, may also have stones in his hand, to whorle at the horse's snout, when need requireth, which I do seldom or rather never allow, unless he hath the steadier hand, or if you will, you may cause two footmen to stand before him, each of them having a good long staff in his hand: At the upper end whereof, would be teyed a little boundell of straw, which being kindled, let the footmen when the horse will not stop, thrust them into his nose, the fear of the flame whereof flashing before his eyes, and the fire parching his skin, together with the smoke entering into his nose, will make him to stop. But though this correction for a need, is very good: yet I would wish you to use the order before declared, which is sufficient I warrant you, to make him stop with the bridle only, without the help of any such extreme remedy.  
It hath been seen many times that some Rider hath corrected his horse of this fault, by running him in the plain field out of breath, continually beating him and spurring him in his anger, so as the horse hath been glad to stop of himself, which correction hath taken so good effect, as the rider giving him a just Career the next day following, hath made him to stop with the least pulling in of the bridle that might be. But this correction is very perilous, and enough to kill a horse, and therefore is not meet to be used, but only when he being to stubborn doth overmuch force you, and will needs run away with you whether you will or not.  
Besides the first order above rehearsed, for his better correction, you may also bit him according to the quality of his mouth, whereof we shall treat hereafter. And unto that bit, or to any other, you may fasten a cord, which must pass between his gums, and his neither lip, in such sort as I showed you before, in the second book in the third correction of the Credence. Of which cord when his mouth is once throughly corrected, he shall have no need▪ nor yet of any other help, but of the bridle only. But in any wise let him continue in his ring turns, which being ended, use him to stop, and to advance upon the knoll of some hill downward.  
And note this by the way as a general rule, that the correction of the footman with stick or cudgel is never to be used but when some great necessity requireth it For it may make the horse to fearful, unless the footman have the more skill, and can observe in his correction both time and measure.   

¶ How to correct that horse that will rear right up when he is corrected for any fault with a stick upon the head. Cap. xiiii.  
AS often as he useth this vice, fail not you in the self same instant that he riseth and hangeth aloft, to beat him well and surely with a good long stick upon the forelegges somewhat beneath the knees, yea and if he be very much accustomed to this vice it shall not be amiss somewhat before he riseth to give him one blow upon the legs at the least. And for the more surety, and to make him the more afraid, it shallbe needful to bear the rod with the point downward right before his knees, always in his sight. And being corrected a while after this sort, you shall see that he shall leave that fault well enough.   

¶ How to correct that horse that will fall down to the ground when he is a little weary or provoked to do any thing which he would not willingly do. Cap. xv.  
cause some expert footman having a good cudgel in his hand, to be somewhat nigh you, at such time as you ride your horse, to the intent that when he perceiveth the horse maketh any offer to lie down, he may be ready with his cudgel or staff, to threaten him, and to fray him with a terrible voice, gesture, coum, tenance, & by cruelly looking him always in the face, more or less according as time & occasion shall require. Which willbe such a terror unto the horse, as whilst he looketh all amazed on the footman, he will have no mind to lie down, but stand still, attending to his rider: who in the mean while, must sit still in his saddle, without making any noise, or moving at all. afterward make him to troth the ring turns, whereas you may cause also more men to stand with staves in their hands, and to do as the footman did before. And if he will needs fall down there, then let them hold him up whether he will or not, cruelly correcting him, both with their voices, and also with their staves, by beating him upon the head betwixt the ears, or upon any part of his body next to hand. And if this do not correct his vice, truly the fault is in the footmen, lacking perhaps such terrible voices, cruel looks and gestures, or such order and time of correcting, as should serve the purpose. And therefore it were good for such men to have in their hands fiery staves made in such sort as is before declared in the last chapter save one, the fear and smart whereof will keep him from lying down whether he will or not, which correction may be used for a restive horse, by fieringe him behind betwixt the thighs.  
This vice also may be corrected by the help of a footman, having in his hand a squirt full of water, which he must squirt in the horses eyes, when he offereth to lie down, which is a good remedy also against the Credence. But these remedies last mentioned, are to be used by riders of small skill. For an expert Rider will correct any vice by true art without the help of any such toys.   

¶ How to correct that horse which passing through any water will lie down in the same, and what is the cause of such vice. Cap. xvi.  
This vice undoubtedly proceedeth of a natural disposition, incident to that horse which is foaled under the sign of Leo. Which is a hot and fiery sign. Albeit all horses foaled under this sign have not this fault in deed: Neither can it be known by the Ostrich feather in the horse's neck, nor yet certainly discerned at the changing of his teeth, what so ever other men say, but only by his plain lying down in the water. For the which fault there is no better remedy, than this here following.  
cause a servant to ride him into some river or water, not over deep, and appoint three other footmen with cogels in their hands, to follow him hard at the heels into the water, to th'intent that when the horse beginneth to lie down, they may be ready to leap upon him and with the help of the Rider to force him to duck his head down under the water, so as the water may enter into his ears. Not suffering him to lift up his head again of a god while together, but make him by main force to keep it still under, continually beating him all the while with their cogels, and rating him with loud and terrible voices. That done, let him only lift up his head to take breath and air. During which time cease not also to beat him still upon the head, betwixt the ears, which done, duck his head with like violence once again, into the water. And then let him rise up upon his feet. And whilst he is passing through the water, let the men follow after, beating him, and rating him all the way until he be clean out of the water, and then leave. For otherwise it were disorder. Then the next day following, let him be ridden again in the same water. And so soon as his rider seeth that the horse maketh any offer to lie down, yea and sometime before he perceiveth it, let him immediately prevent him of his purpose, by touching him with his spurs, and by beating him upon the head betwixt the ears, and upon the flank with his stick, thretninge him with a terrible voice. And you shall see, it will make him to forget his lying down, and to pass through quietly. Yea, and it is possible that this correction alone without the help of the other before declared, will suffice to bring him from this vice. And to both these corrections, you may also if you will add the help of the cord teyed with a riding knot, about the horse's cods, which cord the rider may strain and let go, according as he shall see occasion as well to prevent the horse of his lying down, as also when his head is kept under the water, the grief whereof together with the other corrections will the sooner cause him to leave this vice.   

¶ How to correct that horse which is skyttish or fearful, and will start at every thing, and whereof such vice proceedeth. Cap. xvii.  
A Horse may be fearful, for that he is young, and hath not been ridden perhaps where sundry sights are. And therefore if you chance to ride him through some town or fair, he is afraid of every thing that he seeth. Likewise if he hath been scared before time with any thing that hath offended him. either with noise, sight, or otherwise, so often as he shall hear or see the same, he will be afraid. And finally, fearfulness may proceed for lack of perfect sight, which is worse than all the rest. According to all which causes, remedies do follow here orderly. But first as touching the young horse, which is afraid of such things as he never saw before. See that in no wise ye do beat him for the same, lest he take the thing that he beholdeth and shonneth, to be the cause of his smart, and so become more fearful than he was before: But rather stay there a while, and by gentle means make him by little and little, to go towards the thing whereof he is afraid, which doing, make much of him. And you shall see that by standing sometime still to look upon it, and sometime by going towards it, he shall be so well acquainted therewith, as he will not fear it. And when he cometh at it, let him stay there a pretty while together, to th'intent he may be the more assured thereof. But if your horse be afraid of any thing which hath offended him before time, so as he will by no means pass by it: Then see that you yourself molest him no manner of ways, but appoint some footman standing byhinde you, to provoke him forward, with the sound of his lips, and by threatening him with his voice, and if need be, by beating him with a staff upon the rump, and upon the hinder legs. And when he beginneth to go forward, make you much of him all the way. For so a young horse must be handled. But if your horse be throughly broken in all points meet for him to learn, and knoweth what all manner of corrections and helps mean: Then if he chance to be afraid of any thing, and so, suddenly stoppeth, going by the way, let not immediately to put him forward, by helping him with your voice, legs, spurs, or rod, or all together, without any staying to acquaint him with the thing whereof he is afraid. And that shall make him to go always forward as he ought to do.  
But if your horse be afraid of any thing for lack of perfect sight, than beat him not, but rather by making much of him, encourage him by little and little to go forward, helping him sometime with your voice. And if you see that he standeth doubtful, betwixt going and not going, then suddenly to put all doubts and fearful imaginations out of his mind, help him not only with your voice, but also with your spurs: And it will make him to pass forth without any stay.  
Note also that to embolden a young horse, so as he may abide any thing, it is very good to ride him oft in the night season, and in the day time in some town amongst artificers, and especially amongst smiths, peuterers, armourers, braziers, tinkers, and such like. And likewise amongst furriers where divers coloured skins hang in sight, and also abroad in the field where dead carcases lie new slain, to th'intent that no manner of sight or noise may seem strange unto him. And when so ever he will not come nigh any such thing, than use the order before declared.  
It is good for a certain days to let him wear such a whurleguig as children run withal against the wind, made like wyndmyll sails, fastened to his headstall upon his foretop, or on the one side of his head, under his ear. For besides that, the swift turning about thereof before his eyes, doth help much to assure him. The whiteness also of the same, whilst it turneth about, doth take away those impressions of shadows from his sight, which before were wont to fray him. But though this be a great help to embolden the most part of horses: yet there be some horses of such a nature, as after they have worn it, they will be the worse for it, and become more fearful than they were before, which so soon as you perceive, use it no more, but rather use the means and order before declared.  
Note also that when you use the foresaid whurleguygge, you may make it of what colour you will, as either black, red, yellow or blue, according as you shall think it most needful, for the assuring of your horse.   

¶ How to embolden your horse, and to make him hardy against other horses. Cap. xviii.  
USe to encounter upon a soft pace or troth, with another horseman, face to face, in one self path so as your horse's doss not one another, lest your horse receiving some harm become more fearful than before, yea, rather when you are almost one upon another, if the other horse be not fearful, nor will give place of himself, then cause his Rider to make him to recoil back, by pulling in his head with the bridle. And that shallbe a good encouraging to your horse, and make him the bolder always to go towards any other horse. Or if you will, you may encounter one with the other, riding in two sundry paths, the one lying cheek by cheek within a foot of the other, being both of one length, each of them containing about ten paces, to th'intent that in maneging your horses to and fro upon a trot, you coming one towards another, from two contrary ends may both meet right in the midst of your course. And so pass one hard by another. Which you shallbe sure to do, if both of your horses keep like time and measure aswell in their trotting as in their turning. And look on what hand so ever the one turneth, the other must do the same, and in the self same instant. And like order must be observed afterward, when you manage them also upon a gallop. Thus by passing and repassing, and oft meeting without justling: your horses shall be so well acquainted as the one will not be afraid of the other. Having the company of an other horseman, you may also embolden your horse whilst you troth the rings in this order following. first enter both together into the right ring, and then turning tail to tail, follow you the right hand, and let him follow the left, in the self same ring, enlarging the ring path so, as in your meeting, whilst you go about, you may touch one another. And when you have gone twice about the right ring, enter both together into the left ring, and there turning tails observe like order as before. And so shift from ring to ring, treading the same first with a good round troth, and then if you will, with a gallop. And thus by often meeting, both horses shallbe well acquainted, and the one assured of the other, whereby with time, your horse shall wax so hardy, as he shallbe afraid of no horse. It is very good also to stand still with your horse hard by the ring, looking on whilst an other horse trotteth and galloppeth the rings, or to stand right at the stopping place, when another horse passeth a Career, or on the one side, so as the other horse in his running, may pass hard by your horse, and to th'intent that your horse for fear, turn not away, when the other horse cometh any thing nigh him, it shallbe good to have the company of some other horseman, being mounted upon such a horse as is bold, and will not be afraid, standing a little of from you, whose ensample should be a good encouraging unto your horse. And to go sometime in the company of such a horse, through some City or town, would be also a good boldninge unto him.   

¶ How to make your horse to abide both staff, sword, great noise, gun-shot, or any other thing Cap. nineteen.  
USe first to acquaint him throughlie with the rod, so as he may not be afraid thereof, by often coying him therewith upon the neck, and by holding the point right forth, sometime betwixt his ears, and sometime on the one or other side of his head, so as it may be always in his sight. And when he is thoroughly assured of the rod: then appoint some footman having a staff in his hand, to stand in your way, whereas you should pass. And as you are coming towards him, let the footman by little and little, make signs as though he would lay your horse on the head with his staff. And then encourage your horse to go forward towards the footman, who in the same instant must retire backward, as though he would flee away. And by using him so a while, you shall see that he will not be afraid of the staff at all. And after that he can abide the staff, make him by the like means to abide the sword. But let the footman beware that strike him neither with staff nor sword, lest you utterly discourage him for ever. After this you may cause three or four, or a great number of footmen to stand in his way, making a great howtinge and shouting before him, threatening him with loud voices, against whom encourage him to go forward, first with a soft pace, secondly with a trot, and thirdly with a gallop. At which time let the footmen retire back, faininge to run away. And if such footmen had staves and sword in their hands, to threaten him withal, it should make him so much the bolder.  
To make him abide gun-shot, or any other like terrible noise, let him go hard by another horse, or rather betwixt two other horses that have been accustomed to the like noise before time, and are afraid of nothing. And as you are riding together, cause three or four dags or archabushes to be discharged. First a pretty way of, and then nigher hand, according as your horse beginneth to abide them. During which time cease not continually to make much of him so well with your hand, by clawing him on the neck, as also with your voice, and so by little and little, you shall bring him at length to abide any thing.   

¶ Of the vices of the mouth, and causes thereof in general. Cap. xx.  
Being now come to show you how to correct a horse that hath a naughty mouth as well by using divers kinds of bits, meet for that purpose, as otherwise: I think it first meet to tell you the causes whereof such evilness of mouth proceedeth, and how many vices thereon dependeth: And finally how to correct the same. And first you shall understand that a horse may have an evil mouth, either because his chin or beard, where the kurble should lie, is to hard, or the places where the bit should rest on both sides of his mouth, called of Grison Le bar be to hard, or his tongue is to hard. Or contrariwise, for that all these foresaid places perhaps are to tender, so as he dare not stay his mouth as he should do, upon the bit. Again his mouth may be to little, or his jaws may be to great, & to thick. Of which causes do proceed divers vices, as to draw up the bit, with his tongue, even as though he would swallow it up, not suffering it to rest upon his gums or bars where it should rest. Which vice Gryson calleth beaver la briglia, that is to drink the bridle, likewise to bear his tongue always out of his mouth. Also to bear to hard upon the bit, which in Italion is as much to say, as Titar di bocca. Also to wry with his mouth, holding the neither part thereof one way, & the upper part another way, which in Italion is to say Far forfici: That is to make shears. There is also another vice like unto this, but not so foul: And that is, to wry a little with his jaws aloft, but not so much beneath, which Grison calleth Gangheggiare a word derived of this word Gangha, signifying the jaw. Also to defend the bit with his neither lip, so as it can not rest upon his bars called in the Italion Far Chiomazzuoli. Of some of which vices, there be also other particular causes, which shall be declared hereafter, when we come to the corrections of the same. But Grison saith, that whilst some have sought to correct these vices aforesaid, by often changing of rough and sharp bits, they have clean marred their horses mouths. And therefore he wisheth you in any wise to abstain from all such kind of bits. And to seek rather to bring your horse to have a good mouth, and specially whilst he is young, by riding him with a gentle bit, and by bearing a temperate hand, using such helps, corrections, and cherishinnges, as are taught before, whilst you teach him to tread the rings, with trot, or gallop, to stop, to advance, to turn, to manage, or to pass a Career, which Career, the more seldom it be used, and with the less fury, the better mouth shall your horse have. For assure yourself, it is art and good order of riding, which maketh the good mouth, and not the bit. Notwithstanding the quality of the bit is not utterly to be rejected, yea, rather when the horse beginneth to wax perfect in his doings, and is well broken, and somewhat stayed of head, it shallbe very necessary to ride him with such a bit, as shall be most meet to serve his mouth, be it hard or soft, to th'intent he may bear the lighter, and with the more stay, and also be the more subject to his rider. For the which cause Grison hath set forth in figures. L. sundry bits together with the names and uses of the same, as hereafter shallbe declared. But for so much, as certain vices of the mouth, may be corrected as well by other means, as by the help of divers bits. I will first declare those kinds of corrections, and then afterward, treat of the correcting with bits, and therewith show you all the kinds, names, parts, and properties of the same.   

¶ How to correct that horse which will either draw up the bit with his tongue, or defend the same with his neither lip. Cap. xxi.  
TAke a piece of whip cord, about a span long, and tey the one end thereof unto the eye of the bit, under the kurble, that done, turn down the horses neither lip, to th'intent you may easily bring the cord betwixt his said lip, and his neither gums, unto the other eye of the bit, and there to be tied and fastened, and the more the cord be strained, the harder and stronger shall the bit be. And if the knots at both ends be handsomely knit, no man shall perceive the mystery thereof. Or if you will, in stead of the cord. you may there put a little chain. And by this means not only the vices above rehearsed, are throughly corrected, but also many times divers other vices, as the putting out of his tongue, the bearing hard upon the bit. And also the hardness of his bars, so as he shallbe able therewith to make no resistance. And such cord or chain will do as much, being put to a plain Cannon or scache, as if it were put to a harder bit.   

¶ How to correct that horse, which will mow or wry with his mouth, and the causes whereof such vices doth proceed. Cap. xxii.  
THough this vice doth chiefly proceed of the naughtiness of the horses mouth, yet many times the riding him with to high a port bit, which perhaps the horse can not suffer, may be cause thereof, or the distempered hand of his rider, not knowing how to handle him & to make him to suffer the bridle of what mouth so ever he be, hard or soft. But to remedy the same vice proceeding of the first cause, use to ride him with a musroll straight buckled to his head. And so often as he moweth with his mouth, correct him first with one spur, and then with another, but most with the spur on the contrary side. And sometime also give him the chocke with the bridle, upon the one or other, or else upon both sides at once of his mouth, bearing always a steady and a temperate hand. Yea, and for his more correction, you may also sometime strike him with your stirrup, or foot, under, or upon the shoulder on the contrary side. Not failing to correct him sometime one way, and sometime another, so often as he shall offend. And at length you shall bring him from that fault well enough. But if the port of his bit be the only cause of this vice, than you shall not need to use these corrections, but only to ride him with a close bit, or not so open, being hard or soft, accoring as the horse's mouth shall require, whereof we shall now immediately treat.   

¶ Of the kinds of bits together with their names and parts belonging to the same. Cap. xxiii.  
OF bits some be close, and some be open. The open bits are otherwise called of our bitmakers port bits. Of which ports some are whole and some are broken. Again of the broken ports, some are fashioned like geese necks, and they be round. And some like cats feet: and they be square. Of which square ports so many as are made with Olives, pears, or campanelles, Grison calleth them Cats feet. But our bitmakers do call all kind of square ports, upset mouths without any difference, also some of the broken ports and upset mouths, are locked together with one plight within another, some with a rivet nail, and some with a piece. And according as every bit, as well of the close, as open, is fashioned, so is it named. And therefore some are called Canon bits, some scaches, some melon bits, some pear bits, some campanels or bell bits, some bastonets, and some cats feet. Of which names, the first four are all ready well known unto our bitmakers, through the help of old Alexander the Italion rider who taught them first, both the shapes and also the names of the same. And sins that time they have also learned to make all the rest of the bits, though they have not so many proper names for them, as Grison giveth them, wherefore such names as they have not, I trust it shall not grieve them to learn now at Grisons hand. And specially I englishing them so aptly as I can, using therein I am sure for the most part their own terms. For I have not been negligent in learning at their hands, how to call every part of the bit by his proper name, as the cheeks & eyes thereof, the jeives, the rolls, rings, and buttons, the whole port, broken port, or upset mouth, with one plight within another, or with piece, the trench, the flap, the top roll, and the water chain, the neither chains and the kurble, and divers other terms belonging to their art, not here needful to be rehearsed. Note also that of the broken ports and upset mouths, some be complete, and some be not. The complete be those, which have both water chains, & also trenches above. For the others have but the one or tother, only. And for that cause I think Grison calleth them but half bits, as the half Canon, the half scach, the half Cat's foot. etc. But besides all this, he teacheth you of what fashion the Cheeks ought to be made, to serve divers mouths, either short or long, right out, or compassed. Also of what height the upper eyes of the cheeks ought to stand, and how high the broken ports and upset mouths ought to be, and which kind of closing is best, either with one plight within another, or with a rivet nail, or with piece, and also how the whole port ought to be made: And finally how the kurble ought to be made. But for so much as the cheeks and eyes thereof, and also the kurble are members common to both kinds of bits, so well to the close as open, I will therefore first treat of them, and then of the rest in their places, because the shapes of the close bits shallbe first presented unto you. And next to them, the broken ports upset mouths, and cats feet. And last of all, the whole ports, as well without trenches, as with trenches above.   

¶ Of the cheeks and eyes of bits, and also of the kurble, and how they ought to be made. Cap. xxiiii.  
until your horse then be thoroughly stayed of head, and specially if he bear to low, and bring his head in to much, let the cheeks of your bridle be right out: and not compassed. For the righter they be, with the neither ends coming to the manward, the less the bridle shall force the horses head, yea rather it shall make him to carry his head the hire, and his mosel the more outward. But the more compassed the cheeks be, with the neither end shooting out forward, the more they bring in his head. And therefore when the horse is once throughly stayed, it shall be most meet to use the compassed cheeks, which besides making the horse to reane kindly, do also give the better grace unto the bit in his mouth, and do make it the more comely and sightly. Again, such cheeks must be long or short, according to the greatness of stature and strength of the horse. And also partly according as he beareth his head. For if he be great of stature and weak of back, or carrieth his head low and not steady, than the cheeks would be somewhat longer than they be commonly used, and that shall make him to bear high. Albeit such length must very seldom be above a span. For unless necessity so requireth, it is better that the cheeks be short, then long, so that comeliness touching the stature of the horse be observed. And note here by the way, that according to Grison, the cheek called of him La guardia, is only that part, which extendeth from the nethermost eye, sustaining the jeyve downwards. For all the rest upward, he calleth Stanghetta. For the which our bytmakers have no proper name: And therefore from henceforth I will call it the head of the cheek, which head containeth the great eye, whereunto the jeyve is fastened, and a little hole above that, for the water chain, and also the upper eye, whereunto the portesmouth is put, which head together with the upper eye, if it mount high, it maketh the horse to bear high, both with neck and head. But if the head be short, so that the eye standeth low, than it causeth a contrary effect. But unless some necessity did otherwise force, I would wish it always to he in a mean, neither too high nor to low, but answerable to the rest of the bit.  

¶ Of the kurble.  
NOw as touching the kurble, it would be good and strong, and made with round links, fashioned in this sort like an. S. Neither do I allow for the most part any other fashion to be used than this, how hard or tender, soever the horse be of chin or beard. For the more that a hard chin is broken with rough kurbles, as those be which are made with square links and sharp pointed, like diamantes: the harder his chin will be, through the cornye flesh which will grow thereon, when it is whole. And so make the horse to care less for the bridle than he did before. And again on the other side, though the horse be never so tender of chin, yea, and also very tender of his bars or gums, which kind of horse is very hard to find, yet I would have neither his bit nor his kurble to be covered with cloth, as some men use to do. For though he be so tender in deed, yet it is not that which will give him boldness to stay his mouth upon the bit as he should do, yea rather I would wish you for a certain time to ride him without any kurble at all. And when ye see that he beginneth to stay somewhat upon the bridle, then make him a kurble of double fillet lace, otherwise called ynkle, of an inch broad, teying it no straiter, but so as it may keep the bit always at one stay in his mouth, which fillet, when he is once perfect, you may take away, and put in stead thereof, the kurble before declared. Or if you will, you may make him a kurble flat and smooth, like a flagon chain, and that perhaps shall offend him less.    

¶ Of close bits, for what mouths they are most meet, and also what vices they do correct, which vices you shall easily find by the titles following, and the fashions of the bits, by the numbers set in the margin, answering the numbers of the figures orderly, set altogether in the latter end of this book. Cap. xxv.  
FIrst than you shall understand that close bits are only meet for horses of a good nature, at the least of not to froward a nature, whose mouths such bits may easily frame: yea, and some of them are more meet to be used in the first breaking of a horse, than any other bit, as I told you before in the first book, willing you to ride your horse first with a Cannon bit with right cheeks, of what mouth soever he be, yea, and until he be throughly stayed of head, and perfect in all his doings I would never have you to change it.  

For a gentle mouth.  
But afterward if your horse have a gentle mouth, than you may ride him with a Cannon, having compassed cheeks.   

For a mouth something hard.  
If his mouth be somewhat hard, than you may ride him with a scache.   

For a tender mouth, and not great.  
If his mouth be not great, but tender and good, then besides the foresaid bits, you may very well use a smooth melon bit, having only a water chain above. And such melons may be made like olives.   

Against defending with the lip.  
Take a melon bit, let the melons be somewhat rounder and greater, having on each out side a playing ring, or else two rings next unto the middle joint as you may see in the four and .v. figure. But it were more to the purpose to take a pear bit or a round campanell, otherwise called a round bell bit or else a flat campanell: I call it flat, because the ends thereof are not rising and embossed out as the other is. And let not the pears of the pear bit, or the bells of the bell bit, be made with many edges or squares, for they are nought, but let them be smooth & round. And if either of them have a playing ring on the out side, it shall be so much the better to keep his lip away. Or else two playing rings next to the middle joint, of all which fashions you have example in the .6.7.8.9.10.11.12. figure.   

¶ For the same fault, and for holding out his tongue.  
You may also take for the same vice a scach with a turning roll or button on each side. And the greater such rolls be, the harder shall the bit be. Albeit I would wish them to be of a mean bigness, yea rather to be small and not very high rising. At th'ends whereof on either side next unto the middle joint, may be put two playing rings, yea, and if the rolls or buttons be not over broad, you may put three plaiing rings on a side. And such kind of bit is very good for a horse that will put out his tongue.   

¶ Other bits for the former fault of the lip, but not to be used very often.  
Though some for the same fault use to take a double pear bit, or a double campanell, that is to say, having two pears, or two bells on a side, or else a bastonet, which may be otherwise called a jeyve bit with round buttons, or rough rings made high like wheels, Yet I counsel you not to use them but very seldom, and specially the bastonet, with rough rings.  
And note that though round melon bits, campanelles, scaches and bastonets with buttons, be close bits, yet they be somewhat like unto the open bits, in that they partly give liberty unto the tongue. But beware that you make none of these bits or any other with a gag or spoon in the midst, as was used in old time, and yet is at these days, in some places of the world, for that is very nought. But if you would give your horse some thing to play on, then in stead of such gag or spoon, you may place in every one of these bits, a playing ring or two, on each side next unto the middle joint. And though there were none at all, it made no great matter.    

¶ Of open bits in general. Cap. xxvi.  
Having sufficiently spoken of close bits, how they ought to be made, and whereto they serve: I purpose now to speak of the open bits, otherwise called port bits, which be of more value, because they set the tongue at more liberty, which can make no resistance, the bit being out of his reach. Yea, these bits be so proper to correct any vice of the mouth, as by the help of them joined with art, and good order of riding, any horse may be made to have a good mouth. And first beginning with the broken ports, & upset mouths I will show you how such ports and upset mouths ought to be made, and how they may be locked, joined or fastened together, and which kind of locking is best. And than what vices they do correct, observing for the finding of the vices, and fashions of the bits, the order before declared & kept.   

¶ Of broken ports and upset mouths, how they ought to be made, and what vices they do correct. Cap. xxvii.  
YOu shall understand then, that so well broken ports as upset mouths ought to be made all of one piece together with the jeyves, and so to rise up with a round or square, meeting only in the top, whereas they must be joined together with a rivet nail, or with one plight with in another: or else with a piece, according as shall be most meet to serve the horse's mouth. For a rivet or piece doth make the bit harder, than when it is locked with one plight within another. And therefore such ports as are joined with one plight within another are meetest for most mouths. And do best stay both head and neck. And note that the square ports, otherwise called upsetmouthes, must not be fully so wide in the top, as they are beneath, neither must they or the round ports be to high or to low, for as over high forceth to sore, so overlowe giveth to little liberty. And therefore I would wish them to be in a mean, according as the horses mouth shall require, but so as it may give liberty unto his tongue, and not hurt the roof of his mouth, for that were a foul fault, and yet little considered in times past.  

¶ For a horse that hath tender bars, and doth swallow up his tongue.  
TAke a half Canon with a broken port, without any trenches above. And if you will, such a broken port, may be joined with a rivet nail. But it would be better if it were joined with one plight within an other, having only the water chain above, according as you may see in the first six figures of broken ports and upset mouths, whereof some be joined with rivets, some with one plight within another, and some with pieces.   

¶ For a horse that hath not tender bars, and yet swalloweth up his tongue.  
TAke a Canon with an upset mouth complete, having trenches above, full of little playing rings, beads or buttons, and such Canon may also be joined with a piece. Or else take a half Canon with an upset mouth, having trenches above, fastened in the place of the water chain, or if you will, for the same vice you may take a half scach with a broken port, or upset mouth, wrought like unto the half Canon, as before said. Of all which fashions you have examples in the .7.8.9.10.11.12.13.14. and .15. figures.   

¶ For a horse that hath somewhat hard bars, and swalloweth up his tongue.  
TAke a scache with an upset mouth complete, and such upset mouth may be joined with one plight within another, or else with a piece, which piece, as it giveth the tongue more liberty, so it maketh the horse's mouth more subject.   

For the same vice, and for defending with the lip.  
YOu may for the same vice make both this scach, & also the close scach with a round welt, about the bigness of a good big pack thread on the inside, so well above as beneath, which pinching him on the bars in his mouth, will not only make him the more subject, but also let him from defending with the lip. The fashion of which bit is plainly set forth in the .18. figure.   

For a horse that will draw up the bit with his tongue.  
TAke a half scache with an upset mouth, having a trench above in the place of the water chain, as you may see in the .19. figure. A half Canon also made in like sort doth correct the same vice, whereof you had an example before in the ninth figure.   

¶ For a horse that hath a little mouth and hard bars.  
TAke a Cat's foot or upset mouth complete, made with smooth melons or olives. But if his mouth be great and hard, let such bit be made with pears, or else with bells, otherwise called campanels. Of all which sorts you have examlpes in the .20.21. and 22. figures.   

¶ For a horse that hath a dry mouth and hard, and reaneth low, and perhaps defendeth with the lips.  
TAke a half cat's foot, made with smooth millons or with pears, or else with campanels if he defendeth with the lip, the fashions of which bits do follow the rest orderly. And to the water chain you may also put, if you will ii or four little , or players, to make the bit the more pleasant, that the horse may have some savour and delight therein.    

¶ Of whole ports, how they ought to be made, and what vices they do correct. Cap. xxviii.  
Though whole ports ought to be round, and made all of one piece, and not broken, or joined together in the top, as the others are, yet they must be broken beneath, and joined on both sides unto the jeyves, whereon the pears or bells are put. For those that run whole out with their arms, with out any breaking at all, be to rough, and therefore never good nor meet to be used. And on the top of such port, must hang the flap or player. Note also that of whole ports, some are made without trenches, & some have trenches above. But I will show you first the use of them without trenches.  

¶ For a horse that hath very hard bars.  
TAke a whole port with olives, or with smooth melons. And if such melons had on each out side one playing ring, it were the better.   

¶ For a horse that hath a great mouth and hard bars.  
Take a scach with a whole port.   

¶ For a horse that is hard of mouth, and defendeth very much with his neither lip.  
TAke a whole port with pears, or else with campanels, the shapes whereof are expressed in the iii and four figures. And you may choose whether you will have such campanels embossed out, or else flat at the ends. Moreover as well the pears, as Campanels, may have on each out side a playing roll, and thereby the bit shallbe of more sort and efficacy.    

¶ Of whole ports with trenches above, how they ought to be made, and for what mouths they are most meet. Cap. xxix.  
ALso you may make every one of these foresaid whole ports with trenches above, full of little rings, beads, or buttons, which trenches would be fastened as well to the port, as to the holes, whereas the water chain is wont to be placed, and not to the great eye of the cheek, where the jeyves are fastened. As they used in old time, and do still at these days in some places. And the higher the holes be, whereas such trenches should be fastened, the harder shall the bit be. And so shallbe any bit having trenches above in stead of the water chain, be it Canon, scach, or any other, whereof you had examples before in the .9 and 19 figures of the broken ports and upset mouths. But forsomuch as these whole ports, having trenches above, in stead of the water chain are very hard bits, they are not meet therefore to be used, but only for such horses as be of a very stubborn and froward nature, and be laden with great cheeks or jaws, having hard bars, and hard mouth. The shapes of which bits, you may see in the .5.6.7. and .8. last figures, but now to conclude although every one of the bits before rehearsed from the beginning to thending, may serve as you have hard, to some good purpose (being used in time) and in deed be so sufficient to correct any vice of the mouth, without doing the horse any harm, as I would wish you to seek no further, yet do they little prevail, unless the Rider have a good discretion, and be able to discern one mouth from an other, and to know when and how much to increase or to diminish the quality of the bit, and how to apply the same, which if he can do, and hath besides that, the true art of Riding, he shall not need the help of so many bits, but only of these three, that is the Cannon, the scach, and the whole port with smooth melons, or with olives, which three bits with art do suffice to frame any horse's mouth of what sort soever he be.  

¶ The shape or figure of the head-strain, to be made of good round cord.   

A plain Canone.   

A plain Scach.   

A smooth Melon bit.   

A smooth Melon bit somewhat rounder than the other.   

A Melon bit, having on each side two playing rings next the middle joint.   

A Pear bit.   

A pear bit, having on each out side one playing ring.   

A Pear bit, having on each side two playing rings next the middle joint.     


you shall see it needful. This medicine before rehearsed, is called of the ancient writers Diapente, that is to say, a composition of five simples, and is praised to be a sovereign medicine and preservative against all inward diseases, and therefore they would have such as travel by the way, to carry of this powder always about with them. There be many other medicines which I leave to write, because if I should rehearse every man's medicine, my book would be infinite. I for my part would use no other than either that before expressed, or else Wine and treacle only.   

Of the diseases in the head. The xvi Chapter.  
THe Head is subject to divers diseases, according to the divers parts thereof: for in the pannicles, or little fine skins, cleaving to the bones, and covering the brain, do most properly breed headache, and mygram. Again, in the substance of the brain, (which in a horse is very little or none) do breed the Frenzy, Madness, Sleeping evil, the taking, and forgetfulness. Finally, in the ventricles or celles of the brain, and in those cunduyets through which the spirits animal do give feeling, and moving to the body, do breed the turnesicke, or staggers, the falling evil, the night mare, the Appoplexye, the Palsy, and the convulsion or cramp. the Catharr or Rheum, which in a horse is called the Glanders, but first of headache.   

Of headache. The xvij Chapter▪  
THe headache either cometh of some inward cause, as of some choleric humour, bred in the panicles of the brain, or else of some outward cause, as of extreme heat, or cold, of some blow or of some violent savour. Eumelus saith, that it cometh of raw digestion, but Martin saith, most commonly of cold. The signs be these. The horse will hang down his head, and also hang down his ears, his sight will be dim, his eyes swollen, and waterish, and he will forsake his meat. The cure. Let him blood in the palate of his mouth. Also purge his head with this perfume. Take of Garlic stalks a handful, all to broken in short pieces, and a good quantity of Franconcense, and being put into a Chaufingdish of fresh coals, hold the Chaufingdishe under the horses nostrils, so as the fume may ascend up into his head, and in using him thus once or twice, it will make him to cast at the nose, and so purge his head, of all filth. Pelagonius saith, that it is good to pour into his nostrils, wine wherein hath been sodden Euforbium, Centuarye, and Franconcense.   

Of the Frenzy and Madness of a horse. The xviij Chapter.  
THe learned Physicians do make divers kinds, as well of Frenzye, as of Madness, which are not needful here to be recited, sith I could never read in any Author, nor learn of any Ferrer, that a horse were subject to the one half of them. Absirtus, Hierocles, Eumelius, Pelagonius, & Hipocrates, do write simply de furore & rabie, that is to say, of the madness of a horse. But in deed Vegetius in his second book of horseleech craft, seemeth to make four mad passions belonging to a horse, intituling his Chapters in this sort, de Appioso, de Frenitico, de Cardiacis, de Rabioso, the effects whereof though I fear me it will be to no great purpose, yet to content such as perhaps have read the Author as well as I myself: I will here briefly rehearse the same. When some naughty blood (saith he) doth strike the fylme or pannicle of the brain, in one part only, and maketh the same grievously to ache, than the beast becometh Appiosum, that is to say, as it seemeth by his own words next following, both dull of mind and of sight. This word Appiosum, is a strange word, and not to be found again in any other Author, and because in this passion, the one side of the head is only grieved, the horse turneth round, as though he went in a Mill. But when the poison of such corrupt blood doth infect the mid brain, than the horse becometh fantic, and will leap and fling, and run against the walls. And if such blood filleth the veins of the stomach, or breast, than it infecteth as well the heart, as the brain, & causeth alienation of mind, & the body to sweat, and this disease is called of Vegetius, Passio cardiaca, which if Equus Appiosus, chance to have▪ then he becometh Rabiosus, that is to say, stark mad. For (saith he) by over much heat of the liver, and of blood, the veins and arteries of the heart, are choked up, for grief and pain whereof, the horse biteth himself, and gnaweth his own flesh: thus far Vegetius. Of two sorts of mad horses I (believe) I have seen myself here in this Realm. For I saw once a black Sweathlande horse (as I took him to be) in my Lord of Hunnisdons' Stable at Hunnisdon, coming thither by chance with my lord Morlay, which horse would stand all day long biting of the Manger, & eat little meat or none, suffering no man to approach unto him, by which his doings, and partly by his colour and complexion. I judged him to be vexed with a melancholy Madness, called of the Physicians Mavia, or rather Melancholia, which cometh of a corrupt Melancholy, and filthy blood or humour, sometime spread throughout all the veins of the body, & sometime perhaps remaining only in the head, or else in the splen, or places next thereunto adjoining. The other mad horse was a Roan of Master Asheleys, Master of the jewel house, which with his teeth crushed his masters right forefinger in pieces, whilst he offered him a little hay to eat, whereby he lost in a manner the use of his whole hand, to the great grief of all his friends, and also of all the Muses, which were wont to be much delighted with such passing sweet Music as that his fine quavering hand could sometime make, upon diverse Instruments, but specially upon the virginals. This horse I say though he could eat his meat, drink his drink, & sleep, yet if he were never so little offended, he would take on like a sprite, and both bite and strike at any man that came nigh him▪ yea and would bite himself by the shoulders most tirribly, pulling away lumps of flesh, so broad as a man's hand, and when so ever he was ridden, he was fain to be muzzled with a mussel of Iron, made of purpose to keep him from biting, either his Rider or himself, which no doubt proceeded of some kind of frenzy or madness, whereunto the horse was subject, by means that hot blood (as I take it) abounded, over much in him. But now as touching the causes, signs, and cure of a horses madness, you shall hear the opinion of old writers, for Martin never took such cure in hand. Abfirtus, and the other Authors before mentioned say, that the madness of a horse cometh either by means of some extreme heat, taken by traveling, or long standing in hot sun, or else by eating over many Fitches, or by some hot blood resorting to the pannicles of the brain, or thorough abundance of Choler, remaining in the veins, or else by drinking of some unwholesome water. The signs be these, he will bite the Manger, and his own body, and run upon every man that comes nigh him, he will continually shake his ears, and stare with his eyes, and foam at the mouth, and also as Hypocrates saith, he will forsake his meat, and pine himself with hunger. The cure. Cause him to be let blood in his legs abundantly, which is done (as I take it) to convert the blood from his head. Notwithstanding it were not amiss, to let him blood in the neck & breast veins. Then give him this drink. Take the root of wild cucumber, and boil it in harse red wine, and put thereunto a little Nitre, and give it him with a horn luke warm, or if you can get no cucumber, then take rue, and Mynts, and boil that in the wine. It were not amiss also, to add thereunto a handful of black Elleborus, for that is a very good herb against madness. Eumelius saith, that if you give him man's dung in wine to drink three mornings together, it will heal him, also take of black Elleborus two or three handful, and boil it in a sufficient quantity of strong vinegar, and therewith rub and chause both his head, and all his body once or twice in a day, for the oftener his head is rubbed, the better, and often exercise is very profitable to all his body. Some again would have the skin of his head to be pierced in diverse places with a hot Iron, to let out the evil humours, but if none of all this will prevail, than the last remedy is, to geld him of both his stones, or else of one at the least, for either that will heal him, or else nothing. As touching the diet and usage of a mad horse, the Authors do not agree, for some would have him kept in a close, dark, and quiet house, void from all noise, which Absirtus saith, will either make him madder, or else kill him out of hand. His diet would be thin, that is to say, without any provender, and that day that he is let blood, & receiveth his drink, they would have him to fast until Even, and then to have a warm wash of Barley meal, yea me thinks it were not amiss, to feed him only with warm mashes and hay, and that by little at once, until he be somewhat recovered.   

Of the sleeping evil. The nineteen. Chapter.  
THIS is a disease forcing the beast continually to sleep, whether he will or not, taking his memory and appetite clean away, and therefore is called of the Physicians, Lethargus: it proceedeth of abundance of phlegm, moisting the brain over much. It is easy to know, by the continual sleeping of the horse. The cure of this disease according to Pelagonius, Vegetius, and others, is in this sort. Let him blood in the neck, and then give him this drink. Take of Camomyl, & Motherwort, of each two or three handful, & boil them in a sufficient quantity of water, and put thereunto a little wheat bran, salt, and Vinegar, and let him drink a pint of that every day, the space of three or four days together. It is good also to perfume and chaufe his head, with Time, and Peniryail sodden together in Uinegar, or with Brimstone and Feathers burned upon a chaufing dish of coals, under his nose, and to provoke him to niece, by blowing Pepper, and Perithre, beaten to powder, up into his nosetrils: yea and to anoint the palate of his mouth, with Honey and Mustard mingled together, and in his drink which would be always warm water, to put Parsely seed, & Fenel sede, to provoke urine. His legs also would be bathed, and his hooves filled with wheat bran, salt, and Vinegar, sodden together, and laid to, so hot as he may endure it, and in any case suffer him nor to sleep, but keep him waking, and stirring, by continual crying unto him, or pricking him with some sharp thing, that can not pass clean through the skin, or else by beating him with a whip, and thus doing he shall recover.   

Of a horse that is taken. The twenty Chapter.  
A Horse is said to be taken, when he is deprived of his feeling, and moving, so as he is able to stir no manner of way, but remaineth in such state or form, as he was taken in. Which disease is called of the Physicians by the Greek name Catalepsis, and in Latin Deprehensio, or Congelatio, and of Vegetius, Sederatio, which also calleth those beasts that have this disease lumenta sideratitia. The Physicians say, that it cometh of abundance of Phlegm, and Choler, mixed together, or else of Melancholy blood, which is a cold dry humour oppressing the hinder parts of the brain. But Vegetius saith, that it cometh of some extreme outward cold, striking suddenly into the empty veins, or of some extreme heat, or of raw digestion, or else of some great hunger, caused by long fasting. It is easy to know by the description before mentioned. And as touching the cure, Vegetius saith, that if it come of cold, than it is good to give him to drink, one ounce of Laserpitium, with wine and oil mixed together, and made lukewarm, if of heat, then to give it him with water and honey, it of crudite, then to heal him by fasting, if of hunger, then by feeding him well with pease. But Martin saith, that this disease is called of the French men Surprius, and it cometh (as he saith) most chief of cold, taken after a heat, and he wisheth a horse that is thus taken, to be cured in this sort. First to be let blood on both sides of the breast, and then to be put in a heat either by continual stirring, and molesting him, or else if he will stir by no means, then to bury him all save the head, in a warm dunghill, and there to let him lie, until his limbs have some feeling. And before you so bury him, it shall be good to give him this drink. Take of Malinesy three pints, and put thereunto a quartern of Sugar, and some Cinnamon and Cloves, and let him drink it good and warm, and until he be perfectly whole, let him be kept warm, and often excercised, and walked up and down in the stable, and thinly dieted. and drink nothing but warm water, wherein if you put foam Fenell, and Perslye seed, to provoke him to urine, it shall be the better. And if he cannot dung, let him be raked, and have a glister made of the broth of Mallows, and fresh butter.   

Of the Staggers. The xxi Chapter.  
THis is a doosinesse of the head, called of the Latens Vertigo, and of the Italians as I remember, Capistura. It cometh of some corrupt blood, or gross and tough humours▪ oppressing the brain, from whence proceedeth a vaporous spright, dissolved by a weak heat, which troubleth all the head. The signs be these: dimness of fight, the reeling and staggering of the horse, who for very pain will thrust his head against the walls, and forsake his meat. The cure according to Martin is thus. Let him blood in the temple veins, and then with a knife, make a hole of an inch long overthwart his forehead, hard underneath his foretop, and raise the skin with a cornette, thrusting it upward towards the headstal, a good handful, and then put in a teynt dypt in turpentine, and Hogs grease melted together, renewing the taint every day once, until it be whole, and do the like upon the ridge of the rump, but me thinks it were better to do the like in the paul of his head, or nape of his neck, for so should the evil humours have both ways the easier and spedyer passage: And as touching his diet, let him have continually warm drink, and mashes, and once a day be walked up and down fair and softly, to exercise his body.   

Of the Falling evil. The xxii Chapter.  
THis is a kind of convulsion or Cramp, called of the Latens by the Greek name, Epilepsia, in Italion, il morbo caduco, depriving the beast at certain times and for a certain space, of the use of feeling, hearing, and seeing, and of all the other senses. And though it be a disease, that hath been seldom seen, to chance unto horses, of this country, yet it appeareth by Absirtus, and also by Vegetius, & divers others, that horses be subject thereunto. For Absirtus writing unto his friend Tiberius Claudius, saith, that unto horses chanceth many times the falling sickness. The signs whereof are these. The horse will fall down suddenly, partly through the resolution of his members, and partly through dissension of his sinews, and all his body will quiver and quake, and sometime he will foam at the mouth. Vegetius again writeth in this sort, by a certain course of the Moon, horses and other beasts many times do fall, and die for a time, as well as men. The signs whereof are these. Being fallen, their bodies will quyver and quake, and their mouths will foam, and when a man would think that they would die out of hand, they rise suddenly up, and fall to their meat. And by feeling the grystle of their nostrils with your finger, you shall know whether they will fall often or not, for the more cold the gristle be, the oftener, and the less cold it be, the seldomer they will fall. The cure. Let him blood abundantly in the neck veins, and within five days after, let him blood again in the temple veins, and let him stand in a warm and dark stable, and anoint all his body, with comfortable ointments, and his head and ears with oil de Bay, and liquid Pitch or Tar, mingled together. And also put some thereof into his ears, and then make a Biggin for him of some soft warm skin, as of a sheeps skin, or else of Canvas, stuffed underneath with will, and make him this purging drink. Take of radish roots two ounces, of the root of the herb called in Latin Panax, or Panaces, & of Scammony, of each one ounce, beat all these things together, and boil them in a quart of honey, and at sundry times, as you shall see it needful, give him a good spoonful or two of this in a quart of Ale lukewarm, whereunto would be put three or four spoonful of Oil. It is good also to blow the powder of Motherwort, or of Pyrethrum, up into his nostrils, and if the disease do continue still for all this, than it shall be needful to pierce the skin of his forehead, in divers places with a hot iron, and to let out the humours oppressing his brain.   

Of the night Mare. The xxiii Chapter.  
This is a disease oppressing either man or beast, in the night season when he sleepeth, so as he can not draw his breath, and is called of the Latens Incubus. It cometh of a continual crudity, or raw digestion of the stomach, from whence gross vapours ascending up into the head, doth oppress the brain, and all the sensitive powers, so as they can not do their office, in giving perfect feeling and moving to the body. And if this disease chancing often to a man, be not cured in time, it may perhaps grow to a worse mischief: as to the Falling evil. Madness, or Apoplexy. But I could never learn, that horses were subject to this disease, neither by relation, nor yet by reading, but only in an old English writer, who showeth neither cause nor signs how to know when a horse hath it, but only teacheth how to cure it with a fond foolish charm, which because it may perhaps make you gentle reader to laugh, as well as it did me, for recreation sake I will here rehearse it. Take a flint stone that hath a hole of his own kind, and hang it over him, and write in a bill. In nomine patris. etc.  
Saint George our ladies knight,  
He walked day so did he night,  
Until he her found,  
He her beat and he her bound,  
Till truly her troth she him plight,  
That she would not come within the night,  
There as Saint George our ladies Knight  
Named was three times, Saint George.  
And hang this Scripture over him, and let him alone. With such proper charms as this is, the false Friars in times paste were wont to charm the money out of plain folks purses.   

Of the Apoplexy, and Pawlsye. The xxiiii Chapter.  
THe Appoplexye is a disease, depriving all the whole body of sense, & moving. And if it deprive but part of the body, than it is called of the Latins by the Greek name Paralisis, in our tongue a Pawlsie. It proceeds of cold, gross, and tough humours, oppressing the brain all at once, which may breed partly of crudites and raw digestion, and partly by means of some hurt in the head, taken by fall, stripe, or otherwise. As touching the Appoplexye, few or none writing of horseleech craft, do make any mention thereof. But of the Pawlsye Vegetius writeth in this manner. A horse (saith he) may have the Pawlsye as well as man, which is known by these signs. He will go groveling, and sydeling like a Crab, carrying his neck awry, as if it were broken, and goeth crookedly with his legs, beating his head against the walls, and yet forsaketh not his meat, nor drink, and his provender seemeth moist, and wet. The cure. let him blood in the temple vain, on the contrary side of the wrying of his neck, and anoint his neck with comfortable ointments, and splent it with splentes of wood, to make it stand right, and let him stand in a warm stable, and give him such drinks as are recited in the next Chapter following. But if all this profiteth not, then draw his neck with a hot iron, on the contrary side, that is to say on the whole side, from the neither part of the ear down to the shoulders, and draw also a good long strike on his temple, on that side, and on the other temple, make a little star in this sort * and from his reins unto his mid back, draw little lines in this manner & that will heal him.   

Of the Cramp or convulsion of the Sinews and muscles. The xxv Chapter.  
A Convulsion or Cramp, is a forcible and painful contraction or drawing together of the Sinews & muscles, which doth hap sometimes throughout the whole body, and sometime but in one part, or member only. And according as the body may be diversly drawn, so do the Physicians and also mine Authors, that writ of horseleech craft, give it divers names. For if the body be drawn forward, than they call it in Greek Emprosthotonos, in Latin Tensio ad anteriora. And if the body be drawn backward, it is called in Greek Opisthotonos, in Latin Tensio ad posteriora. But if the body be stark, and straight, bowing neither forward, nor backward, than it is called simply in Greek Tetanoes, in Latin Distentio, or Rigour. Which names also are applied to the like convulsions of the neck. Notwithstanding Vegetius writing of this disease, intytuleth his Chapters the Roborosis, a strange term, and not to be found again in any other Author. A Convulsion as I said before, may chance as well to one part or member of the body, as to the whole body, as to the eye, to the skin of the forehead, to the roots of the tongue, to the jaws, to the lips, to the arm, hand, or leg, that is to say, when so ever the sinew or Muscle, serving to the moving of that part, is evil affected, or grieved. Of which Convulsions, though there be many divers causes: yet Hipocrates bringeth them all into two, that is to say, into fullness, and emptiness: for when a Convulsion proceeds either of some inflammation, of superfluous eating or drinking, or for lack of due purgation, or of over much rest, and lack of exercise, all such causes are to be referred to repletion, or fullness. But if a Convulsion come by means of over much purging or bleeding, of much watching, extreme labour, long fasting, or by wounding, or pricking of the Sinews, than all such causes are to be referred unto emptiness. And if the Convulsion proceed of fullness, it chanceth suddenly, and all at once. But if of emptenesse, than it cometh by little and little, and laysurelye. Besides these kinds of Convulsions, there is also chancing many times in a man's fingers, legs, and toes, another kind of Convulsion, which may be called a windy Convulsion, for that it proceeds of some gross, or tough vapour, entered into the branches of the Sinews, which maketh them to swell, like a Lute string, in moist weather, which though it be very painful for the time, yet it may be soon driven away, by chaufing, or rubbing the member grieved, with a warm cloth. And this kind of Convulsion or Cramp, chanceth also many times to a horses hinder legs, standing in the stable. For I have seen some myself, that have had one of their hinder legs drawn up with the Cramp, almost to the belly, so stiff and hard as no man hath been able to stir it, neither could the horse himself, set it down to the ground of a long season, which I think might be soon remedied. First by continual chaufing and frotting his leg, with a good wisp, and then by teying up the other hinder leg, or else the forelegge on the sore side, whereby he should be forced to set down the pained leg. Thus far I have discoursed of the Convulsion of Sinews, and of the causes thereof, according to the opinions of the learned Physicians. Now I will briefly show you, the causes, signs, and cure thereof, according to the doctrine of mine Authors that write of horseleache craft. Absirtus saith, that this disease doth come, either by driving the horse into a sweat, when he halteth, for that he hath trodden upon some nail, or by taking cold after journeying, and sweeting in Winter season, whereby his lips are clung together, or by long lying & rest after sweeting, whereby the Sinews of his forelegges be numbed, or by having some stripe of his privy members, or by long traveling in the cold Mountains, where snow and Ice doth abound. For Theomnestus writeth, that coming out of Paeonia, with the king and his army, and passing over the mountains, to go into italy, there fell such abundance of Snow, as not only many Soldiers died, sitting still on their horses backs, with their weapons in their hands, being so stark and stiff, and cleaving so fast to their Saddelles, as they could not easily be pulled out of them: but also divers Horses in their going were so nummed, as they could not bow their legs, yea and some were found stark dead, standing still on their feet, and few horses or none escaped at that time, free from the Convulsion of Sinews, in so much as Theomnestus his own horse which he loved dearly, was sore vexed therewith. The signs to know whether a horse be troubled with the Convulsion of the sinews or not, be these. His head and neck will be so stiff and stark, as he can bow it no manner of way, his ears will stand right up, and his eyes will be hollow in his head, and the fleshy parts thereof, in the great corners, will be turned backward, his lips will be clung fast together, so as he can not open his mouth, and his tongue so numbed as he can neither eat nor drink, his backbone and tail will be so stiff, as he can not move it one way nor other, and his legs so stiff, as they will not bow, and being laid he is not able to rise, and specially on his hinder legs, but falleth down on his buttocks, like a dog when he sitteth on the ground, and by means of the Convulsion in his back, his bladder also for neighbourhood sake, suffereth, whereby the horse can not stolen, but with great pain. The cure. Put him into a sweat, either by burying him all save the head in some warm dunghill, or if he be a horse of price, carry him into a hot house, where as is no smoke, and let him sweat there. Then anoint all his body, head, neck, legs, and all, with oil of Cypress, and oil de Bay mingled together. Or else with one of these ointments. Take of Hogs grease two pound, of Terepenthin half a pound, of Pepper beaten in powder one Dram, of new Wax one pound, of old oil two pound, boil all these together, & being made very warm, anoint all his body therewith. Or else with this ointment. Take of new wax one pound, of Terepenthin four ounces, of oil de Bay as much, of Opoponax two ounces, of dears suet and of oil of Storax, of each three ounces, melt all these together, and anoint all his body therewith. It is good also, to bathe his head with the decoction of Fitches, or else of Lupins, and make him this drink. Take xx. grains of long Pepper, finely beaten into powder, of cedar two ounces, of nitre one ounce, of Lacerpitium as much as a Bean, and mingle all these together, with a sufficient quantity of white wine, and give him thereof to drink a quart every Morning & Evening, for the space of three or four days, or else this drink. Take of Opoponax two ounces, of Storax three ounces, of Gention three ounces, of Manna Succary, three ounces, of Mirre one scrupple, of long Pepper two scruples, and give him this with old wine, or make him a drink of Lacerpitium, Cummin, Annis sedes, Fengreke, Bay buries, and old oil. In old time they were wont to let him blood in the temples, which Absirtus doth not allow, saying, that it will cause the Sinews of his lips to dry up, so as the horse not being able to move them, shall pine for hunger. As touching his diet, give him at the first warm mashes, and such soft meat as he may easily get down, and wet hay, bringing him to harder food by little and little. And in any case, let him be kept very warm, and ridden or walked once a day to exercise his legs, and limbs. Theomnestus cured his horse as he saith, by placing him in a warm stable, & by making a clear fire without any smoke round about him, and the horse not being able to open his jaws of himself, he caused his mouth to be opened, and put therein sops dypt in a confertion, called Entrigon Conditum, and also anointed all his body with a medicine, or ointment called Acopum, (the making whereof hereafter followeth) dissolved in Cypress oil, which made him to fall into a sweat, and being before half dead and more, brought him again to his feeling, and moving, so as he did rise and eat his meat.  

The receipt of the medicine or ointment called Acopum.  
TAke of Euforbium two ounces, of Castoreum four ounces, of Adarces, half a pound, of Bdellium three ounces, of Pepper one pound, of Fox grease two ounces, of Opoponax four ounces, of Lacerpitium three ounces, of Amoniacum half a pound, of Pygions' dung as much, of Galbanum two ounces, of Nitrum five ounces, of Spumanitrie three ounces, of Laudanum one pound, of Perethrum, and of Bay buries, of each three ounces, of Cardamomum eight ounces, of the seed of rue half a pound, of the seed of Agnus Castus four ounces, of Parsley two ounces, of the dried roots of Ireos, or Flower de Luce, five ounces, of Isoppe and of Carpobalsamun one pound, of oil of Flower deluce, and oil de Bay, of each one pound & a half, of oil of Spiconard three pound, of Oleum Ciprinum, three pound and half, of the oldest oil Olive that you can possible get six pound, of Pitch not smelling of the smoke, one pound eight ounces, of Turpentine one pound, Melt every one of these that will melt, severally by themselves, and then mingle them together, with the rest of the simples beaten into fine powder, and after that they have been a little boiled on the fire, take it of, & strain it into a fair vessel, and whensoever you will give your horse any thereof, give it him with wine. And if with long keeping it waxeth hard, then soften it with oil of Cypress, so as it may be good & thick. This confection is both a medicine, & also an ointment, & is called of the old writers Acopum. Which if it be put into a horses nostrils, it will draw out all noisome humours, and discharge his head of all grief, yea this medicine healeth all Convulsions, colds, & dryness, or withering of the body, and driveth away all weariness, and tearing.    

Of cold in the head. The xxvi Chapter.  
ACcording as the cold which the horse hath taken is new, or old, great, or small, and also according as humours do abound in his head, and as such humours be thick or thin, so is the disease more or less dangerous. For if the horse casteth little or no matter out of his nose, nor hath no very great cough, but is only heavy in his head, and perhaps lightly cougheth now & than, it is a sign that he is stopped in the head, which we were wont to call the pose. But if his head be full of humours, congealed by some extreme told, taken of long time paste, and that he casteth foul, filthy, and stinking matter out at the nose, and cougheth grievously: than it is a sign, that he hath either the Glanders, or Stranguyllion, Mourning of the Chain, or Consumption of the Lungs. For all such diseases do breed for the most part of the Rheum, or distillation that cometh from the head. Of the cures thereof we leave to speak, until we come to talk of the diseases in the throat, minding here to show you how to heal the Pose, or cold before mentioned. Martin saith, it is good to purge his head by perfuming him with Franconcense, and also to provoke him to niece, by thrusting two Goose feathers dypt in oil de Bay up into his nostrils, and then to trot him up and down, the space of half an hour, for these feathers will make him to cast immediately at the nose. Laurentius Russius would have him to be perfumed, with wheat, Peniryall, and Sage, sodden well together, & put into a bag so hot as may be, which bag would be so close fastened to his head, that all the savour thereof, may ascend up into his nostrils, and his head also would be covered and kept warm: and to provoke him to niece he would have you to bind a soft clout, anointed with Soap, or else with Butter, and oil de Bay, unto a stick, and to thrust that up and down into his nostrils so high as you may conveniently go, & let him be kept warm, and drink no cold water. Yea it shall be good for three or four days, to boil in his water a little Senegreke, Wheat meal, and a few Annis seeds. And every day after that you have purged his head, by perfuming him, or by making him to niece, cause him to be trotted up and down, either in the warm Sun, or else in the house, half an hour, which would be done before you water him, and give him his provender.   

Of the diseases in the eyes. The xxvii Chapter.  
Horse's eyes be subject to divers griefs, as to be waterish, or bloudshotten, to be dim of sight, to have the pin and web, and the haw, whereof some comes of inward causes, as of humours resorting to the eyes, and some of outward causes, as of cold, heat, or stripe.   

Of weeping or watering eyes. The xxviii Chapter.  
THis as Laurentius Russius sayeth, may come sometime by confluence of humours, and sometime by some stripe, whose cure I leave to recite, because it doth not differ much, from Martin's experience here following. Take of Pitch, Rosen, and Mastic, like quantity, melt them together. Then with a little stick, having a clout bound to the end thereof, and dippeth therein: anoint the temple veins on both sides, a handful above the eyes, as broad as a Testern, and then clap unto it immediately, a few Flocks, of like colour to the horse, holding them close to his head, with your hand, until they stick fast unto his head, then let him blood on both sides (if both eyes be infected) a handful under the eyes. Russius also thinketh it good, to wash his eyes once a day, with pure white wine, and then to blow therein a little of Tartarum, and of Pomys stone, beaten into fine powder.   

Of bloudshotten eyes, for a blow, or itching, and rubbing in the eyes. The xxix Chapter.  
MArtin never used any other medicine, than this water here following wherewith he did always heal the foresaid griefs. Take of pure rose water, of Malmesy, of Fenell water, of each three spoonful, of Tutia, as much as you may easily take with your Thumb and Finger, of Cloves a dozen beaten into fine powder, mingle them well together, and being lukewarm, or cold, if you will, wash the inward parts of the eye, with a feather dipped therein, twice a day, until he be whole. Russius saith, that to blood shotten eyes it is good to lay the white of an Egg, or to wash them with the juice of Selidony.   

Of dimness of sight, and also for the Pin and web, or any other spot in the eye. The xxx Chapter.  
IF the Horse be dim of sight, or hath any pearl growing in his eye, or thin fylme covering the ball of his eye, than Russius would have you take of Pommis stone, of Tartarum, and of Sal Gemma, of each like weight, and being beaten into very fine powder, to blow a little of that into his eye, continuing so to do every day once, or twice, until he be whole. Martin saith that he always used to blow a little Sandyvoire into the eye once a day, which simple he affirmeth to be of such force, as it will break any pearl or web in short space, and make the eye very clear and fair. Russius amongst a number of other medicines, praiseth most of all the powder of a black flint stone.   

Of the Haw called of the Italians l'vnghia de gli occhi. The xxxi Chapter.  
THis is a gristle covering sometime more than the one half of the eye. It proceeds of gross, and tough humours, descending out of the head, which Haw, as Martin saith, would be cut away in this sort. first pull both the eye lids open with two several threads, stitched with a needle to either of the lids. Then catch hold of the Hawe with the stych of another needle & thread, and pull it out so far as you may stay it upon your finger, to the intent that you may cut it round the breadth of a penny, and leave the black behind. For by cutting away to much of the fat, & black of the eye, the horse many times becometh blear eyed. And the Haw being clean taken away, squirt a little white wine, or beer, into his eye.   

Of Lunatic eyes. The xxxii Chapter.  
VEgetius Writeth de Oculo Lunatico, but he showeth neither cause nor signs thereof: but only saith that the old men termed it so, because it maketh the eye sometime to look, as though it were covered with white, and sometime clear. Martin saith that the horse that hath this disease, is blind at certain times of the Moon, in so much as he seeth almost nothing at all during that time, and then his eyes will look yealowishe, yea and somewhat reddish, which disease according to Martin is to be cured in this sort. First use the plaster mentioned before in the Chapter of waterish or weeping eyes, in such order as is there prescribed, and then with a sharp knife make two slittes on both sides of his head, an inch long, somewhat towards the nose, a handful beneath the eyes, not touching the vain: and with a cornet loosen the skin upward, the breadth of a groat, and thrust therein a round piece of Leather, as broad as a twopenny piece, with a hole in the midst, to keep the hole open, & look to it once a day, that the matter may not be stopped, but continually run the space of ten days, then take the Leather out, and heal the wound with a little Flax dypte in the salve here following. Take of turpentine, of Honey, of Wax, of each like quantity, and boil them together, which being a little warmed, will be liquid to serve your purpose, and take not away the plasters from the temples, until they fall away of themselves, which being fallen, then with a small hot drawing iron, make a Star in the midst of each temple vain, where the plaster did lie. Which Star would have a hole in the midst, made with the button end of your drawing iron in this sort.   

Of the Cancer in the eye. The xxxiii Chapter.  
THis cometh of a rank and corrupt blood descending from the head, into the eye. The signs. You shall see red pimples, some small, and some great, both within and without upon the eye lids, and all the eye will look red, and be full of corrupt matter. The cure according to Martin is thus. First let him blood on that side the neck, that the eye is grieved, to the quantity of a pottle. Then take of roche Alum, of green Corporas, of each half a pound, of white Corporas one ounce, and boil them in three pints of running water, until the half be consumed, then take it from the fire, and once a day wash his eye with this water, being made lukewarm, with a fine linen cloth, and cleanse the eye therewith, so as it may look raw, continuing thus to do every day once until it be whole.   

Of diseases incident to the ears, and poll of the head, and first of an Impostume in the ear. The xxxiiii Chapter.  
IMpostumes breed either by reason of some blow, or brousing, or else of evil humours congealed in the ear by some extreme cold. The signs be apparent, by the burning & painful swelling of the ear and parts thereabout. The cure according to Martin, is in this sort. First ripe the Impostume with this plaster. Take of Lynesede beaten into powder, of wheat flower, of each half a pint, of Honey a pint, of Hogs grease, or Barrows grease one pound. Warm all these things together in an earthen pot, and stir them continually with a flat stick, or sclyce, until they be thoroughly mingled and incorporated together, and then spread some of this plaster being warm upon a piece of linen cloth, or soft white Leather, so broad as the swelling and no more, & lay it warm unto it, and so let it remain one whole day, and then renew it with fresh ointment, continuing so to do until it break: then lance the sore so as the matter may have passage downward, and taint it to the bottom, with a taint of Flax dipped in this ointment. Take of Metrosatum, of oil Olive, & Turpentine, of each two ounces: and mingle them together, and make him a Byggen of Canvas to close in the sore, so as the taint with the ointment may abide within, renewing the taint once a day, until it be whole. But if the horse have pain in his ears without any great swelling or Impostumation, then thrust in a little black will dipt in oil of Camamyll, and that will heal it.   

Of the paul evil. The xxxv Chapter.  
This is a disease like a Fistula growing betwixt the ears and the paul or nape of the neck, and proceedeth of evil humours, gathered together in that place, or else of some blow or browse, for that is the weakest and tenderest part of all the head, and therefore soonest offended, which rude Carters do little consider, whilst in their fury they beat their horses upon that place of the head, with their whipstockes, and therefore no horses be more subject to this disease, than cart horses. And this disease cometh most in Winter season. The signs. You shall perceive it by the swelling of the place, which by continuance of time will break of itself, rotting more inward than outward, and therefore is more perilous if it be not cured in time, and the sooner it be taken in hand the better. The cure according to Martin is thus. If it be not broken, ripe it with a plaster of Hogs grease, laid unto it so hot as may be, and make a Byggyn for the paul of his head to keep it from cold, which Biggin would have two holes open, so as his ears may stand out: and renew the plaster every day once until it break, keeping the sore place as warm as may be. And if you see that it will not break so soon as you would have it, than there as it is softest, and most meetest to be opened: take a round hot iron as big as your little finger, and sharp at the point, and two inches beneath that soft place, thrust it in a good deepness upward, so as the point of the iron may come out at the ripest place, to the intent that the matter may descend downward, & come out at the neither hole, which would be always kept open, and therefore taint it with a taint of Flax dypt in Hogs grease, and lay a plaster of Hogs grease also upon the same, renewing it every day once, the space of four days, which is done chief to kill the heat of the fire. Then at the four days end, take of Turpintyne half a pound, clean washed in nine sundry waters, & after that thoroughly dried, by thrusting out the water with a felyce on the dishes side, than put thereunto two yolks of Eggs, and a little Saffron, and mingle them well together: that done, search the depth of the hole with a whole quill, and make a taint of a piece of sponge, so long, as it may reach the bottom, and so big as it may fill the wound, and anoint the taint with the foresaid ointment, and thrust it into the wound, either with that quill, or else by winding it up with your finger and thumb, by little and little, until you have thrust it home: and then lay on the plaster of Hog's grease made lukewarm, renewing it every day once or twice, until it be whole. But if the swelling cease, than you need not to use the plaster, but only to taint it, and as the matter decreaseth, so make your taint every day lesser and lesser, until the wound be perfectly whole.   

Of the Uyves. The xxxvi Chapter.  
THe Uyves be certain kernels growing under the horse's ear, proceeding of some rank or corrupt blood resorting to that place. which within are full of little white grains, like white salt kernels. The Italians call them Vivole, which if they be suffered to grow, Laurentius Russius saith, that they will grievously pain the horse in his throat, so as he shall not be able to swallow his meat, nor to breath. They be easy to know, for that they may be felt, and also seen. The cure according to Martin, is in this sort. first draw them right down in the midst with a hot Iron, from the rote of the ear, so far as the tip of the ear will reach, being pulled down: and under the root again draw two strikes on each side, like an arrow head in this form then in the midst of the first line, lance them with a lancet, and taking hold of the kernels with a pair of Pynsons, pull them so far forward, as you may cut the kernels out, without hurting the vain, that done, fill the hole with white salt. But Hierocles would have them to be cured in this sort. Take a piece of Sponge soused well in strong Vinegar, & bind that to the sore, renewing it twice a day until it hath rotten the kernels, that done, lance it in the nethermost part where the matter lieth, and let it out, and then fill it up with salt finely brayed, and the next day wash all the filth away with warm water, and anoint the place with Honey and Fytch flower mingled together. But beware you touch none of the kernels with your bare finger, for fear of venoming the place, which is very apt for a Fistula to breed in.   

Of the cancorous Ulcer in the nose. The xxxvii Chapter.  
THIS disease is a fretting humour, eating and consuming the flesh, and making it all raw within: and not being helped in time, will eat thorough the gristle of the nose. It cometh of a corrupt blood, or else of sharp hunger, engendered by means of some extreme cold. The signs be these. He will bleed at the nose, and all the flesh within will be raw, and filthy stinking savours, and matter will come out at his nose. The cure according to Martin, is thus. Take of green Corporas, of Alom, of each one pound, of white Corporas one quartern, and boil these in a pottle of running water until a pint be consumed, then take it of, and put thereunto half a pint of honey: then cause his head to be holden up, with a drinking staff, and squirt into his nostrils with a squirt of Brass, or rather of Elder, some of this water being lukewarm, three or four times one after another, but betwixt every drinking, give him liberty to hold down his head, and to blow out the filthy matter, for otherwise perhaps you may choke him. And after this, it shall be good also without holding up his head any more, to wash and rub his nostrils with a fine clout bound to a white sticks end, and wet in the water aforesaid, and serve him thus once a day until he be whole.   

Of bleeding at the nose. The xxxviii Chapter.  
I Have seen horses myself, that have bled at the nose, which have had neither sore nor Ulcer in their nose, and therefore I can not choose, but say with the Physicians, that it cometh by means that the vain which endeth in that place, is either opened, broken, or fretted. It is opened many times by means that blood aboundeth to much, or for that it is to fine or to subtle, and so pierceth thorough the vain. Again it may be broken by some violent strain, cut, or blow. And finally it may be fretted, or gnawn through, by the sharpness of the blood, or else of some other evil humour contained therein. As touching the cure. Martin saith, it is good to take a pint of red Wine, and to put therein a quartern of Bole Armeni, beaten into fine powder, and being made lukewarm, to pour the one half thereof, the first day into his nosetril that bleedeth, causing his head to be holden up, so as the liquor may not fall out: and the next day to give him the other half. But if this prevaileth not, than I for my part, would cause him to be let, blood in the breast vain, on the same side that he bleedeth at several times. Then take Franconcense one ounce, of Aloes half an ounce, and beat them into fine powder, and mingle them thoroughly with the whites of Eggs, until it be so thick as Honey, and with soft Hares hair, thrust it up into his nosetrill, filling the hole so full, as it can not fall out, or else fill his nostrils full of Ass' dung, or Hogs dung, for either of them is excellent good to restrain any flux of blood.   

Of the diseases in the mouth, and first of bloody rifts or Chops in the palate of the mouth. The xxxix Chapter.  
THis disease is called of the Italians, Palatina, which as Laurentius Russius saith, cometh by eating hay or provender, that is full of pricking seeds, which by continual pricking, and fretting the furrows of the mouth, do cause them to rankle, and to bleed corrupt and stinking matter, which you shall quickly remedy as Martin saith, by washing first the sore places with Uinegar & salt, and then by anointing the same with honey.   

Of the Bladders in a Horse's mouth which our old Ferrer were wont to call the Gigges. The Italians call them Floncelle. The xl Chapter.  
THese be little soft swellings or rather postules with black heads▪ growing in the inside of his lips next unto the great jaw teeth, which are so painful unto the horse, as they make him to let his meat fall out of his mouth, or at the least to keep it in his mouth unchowed, whereby the horse prospereth not. Russius saith, that they come either by eating to much cold grass, or else of pricking, dusty, and filthy provender. The cure whereof according to Martin, is in this sort. slit them with a lancet, and thrust out all the corruption, & then wash the sore places, with a little Vinegar and salt, or else with Alom water.   

Of the Lampasse. The xli Chapter.  
THe Lampasse, called of the Italians Lampastus, proceedeth of the abundance of blood, resorting to the first forrowe of the mouth, I mean that which is next unto the upper foreteeth, causing the said sorrow to swell so high as the horses teeth, so as he can not chowe his meat, but is forced to let it fall out of his mouth. The remedy is to cut all the superfluous flesh away, with a crooked hot Iron, made of purpose, which every smith can do.   

Of the canker in the mouth. The xlii Chapter.  
THis disease as Martin saith, is a rawness of the mouth & tongue, which is full of blisters, so as he can not eat his meat. Which proceeds of some unnatural heat, coming from the stomach. For the cure whereof. Take of Alom half a pound, of Honey a quartern of a pint, of Colombine leaves, of Sage leaves, of each a handful. Boil all these together in three pints of water, until a pint be consumed, and wash the sore places therewith, so as it may bleed, continuing so to do every day once until it be whole.   

Of the heat in the mouth and lips. The xliii Chapter.  
SOmetime the heat that cometh out of the stomach, breedeth no canker, but maketh the mouth hot, & causeth the horse to forsake his meat. The cure whereof as Martin saith, is in this sort. First turn up his upper lip, and iagge it lightly with a lancet, so as it may bleed, and then wash both that and all his mouth & tongue, with vinegar and salt.   

Of the tongue being hurt with the bit, or otherwise. The xliiii Chapter.  
IF the tongue be cut or hurt any manner of way, Martin saith, it is good first to wash it with Alom water, and then to take the leaves of black Brimble, & to chop them together small with a little lard, that done to bind it within a little clout, making it round like a ball, then having dypt the round end in honey, to rub the tongue therewith: continuing so to do once a day, until it be whole.   

Of the Barbles, or Paps underneath the tongue. The xlv Chapter.  
THese be two little Paps called of the Italians Barbole, growing naturally (as I think,) in every horse's mouth, underneath the tongue, in the neither jaws, which if they shoot out of any length: Russius saith that they will hinder the horses feeding, and therefore he and Martin also, would have them to be clipped away, with a pair of shears, and that done, the horses mouth to be washed with Vinegar and Salt.   

Of the pain in the teeth, and gums, of the Wolves teeth, and jaw teeth. The xlvi Chapter.  
A Horse may have pain in his teeth, partly by descent of humours from his head, down into his teeth and gums, which is to be perceived by the rankness & swelling of the gums, & partly by having two extraordinary teeth, called the Wolves teeth, which he two little teeth growing in the upper jaws, next unto the great grinding teeth, which are so painful to the horse, as he can not endure to chowe his meat, but is forced either to let it fall out of his mouth, or else to keep it still half chowed, whereby the horse prospereth not, but waxeth lean and poor: and he will do the like also, when his upper jaw teeth be so far grown, as they overhang the neither jaw teeth, and therewith be so sharp, as in moving his jaws they cut and race the insydes of his cheeks, even as they were razed with a knife. And first as touching the cure of the pain in the teeth, that cometh by means of some distillation: Vegetius saith, it is good to rub all the outside of his gums with fine Chalk, & strong Vinegar mingled together, or else after that you have washed the gums with Vinegar, to strew on them the powder of Pomegranate pills. But me thinks that besides this, it were not amiss to stop the temple veins, with the plaster before mentioned, in the Chapter of weeping and waterish eyes. The cure of the wolves teeth, and of the jaw teeth according to Martin, is in this sort. First cause the horse head to be tied up to some Rafter or Post, and his mouth to be opened with a cord, so wide as you may easily see every part thereof. Then take a round strong Iron tool, half a yard long, and made at the one end in all points like unto the Carpenters Gouge, wherewith he pierceth his holes to be bored with a Wimble, or Awgor, and with your left hand set the edge of your tool at the foot of the Wolves teeth, on the outside of the jaw, turning the hollow side of the tool downward, holding your hand steadely, so as the tool may not slip, nor serve from the foresaid tooth: then having a mallet in your right hand, strike upon the head of the tool one pretty blow, and therewith you shall loosen the tooth, and cause it to bend inward: then staying the midst of your tool upon the horses neither jaw, wrinch the tooth outward, with the inside, or hollow side of the tool, & thrust it clean out of his head, that done, serve the other Wolves tooth on the other side in like manner, and fill up the empty places with salt finely brayed. But if his upper jaw teeth, do also overhang the neither teeth, and so cut the inside of his mouth, as is aforesaid, then keeping his mouth still open, take your tool and Mallet, & pair all those teeth shorter, running alongst them even from the first unto the last, turning the hollow side of your tool towards the teeth, so shall not the tool cut the insides of his cheeks, the back or round side being turned toward the foresaid cheeks, and that done wash all his mouth with Vinegar and salt, and let him go.   

Why the diseases in the neck, withers, and back, be declared here, before the diseases in the throat. The xlvii Chapter.  
Having hitherto spoken of the diseases incident to a horses head, and to all the parts thereof. Natural order requireth that we should now descend into the throat, as a part next adjacent to the mouth. But for so much as the diseases in the throat have not only affinity with the head, but also with the Lungs and other inward parts, which are many times grieved by means of distillation coming from the head, and through the throat: I will first speak of the diseases incident to the neck, withers, and back of a horse, to the intent that when I come to talk of diseases, as Rheums and distillations do cause: I may discourse of them orderly, without interruption   

Of the Crycke in the neck. The xlviii Chapter.  
Because a Crycke is no other thing, but a kind of Convulsion, and for that we have spoken sufficiently before, of all the kinds thereof in the Chapter of Convulsion: I purpose not here therefore to trouble you with many words. But only show you Russius opinion, and also Martin's experience therein. The Crycke then called of the Italians Scima, or Lucerdo: according to Russius, yea and according to Martin is, when the horse can not turn his neck any manner of way, but hold it still right forth, in so much as he can not take his meat from the ground, but by times, and that very slowly. Russius saith it cometh by means of some great weight laid on the horses shoulders, or else by over much drying up of the Sinews in the neck. The cure whereof according to Martin, is in this sort. Draw him with a hot iron from the root of the ear, on both sides of the neck, through the midst of the same, even down to the breast, a straw deep, so as both ends may meet upon the breast. Then make a hole in his forehead, hard under the foretop, and thrust in a cornette upward, betwixt the skin and the flesh, a handful deep, then put in a goose feather doubled in the midst, and anointed with Hog's grease, to keep the hole open, to the intent the matter may run out the space of ten days. But every day during that time, the hole must be cleansed once, and the Feather also cleansed, and fresh anointed and so put in again. And once a day let him stand upon the bit, one hour or two, or be ridden two or three Miles abroad, by such a one as will bear his head, and make him to bring it in. But if the Crycke be such, as the horse can not hold his neck straight, but clean awry, as I have seen divers myself: then I think it not good, that the horse be drawn with a hot Iron, on both sides of the neck, but only on the contrary side. As for example, if he bend his head toward the right side, then to draw him as is aforesaid, only on the left side, and to use the rest of the cure as is above said, and if need be you may splent him also with handsome staves meet for the purpose, to make his neck stand right.   

Of Wens in the neck. The xlix Chapter.  
A Wen, is a certain kernel like tumour or swelling, the inside whereof is hard like a grystell, and spongeous like a skin full of Wrettes. Of Wens some be great, & some be small. Again some be very painful, and some not painful at all. The Physicians say, that they proceed of gross and vicious humours, but Vegetius saith that they chance to a horse, by taking cold, or by drinking of waters that be extreme cold. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of Mallows, Sage, and red Netels, of each one handful, boil them in running water, and put thereunto a little butter, and honey, and when the herbs be soft, take them out and all to browse them, and put thereunto of oil of Bay two ounces, and two ounces of Hogs grease, and warm them together over the fire, mingling them well together, that done, plaster it upon a piece of Leather, so big as the Wen, and lay it to so hot as the horse may endure it, renewing it every day, in such sort, the space of eight days, and if you perceive that it will come to no head, than lance it from the midst of the Wen downward, so deep as the matter in the bottom may be discovered and let out, that done, heal it up with this salve. Take of turpentine a quartern, and wash it nine times in fair new water, than put thereunto the yolk of an Egg, and a little English Saffron beaten in powder, and make a taint or roll of Flax, and dip it in that ointment, and lay it unto the sore, renewing the same every day once, until it be whole   

Of swelling in the neck after blood letting. The l Chapter.  
THis may come of the Phlegm being rusty, and so causing the vain to rankle, or else by means of some cold wind striking suddenly into the hole. The cure according to Martin, is thus. First anoint it with oil of Camomile warmed, and then lay upon it a little hay wet in cold water, and bind it about with a cloth, renewing it every day, the space of five or six days, to see whether it will grow to a head, or else vanish away. If it grow to a head, then give it a slit with a lancet, and open it with a Cornet, that the matter may come out. Then heal it up, by tainting it with Flax dypt in Turpentine, and Hog's grease, melted together, dressing it so once a day, until it be whole.   

How to staunch blood. The li Chapter.  
IF a horse be let blood, when the sign is in the neck, the vain perhaps will not leave bleeding so soon as a man would have it, which if any such thing chance, than Russius saith, it is good to bind thereunto, a little new horsedong, tempered with chalk, and strong Vinegar, and not to remove it from thence, the space of three days, or else to lay thereunto, burnt Silk, Felt, or Cloth, for all such things will staunch blood.   

Of the falling of the Crest. The lii Chapter.  
THis cometh for the most part of poverty, and specially when a fat horse falleth away suddenly. The cure according to Martin, is thus. Draw his Crest the deepness of a straw, on the contrary side, with a hot iron, the edge of which iron, would be half an inch broad, and make your beginning, and ending, somewhat beyond the fall, so as the first draft may go all the way hard upon the edge of the main, even underneath the roots of the same, bearing your hand right downward, into the neckewarde, then answer that with an other draft beneath, & so far dystante from the first, as the fall is broad, compassing as it were all the fall: but still on the contrary side: and betwixt those two draughts right in the midst, draw a third draft, then with a button iron of an inch about, burn at each end a hole, and also in the spaces betwixt the draughts, make divers holes distant three fingers broad one from an other, as this figure doth show you: that done, to slake the fire, anoint it every day once, for the space of nine days, with a Feather dipped in fresh butter melted. Then take of Mallows and of Sage, of each one handful: boil them well in running water, and wash the burning away, until it be raw flesh. Then dry it up with this powder. Take of Honey half a pint, & so much slect lime as will make that honey thick, like past. Then hold it in a fire pan over the fire, until it be baken so hard, as it may be made in powder, & sprinkle that upon the sore places.   

Of the maunginesse in the Main. The liii Chapter.  
THe Maungynesse proceeds of rankness of blood, or of poverty, of lowsynesse, or else of rubbing where a Mangy horse hath rubbed, and of filthy dust lying in the Main, for lack of good dressing. The signs be aparaunt by the ytching and rubbing of the horse, and the scabs. fretting both flesh, and skin. The cure according to Martin, is thus. Take of fresh grease one pound, of quicksilver half an ounce, of Brimstone one ounce, of Rape Oil half a pint, mingle them together, and stir them continually in a pot with a sclyce, until the quicksilver be so wrought with the rest, as you shall perceive no quicksilver therein. That done, take a blunt knife, or an old horsecombe, and scratch all the mangy places therewith until it be raw, and bloody, and then anoint it with this ointment, in the sun shine, if it may be, to the intent the ointment may sink in: or else hold before it a fire pan, or some broad bar of Iron made hot, to make the ointment to melt into the flesh. And if you see that within the space of three days after, with this once anointing, he leave not rubbing: then mark in what place he rubbeth, and dress that place again, and you shall see it heal quickly.   

Of the falling of the hair of the Main. The liiii Chapter.  
IT falleth for the most part, because it is eaten with little worms, fretting the roots in sunder, which according to Martin, you shall remedy in this sort. Anoint the main, and crest with Soap, then make strong Lie, & wash all the main and crest withal, and that will kill the worms within twice, or thrice washing.   

Of griefs in the withers. The lu Chapter.  
TO a horses withers, and back, do chance many griefs and sorances, which as Russius saith, do sometime proceed of inward causes, as of the corruption of humours, and sometime of outward causes, as through the galling and pinching of some naughty saddle, or by some heavy burden, laid on the horses back, or such like. And of such griefs, some be but superficial blisters, swellings, light galls, or brousinges: and be easily cured. Some again do pierce to the very bone, and be dangerous, and specially if they be nigh the back bone: let us first then show you the cure of the smaller griefs, and then of the greater.   

Of Blystringes, or small swellings in the withers or back, and of gallings. The lvi Chapter.  
WHen so ever you see any swelling rise, than Martin would have you to bind a little hot horse dung unto it, and that will assuage it. If not, then to prick it round about the swelling, either with a phlegm, or else with a sharp pointed knife, not to deep, but so as it may pierce the skin, and make the blood to issue forth. That done. Take of Mallows, or else of Smallage, two or three handful, and boil them in running water, until they be so soft as pap. Then strain the water softly from it, and brose the herbs in a Treane dish, putting thereunto a little Hog's grease, or else Salet oil, or sheeps Suet, or any other fresh grease, boil them and stir them together, not frying them hard, but so as it may be soft and supple, and then with a clout lay it warm upon the sore, renewing it every day once, until the swelling be gone. For this will either drive it away, or else bring it to a head, which lightly chanceth not, unless there be some gristle or bone perished. Russius biddeth you, so soon as you see any swelling rise, to shave the place with a Razor, and to lay thereunto this plaster. Take a little wheat flower, and the white of an Egg beaten together, and spread it on a Linen clout, which being laid unto the swelling, two or three days, and not removed, will bring it to a head, and when you come to take it of, pull it away so softly as you can possibly, and where as you see the corruption gathered together, then in the lowest place thereof, pierce it upward with a sharp iron somewhat hot, that the corruption may come out, and anoint the sore place every day once, with fresh butter, or Hogs grease. But if the skin be only chafed of, without any swelling, then wash the place with water and salt, or else with warm wine, and sprinkle this powder thereon. Take of unsleyet lime▪ a quantity beaten in to fine powder, and mingle it with honey, until it be so thick as past, and make rolls or balls thereof, and bake them in a fire pan over the fire, until they be so hard, as they may be brought to powder, for this is a very good powder to dry up any galling or sore. The powder of myrrh or burnt Silk Felt or cloth, or of any old post, is also good for such purposes, but when so ever you use this powder of lime and honey, let the place he first washed as is aforesaid.   

Of great swellings and inflammations in a horses withers. The lvii Chapter.  
IF the swelling be very great, then the cure according to Martin is thus. First draw round about the swelling, with a hot iron, and then cross him him with the same iron in this manner then take a round hot iron having a sharp point, and thrust it into the swelling place on each side upward toward the point of the withers, to the intent that the matter may issue downward, at both the holes. That done, taint both the holes, first with a taint dipped in Hogs grease, to kill the fire, and also anoint all the other burnt places therewith, continuing so to do, until the swelling be assuaged, renewing the taints every day once, until the fiery matter be fallen away, and then taint him again with washed turpentine, mingled with yolks of Eggs, and Saffron, in such manner, as have been beforesaid renewing the taint every day once, until it be whole. If you see that the swelling, for all this go not away, than it is a sign of some impostumation within, & therefore it shall be necessary to lance it, and to let out the corruption, then take of honey half a pint, of Uerdigreace two ounces beaten to powder, and mingle it together with the honey, then boil them in a pot until it look red, then being lukewarm, make either a taint, or plaster, according as the wound shall require, renewing the same every day once until it be whole. But the sore may be so vehement, that for lack of looking to in time, it will pierce downward betwixt both shoulders, towards the entrails, which is very dangerous, yea and as Russius saith, mortal, because the corruption of the sore, infecting the Lungs, and heart (which be the vital parts, and chief preservers of life) the body must needs decay. And therefore, Martin would have you to fill the hole with the salve last mentioned, & to thrust in after it a piece of sponge, aswell to keep the hole open, as also to suck out the corruption, renewing it every day once, until it be whole.   

Of the horns or hard bones, growing under the Saddle side. The lviii Chapter.  
THis is a dead skin like a piece of leather, called of the italians Corno, that is to say a horn, for that it is hard under hand, and cometh by means of some straight saddle, pinching the horse more on the one side than on the other: or else on both sides equally. The cure whereof according to Martin, is in this sort. Anoint them with fresh butter, or Hogs grease, until they be mollified and made so soft, as you may either cut them, or pull them away, and then wash the wound with man's stolen, or with white wine, and dry it up with powder of unslect lime.   

Of Wens or knobs, growing about the Saddle skirts. The lix Chapter.  
THese be great hard knobs, growing most commonly betwixt two ribs, aparaunt to the eye, which by their hardness, seem to come of some old bruise, and are called of the Italians le Curte. The cure whereof according to Martin, is thus. First mollify them, by anointing them with hot Hogs grease, every day once or twice, the space of eight days, and if you perceive that it will come to no head with this, than lance it from the middle downward, that the matter may come out: then taint it with washed Turpentine, yolks of eggs, & saffron mingled together, as is aforesaid, renewing the taint every day once until it be whole.   

Of the Navel gall. The lx Chapter.  
THe Navel gall is a bruise on the back behind the Saddle, right against the Navel of the horse, and thereof it taketh his name. It cometh either by splytting of the Saddle behind, or for lack of stuffing, or by means of the hinder buckle, fretting that place, or else by some great weight laid on his back: you shall perceive it by the puffed up, & spongy flesh, looking like rotten lights or lungs, and therefore is called of the italians Pulmone or Pulmoncello. The cure whereof according to Martin, is thus. Cut it round about with a sharp knife or razor, even to the bone, leaving no rotten flesh behind: that done. Take the white of an Egg, and salt beaten together, and lay that plasterwise unto the sore, upon a little toawe, renewing it once a day, the space of two days. Then take of honey a quarter of a pint, and of Uerdigreace one ounce, beaten into powder, & boil them together in a pot, stirring it still until it look red, and being lukewarm, make a plaster with toawe, and clap it to the wound, washing and cleansing well the wound first, with a little warm vinegar, or white wine, continuing so to do once a day, until it begin to heal, and to skin, then dry it up, by sprinkling thereon this powder following. Take of Honey a quartern, and as much of slect lime as will thicken the honey like unto past, and in a fire pan over the fire stir it still until it be hard baked, so as it may be beaten into powder, but before you throw on the powder, wash the wound first, with warm Ueneger, continuing so to do, until it be perfectly skinned and whole.   

Of the swaying of the back. The lxi Chapter.  
THis is called of the Italians Mal feruto, and according to Russius, and Martin's opinions, cometh either by some great strain, or else by heavy burdens. You shall perceive it, by the reeling and rolling of the horses hinder parts, in his going, which will folter many times, and sway, sometime backward, and sometime sydeling, and be ready to fall even to the ground, and the horse being laid, is scant able to get up. The cure according to Martin is thus. Cover his back with a sheeps skin, coming hot from the sheeps back, laying the fleshy side next unto his back, and lay a warm howsing cloth upon the same, to keep his back as warm as may be, and so let it continue, until it begin to smell: then take the old skin away, and lay a new unto it, continuing so to do the space of three weeks, and if he amend not with this, then draw his back with a hot iron right out on both sides of the ridge of his back, from the pitch of the buttock, unto a handful within the Saddle, and then again overthwart, in this sort. And let every line be an inch distant, one from another, and let not such strikes be very deep, but so burned as every one may look yellow, then lay upon the burning this charge here following. Take of Pitch one pound, of Rosen half a pound, of bull Armonie half a pound made in powder, and half a pint of Car, and boil all these together in a pot, stirring it until every thing be melted, and thoroughly mingled together, then being lukewarm, daub all the burning therewith very thick, and thereupon clap as many Flocks of the horses colour, as you can make to bide on, and remove it not before it fall away of itself, and if it be in Summer, you may turn him to grass.   

Of weakness in the back. The lxii Chapter.  
IT doth appear by Laurentius Russius, that there is an other kind of weakness in the back, called in Italion le got, or morsecatura, de le reni, that is to say, the fretting or biting of the reins, which as the said Russius saith, proceedeth of abundance of humours, resorting to that place, whereby all the hinder parts of the horse do lose their feeling and strength, and the horse falleth down to the ground: yea & such humours many times resorting to the heart, do suffocate the same, and in two or three hours do cause the horse to die. The remedy according to Russius, is in this sort. Let him blood abundantly in the neck, and draw his back with a hot iron, in such sort as is declared in the last Chapter. He saith also, it is good to make him swim thorough a river, and to roll him upon the haunches, nigh the huckle bones: and to make the hair to grow again, it is good as he saith, to anoint the place with Hog's grease, and three leaved grass stamped together.   

Of hide bound. The lxiii Chapter.  
Hide bound is when the skin cleaveth so fast to the horses back, that a man can not pull it from the flesh with his hand, which Ruellius calleth Coriago, it cometh for the most part of poverty, or else when the horse after some great heat, hath been suffered to stand long in the rain or wet weather, for that will cause the skin to shrink, and to cling to his rib. It is known by the leanness of the horse, and gauntnesse of his belly, and by the fast sticking of the skin unto his ribs, when you pull at it with your hand. The cure according to Martin, is thus. Let him blood on both sides the belly, in the flank veins betwixt the flank, and the girding place, that done, give him this drink. Take a quart of good white wine, or else of good Ale, and put thereunto three ounces of good Salet oil, of Comen one ounce, of Annis seeds two ounces, of Lycoras two ounces, beaten all into fine powder, and give it him lukewarm with a horn. And when he hath drunk, let one standing at his huckle bone, rub him hard with his hand alongst the back, and overthwart the rib the space of half an hour, that done set him in a warm stable, and let him stand in litter up to the belly, and cover all his back and rib with a sack, first thoroughly soaked in a Tub of cold water, and then well and hard wrong, and over that cast an other cloth, and gird it fast with a sur-single, stuffing him well about the back with fresh straw, continuing thus to do every day once the space of a week, during which time give him no cold water, but lukewarm, and put therein a little ground malt. The wet sack will cause the back to gather heat of itself, and the skin to losen from the flesh, and if you will bestow more cost, you may anoint all his body, with wine and oil, mingled together, according to the opinions of the old writers, which no doubt is a very comfortable thing, and must needs supple the skin, and losen it from the flesh.   

Of the diseases in the throat and lungs, and why the griefs of the shoulders and hips be be not mentioned before amongst the griefs of the withers and back. The lxiiii Chapter.  
SOme perhaps would look here that for so much as I have declared the diseases of the neck, withers, and back, that I should also follow on now, with the griefs of the shoulders and hips. But sith that such griefs, for the most part do cause a horse to halt, and that it requireth some skill to know when a horse halteth, whether the fault be in his shoulder, hip, leg, joint, or foot, I think it not good to separate those parts a sunder, specially sith nature hath joined them together, that is to say, the shoulders to the forelegges, and the hips to the hinder legs. And therefore according to nature's order, I will treat of them in their proper place, that is to say, after that I have showed you all the diseases that be in the inward parts of a horses body, not only above the midriff, as the diseases of the throat, lungs, breast, and heart, but also under the Midriff, as those of the stomach, liver, Guts, and of all the rest. And first as touching the diseases of the throat, the Glanders, and Stranguyllion, to all horses is most common.   

Of the Glanders, and Stranguyllion, so called according to the Italion name Stranguijlione. The .lxv. Chapter.  
MOst Ferrer do take the Glanders and Stranguylion to be all one disease, but it is not so, for the Glanders is that which the Physicians call Tonsille, and the Stranguylion is that which they call in Latin Angina, in Greek Synanchi, and we commonly call it in English, the Squinancy, or Quinsy Toncille is interpreted by them to be inflammations of the kernels called in Latin Glandes', in Italion glandule, which lie on each side of the throat, underneath the rote of the tongue, nigh unto the swallowing place, of which word glans or glandule, I think we borrow this name Glanders, for when the horse is troubled with this disease, he hath great kernels underneath his jaws, easy to be seen or fealte, paining him so, as he can not easily swallow down his meat, which cometh first of cold distillation out of the head. But if such kernels be not inflamed, they will perhaps go away of themselves, or else by laying a little hot horse dung & straw unto them, the warmth whereof will dissolve them, and make them to vanish away. But if they be inflamed, they will not go away, but increase and wax greater and greater, and be more painful every day than other, and cause the horse to cast continually filthy and stinking matter, out at his nose. The cure whereof according to Martin, is thus. First ripe the kernels with this plaster. Take of Bran two handful, or as much as will thicken a quart of wine, or Ale: then put thereunto half a pound of Hogs grease, and boil them together, and lay it hot to the sore with a cloth, renewing it every day until it be ready to break: then lance it and let out all the matter, and taint it with a taint of Flax, dippeth in this salve. Take of turpentine, of Hog's grease, of each like quantity, and a little wax, and melt them together, and renew the taint every day until it be whole. Laurentius Russius saith, that this disease is very common to Colts, because in them doth abound fluxible moisture, apt to to be dissolved with every little heat, and so turn to putrefaction, and therefore if the horse be not over young, he would have you first to let him blood in the neck vain, and then to lay unto the sore a ryping plaster, made of Mallows, linseed, rue, Wormwood, ground ivy, oil of Bays, and Dyalthea, and to anoint his throat also, and all the sore place, with fresh butter. And the sore being ripe, to lance it, or else to roll it, that the matter may come forth. But if the kernels will not decrease with this, then pull them away by the roots, & to dry up the ulcerous place with an ointment, made of unslect lime, Pepper, brimstone, Nitrum, and oil Olive. It shall be good also to purge his head by perfuming him every day once, in such sort as have been before declared. And let the horse be kept warm about the head, and stand in a warm stable, and let him drink no cold water. But if you see that after you have taken away the kernels, the horse doth not for all that leave casting filthy matter at the nose, than it is to be feared, that he hath some spice of the mourning of the Chine, for both diseases do proceed of one cause, and therefore I think good to speak of it here presently.   

Of the mourning of the Chine. The lxvi Chapter.  
This word mourning of the Chine, is a corrupt name, borrowed of the French tongue, wherein it is called Mort deschyen, that is to say, the death of the back. Because many do hold opinion, that this disease doth consume the mary of of the back, for remedy whereof, they use strange kinds of cures. For some taking it to be a Rheum, go about to stop it, by laying Astrictyve, or binding charges, unto the nape of the neck. Some again do twine out the pith of the back with a long wyar, thrust up into the horse's head, and so into his neck & back, with what reason I know not. Well I know, that few horses do recover that have this disease. Some again think that the Lungs of the horse be rotten, and that the horse doth cast them out at his nose. But Martin saith, that he hath cut up divers horses which hath been judged to have died of the mourning of the Chine, but he could never find either back or Lungs to be perished, but only the liver, and most commonly that side of the liver, which answereth the nosetrill whereat he casteth, whereof we will talk in his proper place, when we come to speak of the diseases in the liver. The Italians do call this disease Ciamorro, the old Authors do call it the moist malady, whereof Theomnestus maketh two differences. For in the one, the matter which he doth cast at the nose is white, and doth not smell at all, and in the other, that which he casteth is a filthy and stinking corruption. They proceed both of cold humours, congealed in the head, but more abounding in the one, than in the other: by reason perhaps, that the horse was not cured in time: for of cold, first cometh the Pose, and the Cough, than the Glanders, and last of all the mourning of the Chine. When the horse casteth matter at the nose, that is not stinking, he may be easily cured, by such remedies as have been before declared in the Chapter of the Pose. But if the matter be very filthy and stinking, than it is very hard to cure. Notwithstanding it shall not grieve me to write unto you here, the experience of Theomnestus, and of Laurentius Russius. Theomnestus cure is thus. Take of water and honey called of the Physicians Hedromel, a quart, and put thereunto three ounces of oil, and pour that into his nosetril every morning, the space of three days, and if that do not profit him, then let him drink every day, or once in two days, a quart of old wine, mingled with some of the medicine, or rather the precious meat, called of the old writers Tetrapharmacum, and that will restore him to his former estate. Laurentius Russius saith, that of all diseases there is none more perilous, nor more to be suspected, than the Rhewine which cometh of cold, for horses have large Cunduits, and are full of moisture, and therefore if cold once enter, it findeth matter enough to work on, to breed continual distillation, as well outwardly at the nose, as inwardly, descending down to the vital parts▪ in such sort, as it doth suffocat the same. The signs according to the said Russius be these. The horse doth cast matter continually at the nose some time thin, and sometime thick, his nosetrils, ears, and all his outward parts, will be cold to the feeling, his eyes, head, and all his body heavy, and he will cough, and have small appetite to his meat, and less to his drink, and sometime he will tremble and shake. His cure is in this sort. Purge his head, partly by perfuming him, and partly by making him to niece in such sort, as hath been before taught in the Chapter of the Pose, which ways of perfuming & purging the head, as they be good, so doth Russius praise these two here following to be most excellent. The first is this. Take of the stalks of vitis Alba otherwise called Brioni, or wild vine, two or three good handful, and bruise them betwixt two stones, and being so brosed, put them into a Linen bag, and fasten the bag to the horses head, so as he may receive the scent up into his nostrils, without touching the herb with his mouth, and this will cause the humours to come down abundantly. The second medicine. Take of Euforbium beaten into fine powder three ounces, of the juice of Betes one pound, of Swine's blood half a pound. Boil all these together until they be thoroughly mingled, & liquid like an ointment, and then take it from the fire, and put thereunto one ounce more of Euforbium, and mingle them again thoroughly together, and preserve the same in a box to use at needful times, in this sort. Make two stiff long rolls, or tampins, of linen clouts, or such like stuff, sharp pointed like Sugar loves, which tampins are called of the Physicians in Latin Pessi, and being anointed with the ointment aforesaid, thrust them up into the horses nostrils, and let them abide therein a pretty while, then pull them out, & you shall see such abundance of matter, come forth at his nose, as is marvelous to behold. Russius also praiseth very much this medicine here following. Take as much of the middle bark of an Elder tree, growing on the water side, as will fill a new earthen pot, of a mean size, putting thereunto as much clear water, as the pot will hold, and let it boil until the one half be consumed: & then to be filled up again with fresh water, continuing so to do three times, one after an other, and at the last time, that the one half is consumed, take it from the fire, and strain it thorough a linen cloth. Then take two parts of that decoction, and one part of Hogs grease, or butter, and being warmed again together, give the horse to drink thereof one horn full, and pour an other hornefull into his nosetrill that casteth, and when so ever you give him this medicine, let the horse be empty and fasting, and keep him without meat also. two or three hours after. For this is a very good drink for any sickness, that cometh of cold. Moreover open the skin of his forehead, and of his temples, & also of his tail, with a sharp hot iron, that the corrupt humours may issue outward. That done. Take hot Bricks, or else a pan fresh burning coals, and hold it nigh unto his belly, and flanks, to the intent they may be thoroughly warmed, & being so warmed, anoint them all over, with oil de Bay, or Dialthea, to defend his body from the cold, and let his head be well covered, and all his belly kept warm. Yea and it were good to bathe his head sometime as Russius saith with a bathe made of Rhewe, Wormwood, Sage, juniper, bay leaves, and Hyssop. And let his drink be warm water mingled with wheat meal, yea and to make it the more comfortable, it were good as Russius saith, to put thereunto some Cinnamon, ginger, Galingale, and such hot spices. And his meat in Winter season would be none other but sodden corn, or warm mashes, made of ground Malt and wheat Bran: in Summer season if he went to grass, I think it would do him most good, so that he go in a dry warm ground, for by feeding always downward, he shall purge his head the better as Russius saith. Thus much of the Glanders, & mourning of the Chine. Now we will speak somewhat of the Stranguylion, according to the opinion of the old Authors, though not to the satisfaction perhaps of our English Ferrer.   

Of the Stranguylion or Squynancye. The lxvii Chapter.  
THe Stranguylion called of the Latens Angina, according to the Physicians, is an inflammation of the inward parts of the throat, and as I said before, is called of the Greeks Sinanchi, which is as much to say in English as a strangling, whereof this name Stranguylion as I think is derived, for this disease doth strangle either man or beast, & therefore is numbered amongst the perilous and sharp diseases, called of the Latens Morbi acuti, of which strangling the Physicians in man's body make four differences. The first and worst is, when no part within the mouth, nor without, appeareth manifestly to be inflamed, and yet the patient is in great peril of strangling. The second is, when the inward parts of the throat only be inflamed. The third is when the inward and outward parts of the throat be both inflamed. The fourth is, when the muscles of the neck are inflamed, or the inward joints thereof so losened, as they straighten thereby, both the throat, or weasand, or windpipe, for short breath is incident to all the four kinds before recited, and they proceed all of one cause, that is to say, of some Colorick or bloody fluxion, which comes out of the branches of the throat veins into those parts, and there breedeth some hot inflammation. But now to prove that a horse is subject to this disease, you shall hear what Absirtus, Hierocles, and Vegetius and others do say. Absirtus writing to his friend, a certain Ferrer or Horsleache, called Aistoricus, speaketh in this manner. When a horse hath the stranguylion, it quickly killeth him, the signs whereof be these. His temples will be hollow, his tongue will swell, & hang out of his mouth, his head and eyes also will be swollen, and the passage of his throat stopped, so as he can neither eat nor drink. All these signs be also confirmed by Hierocles. Moreover Vegetius rendereth the cause of this disease, affirming, that it proceeds of abundance of subtle blood, which after long travel, will inflame the inward or outward muskels of the throat or weasand, or such affluence of blood may come, by use of hot meats after great travel, being so alterative, as they cause those parts to swell in such sort, as the horse can neither eat nor drink, nor draw his breath. The cure according to Vegetius, is in this sort. First bath his mouth and tongue well with hot water, and then anoint it with the gall of a Bull, that done, give him this drink. Take of old oil two pound, of old wine a quart, nine Figs, and nine Leeks heads, well stamped and brayed together. And after you have boiled these a while, before you strain them, put thereunto a little Nitrum Alexandrinum, and give him a quart of this every morning, and evening. Absirtus and Hierocles, would have you to let him blood in the palate of his mouth, and to pour wine & oil into his nostrils, and also to give him to drink this decoction of figs and Nitrum, sodden together, or else to anoint his throat within with Nitre oil, and honey, or else with honey and Hogs dung mingled together, which differeth not much from Galen his medicine, to be given unto man. For he saith, that honey mingled with the powder of dogs dung that is white, and swallowed down, doth remedy the Squinancye presently. Absirtus also praiseth the ointment made of Bdellinum, and when the inflammation beginneth somewhat to decrease, he saith it is good to purge the horse, by giving him wild Concumbre, and Nitre to drink. Let his meat be grass, if it may be gotten, or else wet hay, and sprinkled with Nitre. Let his drink also be lukewarm water, with some Barley meal in it.   

Of the Cough. The lxviii Chapter.  
OF Coughs some be outward, and some be inward. Those be outward which do come of outward causes, as by eating a feather, or by eating dusty or sharp bearded straw, and such like things: which tycling his throat, causeth him to Cough. You shall perceive it by wagging and wrying his head in his choughing, & by stamping sometime with his foot, labouring to get out the thing that grieveth him, and can not. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take a Willow wand, rolled throughout with a fine Linen clout, and then anoint it all over with honey, and thrust it down his throat, drawing your hand to and fro, to the intent it may either drive down the thing that grieveth him, or else bring it up, and do this twice or thrice, anointing at every time the stick with fresh honey.   

Of the inward and wet Cough. The lxix Chapter.  
OF inward Coughs some be wet and some be dry. The wet cough is that, which cometh of cold, taken after some great heat given to the horse, dissolving humours, which being afterward congealed, do cause obstruction and stopping in the lungs. And I call it the wet cough, because the horse in his coughing, will void moystye matter at his mouth, after that it is once broken. The signs be these. The horse will be heavy, and his eyes will run a water, and he will forsake his meat, and when he cougheth, he thrusteth out his head, and reacheth with great pain at the first, as though he had a dry cough, until the Phlegm be broken, and then he will cough more hollow, which is a sign of amendment. And therefore according to Martin's experience, to the intent the Phlegm may break the sooner, it shall be necessary to keep him warm, by clothing him with a double cloth, and by littering him up to the belly with fresh straw, & then to give him this drink. Take of Barley one Peck, and boil it in two or three Gallons of fair water, until the Barley begin to burst, and boil therewith of browsed Lycoras, of Annis seeds, of Raisins, of each one pound, then strain it, and to that liquor, put of honey a pint, and a quartern of Sugercandy, and keep it close in a pot to serve the horse therewith four several mornings, and cast not away the sodden Barley with the rest of the strayninges, but make it hot every day to perfume the horse withal, being put into a bag, and tied to his head, and if the horse will eat of it, it shall do him the more good. And this perfuming in Winter season would be used about ten of the clock in the morning, when the sun is of some height, to the intent the horse may be walked abroad, if the sun shine, to exercise him moderately. And until his cough wear away, fail not to give him warm water, with a little ground Maulte. And as his cough breaketh more and more, so let his water every day be less warmed, than other.   

Of the dry Cough. The lxx Chapter.  
THis seemeth to come of some gross and tough humour, cleaving hard to the hollow places of the lungs which stoppeth the wind pipes, so as the horse can not easily draw his breath, & if it continue, it will either grow to the Pursick, or else break his wind altogether. The signs be these. He will cough both often, dryly, and also vehemently, without voiding at the nose or mouth. The cure according to Martin, is in this sort. Take a close earthen pot and put therein, three pints of strong Vinegar, and four Eggs, shells and all unbroken, and four Garlic heads clean peeled & browsed, and set the pot being very close covered, in some warm dunghill, and there let it stand a whole night: and the next morning with your hand take out the Eggs, which will be so soft as silk, & lay them by, until you have strained the garlic and Vinegar thorough a fair cloth, then put to that liquor, a quartern of honey, and half a quartern of Sugercandye, and two ounces of Lycoras, & two ounces of Annis seeds, beaten all into fine powder. And then the horse having fasted all the night before, in the morning betwixt seven and eight of the clock, open his mouth with a cord, and whorle therein one of the Eggs, so as he may swallow it down, and then immediately power in after it a horn full of the foresaid drink, being first made lukewarm, and then cast in an other Egg, with an other horn full of drink, and so continue to do, until he hath swallowed up all the Eggs, and drunk up all the drink: and then bridle him, and cover him with warmer clothes than he had before, and bring him into the stable, and there let him stand on the bit, at the bare rack, well littered up to the belly, the space of two hours. Then unbitte him, and if it be in Winter, offer him a handful of Wheaten straw, if in Summer, give him grass, and let him eat no hay, unless it be very well dusted, and sprinkled with water, and give him not much thereof. And therefore you shall need to give him the more provender, which also must be well cleansed of all filth, and dust, and give him no cold water, the space of nine days. And if you perceive that the cough doth not wear away, then if it be in Winter, purge him with these pills. Take of lard two pound laid in water two hours, then take nothing but the clean fat thereof, and stamp it in a mortar, and thereto put of Lycoras, of Annis seeds, of Fenegreke, of each beaten into powder three ounces, of Aloes in powder two ounces, of Agarice one ounce. knead these together like past, make thereof six balls, as big as an Egg. Then the horse having fasted over night, give him the next morning these pills, one after another, anointed with honey and oil mingled together, in a Platter, and to the intent he may swallow them down whither he will or not, when you have opened his mouth, catch hold of his tongue, and hold it fast whilst you whorle in one of the pills, that done, thrust it into his throat with a rolling pin, and then let his tongue go until he hath swallowed it down: then give him in like manner all the rest of the pills, & let him stand on the bit warm clothed, and littered the space of three hours at the least, and after that give him a little wet hay, and warm water with a little ground Maulte in it, to drink, and let him drink no other but warm water, the space of a week. And now and then in a fair sunny day, it shall be good to trot him one hour abroad, to breathe him.   

Of the fretized, broken, and rotten lungs. The lxxi Chapter.  
THis proceeds as Absirtus and Theomnestus saith, either of an extreme cough, or of vehement running, or leaping, or of over greedy drinking after great thirst, for the lungs be enclosed in a very thin film or skin, and therefore easy to be broken, which if it be not cured in time, doth grow to appostumation, and to corruption, oppressing all the lungs, which of the old Authors is called Vomica, and Supputatio. But Theomnestus saith, that broken lungs, & rotten lungs, be two divers diseases, and have divers signs, & divers cures. The signs of broken lungs be these. The horse draweth his wind short, and by little at once, he will turn his head often toward the place grieved, and groaneth in his breathing, he is afraid to cough, and yet cougheth as though he had eaten small bones. The same Theomnestus healed a friends horse of his, whose lungs were fretyzed or rather broken as he saith, by continual eating of salt, with this manner of cure here following. Let the horse have quiet and rest, & then let him blood in the haunches, where the veins appear most: and give him to drink the space of seven days, Barley or rather Oats, sudden in goats milk, or if you can get no milk, boil it in water, and put therein some thick Collops of lard, and of dears suet, and let him drink that: and let his common drink in winter season, be the decoction of wheat meal, and in Summer time, the decoction of Barley, and this as he saith will bind his lungs again together. Vegetius utterly disalloweth letting of blood in any such disease as this is, and also all manner of sharp medicines, for fear of provoking the cough, by means whereof the broken places can never heal perfectly. And therefore neither his medicines nor meat would be harsh, but smouth, gentle, and cooling. The best medicine that may be given him at all times is this. Take of Fengreke, and of linseed, of each half a pound, of Gum dragant, of Mastic, of myrrh, of Sugar, of Fytch flower, of each one ounce. Let all these things be beaten into fine powder, and then infused one whole night in a sufficient quantity of warm water, and the next day give him a quart of this lukewarm, putting thereunto two or three ounces of oil of Roses, continuing so to do many days together, and if the disease be new, this will heal him. Yea and it will ease him very much though the disease be old, which then is thought uncurable. And in winter season so long as he standeth in the stable, let him drink no cold water, & let his meat be clean without dust, but in Summer season it were best to let him run to grass. For so long as he eateth grass, a man shall scantly perceive this disease: thus much of broken lungs.   

Of putryfied or rotten lungs. The lxxii Chapter.  
THe signs to know whether a horses lungs be putrefied or rotten, according to Theomnestus, are these. The horse will both eat & drink more greedily than he was wont to do, and he shall be oftener vexed with a dry cough, and in coughing he will cast little lumps of matter out at his mouth. The cure whereof, according to Theomnestus, is thus. Give him to drink every morning, the space of seven days, the juice of Purslen mingled with oil of Roses, and add thereunto a little Tragagantum, that hath been laid before in steep in goats milk, or else in barley or oaten milk, strained out of the corn. When the Apostume is broken, than a very strong and evil savour will come out at his nostrils. For remedy whereof, it shall be good to give him the space of seven days this drink here following. Take of the root called Costus two ounces, and of Casia, or else of Cinnamon three ounces, beaten into fine powder, and a few Raisins, and give it him to drink with wine. But Vegetius would have him to be cured in this sort, and with less cost, I assure you. Take of Franconcense, and of Aristoloch, of each two ounces, beaten into fine powder, and give him that with wine, or else take of unburnt Brimstone two ounces, and of Aristoloch one ounce and a half beaten into powder, and give him that with wine. And he would have you also to draw his breast with a hot iron, to the intent that the humours may issue forth outwardly.   

Of shortness of breath. The lxxiii Chapter.  
A Horse may have shortness of breath, by hasty running after drinking, or upon a full stomach, or by the descending of humours unto his throat or lungs, after some extreme heat dissolving the said humours, which so long, as there is nothing broken, may in the beginning be easily helped. The signs be these. The horse will continually pant, and fetch his breath short, which will come very hot out at his nose, & in his breathing he will squeses in the nose, and his flanks will beat thick, yea and some can not fetch their breath unless they hold their necks right out, and straigth, which disease is called of the old writers by the Greek name Orthopnoea. The cure. Let him blood in the neck, and give him this drink. Take of wine, and of oil, of each a pint, of Franconcense, half an ounce, and of the juice of Horehound half a pint. It is good also to pour into his throat honey, butter, and Hogs grease melted together, & made lukewarm. Tiberius saith, it is good to give him whole Eggs, shells and all, steeped and made soft in Vinegar: that is to say, the first day three, the second day five, and the third day seven, and to pour oil and wine into his nostrils. I for my part would take nothing but Annis seeds, Lycoras and Sugercandy, beaten all into fine powder, give him that to drink, with wine and oil, mingled together.   

Of the Pursicke. The lxxiiii Chapter.  
THis is a shortness of breath, and the horse that is so diseased, is called of the Italians, Cavallo pulsino, or Bolso, which I think is derived of the Latin word Vulsus, by changing V into B. and I think differeth not much from him that hath broken lungs, called of Vegetius and other old writers Vulsus, for such shortness of breath comes either of the same causes, or else much like, as of abundance of gross humours cleaving hard to the hollow places of the lungs, and stopping the wind pipes. And the wind being kept in, doth resort downward as Russius saith, into the horses guts, and so causeth his flanks to beat continually without order, that is to say, more swiftly, and higher up to the back, than the flanks of any horse that is sound of wind. And if this disease be old it is seldom or never cured, and though I find many medicines prescribed by divers Authors, few or none do content me, unless it be that of Vegetius, recited before in the chapter of broken lungs. And if that prevaileth not, then I think it were not amiss according to Russius to purge him with this drink here following. Take of maiden hair, of Ireos, of Ash, of Lycoras, of Fengreke, of Raisins, of each half an ounce, of Cardamum, of Pepper, of bitter Almonds, of Baurach, of each two ounces, of Nettle seed, and of Aristoloche, of each two ounces, boil them all together in a sufficient quantity of water, and in that decoction dissolve half an ounce of Agaricke, and two ounces of Coloquintida, together with two pound of honey, and give him of this a pint or a quart at divers times, and if it be to thick, make it thinner, by putting thereunto water, wherein Lycoras hath been sodden, and if need be, you may also draw both his flanks crosswise with a hot Iron, to restrain the beating of them, and also slit his nostrils, to give him more air. And if it be in Summer, turn him to grass, if in Winter, let him be kept warm, and give him now and then a little sodden wheat. Russius would have it to be given him three days together, and also new sweet wine to drink, or else other good wine, mingled with Liquorice water.   

Of a Consumption. The .lxxv. Chapter.  
A Consumption is none other thing but an exulceration of the lungs, proceeding of some fretting or gnawing humour, descending out of the head into the lungs. And I take it to be that disease which the old writers are wont to call the dry malady. Which perhaps some would rather interpret to be the mourning of the Chine, with whom I intent not to strive. But thus much I must needs say, that every horse having the mourning of the Chine, doth continually cast at the nose, but in the dry malady it is clean contrary. For all the Authors that write thereof affirm, that the horse avoideth nothing at the nose. And the signs to know the dry malady according to their doctrine, be these. His flesh doth clean consume away, his belly is gaunt, and the skin thereof so hard stretched, or rather shrunk up, as if you strike on it with your hand it will sound like a Tabor, and he will be hollow backed, and forsake his meat, and though he eateth it, (as Absirtus saith) yet he doth not digest it, nor prospereth not withal, he would cough and can not but hickingly, as though he had eaten small bones. And this disease is judged of all the Authors to be incurable. Notwithstanding, they say all, that it is good to purge his head with such perfumes as have been showed you before, in the Chapter of the Glanders, & also to give him always Coleworts, small chopped with his provender. Some would have him to drink the warm blood of sucking Pigs new slain, and some the juice of Leeks, together with oil and wine mingled together. Others praise wine and Franconcense, some oil and Rhew, some would have his body to be purged, and sent to grass.   

Of the Consumption of the flesh, and how to make a lean horse fat. The lxxvi Chapter.  
MArtin saith that if a horse take a great cold after a heat: it will cause his flesh to waste, & his skin to wax hard & dry, & to cleave fast to his sides, and he shall have no appetite unto his meat, and the fillettes of his back will fall away, and all the flesh of his buttocks, and of his shoulders, will be consumed. The cure whereof is thus. Take two sheeps heads unfleaed, boil them in three gallons of Ale, or fair running water, until the flesh be consumed from the bones, that done, strain it through a fine cloth, and then put thereunto of Sugar one pound, of Cinnamon two ounces, of conserve of Roses, of Barbaries, and of Cherries, of each two ounces, and mingle them together, & give the horse every day in the morning, a quart thereof lukewarm, until all be spent: and after every time he drinketh, let him be walked up and down in the stable, or else abroad if the weather be warm, and not windy, and let him neither eat nor drink in two hours after, and let him drink no cold water, but lukewarm the space of fifteen days, and let him be fed by little and little, with such meat as the horse hath most appetite unto. But if a horse be nesh & tender, and so wax lean without any apparent grief or disease, than the old writers would have him to be fed now and then with parched wheat, & also to drink wine with his water, and to eat continually wheat bran mingled with his provender, until he wax strong, and he must be often dressed and trimmed, and lay soft, without the which things his meat will do him but little good. And his meat must be fine and clean, and given him often, and by little at once. Russius saith, that if a horse eating his meat with a good appetite, doth not for all that prosper, but is still lean: than it is good to give him Sage, Savyn, Bay buries, Earth nuts, and Boars grease, to drink with wine: or to give him the entrails of a Barble or Tench, with white wine. He saith also that sodden Beans mingled with bran and salt, will make a lean horse fat in very short space.   

Of grief in the breast. The lxxvii Chapter.  
LAurentius Russius writeth of a disease called in Italian Granezza di petto, which hath not been in experience amongst our Ferrer, that I can learn. It comes as Russius saith, of the superfluity of blood, or other humours dissolved by some extreme heat, and resorting down to the breast, paining the horse so as he can not well go. The cure whereof according to Russius is thus. Let him blood on both sides of the breast, in the accustemed veins, and rowel them under the breast, and twice a day turn the rowelles with your hand, to move the humours that they may issue forth, and let him go so rowelled the space of xu days.   

Of the pain at the heart called Anticor, that is to say contrary to the heart. The lxxviii Chapter.  
THis proceeds of abundance of rank blood bred with good feeding and over much rest. Which blood resorting to the inward parts, doth suffocate the heart, and many times causeth swellings to appear before the breast, which will grow upward to the neck, and then it killeth the horse. The signs. The horse will hang down his head in the manger, for saking his meat, and is not able to lift up his head. The cure according to Martin, is thus. Let him blood on both sides abundantly in the plat veins, and then give him this drink. Take a quart of Malmesy, and put thereunto half a quartern of Sugar, & two ounces of Cinnamon, and give it him lukewarm. Then keep him warm in the stable, stuffing him well about the stomach, that the wind offend him no manner of way, and give him warm water with malt always to drink, and give him such meat as he will eat. And if the swelling do appear, then besides letting him blood, strike the swelling in divers places with your phlegm, that the corruption may go forth: and anoint the place with warm Hogs grease, and that will either make it to wear away, or else to grow to a head, if it be covered and kept warm.   

Of tired horses. The lxxix Chapter.  
Because we are in hand here with the vital parts, and that when horses be tired with over much labour, their vital spirits wax feeble, I think it best to speak of them even here, not with such long discoursing as Vegetius useth, but briefly to show you how to refresh the poor horse, having need thereof, which is done chiefly by giving him rest, warmth, and good feeding, as with warm mashes and plenty of provender. And to quicken his spirits, it shall be good to pour a little oil and Vinegar into his nostrils, and to give him the drink of sheeps heads, recited before in the Chapter of the consumption of the flesh, yea and also to bathe his legs with this bath. Take of Mallows, of Sage, of each two or three handful, and a rose Cake. Boil these things together, and being boiled, then put unto it a good quantity of butter, or of Salad oil. Or else make him this charge. Take of bull harmony, and of wheat flower, of each half a pound, and a little Rosen beaten into powder, and a quart of strong vinegar: and mingle them together, and cover all his legs therewith, and if it be in Summer turn him to grass.   

Of the diseased parts under the midriff, and first of the stomach. The lxxx Chapter.  
THe old Authors make mention of many diseases incident to a horses stomach, as loathing of meat, spuing up his drink, surfeiting of provender, the hungry evil, and such like, which few of our Ferrer have observed: and therefore I will briefly speak, of as many as I think necessary to be known, and first of the loathing of meat.   

Of the loathing of meat. The lxxxi Chapter.  
A Horse may loath his meat through the intemperature of his stomach, as for that, it is to hot or to cold. If his stomach be to hot, then most commonly it will either inflame his mouth, and make it to break out in blisters, yea and perhaps cause some canker to breed there. The cure of all which things have been taught before. But if he forsake his meat only for very heat, which you shall perceive by the hotness of his breath and mouth, then cool his stomach by giving him cold water mingled with a little vinegar and oil to drink, or else give him this drink. Take of milk, and of wine, of each one pint, and put thereunto three ounces of Mel Rosatum, and wash all his mouth with Vinegar and salt. If his stomach be to cold, chen his hair will stare and stand right up, which Absirtus & others were wont to cure, by giving the horse good wine and oil to drink, and some would seethe in the wine, Rhew, or Sage, some would add thereunto, white Pepper and Myrrh, some would give him Onions and Rocket seed to drink with wine, some the blood of a young Sow with wine. Absirtus would have the horse to eat the green blades of wheat, if the time of the year will serve for it. Columella saith, that if a horse or any other beast do loath his meat, it is good to give him wine, and the seed of Gith, or else wine and stamped Garlic.   

Of casting out his drink. The lxxxii Chapter.  
VEgetius saith that the Horse may have such a Pawlsy proceeding of cold in his stomach, as he is not able to keep his drink, but many times do cast it out again at his mouth. The remedy whereof is to let him blood in the neck, and to give him cordial drinks, that is to say, made of hot and comfortable spices, and also to anoint all his breast and under his shoulders with hot oils, & to purge his head, by blowing up into his nosetrils, powders that provoke sneezing, such as have been taught you before.   

Of surfeiting with glut of Provender. The lxxxiii Chapter.  
THe Glut of Provender or other meat not digested, doth cause a Horse to have great pain in his body, so as he is not able to stand on his feet, but lieth down, & waltereth, as though he had the Bottes. The cure whereof according to Martin's experience is in this sort. Let him blood in the neck, then trot him up and down for the space of an hour, and if he can not stolen, draw out his yard, and wash it with a little white Wine lukewarm, and thrust into his yard either a bruised Clove of Garlic, or else a little oil of Camamill, with a wax Candle. If he can not dung, then rake his fundament, & give him this glistre. Take of Mallows two or three handful, and boil them in a pottle of fair running water, and when the Mallows be sudden, then strain it, and put thereunto a quart of fresh Butter, and half a pint of oil Olive, and having received this glister, lead him up and down, until he hath emptied his belly. Then set him up and keep him hungry, the space of three or four days, and the Hay that he eateth, let it be sprinkled with water, and let him drink warm water, wherein would be put a little bran, and when he hath drunk, give him the bran to eat, and give him little or no provender at all, for the space of eight or ten days.   

Of an other kind of surfeiting with meat or drink, called of us foundering in the body. The lxxxiiij Chapter.  
THis disease is called of the old writers in Greek Crithiasis, in Latin Hordiatio, it cometh as they say by eating of much Provender, suddenly after labour whilst the Horse is hot and panting, whereby his meat not being digested, breedeth evil humours, which by little and little do spread through his members, and at length do oppress all his body, and do clean take away his strength, & make him in such case as he can neither go, nor bow his joints, nor being laid is able to rise again, neither can he stale but with great pain. It may come also as they say, of drinking to much in traveling by the way when the horse is hot, but than it is not so dangerous, as when it cometh of eating to much. But how so ever it cometh, they say all, that the humours will immediately resort down into the horses legs, & feet, & will make him to cast his hooves: and therefore I must needs iudgeit to be no other thing but a plain foundering, which word foundering is borrowed as I take it of the French word Fundu, that is to say melted. For foundering is a melting or dissolution of humours, which the Italians call infusione. Martin maketh divers kinds of foundering, as foundering in the body, which the French men call most commonly morfundu, and foundering in the legs, and feet, also foundering before, and foundering behind, which some authors do deny, as Magister Maurus, and Laurentius Russius, affirming that there are fewer humours behind than before, and that they can not easily be dissolved or molten, being so far distant from the heart, and the other vital parts. Whereunto a man might answer, that the natural heat of the heart doth not cause dissolution of humours, but some unnatural and accidental heat, spread throughout all the members, which is daily proved by good experience. For we see horses to be foundered not only before or behind, but also of all four legs at once, which most commonly chanceth, either, by taking cold suddenly after a great heat, as by standing still upon some cold pavement, or abroad in the cold wind, or else for that perhaps the horse traveling by the way, and being in a sweat, was suffered to stand in some showld water whilst he did drink, which was worse than his drinking, for in the mean time the cold entering at his feet, ascended upward, and congealed the humours which the heat before had dissolved, and thereby when he cometh once to rest, he waxeth stiff and lame of all his legs. But leaving to speak of foundering in the legs, as well before as behind, until we come to the griefs in the legs and feet, we intend to talk here only of foundering in the body according to Martin's experience. The signs to know if a horse be foundered in his body be these. His hair will stare, & he will be chill and shrug for cold, and forsake his meat hanging down the head, and quiver after cold water, and after two or three days he will begin to cough. The cure according to Martin is thus. First scour his belly with the glistre last mentioned, and then give him a comfortable drink made in this sort. Take of Malmsey a quart, of Sugar half a quartern, of honey half a quartern, of cinnamon half an ounce, of Lyckoras and Annis seeds of each two spoonful, beaten into fine powder, which being put into the Malmsey, warm them together at the fire so as the honey may be melted, and then give it him lukewarm. That done walk him up and down in the warm stable the space of half an hour, and then let him stand on the bit two or three hours without meat, but let him be warm covered & well littered, and give him hay sprinkled with a little water, and clean sifted provender by little at once, and let his water be warmed with a little ground Malt therein. And if you see him somewhat cheered, then let him blood in the neck, and also perfume him once a day, with a little Frankincense, and use to walk him abroad when the weather is fair and not windy, or else in the house if the weather be foul, and by thus using him you shall quickly recover him.   

Of the hungry evil. The lxxxv. Chapter.  
THis is a greedy desire to eat following some great emptiness, or lack of meat, and is called of the old authors by the Greek name. Bulimos, which is as much to say, as a great hunger proceeding as the Physicians say at the first of some extreme outward cold, taken by long traveling in cold barren places, and specially where snow aboundeth, which outward cold causeth the stomach to be cold, & the inward powers to be feeble. The cure according to Absirtus and Hierocles, is in the beginning to comfort the horse's stomach, by giving him bread sopte in wine, and if you be in a place of rest, to give him wheat flower, and wine to drink, or to make him Cakes or Bails of flower and wine kneded together, and to feed him with that, or with wine and Nuts of pine trees. Hierocles saith, if any such thing chance by the way whereas no flower is to be had, than it shall be best to give him wine and earth wrought together, either to drink or else to eat in Balls.   

Of the diseases in the Liver. The lxxxvi Chapter.  
ALL the old Authors speak much of the pain in the liver, but none of them do declare whereof it cometh, or by what means, saving that Hipocrates saith, that some horses do get it by violent running upon some stony or hard ground. I for my part think that the liver of a Horse is subject to as many diseases, as the liver of a man, and therefore may be pained diversly. As sometime by the intemperateness of the same, as for that it is perhaps to hot or to cold, to moist or to dry: sometime by means of evil humours, as choler, or Phlegm, abounding in the same, according as the liver is either hot or cold: for heat breedeth choler, and cold Phlegm. By means of which intemperature proceedeth all the weakness of the liver. It may be pained also sometime by obstruction and stopping, and sometime by hard knobs, inflammation, apostume, or ulcer bred therein, sometime by consumption of the substance thereof. The signs of heat and hot humours be these, loathing of meat, great thirst and looseness of belly, voiding dung of strong scent, & leanness of body. The signs of cold, and cold humours be these: appetite to meat without thirst, belly neither continually lose, nor styptic, but between times, no strong scent of dung, nor leanness of body, by which kind of signs, both first and last mentioned and such like, the weakness of the liver is also to be learned and sought out. Obstruction or stopping most commonly chanceth by traveling or labouring upon a full stomach, whereby the meat not being perfectly digested, breedeth gross and tough humours, which humours by vehemence of the labour, are also driven violently into the small veins whereby the liver should receive good nutriment, and so breedeth obstruction and stopping. The signs whereof in man's body is heaviness, and distension, or swelling, with some grief in the right side, under the short ribs, and specially when he labourech immediately after meat, which signs I believe if it were diligently observed, were easy enough to find in a horse by his heavy going at his setting forth, & often turning his head to the side grieved. Of an old obstruction, and specially if he humours be Choleric, breedeth many times a hard knob on the liver, called of the Physicians Scirrhus, which in man's body may be felt, if the body be not over fat, and it is more casye for him to lie on the right side, than on the left, because that lying on the left side, the weight of the knob would oppress the stomach, and vital parts very sore, by which signs me thinks, a diligent ferrer may learn, whither a horse hath any such disease or not. The inflammation of the liver cometh by means that the blood either through the abundance, thinness, boiling heat, or sharpness thereof, or else through the violence of some outward cause, breaketh out of the veins, and floweth into the body of the liver, and there being out of his proper vessels, doth immediately putrefy, and is inflamed, and therewith corrupteth so much fleshy substance of the liver as is imbrued withal, and therefore for the most part the hollow side of the liver is consumed, yea and sometime the full side. This hot bloody matter then, is properly called an inflammation, which by natural heat, is afterward turned into a plain corruption, and then it is called an impostume, which if it break out & run, then it is called an ulcer, or filthy sore. Thus you see, that of one evil fountain may spring divers griefs, requiring divers cures. And though none of mine Authors, nor any other Ferrer that I know, have waded thus far, yet I thought good by writing thus much, to give such Ferrer as be wise, discrete, and diligent, occasion to seek for more knowledge and understanding than is taught them, and me thinks that it is a great shame, that the Ferrer of this age should not know much more, than the Ferrer of old time, sith that besides that, the old men's knowledge is not hidden from them, they have also their own experience, and time also bringeth every day new things to light. But now to proceed in discoursing of the liver according to the physicians doctrine as I have begun, I say then of an inflammation in the hollow side of the liver. The signs be these. Loathing of meat, great thirst, looseness of belly, easy lying on the right side, & painful lying on the left. But if the inflammation be on the full side or swelling side of the liver, than the Patient is troubled with difficulty of breathing, with a dry Cough, and grievous pain, pulling & twitching the wind Pipe, and to lie on the right side is more painful than on the left, & the swelling also may be felt with a man's hand. But you must understand by the way, that all these things last mentioned, be the signs of some great inflammation for small inflammations have no such signs but are to be judged only by grief under the short ribs, and long featching of the breath. The signs of Appostumation is painful, and great heat. The signs of Ulceration is decrease of the heat, with feablenesse & fainting. For the filthy matter flowing abroad with evil vapours, corrupteth the heart and many times causeth death. The signs of the consumption of the liver, shall be declared in the next Chapter, and as for the curing of all the other diseases before mentioned, experience must first teach it ere I can write it. Notwithstanding I can not think, but that such things as are good to heal the like diseases in man's body, are also good for a horse, for his liver is like in substance and shape to a man's liver, differing in nothing but only in greatness. And therefore I would wish you to learn at the physicians hands, which I am sure first as touching the weakness of the liver proceeding of the untemperateness thereof, will bid you to heal every such untemperateness by his contrary, that is to say, heat by cold, and dryness by moisture, and so contrary. And therefore it shall be very necessary for you to learn the qualities, natures, and virtues of herbs, drugs, and all other simples, and how to apply them in time. And for to heal the obstruction of the liver, they will council you perhaps to make to the horse, drinks of such simples, as these be, Agrimony, Fumitory, Camamill, wormwood, Lycoras, Annis seeds, Smallage, Perslye, Spicknard, Gentian, Succory, Endive, Sperage, Lupius, the virtues whereof you shall learn in the Herbals: but amongst all simples, there is none more praised than the liver of a Wolf beaten into powder, & mingled in any medicine that is made for any disease in the liver. The cure of an inflammation consisteth in letting blood, and in bathing, or fomenting the sore place with such herbs & oils, as may mollify & disperse humours abroad, wherewith some simples that be astringent, would be always mingled, yea and in all other medicines that be applied to the liver, for any manner of disease. Simples that mollify and disperse be these. Linesede, Fengreke, Camamill, Annis seeds, Melilot & such like things. Simples astringent be these. Red Rose leaves, Brimble leaves, Wormewode, plantain, Myrrh, Mastic, Styrax, and such like. apostumes are to be riped and voided. Ulcers must be cleansed, & scoured downward, either by the belly, or by urine, and therefore the use of such simples as provoke urine in such cases is necessary. The old writers of Horseleech craft do say, that when a horse is grieved in his liver, he will forsake his meat, & his body will waste, his mouth will be dry, his tongue rough and harsh, yea and it will swell, and he will refuse to lie on that side where his grief is. The cure whereof according to Absirtus is in this sort. Let him drink stamped Ireos with wine allayed with water. He praiseth also an herb much like unto Calamynt called of Pliny Polimonia, or let him drink savoury with wine and oil, I think that Agrimony or liver wort is as good as the best of them. Absirtus would have his body to be chafed with wine and oil mixed together, and to be well littered that he may lie soft, and his provender that should be given him, to be styped first in warm water, and now and then some Nytrum to be put in his drink.   

Of the consumption of the liver. The lxxxvij Chapter.  
I Believe that no inward member of a Horse doth suffer so much, as the Lungs and liver, and that not so much by continual, as by unordinate, and untimely travel, labour and exercise, whereby either the Horses Lungs or his liver do most commonly perish, and is consumed, yea and sometime both. Of the consumption of the Lungs, we have talked sufficiently before. Therefore let us show you here the causes whereof the consumption of the liver proceedeth. The Physicians say, that it may come of any humour, but chief and most commonly of Choleric matter, shed throughout the substance of the Liver, which putrefying by little and little, and laysurely doth at length corrupt, and perish all the substance of the liver, which thing in man's body doth first proceed as the Physicians say, either by eating corrupt meats, or else by continual drinking of sweet wines. But me thinks that the consumption of a horses liver should come by some extreme heat, inflaming the blood, which afterward being putrefied, doth corrupt and exulcerate the substance of the liver. For after inflammation, as I said before cometh appostumation, and then exulceration which is very hard to cure, because the substance of the liver is spongeous like unto the Lungs, & whilst the liver is so corrupted, there can be no good digestion, for lack whereof the body receiveth no good nutriment, and therefore must needs also languish and consume. The signs according to Martin be these. The horse will forsake his meat, and will stand stretching himself in length, and never covet to lie down, and his breath will be so strong as no man can abide it, and he will continually cast yealowishe matter at the one nosetrill, or else at both, according as one or both sides of the liver is corrputed, and on that side that he casteth he will have under his jaw, even about the midst thereof a knob or kernel as much as a Walnut, which when Martin findeth, he committeth his carcase to the Crows, taking him to be past cure. But if he were let blood in time and had such drinks given him, as are good to comfort and strengthen the liver, he thinketh that the horse might be recovered. I never read any medicine for the wasting of the liver as I remember, but this only diet, which I found in an old English book. Let him drink for the space of three days no other thing but warm wort, and let him eat no other meat but Oats baked in an Oven, and let him stand meatelesse the first night before you give him the wort. But I think it were not amiss to put into the wort that he drinketh, every morning some good confection or powder made of Agrimony, red Rose leaves, Saccharun Rosaceum, Diarchadon, Abbatis, Diasantalon, Lycoras, and of the liver of a Wolf, and such other simples as do comfort & strengthen the liver or else to give him the same things with goats milk lukewarm.   

Of the diseases in the Gall. The lxxxviij Chapter.  
IN my opinion the Gall of a Horse is subject to divers diseases as well as the Gall of a man, as to obstruction whereof cometh fullness and emptiness of the Bladder thereof, and also the stone in the Gal. But obstruction may chance two manner of ways. First, when the way whereby the choler should proceed, from the liver unto the Bladder of the Gall, as unto his proper receptacle, is stopped, & thereby the Bladder remaineth empty, whereof may spring divers evil accidents, as vomiting, the lax or bloody Flyx. secondly when the way whereby such choler should issue forth of the Bladder of the Gall, down into the Guts, is shut up, whereby the Bladder is over full, and aboundeth with to much choler, which causeth heaviness, suffocation, belching, heat, thirst, and disposition to angrynesse. The signs of both kinds of obstruction in the Gall is costluenesse, and yealowishnesse of the skin infected with the yellow jaundice. The stone in the gall which is somewhat blackish, proceedeth of the obstruction of the cunduyts of the Bladder, whereby the choler being long kept in, waxeth dry, and turneth at length to hard gravel, or stones, whereof because there is neither signs, nor any grievous accident known to the Physicians, I leave to talk any further thereof, and the rather for that none of my Authors do make any mention of the Gall at all. Notwithstanding to give some light unto the unlearned Ferrer, and that they may the better understand the inward parts of a horse, I thought good to write thus much, thinking it no time lost while I may profit them any way.   

Of the diseases in the Spleen. The lxxxix Chapter.  
THe spleen as I said before in the keepers office, is the receptacle of Melancholy and of the dregs of the blood, and is subject to the like diseases that the liver is, that is to say to swelling obstruction, hard knob, and inflammation, for the substance of the spleen is spongeous, and therefore apt to suck in all filth, and to delate itself, wherefore being full, it must needs swell, which will appear in the left side under the short rib, & such swelling causeth also shortness of breath, and specially when the body doth labour or travail. It is painful also to lie on the right side, because the splen being so swollen oppresseth the midriff, and specially when the stomach is full of meat, and the Patient hath worse digestion than appetite, & is troubled with much wind, both upward and downward. Moreover the vapour of the humour doth offend the heart making it faint, and causeth all the body to be heavy and dull, and if such swelling be suffered to go uncured, then if it be a Melancholy humour and abounding overmuch, it waxeth every day thicker and thicker, causing obstruction not only in the veins, and arteries, which is to be perceived by heaviness and grief on the left side, but also in the splen itself, whereas by virtue of the heat it is hardened every day more and more, and so by little and little waxeth to a hard knob, which doth not only occupy all the substance of the splen, but also many times all the left side of the womb, and thereby maketh all the evil accidents or griefs before recited, much worse than they were. Now as touching the inflammation of the splen which chanceth very seldom, for so much as every inflammation proceedeth of pure blood, which seldom entereth into the splen: I shall not need to make many words, but refer you over to the Chapter of the liver, for in such case they differ not, but proceeding of like cause have also like signs, and do require like cure. The old writers say, that horses be often grieved with grief in the splen, and specially in Summer season with greedy eating of sweet green meats, and they call those horses Lienosos, that is to say splenticke. The signs whereof (say they) are these, hard swelling on the left side, short breath, often groaning, and greedy appetite to meat. The remedy whereof according to Absirtus, is to make the horse to sweat once a day during a certain time, by riding him or otherwise traveling him, and to pour into his left nosetrill every day the juice of Mirabolaus mingled with wine, and water, amounting in all, to the quantity of a pint. But me thinks it would do him more good if he drank it as Hierocles would have him to do. Eumelius praiseth this drink. Take of cumin seed, and of honey, of each six ounces, and of Lacerpitium as much as a bean, of Vinegar a pint, and put all these into three quarts of water, and let it stand so all night, and the next morning give the horse to drink thereof, being kept overnight fasting. Theomnestus praiseth the decoction of Capers, specially if the bark of the root thereof may be gotten sudden in water to a Syrup, or else make him a drink of garlic, Nytrum, Horehound, and wormewode sudden in harsh wine, and he would have the left side to be bathed with warm water, & to be hard rubbed. And if all this will not help, then to give him the fire, which Absirtus doth not allow, saying that the splen lieth so, as it can not be easily fired, to do him any good. But for so much as the liver and splen are members much occupied in the engendering and separating of humours, many evil accydents and griefs do take their first beginning of them, as the jaundice called in a horse, the yealows, dryness of body, and consumption of the flesh, with out any apparent cause why, which the Physicians call Atrophia, also evil habit of the body called of them Cachexia, and the Dropsy. But first we will speak of the jaundice or yealows.   

Of the yealows. The xc Chapter.  
THe Physicians in man's body do make two kinds of jaundice, that is to say, the yellow proceeding of choler, dispersed thorough out the whole body, and dying the skin yellow, and the black proceeding of Melancholy dispersed like wise throughout the whole body, and making all the skin black. And as the yellow jaundice cometh for the most part either by obstruction or stopping of the conduits, belonging to the bladder of the Gall, which (as I said before) is the receptacle of Cholour, or by some inflammation of the liver whereby the blood is converted into Cholour, and so spreadeth throughout the body: even so the black jaundice cometh by means of some obstruction in the liver vain, that goeth to the spleen, not suffering the spleen to do his office, in receiving the dregs of the blood from the liver wherein they abound to much, or else for that the splen is already to full of such dregs, and so sheddeth them back agaime into the veins. But as for the black jaundice they have not been observed to be in horses as in men, by any of our Ferrer in these days that I can learn. And yet the old writers of horseleech craft, do seem to make two kinds of jaundice called of them Cholera, that is to say the dry choler, and also moist choler. The signs of the dry choler as Absirtus saith is great heat in the body, and costiveness of the belly, whereof it is said to be dry. Moreover the horse will not covet to lie down, because he is so pained in his body, and his mouth will be hot and dry. It cometh as he saith by obstruction of the conduit, whereby the choler should resort into the bladder of the Gall, and by obstruction also of the urine vessels, so as he can not stolen. The cure according to his experience is to give him a glister made of Oil, water and Nytrum, and to give him no provender before that you have raked his fundament, and to pour, the decoction of Mallows mingled with sweet wine into his nosetrels, & let his meat be grass, or else sweet hay sprinkled with nitre and water, and he must rest from labour & be often rubbed. Hierocles would have him to drink the decoction of wild Coleworts sodden in wine. Again of the moist choler or jaundice, these are the signs. The horses eyes will look yellow, and his nostrils will open wide, his ears and his flanks will sweat, and his stale will be yellow and Choleric, and he will groan when he lieth down, which disease the said Absirtus was wont to heal as he saith, by giving the horse a drink made of Time & Coming of each like quantity stamped together, & mingled with wine, honey and water, and also by letting him blood in the pasterns. This last disease seemeth to differ nothing at all from that which our Ferrer call the yeallows. The signs whereof according to Martin be these. The horse will be faint, and sweat as he standeth in the stable, and forsake his meat, and his eyes, and the inside of his lips and all his mouth within will be yellow. The cure whereof according to him, is in this sort. Let him blood in the neck vain, a good quantity, and then give him this drink. Take of white wine, or of Ale, a quart, & put thereunto of Saffron, of Turmerike, of each half an ounce, and the juice that is wrong out of a great handful of Selondine, and being lukewarm give it the horse to drink, and keep him warm the space of three or four days, giving him warm water with a little bran in it.   

Of the evil habit of the body and of the Dropsy. The xci Chapter.  
AS touching the dryness and consumption of the flesh without any apparent cause why, called of the Physicians as I said before Atrophia, I know not what to say more than I have done already before in the Chapter of Consumption of the flesh, and therefore resort thither, and as for the evil habitte of the body which is to be evil coloured, heavy, dull, and of no force, strength, nor liveliness, cometh not for lack of nutriment, but for lack of good nutriment, for that the blood is corrupted with Phlegm, choler or Melancholy, proceeding either from the spleen, or else through weakness of the stomach, or liver, causing evil digestion, or it may come by fowl feeding, yea and also for lack of moderate exercise. The evil habit of the body is next cousin to the dropsy, whereof though our Ferrer have had no experience, yet because mine old Authors writing of horse leech craft do speak much thereof: I think it good here briefly to show you their experience therein, that is to say, how to know it, and also how to cure it. But sith none of them do show the cause whereof it proceeds, I think it meet first therefore to declare unto you the causes thereof, according to the doctrine of the learned Physicians, which in man's body do make three kinds of Dropsyes, calling the first Anasarca, the second Ascites, and the third Timpanias. Anasarca is an universal swelling of the body through the abundance of water, lying betwixt the skin and the flesh, and differeth not from the disease last mentioned called Cachexia, that is to say evil habit of the body, saving that the body is more swollen in this than in the Cachexia, albeit they proceed both of like causes, as of coldness & weakness of the liver, or by means that the heart, splen, stomach, and other members serving to digestion, be grieved or diseased. Ascites is a swelling in the covering of the belly called of the Physicians Abdomen, comprehending both the skin, the fat, eight Muscles, and the fylme or panicle called Peretoneum, through the abundance of some wayish humour entered into the same, which be sides the causes before alleged, proceedeth most chiefly by means that some of the vessels within be broken or rather cracked, out of the which though the blood being somewhat gross can not issue forth, yet the wayish humour being subtle may run out into the belly, like water distilling through a cracked pot. Timpanias' called of us most commonly the Timpany, is a swelling of the foresaid covering of the belly, through the abundance of wind entered into the same, which wind is engendered of crudity and evil digestion, and whilst it aboundeth in the stomach, or other entrails, finding no issue out, it breaketh in violently through the small conduits amongst the pannicles of the said covering, not without great pain to the patient, & so by tossing to and fro, windeth at length into the space of the covering itself. But surely such wind can not be altogether void of moisture. Notwithstanding, the body swelleth not so much with this kind of dropsy, as in the other kind called Ascites. The signs of the dropsy is shortness of breath, swelling of the body, evil Colour, loathing of meat, and great desire to drink, and specially in the dropsy called Ascites, in which also the belly will sound like a Bottle half full of water, but in the Timpany, it will sound like a Tabor. But now though mine Authors make not so many kinds of Dropsyes, yet they say all generally that a horse is much subject to the dropsy. The signs according to Absirtus and Hierocles be these. His belly legs and stones, will be swollen, but his back, buttocks, and flanks, will be dried and shrunk up to the very bones. Moreover the veins of his face and temples, and also the veins under his tongue will be so hidden, as you can not see them, and if you thrust your finger hard against his body, you shall leave the print thereof behind, for the flesh lacking natural heat, will not return again to his place, and when the horse lieth down he spreadeth himself abroad not being able to lie round together on his belly, and the hair of his back by rubbing will fall away. Pelagonius in showing the signs of the dropsy, not much differing from the signs of the Physicians first recited, seemeth to make two kinds thereof, calling the one the Timpany which for difference sake may be called in English the wind dropsy, and the other the water dropsy. Notwithstanding both have one cure so far as I can perceive, which is in this sort. Let him be warm covered and walked a good while together in the sun to provoke sweat, and let all his body be well and often rubbed alongst the hair, and let him feed often on Coleworts, Smallage, and Elming bows, and of all other things, that may loosen the belly, or provoke urine, and let his common meat be grass if it may be gotten, if not, than hay sprinkled with water and Nitrum. It is good also to give him a kind of pulse called Cyche, steeped a day and a night in water, and then taken out, and laid so as the water may drop away from it. Pelagonius would have him to drink Parsley stamped with wine, or the root of the herb called in Latin Panax, with wine. But if the swelling of the belly will not decrease for all this, then slit a little hole under his belly a handful behind the Navel, and put into that hole a hollow Reed or some other Pipe, that the water or wind may go out, not all at once, but by little and little, and at divers times, and beware that you make not the hole overwide, lest the Caule of the belly fall down thereunto, and when all the water is clean run out, then heal up the wound as you do all other wounds, and let the Horse drink as little as is possible.   

Of the diseases in the guts of a Horse, and first of the Cholycke. The xcij Chapter.  
THe Guts of a horse may be diseased with divers griefs, as with the Colic, with costiveness, with the Lax, with the bloody flux, and worms. The Colic is a grievous pain in the great Gut, called of the physicians Colon, whereof this disease taketh his name, which gut because it is very large, and ample, and full of corners it is apt to receive divers matters, and so becometh subject to divers griefs. For sometime it is tormented with the abundance of gross humours, gotten betwixt the panycle of the said Gut, and sometime with wind having no issue out, sometime with inflammation, and sometime with sharp fretting humours. But so far as I can learn, a horse is most commonly troubled with the Colic, that cometh of wind, and thereof our ferrers do term it the wind Cholyck. The signs whereof be these. The horse will forsake his meat, & lie down and wallow, and walter upon the ground, and standing on his feet he will stamp for very pain with his forefeit, and strike at his belly with his hinder foot, and look often towards his belly, which also towards the flanks will swell, and seem greater to the eye, than it is wont to be. The cure whereof according to Martin is in this sort. Take a quart of Malmesye, of Cloves, Pepper, cinnamon, of each half an ounce, of Sugar half a quarter, and give it the horse luke warm, and anoint his flanks with oil of Bay, and then bridle him, and trot him immediately up and down, the space of an hour until he dung, and if he will not dung, then rake him, and if need be, provoke him to dung, by putting into his fundament an Onion peeled and jagged with a knife, crosswise, so as the juice thereof may tickle his fundament, and for the space of three or four days let him drink no cold water, and let him be kept warm. Russius was wont to use this kind of cure. Take a good big Reed a span long or more, and being anointed with Oil, thrust it into the horse's fundament, fastening the outward end thereof, unto his tail, so as it can not slip out, and then having first anointed and chafed all the horses belly, with some hot oil, cause him to be ridden somewhat hastily, up and down some hilly ground, and that will make him to void the wind out of his belly, through the Reed, which done, let him be kept warm, and fed with good provender & warm mashes made of wheat meal, and Fenell seed, and let him drink no cold water, until he be whole. Absirtus would have you to give him a glister made of wild cucumber, or or else of hens dung, Nytrum, and strong wine.   

Of costiveness, or belly bound. The xciij Chapter.  
costiveness is when a horse is bound in the belly and cannot dung, which may come by glut of provender, or over much feeding and rest, whereof we have talked sufficiently before, also by wind, gross humours, or cold causing obstruction, and stopping in the Guts. The cure whereof according to Martin is in this sort. Take of the decoction of Mallows a quart, and put thereunto half a pint of oil, or in stead thereof, half a pint of fresh Butter, and one ounce of benedict laxatuae, and pour that into his fundament with a little horn meet for the purpose, that done clap his tail to his fundament, holding it so still with your hand, whilst an other doth lead him in his hand, and trot him up and down, that the medicine may work the better, and having voided all that in his belly, bring him into the Stable, and there let him stand a while on the bit well covered, & warm littered, and then give him a little hay, and let his drink be warmed, it shall not be amiss also to give him that night a warm mashe.   

Of the Lax. The xciiij Chapter.  
THe Italians call this disease Ragiatura, and the horse that hath this disease Cavallo arragiato, or Sforato. It may come through the abundance of Choleric humours descending from the liver, or Gall, down to the Guts. But Russius saith, that it cometh most commonly, by drinking over much cold water immediately after provender, or by sudden traveling upon a full stomach, before his meat be digested, or by hasty running, or galloping immediately after water. If this disease continue long it will make the horse very weak, & feeble, so as he shall not be able to stand on his legs. Notwithstanding sith nature feeling herself oppressed, endeavoureth thus to ease herself by expelling those humours that grieve her, I would not wish you suddenly to stop it, lest some worse inconvenience grow thereof. But if you see that the horse loseth his flesh, and waxeth more dull and feeble than he was wont to be, then give him this drink often experimented by Martin, and that shall stop him. Take of bean flower, and of bull Armeny or each a quartern, mingle these things together in a quart of red wine, and give it him lukewarm, and let the horse rest and be kept warm, and let him drink no cold drink but lukewarm, and put therein a little bean flower, and let him not drink but once a day, and then not over much for the space of three or four days.   

Of the bloody flux. The 95 Chapter.  
IT seemeth by the old writers that a horse is also subject to the bloody flux. For Absirtus, Hierocles, and Democritus say all with one voice, that the Guts of a horse may be so exulcerated that he will void bloody matter at his fundament, yea and that his fundament therewith will fall out, which disease they call Disenteria, which is as much to say, as a painful exulceration of the Guts, under the which the old men, as it seemeth by the words of Hierocles and Absirtus, would comprehend the disease called of the Physicians Tenesmus, that is to say a desire to dung often, and can do but little, and that with great pain: And also an other disease called Procidentia ani, that is to say the falling out of the fundament, which the Physicians do account as several diseases. Notwithstanding for somuch as Disenteria and Tenasmus doth spring both of like causes, yea and also for that the falling out of the fundament hath some affinity with them, I will follow mine Authors, in joining them all together in this one Chapter. The Physicians make divers kinds of bloody flix. For sometime the fat of the slimy filth which is voided, is sprinkled with a little blood, sometime the matter that voideth is mixed with the scrapings of the guts, and sometime it is waterish blood, like water wherein bloody flesh hath been washed, and sometime blood mixed with Melancholy, and sometime pure blood, and by the mixture of the matter you shall know in man's body whether the ulceration be in the inner small guts, or in the thick outward guts, for if it be in the inner guts, than the matter and blood will be perfectly mixed together. But if it be in the outward guts, than they be not mingled together, but come out severally, the blood most commonly following the matter. Of this kind is that disease called before Tenasmus, for that is an ulcer in the right gut serving the fundament, and doth proceed even as the flux, doth of some sharp humours which being violently driven, and having to pass thorough many crooked and narrow ways, do cleave to the guts, and with their sharpness fret them, causing exulceration and grievous pain. The flyx may come also of some extreme cold, heat, or moistness, or by mean of receiving some violent purgation, having therein over much Scamonie, or such like violent simple, or through weakness of the liver, or other members serving to digestion. Now as touching the falling out of the fundament, the Physicians say, that it cometh through the resolution, or weakness of the muscles serving to draw up the fundament which resolution may come partly by over much straining, and partly they may be losened, by over much moisture, for which cause, children being full of moisture are more subject to this disease than men. And for the self same cause I think that horses having very moist bodies be subject thereunto. Thus having showed you the causes of the diseases before recited, I will show you the cure prescribed by the old writers. Absirtus would have the fundament on the out side to be cut round about, but so as the inward ring thereof be not touched, for that were dangerous and would kill the horse, for so much, as his fundament would never abide within his body, & that done he would have you to give him to drink the powder of unripe Pomegranate shells, called in Latin Malicorium, together with wine and water, which in deed because it is astringent is not to be misliked, but as for cutting of the fundament I assure you I can not judge what he should mean thereby, unless it be to wyden the fundament, by giving it long slittes or cuts on the out side, but well I know that it may cause more pain, & greater inflammation. And therefore me thinks it were better in this case to follow the physicians precepts, which is first to consider whither the fundament being fallen out, be inflamed or not, for if it be not inflamed, than it shall be good to anoint it first with oil of Roses somewhat warmed, or else to wash it with warm red wine. But if it be inflamed, then to bathe it well, first with a sponge dipped in the decoction of Mallows, Camamil, Linescede, and Fengreke, and also to anoint it well with oil of Camomile & Dill, mingled together, to assuage the swelling, and then to thrust it in again fair and softly, with a soft linen cloth. That done, it shall be good to bathe all the place about with red wine, wherein hath been sodden Acatium, Galls, Accorne cups, parings of Quinces, and such like simples as be astringent, & then to throw on some astringent powder made of bull Armeny, Frankincense, Sanguis Draconis, Myrrh, Acatium, and such like. Yea and also to give the horse this drink much praised of all the old writers. Take of Saffran one ounce, of Myrrh two ounces, of the herb called in Latin Abrotanum, named in some of our English Herbals Sothernwod, three ounces, of Parslie one ounce, of Garden Rhew otherwise called herb grace, three ounces, of Pirethum, otherwise called of some spittlewort, and of Isop, of each two ounces, of Cassia which is like cinnamon, one ounce. Let all these things be beaten into fine powder, & then mingled with Chaulk, & strong Vinegar wrought into a paste, of which paste make little Cakes, and dry them in the shadow, and being dried, dissolve some of them in a sufficient quantity of Barley milk, or juice, called of the old writers, and also of the physicians Cremor Ptisanae, & give the horse to drink thereof with a horn: for this medicine, as the Authors writ doth not only heal the bloody Flix▪ and the other two diseases before recited, but also if it be given with a quart of warm water, it will heal all grief and pain in the belly, and also of the Bladder, that cometh for lack of stalling. And being given with sweet wine, it will heal the biting of any Serpent or mad dog.   

Of the Worms. The xcvi Chapter.  
IN a Horse's guts do breed three kinds of Worms, even as there doth in man's body, though they be not altogether like in shape. The first are long and round, even like to those that children do most commonly void, and are called by the general name worms. The second are little worms having great heads, and small long tails like an Edle, and be called Bottes. The third be short & thick like the end of a man's little finger, and therefore be called Troncheons: And though they have divers shapes, according to the diversity of the place perhaps where they breed, or else according to the figure of the putrefied matter whereof they breed, yet no doubt they proceed all of one cause, that is to say of a raw gross and phlegmatic matter apt to putrification, engendered most commonly by fowl feeding, and as they proceed of one self cause, so also have they like signs, & like cure. The signs be these. The horse will forsake his meat, for the Tronchons and the Bolts will covet always to the Maw & pain him sore. He will also lie down and wallow, and standing he will stamp & strike at his belly with his hinder foot, and look often toward his belly. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of sweet milk a quart, of honey a quartern, and give it him lukewarm, and walk him up and down for the space of an hour, and so let him rest for that day, with as little meat or drink as may be, and suffer him not to lie down. Then the next day give him this drink. Take of herb grace a handful, of Sauine as much, and being well stamped, put thereunto a little Brimstone, and a little soot of a Chimney beaten into fine powder, and put all these things together in a quart of wort or new Ale, and there let them lie in steep the space of an hour or two, then strain it well through a fair cloth, and give it the horse to drink lukewarm, then bridle him, and walk him up and down the space of an hour, that done bring him into the Stable, and let him stand on the bit two or three hours, and then give him a little hay. Laurentius Russius saith, that it is good to give the horse the warm guts of a young Hen, with a little salt three days together in the morning, and not to let him drink until it be Noon. Some say that it is good to ride him having his bit first anointed with dung, coming hot from the man. Some again use to give him a quantity of Brimstone, and half as much Rosen beaten into powder & mingled together with his provender, which he must eat a good while before he drinketh.   

Of the pain in the kidneys. The xcvij Chapter.  
ME thinks that the kidneys of a horse should be subject to as many griefs as the kidneys of a man, as to inflammation, obstruction, apostumes, and Ulcers, and specially to obstruction, that cometh by means of some stone or gravel gathered together in the kidneys, whereby the horse cannot stale but with pain, for I have seen divers horses myself that have voided much gravel in their stale, which without doubt did come from the kidneys, but my Authors do refer such griefs to the bladder, & urine, and write of no disease but only of the inflammation of the kidneys, which is called of them Nephritis, and so is it also called of the Physicians. It cometh as they say by some great strain in leaping over some ditch, or else by bearing some great burden. The signs whereof be these. The horse will go rolling behind and staggering, his stones will shrink up, and his stale will be blackish and thick. I think this disease differeth not from that which we called before the swaing of the back, when we talked of the griefs in the back and loins, and therefore resort thither. The cure of this disease according to the best of the old writers is in this sort. Bathe his back and loins, with wine, oil, and Nytrum, warmed together, and after that you have so bathed him, let him be covered with warm clothes, and stand littered up to the belly with straw, so as he may lie soft, and give him such drinks as may provoke urine, as those that be made with Dil, Fenell, Annis, Smallage, Perslie, Spicknard, Myrrh, & Cassia. Some say it is good to give him a kind of pulse called Cyche, with wine. Some again do praise Ewes milk, or else Oil and Deres suet molten together to be given him to drink, or the root of the herb called Asphodelus englished by some Daffodil sodden in wine.   

Of the diseases belonging to the Bladder and urine of a horse. The xcviij Chapter.  
HIerocles saith that a horse is subject to three kinds of diseases incident to the bladder or urine, the first is called Stranguria, the second Disuria, the third Ischuria. Stranguria otherwise called in Latin Stillicidium, and of our old Ferrer according to the French name Chowdepis, is when the horse is provoked to stolen often, and voideth nothing but a few drops, which cometh as the Physicians say either through the sharpness of the urine, or by some exulceration of the bladder, or else by means of some apostume in the liver or kidneys, which apostume being broken, the matter resorteth down into the bladder, and with the sharpness thereof causeth a continual provocation of pissing. Disuria is when the horse can not piss but with great labour and pain, which for difference sake I will call from henceforth the paynepisse. It may come some time through the weakness of the bladder, & cold intemperature thereof, and sometime through the abundance of Phlegmatic, and gross humours, stopping the neck of the bladder. Ischuria is when the horse can not piss at all, and therefore may be called the pissupprest, or suppression of urine whether you will: me thinks always the shorter a proper name be, the better, and more easy to pronounce. It may come as the Physicians say, by weakness of the bladder, or for that the water conduit is stopped with gross humours, or with matter descending from the liver or kidneys, or with the stone, yea and sometimes by means of some inflammation, or hard knob growing at the mouth of the Conduit, or for that the sinews of the bladder is numbed, so as the bladder is without feeling: or it may come by retention, and long holding of the water, most of which causes Hierocles also reciteth, adding thereunto, that it may chance to a Horse through over much rest and Idleness, and also by means of some extreme cold, and specially in winter season, for the which the warmth of fire is a present remedy. But now mine Authors do not show for every one of these three kinds of diseases several signs, but only say that when a horse can not stolen, he will stand as though he would stale, and thrust out his yard a little, and also for very pain stand beating his tail betwixt his thighs. Neither do they seem to appoint several cures, but do make a hochepot mingling them all together, some of them praising one thing, and some an other, for some say it is good to mingle the juice of Leeks with sweet smelling wine and oil together, and to pour that into his right nosetryll, and then to walk him up and down upon it, and that will make him to stolen. Some say it is good to give him smallage seed, or else the root of wild Fenell, sodden with wine to drink, or to put five sharp Onions, clean peeled, and somewhat browsed into his fundament, and to chaufe him immediately upon it, either by riding him or other wise, & that shall cause him to stale presently. It is good also to bathe all his back and Loins with warm water. The scrapings of the inward parts of his own hooves beaten into powder, and mingled with wine, and poured into his right nosetryll will make him to stale if you chaufe him upon it, and the rather as Hierocles saith, if you carry him to some sheeps coat, or other place where sheep are wont to stand, the smell of whose dung and piss, without any other medicine as he saith, will provoke him to stolen. Some will give the horse white dogs dung dried and mingled with salt, wine, & Amoniacum to drink, some Hog's dung only with wine, & some the dregs of horsepisse with wine, and many other medicines which I leave to rehearse for fear of being to tedious, and specially, sith Martin's experience followeth here at hand, agreeing in all points with Laurentius Russius cure which is in this sort. First draw out his yard and wash it well in white wine, and scour it well, because it will be many times stopped with dirt, and other baggage together, & hardened like a stone, and then put a little oil of Camomile into the Cunduit with a wax Candle and a broused clove of Garlic, and that will provoke him to stolen. And if that will not help, then give him this drink. Take of parsley two handful, of Coriandre one handful, stamp them and strain them with a quart of white wine, & dissolve therein one ounce of cake soap, and give it lukewarm unto the horse to drink, and keep him as warm as may be, and let him drink no cold water for the space of five or six days, and when you would have him to stolen, let it be either upon plenty of straw, or upon some green plot, or else in a sheps coat, the savour whereof will greatly provoke him to stolen as hath been aforesaid.   

Of pissing blood. The xcix Chapter.  
PElagonius saith, that if a horse be over much laboured, or over charged with heavy burden, or over fat, he will many times piss blood, and the rather as I think, for that some vain is broken within the horse's body, and then clear blood will come forth many times, as the Physicians say, without any piss at all. But if the blood be perfectly mingled together with his stale, than it is a sign that it cometh from the kidneys, having some stone therein, which through vehement labour, doth fret the kidneys & veins thereof, & so causeth them to bleed, through which whilst the urine passeth must needs be infected, & died with the blood. It may come also by some stripe, or from the muscle that encloseth the neck of the bladder. The cure according to Pelagonius, Absirtus, Hierocles, and the rest, is thus. Let the horse blood in the palate of the mouth, to convert the blood the contrary way. Then take of Tragagant that have been steeped in wine, half an ounce, and of Popy seed one dram and one scruple, and of Styrax as much, and twelve Pyneaple kyrnels. Let all these things be beaten and mingled well together, and give the horse thereof every morning the space of seven days, the quantity of a Hasell nut distempered in a quart of wine, me thinks that the quantity of a Walnut were to little for so much wine. Some writ that it is good to make him a drink with the root of the herb Asphodelus, which some call Daffadyll mingled with wheat flower, & Sumach sodden long in water, and so to be given the horse with some wine added thereunto, or make him a drink of goats milk and Oil, straining thereunto a little Fromenty. Anatolius saith, that it is good to give the Horse three days together, sodden beans clean peeled, whereunto would be added some Deres suet and a little wine.   

Of the Colt evil. The. C. Chapter.  
THis name Colt evil in my judgement, doth properly signify that disease which the Physicians call Priapismus, which is a continual standing together, with an unnatural swelling of the yard proceeding of some wind, filling the arteries, and hollow sinew or pipe of the yard, or else through the abundance of seed, which do chance oft times to man, and I think sometime to stoned horses. Notwithstanding Martin saith, that the Colt evil is a swelling of the sheath of the yard, and the part of the belly there about, caused of corrupt seed, coming out of the yard, and remaining within the sheath where it putrifyeth. And Geldings most commonly are subject to this disease, not being able for lack of natural heat, to expel their seed any further. For horses as Martin saith, are seldom troubled with this disease because of their heat, unless it be when they have been over travailed, or otherwise weakened. The cure according to him is thus. Wash the sheath clean within with lukewarm Vinegar, then draw out his yard, and wash that also. That done, ride him into some running stream up to the belly, tossing him therein to and fro to allay the heat of the members, and use him thus two or three days and he shallbe whole.   

Of the mattering of the yard. The. Ci. Chapter.  
IT cometh at covering time when the Horse & Mare both are over hot, and so perhaps burn themselves. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take a pint of white wine, and boil therein a a quartern of roche alum, and squirt thereof into his yard three or four squirtfull, one after an other, and thrust the squyrt so far in as the liquor may pierce to the bottom to scour away the bloody matter, continuing thus to do once a day until he be whole.   

Of the shedding of seed. The. Cij. Chapter.  
THis disease is called of the physicians Gonorrhoea, which may come some time through abundance and rankness of seed, & sometime by the weakness of the stones, and seed vessels not able to retain the seed, until it be digested, and thickened. Vegetius saith that this disease will make the horse very faint and weak, & specially in summer season for cure whereof the said Vegetius would have the horse to be ridden into some cold water, even up to the belly, so as his stones may be covered with water, and then his fundament being first bathed with warm water or oil, he would have you to thrust in your hand and arm even to the very bladder, and softly to rub and claw the same, and the parts there abouts which be the seed Uessels. That done to cover him warm that he take no cold, and every day he would have you to give the horse Hogs dung to drink with red wine, until he be whole. I for my part, if I thought that it came of weakness as is afore said, which I would judge by the waterishness of the seed, & unlustiness of the horse, would give him red wine to drink, and put therein a little Acatium, the juice of Plantain, and a little Mastic, & bathe his back with red wine, & oil of Roses mingled together.   

Of the falling of the Yard. The. Ciij. Chapter.  
IT cometh as I take it thorough the weakness of the member, by means of some resolution in the muscles & sinews serving the same, caused at the first (perhaps) by some great strain or stripe on the back. It may come also by weariness and tearing. For remedy whereof Absirtus was wont to wash the yard with salt water from the Sea if it might be gotten, if not, with water and salt, and if that prevailed not, he would all to prick the outmost skin of the yard with a sharp needle, but not deep, and then wash all the pricks with strong Vinegar, and that did make the horse as he sayeth to draw up his yard again immediately, yea and this also will remedy the falling out of the fundament. Pelagonius would have you to put into the pipe of his yard, honey and salt boiled together and made liquid, or else a quick Fly, or a grain of Franconsence, or else a clove of Garlic clean peeled, and somewhat browsed, and also to pour on his back Oil, Wine, and nitre, made warm & mingled together. But Martin's experience is in this sort. First wash the yard with warm white wine, & then anoint it with oil of Roses, & honey mingled together, and put it up into the sheath, and make him a Codpiece of Canvas to keep it still up, and dress him thus every day once, until he be whole. And in any case let his back be kept warm, either with a double cloth, or else with a charge made of bull Armeny, Eggs, wheat flower, Sanguis Draconis, turpentine, and Vinegar, or else lay on a wet sack, which being covered with an other dry cloth will keep his back very warm.   

Of the swelling of the Cod and stones. The. Ciiij. Chapter.  
ABsirtus saith that the inflammation and swelling of the Cod and stones, cometh by means of some wound, or by the stinging of some Serpent, or by fight one horse with an other. For remedy whereof, he was wont to bathe the Cod with water, wherein had been sodden the roots of wild cucumber and salt, and then to anoint it with an ointment made of Cerusa, oil, goats grease, and the white of an Egg. Some again would have the Cod to be bathed in warm water, Nytrum, and Vinegar mingled together, and also to be anointed with an ointment made of Chalk, or of potter's earth, Ox dung, cumin, water and vinegar, mingled together, or else to be anointed with the juice of the herb Solanum, called of some night shade, or with the juice of humblocke growing on dung hills, yea & also to be let blood in the flanks. But Martin saith, that the swelling of the cods cometh for the most part, after some sickness, or surfeyting with cold, and then it is a sign of amendment. The cure according to his experience is in this sort. First let him blood on both sides the flank veins. Then take of oil of Roses, of Vinegar, of each half a pint, and half a quartern of bull Armonie, beaten into powder. Mingle them together in a Cruse, and being lukewarm, anoint the cods therewith with two or three feathers bound together, and the next day ride him into the water, so as his cods may be within the water, giving him two or three turns therein, and so return fair and softly to the stable, and when he is dry anoint him again as before, continuing thus to do every day once until he be whole. The said Martin saith also that the cods may be swollen by means of some hurt or evil humours resorting unto the Cod, and then he would have you to cover the cods, with a charge made of bull Armeny and vinegar wrought together, renewing it every day once until the swelling go away, or that it break of itself, and if it break, then taint it with Mel Rosatum, & make him a breach of Canvas to keep it in, renewing the taint every day once until it be whole.   

Of incording or bursting. The. Cv. Chapter.  
THis term incording is borrowed of the Italion word Incordato, which in plain english is as much to say as brusten, and might be more rightly termed of us incodded. For when a horse is bursten, his Gut falleth down into the Cod making it to swell. The Italians as I take it did call it Incordato because the gut follows the string of the stone called of them Il cordone, or Lachorda, whereof incordato seems to be derived with some reason. According to which reason we should call it rather instringed than incorded. Notwithstanding sith that incording is already received in the stable. I for my part am very well content therewith, minding not to contend against it. But now you have to note, that either man or beast may be bursten diversly, and according to the names of the parts grieved. The Physicians do give it divers names, for you shall understand, that next unto the thick outward skin of the belly, there is also an other inward thin skin covering all the muscles, the Caule, and the guts of the belly, called of the Anatomists, Peritoneum, which skin cometh from both sides of the back, and is fastened to the midryffe above, and also to the bottom of the belly beneath, to keep in all the contents of the neither belly. And therefore if this skin be broken, or over sore strained or stretched, then either some part of the Caule or Guts slippeth down, sometime into the Cod, sometime not so far. If the gut slip down into the Cod, than it is called of the Physicians by the Greek name Enterocele, that is to say Gut bursten. But if the Caule fall down into the Cod, than it is called of the physicians Epiplocele, that is to say call bursten. But either of these diseases is most properly incident to the male kind, for the Female kind hath no Cod. Notwithstanding, they may be so bursten, as either Gut or Caule may fall down into their natures, hanging there like a bag. But if it fall not down so low, but remaineth above nigh unto the privy members or flanks, which place is called of the Latins Inguen, then of that place the bursting is called of the physicians Bubonocele, whereunto I know not what English name to give, unless I should call it flank bursten. Moreover the Cod or flank may be sometime swollen, by means of some waterish humour, gathered together in the same, which is called of the physicians Hydrocele, that is to say water bursten, and sometime the Cod may be swollen, by means of some hard piece of flesh cleaving to the thin skins or panicles of the stones, and then it is called of the physicians Sarcocele, that is to say flesh bursten. But for as much as none of mine Authors, Martin, nor any other Ferrer in these days that I know, have intermeddled with any kind of bursting, but only with that wherein the gut falleth down into the Cod: leaving all the rest apart, I will only talk of this. And that according to Martin's experience which I assure you differeth not much from the precepts of the old writers. But first you shall understand, that the gut bursten, and flank bursten, doth proceed both of one cause, that is to say, by means that the skin called before Peritoneum, is either sore strained, or else broken, either of which things do most commonly chance to horses, either by some stripe of an other horse, or else by some strain in leaping over a hedge, ditch, or pale, or otherwise, yea and many times in passing a carrier, through the undiscretenesse of the Rider, stopping the horse suddenly without giving him any warning, whereby the horse is forced to cast his hinder legs abroad, and so straineth or bursteth the skin aforesaid, by means whereof the gut falleth down into his Cod. The signs be these. The horse will forsake his meat, and stand shoring and leaning always on that side that he is hurt, and on that side if you search with your hand, betwixt the stone and the thigh upward to the body, and somewhat above the stone, you shall find the gut itself big and hard in the feeling, whereas on the other side you shall find no such thing. The cure according to Martin is thus. Bring the horse into some house or place that hath over head a strong bawk, or beam going overthwart, and strew that place thick with straw. Then put on four pasterns with four rings on his feet, and fastening the one end of a long rope to one of those rings, thread all the other rings with the loose end of the rope, & so draw all his forefeit together, and cast him on the straw. That done, cast the rope over the bawlke, & hoist the horse so as he may lie flat on his back, with his legs upward without struggling. Then bathe his stones well with warm water and butter melted together, & the stones being somewhat warm, and well mollified, raise them up from the body with both your hands being closed by the fingers fast together, and holding the stones in your hands in such manner, work down the gut into the body of the horse, by striking it downward continually with your two thombs, one labouring immediately after an other, until you perceive that side of the stone to be so small as the other, and having so discorded, that is to say returned the gut into his right place. Take a list of two fingers broad thoroughly anointed with fresh butter, & tie his stones both together with the same so nigh the body as may be, not over hard, but so as you may put your finger betwixt. That done, take the horse quietly down, and lead him fair and softly into the stable, whereas he must stand warm, & not be stirred for the space of three weeks. But forget not the next day after his discording to unlosen the list, and to take it away, and as well at that time, as every day once or twice after, to cast a dish or two of cold water up into his cods, and that will make him to shrink up his stones, and thereby restrain the gut from falling down, and at the three weeks end to be sure: it were not amiss to geld the stone on that side away, so shall he never be incorded again on that side. But let him not eat much, nor drink much, and let his drink be always warm.   

Of the botch in the grains of a horse. The. Cvi. Chapter.  
IF a horse be full of humours, and then suddenly laboured, the humours will resort into the weakest parts, and their gather together, and breed a botch, and specially in the hinder parts, betwixt the thighs not far from the cods. The signs be these, The hinder legs will be all swollen, and specially from the houghes upward, and if you feel with your hand, you shall find a great knob or swelling, & if it be round & hard, it will gather to a head. The cure according to Martin is thus. First ripe it with this plaster. Take of wheat flower, of Turpentine, & of honey, of each like quantity, stirring it together to make a stiff plaster, & with a cloth lay it unto the sore, renewing it every day once, until it break or wax soft, and then lance it so as the matter may run downward. Then taint it with turpentine, and Hog's grease melted together, renewing it every day once until it be whole.   

Of the diseases incident to the womb of a Mare, and specially of barrenness. The. Cvij. Chapter.  
IT seemeth by some writers that the womb of a Mare is subject to certain diseases, though not so many as the womb of a woman, as to ascent, descent, falling out, convulsion, barrenness, aborsement, yea Aristotle and others do not let to write, that menstrual blood doth naturally void from the Mare, as from the woman, though it be so little in quantity, as it can not be well perceived. But sith none of mine Authors have written thereof to any purpose, nor any Ferrer of this time that I know, have had any experience in such matters, I will pass them all over with silence, saving barrenness whereof I promised in the breders office to declare unto you the causes, & such kind of cure for the same, as the old writers have taught. A Mare then may be barren through the untemperateness of the womb or matrix, as for that it is to hot & fiery, or else to cold & moist, or to dry, or else to short, or to narrow, or having the neck thereof turned awry, or by means of some obstruction or stopping in the matrix, or for that the Mare is to fat, or to lean, and many times Mares go barren, for that they be not well horsed. Well, the cure of barrenness that cometh through the fault of the Matrix or womb, according to the old writers is thus. Take a good handful of Leeks, stamp them in a mortar, with half a Glass full of wine. Then put thereunto twelve flies called of the Apothecary's, Cantharides, of divers colours if they may be gotten, then strain all together, with a sufficient quantity of water to serve the Mare therewith two days together, by pouring the same into her nature with a horn or glister pipe made of purpose, and at the end of three days next following, offer the horse unto her that should cover her, and immediately after that she is covered, wash her nature twice together with cold water.  

another receit for the same purpose.  
TAke of Nytrum, of sparrows dung, and of turpentine, of each like quantity, well wrought together and made like a suppository, and put that into her nature, and it will cause her to desire the horse, and also to conceive. Hipocrates saith, that it is good also to put a Nettle into the horse's mouth that should cover her.    

Of the Itch, Scab, and Maunginesse in the tail, and falling of the tail. The. Cviij. Chapter.  
IN spring time horses be many times troubled with the tronchons in their fundament, and then they will rub their tail, and break the hair thereof, and yet in his tail perhaps, shall be neither itch, scurf, nor scab, wherefore if you rake the horse well with your hand, anointed with Soap, and search for those tronchons, and pull them clean out, you shall cause him to leave rubbing: and if you see that the hair do fall away of itself, than it is a sign, that it is either eaten with worms, or that there is some scurf or scab fretting the hair, and causing such an itch in his tail, as the horse is always rubbing the same. As touching the worms, scurf, or scab, it shall be good to anoint all the tail with soap, & then to wash it clean even to the ground with strong lie, & that will kill the worms, and make the hair to grow again. And if much of the tail be worn away, if shall be needful to keep the tail continually wet, with a sponge dippeth in fair water, and that will make the hair to grow very fast. But if the horses tail be mangy, then heal that like as you do the maungynesse of the Main before rehearsed. Again if there breed any Canker in the tail, (which will consume both the flesh and bone, and as Laurentius Russius saith, make the joints to fall away one by one.) It shall be good as Martin saith to wash all his tail with Aqua fortis or strong water, made in this sort. Take of green Corporas, of Atom, of each one pound, of white Corporas a quartern. Boil all these things together in three quarts of running water, in a very strong earthen pot, until the one half be consumed, and then with a little of this water being made lukewarm, wash his tail with a little clout, or Flax bound to the end of a stick, continuing so to do every day once, until it be whole.   

How to know when a horse halteth before, in what part his grief is. The. Cix. Chapter.  
BEing now come to talk of the griefs in the shoulders, legs, hips, houghes, joints, and hooves, causing the horse most commonly to halt: I think it good first to show you the way how to find in what part of his legs, the horse is grieved when he halteth either before or behind. And first you have to consider that if a horse halteth before, it must be either in his shoulders, in his legs, or in his feet. If it be in his shoulders, and new hurt, the horse will not lift that leg, but trail it nigh the ground. If it be old hurt, he will cast that leg further from him in his going, than the other, and if he be turned on the sore side, than he will halt so much the more. If a horse halteth in the leg, it is either in the knee, in the shank, or in the pastorne joint, if it be either in the knee, or pastorne joint, he will not bow that in his going like the other, but go very stiffly upon it. If he halteth in the shank, than it is by means of some splent, wingall, or such apparent grief, apt to be seen, or felt. If he halt in the foot, it is either in the cronet, heel, in the toe, in the quarters, or sole of the foot. If it be in the cronet, the grief will be apparent, the skin being broken or swollen some manner of way: If in the heel, as by over reach or otherwise, than he will tread most on the toe: if upon any of the quarters, them going on the edge of a bank or hilly ground, he will halt more, than on the plain ground, and by the horses coming towards you, and going from you upon such edge or bank, you shall easily perceive whether his grief be in the inward quarter or outward quarter. The quarter is to be understand, from the mid hoof to the heel. If he halt in the toe which is not commonly seen, than he will tread more upon the heel. If his grief be in the sole of the foot, than he will halt all after one sort upon any ground, unless it be upon the stones. And to be sure in what part of the foot the grief is, it shall be good first to make him go upon the plain ground, and then upon a hard and stony ground, yea and also banky ground. Thus having declared unto you in general, how to know in what part a horse is grieved when he halteth before: I think it meet first to show you orderly all the particular griefs and sorances, whereunto the fore parts of a horse are subject, together with the causes, signs and cure thereof. That done, I will speak of halting behind, and show you first generally where the grief is, and then particularly declare unto you every grief incident to the hinder parts of a horse. And lastly I will speak of such griefs and sorances as are common to both parts, that is to say, as well to the forelegges, and forefete, as to the hinder legs and hinder feet.   

Of the grief and pinching in the shoulder. The. Cx. Chapter.  
THis cometh either by labouring and straining the horse to young, or else by some great burden. You shall perceive it by the narrowness of the breast, and by consuming of the flesh of the shoulders, in so much as the fore part of the shoulder bone will stick out, & be a great deal higher than the flesh. And if it be of long continuance, he will be very hollow upon the brisket towards the armholes, and he will go wider beneath at the feet, than above at the knees. The cure according to Martin is thus. Give him a slit of an inch long with a sharp knife or Razor upon both sides an inch under the shoulder bones. Then with a swans quill put into the slit, blow up first the one shoulder, and then the other, as big as you can possibly, even up to the withers, and with your hand strike the wind equally into every place of the shoulders. And when they be both full, then beat all the windy places with a good hazel wand over all the shoulder. Then with a flat sclise of iron, loosen the skin within from the flesh. That done rowel the two slits or cuts with two round rowels made of the upper leather of an old shoe with a hole in the midst, that the matter may issue forth, and let such rowels be three inches broad, and so put in as they may lie plain and flat within the cut. Then make a charge to lay upon the same in this sort. Take of Pitch, of Rosen, of each one pound, of Tar half a pint, boil these things all together in a pot, and when it is somewhat cooled, take a stick with a woollen clout bound fast to the one end thereof, and dip it into this charge, and cover or daub all the shoulders therewith. That done, clap thereunto a pound of Floxe of such colour as the horse is, or as nigh unto the same as may be, & every other day cleanse both the wounds and rowels, & put them in again, continuing thus to do, the space of xu days. Then take them out & heal up the wounds with two taints of Flax dipped in Turpentine, and Hog's grease melted together, renewing the same every day once, until the wounds be whole. But let the charge lie still, until it fall away of itself, and let the horse run to grass until he hath had a frost or two.   

Of wrinching the shoulder. The. Cxi. Chapter.  
THis cometh sometime by a fall. and sometime by turning to suddenly in some uneven ground, or by to rash running out at some door, or by some stripe of an other horse, or by some sudden stop in passing a Carrier. You shall perceive it in his going, by trailing his leg upon the ground, so close unto himself as he can possible. The cure according to Martin is thus. Let him blood, the quantity of three pints on the breast in the plat vain, receiving the blood in a pot, and thereunto put first a quart of strong Vinegar, & half a dozen broken eggs, shells & all, & so much wheat flower as will thicken all that liquor. That done, put thereunto of bull Armeny beaten into fine powder one pound, of Sanguis Draconis two ounces, and mingle them all together, so as the flower may not be perceived, and if it be to stiff, you may make it more liquid or soft, with a little Vinegar. Then with your hand daub all the shoulder from the main downward, and betwixt the forebowels, all against the hair, and let not the horse depart out of that place, until the charge be surely fastened unto the skin. That done, carry him into the stable, and tie him up to the rack, and suffer him not to lie down all that day, & give him a little meat, dieting him moderately the space of xu days, during which time, he may not stir out of his place, but only to lie down, and every day once refresh the shoulder point with this charge, laying still new upon the old, & at the xu days end, lead him abroad to see how he goeth, and if he be somewhat amended, then let him rest without travailing, the space of one month, and that shall bring his shoulder to perfection. But if he be never the better for all this that is done: than it shall be needful, to rowel him with a leather rowel upon the shoulder point, and to keep him rowelled the space of xu days, renning the rowel, and cleansing the wound every other day, and then walk him up and down fair and softly, and turn him always on the contrary side to the sore, and when he goeth upright, pull out the rowel, and heal the wound with a taint of Flax dipped in Turpentyne, and Hogs grease melted together. And if all this will not serve, than it shall be needful to draw him chequorwise with a hot iron over all the shoulder point and also to make him to draw in a plough every day two hours at the least, to settle his joints for the space of three weeks or a month, and if any thing will help him these two last remedies will help him, and make him to go right up again.   

Of splayting of the shoulder. The. Cxij. Chapter.  
THis cometh by some dangerous sliding or slipping, whereby the shoulder parteth from the breast, and so leaves an open rift not in the skin, but in the flesh and film next under the skin, and so he halteth, and is not able to go, you shall perceive it by trailing his leg after him in his going. The cure according to Martin is thus. First put a pair of straight pasterns on his forefeit, keeping him still in the stable, without disquieting him. Then take of Dialthea one pound, of Salad Oil one pint, of Oil de Bays half a pound, of fresh butter half a pound. Melt all these things together in a Pipkin, and anoint the grieved place therewith, and also round about the inside of the shoulder, and within two or three days after, both that place and all the shoulder besides will swell. Then either prick him with a lancet, or phlegm, in all the swelling places, or else with a little sharp hot iron made in this sort, the head whereof would be an inch long, to the intent that the corruption may run out, and use to anoint it still with the ointment aforesaid. But if you see that it will not go away, but swell still, and gather to a head, than lance it where the swelling doth gather most, & is soft under the finger & then taint it with flax dipped in this ointment. Take of Turpentine, and of Hogs grease, of each two ounces, and melt them together, renewing the taint twice a day until it be whole.   

Of the shoulder pight. The. Cxiij. Chapter.  
THat is when the shoulder point or pitch of the shoulder is displaced, which grief is called of the Italians Spalleto, & it cometh by reason of some great fall forward, rush, or strain. The signs be these. That shoulder point will stick out further than his fellow, and the horse will halt right down. The cure according to Martin is thus. First make him to swim in a deep water, up and and down a dozen turns, and that shall make the joint to return to his place. Then make two tough pings of Asshen wood, as much as your little finger, sharp at the points, each one five inches long. That done, slit the skin, an inch above the point, and an inch beneath the point of the shoulder, and thrust in one of the pings from above downward, so as both ends may equally stick without the skin. And if the pin of wood will not easily pass through, you may make it way, first with an iron pin. That done, make other two holes cross to the first holes, so as the other pin may cross the first pin, right in the midst, with a right cross, and the first pin would be somewhat flat in the midst, to the intent that the other being round, may pass the better without stop, and close the juster together. Then take a piece of a little line somewhat bigger than a whipcord, and at one end make a loop, which being put over one of the pins ends, wind the rest of the Line good and straight about the pings ends, so as it may lie betwixt the pin's ends and the skin, and fasten the last end with a pack needle, and a pack thread, unto the rest of the cord, so as it may not slip, and to do well, both the pricks and the cord would be first anointed with a little Hogs grease. Then bring him into the stable, and let him rest the space of nine days, but let him lie down as little as may be, and put on a pastorne on the sore leg, so as it may be bound with a cord, unto the foot of the manger, to keep that leg always whilst he standeth in the stable more forward than the other. And at the ix▪ days end, take out the pricks, and anoint the sore places with a little Dialthea, or with Hog's grease, and then turn him to grass.   

Of the swelling of the forelegs after great labour. The. Cxiiij. Chapter.  
GReat labour and heat causeth humours to resort down into the legs, making them to swell. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. bath them with buttered beer, or else with this bath here following. Take of mallows three handful, a Rose Cake, of Sage one handful. Boil them together in a sufficient quantity of water, and when the meadows be soft put in half a pound of butter, and half a pint of Salad oil, and then being somewhat warm, wash the swelling therewith every day once, the space of three or four days. And if the swelling will not go away with this, then take wine lies, and Cumin, & boil them together, & put thereunto a little wheat flower, and charge all the swelling therewith, and walk him often, and if all will not serve, then take up the great vain above the knee on the inside, suffering him not to bleed from above, but all from beneath.   

Of foundering in the forelegges. The. Cxv. Chapter.  
THe cause of this grief is declared before in the chapter of foundering in the body whereas I showed you that if a horse be foundered in the body, the humours will immediately resort down into his legs. Martin saith within the space of xxiiij hours, and then the horse will go crouching all upon the hinder legs, his forelegges being so stiff, as he is not able to bow them. The cure whereof according to Martin is in this sort. Garter each leg immediately one handful above the knee, with a list good and hard, and then walk him to chafe him, and to put him in a heat, and being somewhat warmed, let him blood in both the breast veins, reserving the blood to make a charge withal in this manner. Take of that blood two quarts and of wheat flower half a Peck, and six eggs, shells and all, of bull Armeny half a pound, of Sanguis Draconis half a quartern, and a quart of strong Vinegar. Mingle them all together, and charge all his shoulders, breast, back, loins, and forelegges therewith, and walk him upon some hard ground suffering him not to stand still, and when the charge is dry refresh it again. And having walked him three or four hours together, lead him into the stable, and give him a little warm water with ground malt in it, & then a little hay and provender, and then walk him again either in the house, or else abroad, and continue thus to do the space of four days, and when all the charge is spent, cover him well with a housing cloth, and let him both stand and lie warm, and eat but little meat during the four days. But if you see that at the four days end he mendeth not a whit, than it is a sign that the humours lie in the foot, for the which you must search with your butter, paring all the soles of the fore feet so thin, as you shall see the water issue through the sole. That done, with your butter let him blood at both the toes, and let him bleed well. Then stop the vain with a little hog's grease, and turpentine melted together, and laid upon a little Flax, and then tack on the shoes, and cram the place where you did let him blood hard with toawe, to the intent it may be surely stopped. Then fill both his feet with Hogs grease and bran fried together in a stopping pan, so hot as is possible. And upon that stopping clap a piece of leather, or else two splents to keep in the stopping. And immediately after this, Take two Eggs, beat them in a dish, and put thereunto as much bull Armeny and bean flower as will thicken the same, and mingle them well together, & make thereof two plasters, such as may close each foot round about, somewhat above the cronette, and bind it fast with a list, or roller, that it may not fall away nor be removed for the space of two days, but let the sole be cleansed, and new stopped every day once, and the cronets to be removed every two days, continuing so to do until he be whole. During which time, let him rest unwalked, for fear of losening his hooves. But if you see that he begin to amend, you may walk him fair and softly once a day upon some soft ground, to exercise his legs and feet, and let him not eat much, nor drink cold water. But if this foundering break out above the hoof, which you shall perceive by the looseness of the coffin, above by the cronette, them when you pair the soole, you must take all the fore part of the sole clean away, leaving the heels hole, to the intent the humours may have the freer passage downward, and then stop him, and dress him about the cronet, as is before said.   

Of the splent as well in the inside or outside of the knee, as other where in the leg. The. Cxvi. Chapter.  
THis sorance to any man's feeling is a very gristle, sometime as big as a walnut, and sometime no more than a Hasell nut, which is called of the Italians Spinella, and it cometh as Laurentius Russius saith, by traveling the horse to young, or by oppressing him with heavy burden, offending his tender synews, and so causeth him to halt. It is easy to know because it is apparent to the eye, and if you pinch it with your thumb and finger, the horse will shrink up his leg. The cure whereof according to Martin is in this sort. Wash it well with warm water, and shave of the hair, and lightly scarify all the sore place with the point of a Razor, so as the blood may issue forth. Then take of Cantharides half a spoonful, and of Euforbium, as much beaten into fine powder, & mingle them together with a spoon full of oil de Bay, and then melt them in a little pan, stirring them well together, so as they may not boil over, and being so boiling hot, take two or three feathers, and anoint all the sore place therewith. That done, let not the horse stir from the place where you so dress him for one hour after, to the intent he shake not of the ointment. Then carry him fair and softly into the stable, and tie him so as he may not reach with his head beneath the manger, for otherwise he will covet to bite away the smarting & pricking medicine, which if it should touch his lips, would quickly fetch of the skin. And also let him stand without litter all that day and night. The next day anoint the sore place with fresh butter, continuing so to do every day once for the space of nine days, for this shall allay the heat of the medicine, and cause both that, and the crust to fall away of itself, and therewith either clean take away the splent, or at the least remove it out of the knee into the leg, and so much diminish it, as the horse shall go right up, and halt no more through occasion thereof. Laurentius Russius would have the splent to be cured by fyering it longest wise and overthwart. Some again do make it soft by beating it with a Hasell stick, and then do suck it out with a piece of new leather and a hot iron which many times diminisheth the splent, and increaseth the halting. For if a splent be not very well dressed, the horse will halt half a year after, yea and perhaps all his life long.   

Of a Malander. The. Cxvij. Chapter.  
A Malander is a kind of scab growing in the form of lines, or strekes, overthwart the bent of the knee, and hath long hairs with stubborn roots, like the bristles of a Boar, which corrupteth and cankereth the flesh, like the roots of a child's scabbed head, and if it be great, it will make the horse to go stiff at the setting forth and also to halt. This disease proceeds sometime of a corrupt blood, but most commonly, for lack of clean keeping, and good rubbing. The cure according to Martin is thus. first wash it well with warm water, then shave both hair & scab clean away, leaving nothing but the bare flesh, whereunto lay this plaster. Take a spoon full of Soap, and as much Lime. Mingle them together, that it may be like past, and spread as much on a clout as will cover the sore, and bind it fast on with a list, renewing it every day once the space of two or three days, and at the three days end, take away the plaster, and anoint the sore with Oil of Roses made lukewarm, & that shall fetch away the crust or scurf, bred by means of the plaster, which scurf being taken away, wash the sore place well every day once with his own stolen, or else with man's urine, & then immediately strow upon it the powder of burnt Oyster shells, continuing thus to do every day once until it be whole.   

Of an upper attaint or over reach upon the back sinew of the shank somewhat above the joint. The. Cxviij. Chapter.  
THe Italians call this sorance Attincto, which is a painful swelling of the master sinew, by means that the horse doth sometime overreach, and strike that sinew, with the toe of his hinder foot, which causeth him to halt. The signs be apparent by the swelling of the place, & by the horses halting. The cure according to Martin is thus. Wash the place with warm water, and shave of all the hair so far as the swelling goeth, and scarify every part of the sore place lightly with the point of a Razor, that the blood may issue forth. Then take of Cantharides, and of Euforbium, of each half an ounce, mingle them together with half a quartern of Soap, and with a sclice spread some of this ointment over all the sore, suffering him to rest there as you dress him, for one half hour after, and then you may carry him into the stable, and there let him stand without litter and tied as hath been said before in the Chapter of the splent, and the next day dress him with the same ointment once again, even as you did before. And the third day anoint the place with fresh butter, continuing so to do the space of ix days, & at the ix days, end make him this bathe. Take of Mallows three handful, a Rose Cake, of Sage a handful. Boil them together, in a sufficient quantity of water. And when the meadows be soft, put in half a pound of butter & half a pint of Salad Oil, and then being somewhat warm, wash the sore place therewith every day once, the space of three or four days.   

Of a neither taint. The. Cxix. Chapter.  
THis is a little bladder full of jelly much like unto a windgal, not apparent to the eye, but to the feeling, growing in the midst of the pastorne, somewhat above the frushe. It cometh by a strain, or else by some wrinch, or by an over reach, and maketh the horse to halt. The signs be these. The neither joint toward the fewterlock will be hot in the feeling, and somewhat swollen. The cure according to Martin is in this sort. Tie him above the joint with a list somewhat hard, and that will cause the bladder to appear to the eye. Then lance it with a sharp pointed knife, and thrust out all the jelly. That done, lay unto it the white of an Egg, and a little Salt beaten together, and laid upon flax or toawe, and bind it fast unto the sore, renewing it once a day the space of four or five days, during which time let him rest, and then you may boldly labour him.   

Of an over reach upon the heel. The. Cxx. Chapter.  
This is a cut so as the skin hangs down at the heel, made with the toe of the hinder foot, and is apparent to the eye, and it will cause the horse somewhat to halt. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. Cut away the skin that hangeth down, and bind unto it a little flax dippeth in the white of an Egg, mingled with a little bull Armeny, renewing it every day once, the space of three or four days, and that will heal it.   

Of false quarters. The. Cxxi. Chapter.  
THis is a rifte sometime in the outside, but most commonly in the inside of the hoof, because the inside is ever the weaker part, which sides are commonly called quarters, and thereof this sorance taketh his name, and is called a false quarter, that is to say a crazed or unsound quarter, which name in deed is borrowed of the Italians, calling it in their tongue Falso quarto. It cometh by evil shoeing, and partly by evil paring. The signs be these. The horse will for the most part halt, and the rifte will bleed, and is apparent to the eye. The cure according to Martin is thus. If the horse halt, then pull of the shoe, and cut so much away on that side of the shoe where the grief is, as the shoe being immediately put on again, the rift may be uncovered. Then open the rift with a rosenette or drawer, & fill all the rift with a roll of toawe, dippeth in turpentine, Wax, and sheeps suet melted together, renewing it every day once until it be whole. And the rifte being closed in the top, draw him betwixt the hair and the hoof with a hot Iron overthwart that place, to the intent that the hoof may shoot all whole downward, and when the horse goeth upright, ride him with no other shoe, until his hoof be thoroughly hardened again. But as touching shoes for false quarters, you shall have the order of making of them declared unto you hereafter in the end of this book.   

Of halting behind, and where the grief is. The. Cxxij. Chapter.  
IF a horse halt behind the grief must either be in the hip, in the stifle, in the houghe, in the ham, in the leg, in the neither joint, pastorne, or foot, if he halt in the hip of a new hurt, the horse will go sydeling, and not follow so well with that leg as with the other. But if it be old hurt, the sore hip will shrink and be lower than the other, and is best seen when he goeth up a hill, or upon the edge of some bank so as the worst leg may go on the higher side, for than he will halt so much the more, because it is painful unto him to go so unevenly wrinching his leg. If the grief be in the stifle, than the horse in his going will cast the stifle joint outward, and the bone on the inside will be far bigger than the other. If the grief be in the hough, than it is by means of some spavin, or some other hurt apparent to the eye. And the like may be said of the ham, wherein may be seen the selandre, or such like apparent sorance, causing the horse to halt. If the grief be either in the leg, pastorne, or foot, than you shall find it by such signs as have been taught you before. And therefore let us now speak of those sorances, that are properly incident to the hinder legs.   

Of a horse that is hipped, or hurt in the hips. The. Cxxiij. Chapter.  
THe horse is said to be hipte, when the hip bone is removed out of his right place, which grief is called of the Italians Malipiero del aucha It cometh most commonly by some great stripe or strain, slypping, sliding, or falling. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and in his going he will go sydeling, and the sore hip will fall lower than the other, and the flesh in process of time will consume clean away. And if it be suffered to run so long, it will never be restored unto his pristine estate. The best way as Martin saith, to make him go upright: is, to charge his hip & back with pitch & rosin melted together, and laid on warm, & then some flocks of his own colour to be clapped upon the same, and so to let him run to grass until he go upright. But the sore hip will never rise again so high as the other. If the horse be not hipped but only hurt in the hip, and that newly. Then first take of oil de Bay, of Dialthea, of Nerual, of swine's grease, of each half a pound, melt them all together stirring them continually, until they be thoroughly mingled together, and anoint the sore place against the hair, with this ointment, every day once, the space of a fortenight, and make the ointment to sink well into the flesh, by holding a hot broad bar of iron over the place anointed, weaving your hand to and fro, until the ointment be entered into the skin. And if at the fortenightes' end, you see that the horse amendeth no whit for this, then slit a hole downward in his skin, an inch beneath the hip bone, making the hole so wide, as you may easily thrust in a rowel with your finger, and then with a little broad sclice of iron, losen the skin from the flesh above the bone, & round about the same, so broad as the rowel may lie flat & plain betwixt the skin & the flesh, which rowel would be made of soft calves leather, with a hole in the midst like a ring, having a thread tied unto it, to pull it out when you would cleanse the hole, in this sort, & if the rowel be rolled about with flax fast tied on, and anointed with the ointment under written, it will draw so much the more. And thrust in the rowel first double, and then spread it abroad with your finger. That done, taint it with a good long taint of flax or toawe dipped in a little Turpentine & hogs grease melted together, and made warm, and cleanse the hole and the rowel every day once, & also renew the taint for the space of a fortenight. And before you dress him, cause him every day to be led up and down a foot place a quarter of an hour, to make the humours come down, and at the fortenights' end pull out the rowel, and heal up the wound with the same salve, making the taint every day lesser and lesser, until it be whole. And so soon as it is whole, draw with a hot iron cross lines of eight or nine inches long right over the hip bone, so as the rowelled place may be in the very midst thereof, and burn him no deeper, but so as the skin may look yellow, & then charge all that place, and over all his buttock with this charge. Take of pitch one pound, of Rosen half a pound, of Tar half a pint. Boil them together, and then being good and warm, spread it on with a clout tied in a riven stick. And then clap on a few flocks of the horses colour, and if it be in Summer, let the horse run to grass a while, for the more he travaileth at his own will, the better it is for him.   

Of stifling and hurts in the stifle. The. Cxxiiij. Chapter.  
THe Horse is said to be styffled, when the styffling bone is remoned from his right place. But if it be not removed nor losened, and yet the Horse halteth by means of some grief there, than we say that the horse is hurt in the stifle, and not styffled. The styffle cometh by means of some side blow▪ or some great strain flypping or sliding. The signs be these. If he be stifled the one bone will stick out further than the other, and is apparent to the eye. Martin would have you to cure the styffle in all points like unto the shoulder pight saving that the pings need not to be so long because the stifling place is not so broad as the shoulder, and standing in the stable, let him have a pastorne with a ring upon his sore leg, and thereunto fasten a cord, which cord must go about his neck, & let it be so much strained, as it may bring his sore leg more forward than the other, to keep the bone from starting out. But if the Horse be but hurt in the styffle with some stripe, or strain, than the bone will not stand out, but perhaps the place may be swollen. The cure according to Martin is thus. first anoint the place with the ointment mentioned in the last Chapter before, every day once the space of a fortenight, and if the Horse amend not with this▪ then rowel him with a hearen rowel, or else with a quill, and let the neither hole be somewhat beneath the sore place, & cleanse the hole every day, by turning the rowel, continuing still to anoint the place with the ointment aforesaid, and that shall make him whole.   

Of foundering behind. The. Cxxv. Chapter.  
This haps most commonly when a horse is very fat, and hath his grease melted within him, which is soon done with every little heat. You shall perceive it by his going, for he will be afraid to set his hinder feet to the ground, and he will be so weak behind, as he will stand quivering and shaking, and covet always to lie down. The cure according to Martin is thus. first garter him above the houghes, and then force him to go a while to put him in a heat, and being somewhat warm, let him blood in the thigh veins, reserving of that blood a pottle, to make him a charge in this sort. Put unto that blood, of wheat flower & of bean flower, of each a quarter of a peck, of Bole Armenia one pound, of Sanguis Draconis two ounces, six eggs, shells and all, of Turpentine half a pound, of vinegar a quart. Mingle all these things together, and therewith charge both his hinder legs, reins, and flanks, all against the hair. And if the horse can not dung, let him be raked, and give him this glister. Take of Mallows three handfuls, boil them well in fair water from a pottle to a quart. Then strain it, and put thereunto half a pound of butter, and of Salad oil a quarter of a pint, and having emptied his belly, give him also this drink to comfort him. Take of Malmesy a quart, and put thereunto a little cinnamon, Mace, and Pepper, beaten into fine powder, and of oil a quarter of a pint, and give the horse to drink of that lukewarm with a horn. That done, let him be walked up & down a good while together, if he be able to go: if not, then tie him up to the rack, and let him be hanged with canvas and ropes, so as he may stand upon the ground with his feet. For the less he lie, the better, and pair his hinder feet thin, until the dew come out, and tacking on the shoes again stop the hooves with bran and hogs grease boiled together, and let both his feet having this gear in it, be wrapped up in a cloth even to his pasterns, and there tie the clout fast. Let his diet be thin, and let him drink no cold water, and give him in winter wet hay, and in summer grass.   

Of the dry spavin. The. Cxxvi Chapter.  
THe dry spavin called of the Italians Spavano, or Sparavagno, is a great hard knob, as big as a Walnut, growing in the inside of the hough, hard under the joint, nigh unto the master vain, and causeth the horse to halt, which sorance cometh sometime by kind, because the horses parents perhaps had the like disease at the time of his generation, & sometime by extreme labour, & heat dissolving humours, which do descend through the master vain, continually feeding that place with evil nutriment, & causeth that place to swell. Which swelling in continuance of time, becometh so hard as a bone, and therefore is called of some the bone spavin. It needeth no signs to know it, because it is apparent to the eye, & most Ferrer do take it to be incurable. Notwithstanding Martin saith, that it may be made less with these remedies here following. Wash it with warm water, and shave of the hair so far as the swelling extendeth, and scarify the place, so as it may bleed. Then take of Cantharides one dozen, and of Euforbium half a spoonful, break them in powder, and boil them together with a little oil de Bay, and with two or three feathers bound together, put it boiling hot upon the sore, and let his tail be tied up for wiping away the medicine: and then within half an hour after, set him up in the stable, and tie him so as he may not lie down all that night, for fear of rubbing of the medicine, and the next day anoint it with fresh butter, continuing thus to do every day once the space of five or six days, and when the hair is grown again, draw the sore place with a hot iron, in this sort. Then take another hot sharp iron like a bodkyn, somewhat bowing at the point, & thrust it in at the neither end of the middle line, and so upward betwixt the skin and the flesh an inch and a half. And then taint it with a little Turpentine and hog's grease melted together and made warm, renewing it every day once, the space of nine days. But remember first immediately after his burning to take up the master vain, suffering him to bleed a little from above, and tie up the upper end of the vain, and leave the neither end open, to the intent that he may bleed from beneath, until it cease of itself, and that shall diminish the spavin, or else nothing will do it.   

Of the wet spavin, or through spavin: The. Cxxvij. Chapter.  
THis is a soft swelling growing on both sides of the hough, and seems to go clean through the hough, and therefore may be well called a through spavin. But for the most part the swelling on the in side because it is continually fed of the master vain, is greater than the swelling on the outside. The Italians call this sorance La ierda, or gierdone, which seemeth to come of a more fluxible humour, & not so viscouse or slimy as the other spavin doth, and therefore this waxeth not so hard, nor groweth to the nature of a bone, as the other doth, and this is more curable than the other. It need no signs, because it is apparent to the eye, and easy to know, by the description thereof before made. The cure according to Martin is thus. first wash, shave, and scarify the place, as before. Then take of Cantharides, half an ounce, of Euforbium one ounce broken to powder, and of oil de Bay one ounce. mingle them well together cold, without boiling them, and dress the sore therewith two days together, and every day after until the hair be grown again, anoint it with fresh butter. Then fire him both without and within, as before, without tainting him, and immediately take up the master vain as before. And then for the space of nine days, anoint him every day once with butter, until the fired place begin to scale, and then wash it with this bath. Take of Mallows three handfuls, of Sage one handful, & as much of red nettles, boil them in water, until they be soft, and put thereunto a little fresh butter, and bathe the place every day once, for the space of three or four days, and until the burning be whole, let the horse come in no wet.   

Of the Selander. The. Cxxviij. Chapter.  
THis is a kind of Scab breeding in the ham, which is the bent of the hough, and is like in all points to the Malandre, proceeding of like causes, and requireth like cure, and therefore resort to the Chapter of the Malander.   

Of the Hough bonny. The. Cxxix. Chapter.  
THis is a round swelling bonny, like a Paris ball, growing upon the very tip or elbow of the Hough, & therefore I thought good to call it the Hough bonny. This sorance cometh of some stripe or bruise, and as Martin saith, is cured thus. Take a round iron somewhat sharp at the end like a good big bodkyn, and let it be somewhat bending at the point. Then holding the sore with your left hand, pulling it somewhat from the sinews, pierce it with the iron, being first made red hot, thrusting it beneath in the bottom, and so upward into the jelly, to the intent that the same jelly may issue downward out at the hole, and having thrust out all the jelly, taint the hole with a taint of flax dypt in Turpentine, & hogs grease melted together, and also anoint the outside with hog's grease made warm, renewing it every day once, until the hole be ready to shut up, making the taint every day lesser and lesser, to the intent it may heal up.   

Of the Curb. The. Cxxx. Chapter.  
THis is a long swelling beneath the elbow of the hough, in the great sinew behind, & causeth the horse to halt after that he hath been a while laboured, and thereby somewhat heated. For the more the sinew is strained, the greater grief which again by rest is eased. This cometh by bearing some great weight when the horse is young, or else by some strain or wrinch, whereby the tender sinews are grieved, or rather bowed (as Russius saith) whereof it is called in Italian Curba a Curuando, that is to say of bowing, for anguish whereof it doth swell, and such swelling is apparent to the eye, and maketh that leg to show bigger than the other. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of wine lees a pint, and a porringer full of wheat flower, of Coming half an ounce and stir them well together, & being made warm, charge the sore place therewith, renewing it every day once the space of three or four days, and when the swelling is almost gone, then draw it with a hot iron in this sort, and cover the burning with Pitch & Rosen melted together, and laid on good & warm, and clap thereon some flocks of his own colour, or so nigh as may be gotten, and remove them not, until they fall away of themselves. And for the space of nine days let the horse rest and come in no wet.   

Of the Pains. The. Cxxxi. Chapter.  
THis is a kind of Scab called in Italian Grappe, which is full of fretting matterish water, and it breedeth in the pasterns for lack of clean keeping and good rubbing after the horse hath been journeyed, by means whereof the sand and dirt remaining in the hair, fretteth the skin and flesh, and so breedeth to a scab. And therefore those horses that have long hair, & are rough about the feet, are soonest troubled with this disease, if they be not the cleanlier kept. The signs be these. His legs will be swollen & hot, and water will issue out of the Scab, which water is so hot and fretting, as it will scald of the hair and breed Scabs, so far as it goeth. The cure according to Martin is thus. First wash well all the pasterns with beer and butter warmed together, and his legs being somewhat dried with a cloth: clip away all the hair, saving the fewterlockes. Then take of Turpentine, of hog's grease, of honey, of each like quantity, mingle them together in a pot, and put thereunto a little Bole Armenia, the yolks of two eggs, and as much wheat flower as will thicken the things aforesaid, and make it plaster like, and for that cause, it had need to be very well wrought and stirred together. Then with a slice strike some of the plaster upon such a piece of linen cloth as will serve to go round about the pastorne, and bind it fast on with a roller, renewing it once a day until it be whole, and let not the horse be travailed nor stand wet.   

Of Mules, or kibed heels, called of the Italians Mule. The. Cxxxij. Chapter.  
THis is a kind of Scab breeding behind, somewhat above the neither joint, growing overthwart the fewterlocke, which cometh most commonly for being bred in cold ground, or else for lack of good dressing, after that he hath been laboured in foul mire, & dirty ways, which dirt lying still in his legs, fretteth the skin, and maketh scabby rifts which are soon bred, but not so soon gotten away. The anguish whereof maketh the legs sometime to swell, and specially in winter, and spring-time, and then the Horse goeth very stiffly, and with great pain. This sorance is apparent to the eye, and is cured according to Martin in this sort. Take a piece of linen cloth, and with the salve recited in the last chapter make such a plaster as may cover all the sore place, and bind it fast on, that it fall not of, renewing it every day once until the sore leave running, & beginneth to wax dry, then wash it every day once with strong water, until it be clean dried up, but if this sorance be but in breeding, and that there is no raw flesh, than it shall suffice to anoint it with Soap two or three days, and at the three days end to wash them with a little beef broth or dish water.   

Of sorances or griefs that be comen to all four feet. The. Cxxxiij. Chapter.  
Hitherto we have declared unto you the causes, signs, and cure of all such griefs as are porperlye incident, either to the forelegges, or hinder legs, now therefore we will speak of those griefs that be common to them both, and first of windegalles.   

Of windgalles. The. Cxxxiiij. Chapter.  
THe Windegall called of the Italians Galla, is a bladder full of corruptielly, whereof some be great and some be small, and do grow on each side of the joint, & is so painful, and specially in Summer season when the weather is hot, and the ways hard, as the horse is not able to travel, but halteth right down. They come for the most part through extreme labour and heat, whereby the humours being dissolved, do flow and resort into the hollow places about the neither joints, and their be congealed, and covered with a thin skin like a bladder. They be apparent to the eye, and therefore need no other signs to know them. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. Wash them with warm water, and shave of the hair, and scarify them with the point of a Razor, and dress them with Cantharides in the self same manner, as the splent in the knee was taught before, and anoint them afterward with butter, until the skin be whole. And if this will not heal it, then draw them with a hot iron in this manner. That done slit the middle line, which passeth right down, through the windegall with a sharp knife, beginning beneath, and so upward the length of half an inch, to the intent you may thrust the jelly out at that hole, and then lay unto it a little pitch, and Rosen melted together, and made lukewarm, and put a few floxe on it, and that will heal him.   

Of wrinching the neither joint. The. Cxxxv. Chapter.  
THis cometh many times by treading awry in some Cart root or otherwise. The signs be these. The joint will be swollen & sore, and the horse will halt. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. Take of Dialthea half a pound, and as much of Neruall. Mingle them together, and anoint the sore place therewith, chafing it well with both your hands, that the ointment may enter, continuing so to do every day once, until the ointment be all spent, and let the horse rest. But if this will not prevail, then wash it well with warm water, and shave away all the hair saving the fewterlocke. Scarifye it, and lay unto it Cantharides, and heal it as you do the splent in the knee.   

Of interfering. The. Cxxxvi Chapter.  
Because interfering is to be helped by shooing, we purpose not to speak of it, until we come to talk of the order of paring & shoeing all manner of hooves, and therefore resort thither.   

Of the shekel gall. The. Cxxxvij. Chapter.  
IF a Horse be galled in the pasterns, with shakell, lock, pastorne, or halter anoint the sore place, with a little honey and verdigris boiled together, until it look red, which is a good ointment for all gallings on the withers, & immediately strow upon the ointment, being first laid upon the leg, a little chopped flax, or toawe, and that will stick fast, continuing so to do every day once, until it be whole.   

Of hurts in the legs, that cometh by casting in the Halter, or collar. The. Cxxxviij. Chapter.  
IT chanceth many times that a horse having some itch under his ears, is desirous to scratch the same with his hinder foot, which whilst he reacheth to and fro, doth fasten in the collar or halter, wherewith the more that he striveth, the more he galleth his legs, and many times it chanceth for that he is tied so long, by means whereof, he being laid, and the halter slack about his feet, in his rising perpaps or turning he snarleth himself, so as he is not able to get up, but hangeth either by the neck, or legs, which sometimes are galled even to the hard bone. Russius calleth such kind of galling Capistratura, which he was wont to heal with this ointment here following, praising it to be excellent good, for the Cratches or any scab, bruise, or wound. Take of oil Olive one ounce, of Turpentine two or three ounces, melt them together over the fire, & then put thereunto a little wax, and work them well together, and anoint the sore place therewith. Martin saith it is good to anoint the sore place with the white of an egg, and Salad oil beaten together, and when it cometh to a scab, anoint it with butter being melted until it look brown.   

Of the Cratches or Rats tails called of the Italians Crepaccie. The. Cxxxix. Chapter.  
THis is a kind of long scabby rifts growing right up and down in the hinder part from the fewterlocke up to the Curb, and cometh for lack of clean keeping, and is easily seen if you take up the horse's foot, and lift up the hear. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of Turpentine half a pound of Honey half a pint of Hogs grease a quartern, and three yolks of eggs, and of bull armeny a quartern beatyn into powder, of bean flower half a pint. mingle all these well together, and make a salve thereof, and with your finger anoint all the sore places, shedding the hair as you go, to the intent you may the easilier find them, and also to make the salve enter into the skin, and let the horse come in no wet, until he be whole.   

Of the Ring bone. The. Cxl. Chapter.  
THis is a hard grystle growing upon the cronette, and sometime goeth round about the cronet, and is called in italian Soprosso. Laurentius Russius saith, that it may grow in any other place of the leg, but then we call it not a Ringbone, but a knot or knob. It cometh at the first either by some blow of an other horse, or by striking his own foot against some stub, or stone, or such like casualty. The pain whereof breedeth a viscouse and slimy humour, which resorting to the bones, that are of their own nature, cold and dry, waxeth hard, and cleaveth to some bone, and in process of time becometh a bone. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and the hard swelling is apparent to the eye, being higher than any place of the crownet. The cure according to Martin is thus. first wash it well with warm water, and shave away all the hair, so as the sore place may be all discovered. Then scarify it lightly with the point of a Razor, so as the blood may issue forth. Then if the sore be broad, take of Euforbium one ounce, of Cantharides half an ounce, broken both into fine powder, and of Oil de Bay one ounce, and if the sore be but little, the one half of this may serve. Boil these things together, stirring them continually lest it run over, and with two or three feathers, lay it boiling hot unto the sore, and let not the horse stir from that place for half an hour after. Then carry him into the stable, and both use him & cure him for the space of nine days, in such order as hath been said before in the Chapter of the splent. But when the hair beginneth to grow again, then fire the sore place with right lines from the pastorne down to the coffin of the hove in this manner, and let the edge of the drawing iron be as thick, as the back of a meat knife, and burn him so deep as the skin may look yellow, that done, cover the burning with Pitch, & Rosen melted together, and clap thereon floxe of the horses own colour, or somewhat nigh the same, and about three days after, lay again some of the last mentioned plaster, or ointment, and also new flox upon the old, and there let them remain until they fall away of themselves. But if these ring-bones, or knobs breed in any other place than in the cronette, you shall cure them as is before said without fyering them.   

Of the Crown scab. The. Cxli Chapter.  
THis is a kind of filthy and stinking scab, breeding round about the feet upon the cronettes, and is an division and painful disease, called in Italian Grisaria. It seemeth to come by means that the horse hath been bred in some cold wet soil, striking corrupt humours up to his feet, and therefore the horse that hath this grief is worse troubled in winter, than in summer. The signs be these. The hair of the cronettes will be thin, and staring like bristles, and the cronets will be always mattering, and run on a water. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of Soap, of Hogs grease, of each half a pound, of bull Armeny a little, of turpentine a quartern, and mingle them well together, and make a plaster, and bind it fast on, renewing it every day once, until it leave running, and then wash it with strong vinegar being lukewarm every day once, until the sore be clean dried up, and let him come in no wet until he be whole.   

Of hurts upon the cronet by crossing one foot over an other, which the Italians call Supraposte. The. Cxlij. Chapter.  
MArtin. Wash it well with white wine, or with a little stolen, and then lay unto it the white of an egg mingled with a little Chimney soot and salt, and that will dry it up in three or four days, if it be renewed every day once.   

Of the quitterbone. The. Cxliij. Chapter.  
THis is a hard round swelling upon the cronette, betwixt the heel and the quarter, and groweth most commonly on the inside of the foot, and is called of the Italians Setula, or Seta. It cometh by means of gravel gathered underneath the shoe, which fretteth the heel, or else by the cloying or pricking of some nail evil driven, the anguish whereof loseneth the gristle, and so breedeth evil humours, whereof the quitterbone springeth. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and the swelling is apparent to the eye, which in four or five days cometh to a head, will break out with matter at a little deep hole like a fistula. The cure according to Martin is thus. First burn about the quitterbone with a hot iron, in manner of a half circle, and then with the same iron draw an other right strike through the midst thereof in this sort. Then take of Arsenic the quantity of a Bean beaten into fine powder, and put it into the hole thrusting it down to the bottom with a quill, & stop the mouth of the hole with a little toawe, and bind it so fast with a cloth, and cord, as the horse may not come at it with his mouth, and so let it rest for that day. And the next day, if you see that the sore looketh black within, than it is a sign that the Arsenic hath wrought well, and done his part. Then to allay the burning thereof, taint the hole with flax dippeth in Hog's grease, and turpentine, molten & mingled together, and cover the taint with a bolster of toawe dipped also in the ointment aforesaid, continuing so to do every day once until you have gotten out the core. Then shall you see whether the loose gristle in the bottom be uncovered or not, and if it be not uncovered, then feel with your finger, or with a quill, whither you be nigh it or not. And if you be, then raise the gristle with a little crooked instrument, and pull it clean out with a pair of small Nyppers meet for the purpose. That done, taint it again with a full taint dippeth in the foresaid Ointment, to assuage the anguish of the last dressing, and stop it hard, to the intent that the hole may not shrink together or close up, and the next day take out that taint, and taint it a new with the salve or ointment taught in the Chapter of the shekel gall, renewing it every day once until it be hole, keeping always the mouth of the sore as open as you may, to the intent that it heal not up to fast, and let not the horse come in any wet, nor travel, until he be perfectly whole.   

Of the graveling. The. Cxliiij. Chapter.  
THis is a fretting under the foot, most commonly in the inside, and sometime in the outside, and sometime in both sides together of the heel. It cometh by means of little gravel stones getting betwixt the hoof, and calkin, or sponge of the shoe, which by continual labour & treading of the horse, doth eat into the quick, and the rather, if his heel be soft and weak, or that the shoe lie to flat to his foot, so as the gravel being once gotten in, can not get out again. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and covet to tread all upon the toe, to favour his heel. The cure according to Martin is thus. First pare the hoof, and get out the gravel with a cornette or drawer, leaving none behind, for if you do, it will breed to a quitterbone. That done, stop him with turpentine and Hogs grease melted together, and laid on with a little toawe or flax, and then clap on the shoe to keep in the stopping, renewing it every day once until it be whole. And suffer the Horse to come in no wet, until he be throughly hole. If a gravelling be not well stopped to keep down the flesh, it will rise higher than the hoof, and not only require more business in bolstering it, but also put the horse to more pain.   

Of Surbating. The. Cxlv. Chapter.  
THis is a beating of the hoof against the ground, called of the Italians Sobatitura, it cometh sometime by means of evil shoeing lying to flat to his foot, or by going long barefoot, and sometime by the hardness of the ground, and high lifting of the horse. And those horses that be flat footed, the coffins whereof are tender & weak, be most commonly subject to this sorance. The signs be these. The horse will halt on both his fore legs, and go stiffly, and creeping as though he were half foundered. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take off his shoes, pare him as little as may be, and if the shoes be not easy, that is to say, long, large, and hollow enough, then make them so, and tack them on again with four or five nails. That done, stop his feet with bran, and Hogs grease boiled together, so hot as may be, and also cover all the coffin round about with the same, binding all in together with a cloth, and a list fastened about the joint, renewing it every day once, until it be whole, & give the horse during that while warm water, and let him stand dry and warm, and not be travailed until he be whole.   

Of a prick in the sole of the foot, either by treading on a nail, or any other sharp thing that doth enter into the foot. The. Cxlvi. Chapter.  
THe signs be these. If a man be on his back when he treadeth on any such thing, he shall feel that the horse will lift up his foot, and covet to stand still to have help. And if it chance at any other time, the halting of the horse, and the hurt itself will show. The cure according to Martin is thus. Pull of the shoe, and pair the foot, and with a drawer uncover the hole, making the mouth so broad as a two penny piece, then tack on the shoe again. That done, stop it, by pouring into the hole Turpentine and hogs grease melted together, and lay some flax, or toawe upon it, and then stop all the horses foot with horsdong, or rather with Cow dung, if you can get it, & splent it either with sticks, or else with an old shoe sole, so as the stopping may abide in, renewing it every day once until it be whole, and let the horse come in no wet. If this be not well cured, or looked to in time, it will cause the hoof to break above, and to loosen round about, and perhaps to fall clean away. But it you see that it begin to break above, then make a greater issue beneath, by opening the hole wider, and taking more of the sole away, that the flesh may have the more liberty. Then take of bull Armeny half a quartern, & of bean flower, and two eggs. Beat them, and mingle them well together, and make a plaster thereof upon toaw, & lay it round about the cronet, bind it fast on, & so let it remain the space of two days, & then renew it again, not failing so to do every two days, until you see it wax hard & firm above. For this plaster being restrictive, will force the humours to resort all downward, which must be drawn out with Turpentyne and Hogs grease as before, until it leave mattering, and then dry it up with burnt Allom, beaten in powder, and strewed upon it, with a little flax laid again upon that, continuing so to do every day once until it be hardened, & let not the horse come in any wet until he be whole.   

Of the Fig. The. Cxlvij. Chapter.  
IF a horse having received any hurt, as before is said by canel, nail, bone, splent, or stone, or otherwise in the sole of his foot, and be not well dressed and perfectly cured: there will grow in that place a certain superfluous piece of flesh, like a Fig, yea and it will have little grains in it like a Fig, and therefore is rightly called of the Italians Vnfico, that is to say, a Fig. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. Cut it clean away with a hot iron, and keep the flesh down with Turpentine, Hogs grease, and a little Wax laid on with tow or flax, and stop the hole hard, that the flesh rise not, renewing it once a day until it be whole.   

Of a Retreat. The. Cxlviij. Chapter.  
THis is the pricking of a nail, not well driven in the shoeing, and therefore pulled out again by the smith, and is called of the Italians Tratta messa. The cause of the pricking may be partly, the rash driving of the Smith, and partly the weakness of the nail, or the hollowness of the nail in the shank. For if it be to weak, the point many times bendeth awry into the quick, when it should go right forth, again, if the shank be hollow, it slattereth and shivereth in the driving, into two parts, whereof, one part raceth the quick in pulling out, or else perhaps breaketh clean a sunder, and so remaineth still behind, and this kind of pricking is worse than a cloying, because it will rankle worse, by reason of the flaw, remaining in the flesh. The signs be these. If the Smith that driveth such a nail be so lewd, as he will not look unto it, before the horse depart, than there is no way to know it, but by the halting of the horse, & searching the hoof first with a hammer by knocking upon every clinging. For when you knock upon that nail, where the grief is, the horse will shrink up his foot. And if that will not serve, then grope the hoof with a pair of pinson's round about, until you have found the place grieved. The cure according to Martin is thus. First, pull of the shoe, and then open the place grieved with a butter, or drawer, so as you may perceive by feeling or seeing, whether there be any piece of nail or not, if there be, to pull it clean out, and to stop the hole with turpentine, Wax, and sheeps suet melted together, and so poured hot into the hole, and then lay a little tow upon it, and clap on the shoe again, renewing it thus every day until it be whole, during which time, let not the horse come in any wet, and it must be so stopped, though it be but pricked without any piece of nail remaining. And if for lack of looking to in time, this Retreat causeth the hoof to break above, then cure it with the plaster restrictive in such order as is mentioned in the last chapter, saving one before this.   

Of Cloying. The. Cxlix.  
CLoying is the pricking of a whole nail called of the Italians Inchiodatura, passing through the quick and remaining still in the same, and is clenchid as other nails be, and so causeth the horse to halt. The grieved place is known, by searching with the hammer and pinson's as is before said. If the horse halt immediately, then pull of his shoe, and open the hole, until it begin to bleed, and stop it with the ointment aforesaid in the chapter of the Retreat, and clap on the shoe again, and the hoof may be so good, and the harm so little, as you may travail him immediately upon it. But if it be rancled, then renew the stopping every day once, and let him come in no wet until it be whole.   

Of lousening the hoof. The. Cl. Chapter.  
THis is a parting of the hoof from the cronet, called of the Italians, Dissolatura del unghia, which if it be round about, it cometh by means of foundering, if in part, then by the anguish, caused by the pricking of some canel nail perching the sole of the foot, or by some quitterbone, retreat graveling, or cloying, or such like thing. The signs be these. When it is lousened by foundering then it will break first in the fore part of the cronet, right against the Toes, because the humour doth covet always to descend towards the toe. Again, when the pricking of a canell nail or such like cankered thing is the cause, than the hoof will losen round about, equally even at the first. But when it proceeds of any of the other hurts last mentioned, than the hoof will break right above the place that is offended, & most commonly will proceed no further. The cure according to Martin is thus. first, of which soever of these causes it proceeds, be sure to open the hoof in the sole of the foot, so as the humour may have free passage downward, and then restrain it above with the plaster restrictive before mentioned, & in such order as is there written, & also heal up the wound, as is before taught in the chapter of a prick in the sole of the foot.   

Of casting the hoof. The. Cli. Chapter.  
THis is when the coffin falleth clean away from the foot, which cometh by such causes as were last rehearsed, and is so apparent to the eye, as it needeth no signs to know it. The cure according to Martin is thus. Take of Turpentine one pound, of Tar, half a pint of unwrought Wax, half a pound of sheeps suet, half a pound, of salet Oil half a pint. Boil all these things together, and stir them continually until they be thoroughly mingled, and compact together. Then make a boot of leather with a good strong sole meet for the horses foot, to be laced or buckled about the pastorne, & dress his foot with the salve aforesaid laid upon flax or toaw, and bolster or stuff his foot with soft flax, so as the boot may grieve him no manner of way, renewing it every day once until it be whole, and then put him to grass.   

Of the hoof bound. The. Clij. Chapter.  
THis is a shrinking of all the whole hoof. It cometh by drought, for that the hooves perhaps are kept to dry, when the horse standeth in the stable, & sometime by means of heat, or of over strait shoeing. The Italians call the horse thus grieved Incastellado. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and the hooves will be hot, and if you knock on them with a hammer, they will sound hollow like an empty bottle, and if both the feet be not hoof bound, the sore foot will be lesser than the other, in deed, and appear so to the eye. The cure according to Martin is thus. Pull of his shoes, & show him with half Moon shoes, called Lunette, the order and shape, whereof you shall find hereafter among the other shoes, and raze both the quarters of the hoof with a drawer, from the corownet unto the sole of the foot, so deep as you shall see the dew come forth. And if you make two races on each side, it shall be so much the better, and enlarge the hoof the more. That done, anoint all the hoof above, next unto the corownet round about, with the ointment prescribed before, in the Chapter of casting the hoof, continuing so to do every day once until he begin to amend, and let him be ridden upon some soft wet ground an hour or two, every day once, for the space of a month, and if he goeth not well at the Months end, than take off the half shoes, and pair all the soles, frusshes and all, so thin as you may see the dew come forth, and tack on a whole shoe and stop all the foot within with Hogs grease, and bran boiled together, and laid hot to the foot, renewing it every day once, the space of ix days, to the intent the sole may rise. But if this will do no good. Then take away the sole clean, and clapp one a whole shoe, and stop the foot with nettles, and Salt brayed together, renewing it once a day, but not over hard, to the intent the sole may have liberty to rise, and being grown again, let him be shod with the lunettes, and so sent to grass.   

Of the running Frushe. The. Cliij. Chapter.  
THe Frushe is the tenderest part of the hoof towards the heel, called of the Ilians Fettone, and because it is fashioned like a forked head, the French men call it Furchette, which word our ferrers, either, for not knowing rightly how to pronounce it, or else perhaps for easiness sake of pronunciation do make it a monasillable, and do shortly pronounce it the frushe, in which frush breedeth many times a rottenness or corruption proceeding of humours that cometh out of the leg, whereby the leg is kept clean from wynegalles, and all other tumours and swellings, by means that the humours have passage that way. Notwithstanding the discomodity of this sorance is greater than the commodity, because it maketh the horse's foot so weak and tender, as he is not able to tread upon any hard ground. The signs be these. The horse will halt, and specially when the passage of the humour is stopped with any gravel gathered into the Frushe, and not being stopped, it will continually run, the savour whereof will be so strong as a man is not able to abide it, and in some places it will look raw. The cure according to Martin is thus. First take off the shoe, and pair away all the corrupt places, and make them raw, so as you may see the water issue out of the raw places. Then tack on the shoe again, being first made wide, & large enough. That done, take of soot one handful, of salt as much. Bruise them well together in a dish and put thereunto the white of three eggs, and temper them altogether, and with a little toaw dipped therein, stop all the foot, and specially the frushe, and splent it so, as it may not fall out, renewing it once a day, the space of seven days, and then he will be whole. During which time, let the horse rest, and come in no wet, at the vij days end, leave stopping him, and ride him abroad, and always when he cometh in, let his sore foot be clean washed, that no gravel remain therein, without doing any more unto him.   

Of diseases or griefs indifferently incident to any part of the body, but first of the Leprosy or universal maunginesse called of the old writers Elephantia. The. Cliiij. Chapter.  
THis is a cankered maunginesse spreading over all the body, which cometh of abundance of Melancholy, corrupt, and filthy blood. The signs be these. The horse will be all maungye, and scurvy full of scabs, and raw plots about the neck, & evil favoured to look on, & always rubbing & scratching. The cure according to Martin is thus. Let him blood the first day in the one side of the neck, & within two days after on the other side of the neck, & within two days after that, in the flank veins, & last of all in the vain under the tail. Then wash all the sore places with salt brine, & rubbing them hard, with a wisp of straw hard twysted, so as they may bleed well, and be all raw. That done, anoint the places with this ointment. Take of quick silver one ounce, of Hogs grease one pound, of brimstone beaten into powder a quartern, of Rape oil a pint. Mingle these things well together until the quick silver be throughly incorporated with the rest, and having anointed all the raw places with this ointment, make it to sink into the flesh, by holding and weaving up & down over it, a hot broad bar of iron, & then touch him no more again, the space of two or three days, during which time, if you see that he rubbeth still in any place, then rub that place again with an old horsecombe, to make it raw, and anoint it with fresh ointment. But if all this will not help, then with a hot iron round and blunt at the point, so big as a man's little finger. Burn all the maungye places, making round holes passing only through the skin, and no further. For which intent it shall be needful, to pull the skin first from the flesh, with your left hand, holding it still until you have thrust the hot iron through it, and let every hole be a span one from an other, and if need be, you may anoint those holes with a little Soap, and let the horse be thin dieted, during this curing tyme.   

Of the Farcyn, called in Italian of some, ill verme, and of some Farcina. The. Clu. Chapter.  
THis is a kind of creeping ulcer growing in knots following alongst some vain, and it proceedeth of corrupt blood engendered in the body, or else of some outward hurt, as of spurgalling, or of the biting of some other horse, or of the biting of tickes, or of Hogs lice, or such like casualtyes. Or if it be in the leg, it may come by interfering. It is easily known, partly by the former description, and also it is apparent to the eye. The cure according to Martin is thus. Let him blood in that vain where it cometh, as nigh the sore place as may be, & let him bleed well. Then fire every knot one by one, taking the knot in your left hand, and pulling it so hard as you can from his body, to the intent you may the better pierce the knot, with a round, blunt, hot iron, of the bigness of a man's forefinger, without doing the body any hurt, and let the matter out, leaving none unburned, be it little or much. That done, anoint every knot so burned with Hogs grease warmed every day once, until the cores be ready to fall away, and in the mean time prepare a good quantity of old urine, and when you see that the cores are ready to fall: boil the urine, and put therein a little Corporas, and salt, and a few strong Nettles, and with that water, being warm, wash out all the cores, and all the corruption. That done, fill every hole immediately with the powder of sleict lime, continuing thus to do, every day once, until the holes be closed up, and if any be more ranker than others, fill those with Uerdygrease, and during this cure, let the horse be thinly dieted, that is to say, with straw and water only: unless it be now and then to give him a loaf of bread. For the lower he be kept the sooner he will be whole. And in any wise let his neck be yoked in an old bottomless pail, or else with short staves to keep him from licking the sores, and the less rest he hath, the better.   

Of the Canker called of the Italians ill Cancro. The. Clvi. Chapter.  
A Canker is a filthy creeping Ulcer, fretting and gnawing the flesh in great breadth. In the beginning it is knotty, much like a Farcyne, and spreadeth itself into divers places, and being exulcerated, gathereth together at length into one wound or sore. This proceeds of a Melancholy and filthy blood engendered in the body, which if it be mixed with sharp and salt humours, it causeth the more painful and grievous exulceration, and sometime it cometh of some filthy wound, that is not cleanly kept, the corrupt matter whereof cankreth other clean parts of the body. It is easy to be known by the description before written. The cure whereof according to Martin is thus. First let him blood in those veins that be next unto the sore, and take enough of him. Then take of Alom, half a pound, of green Corporas as much, of white Corporas one quartern, and a good handful of salt. Boil all these things together, in fair running water from a pottle to a quart, and this water being warm, wash the sore therewith, with a clout, & then sprinkle thereon the powder of sleyked lime, continuing so to do every day once, the space of xu days, and if you see that the Lime do not mortify the rank flesh, and keep it from spreading any further, then take of Soap half a pound, of quick silver half an ounce, and beat them together in a pot, until the quick silver be so well mingled with the Soap, as you can perceive none of the quick silver in it. And with an iron sclyce, after that you have washed the sore with the strong water aforesaid, cover the wound with this ointment, continuing thus to do every day once, until the canker leave spreading abroad. And if it leave spreading, and that you see the rank flesh is mortified, and that the edges begin to gather a skin. Then after the washing, dress it with the Lime as before, continuing so to do until he be whole. And in the dressing suffer no filth that cometh out of the sore, to remain upon any whole place about, but wipe it clean away, or else wash it away with warm water. And let the Horse during this cure, be as thinly dieted as may be, and thoroughly exercised.   

Of the Fistula, called of the Italians Fistula. The. Clvij. Chapter.  
A Fistula is a deep hollow crooking Ulcer, & for the most part springs of malign humours, engendered in some wound, sore, or canker, not thoroughly healed. It is easy to know by the description before made. The cure according to Martin is thus. First search the depth of it with a quill, or with some other instrument of Lead, that may be bowed every way, meet for the purpose. For unless you find the bottom of it, it will be very hard to cure. And having found the bottom, if it be in such place as you may boldly cut, and make the way open with a lancet, or Razor, then make a slit right against the bottom, so wide as you may thrust in your finger, to feel whether there be any bone or gristle perished, or spongy, or lose flesh, which must be gotten out, & then taint it with a taint of flax, dipped in this ointment. Take of honey a quartern, and of Uerdigrease one ounce beaten in powder. Boil them together until it looke-redde, stirring it continually, lest it run over, and being lukewarm, dress the taint therewith, and bolster the taint with a bolster of flax. And if it be in such a place, as the taint can not conveniently be kept in with a band, then fasten on each side of the hole, two ends of a shoemakers thread right over the bolster, to keep in the taint, which ends may hang there as two laces to tie, and untie at your pleasure, renewing the taint every day once, until the sore leave mattering. And then make the taint every day lesser and lesser, until it be whole. And close it up, in the end, by sprinkling thereon a little sleict lime. But if the Fistula be in such a place, as a man can neither cut right against the bottom, nor nigh the same: then there is no remedy but to pour in some strong water, through some quill, or such like thing, so as it may go to the bottom, and dry up the filthy matter, dressing him so twice a day, until the horse be whole.   

Of an Anburye. The. Clviij. Chapter.  
THis is a great spongy wert full of blood, called of the Italians Moro, or Selso, which may grow in any place of the body, and it hath a root like a cocks stone. The cure according to Martin is thus. Tie it about with a thread, so hard as you can pull it, and the thread will eat in, by little and little, in such sort as within seven or eight days, it will fall away by itself. And if it be so flat as you can bind nothing about it, then take it away with a sharp hot iron, cutting it round about, and so deep as you leave none of the root behind, and dry it up with Uerdygrease. Russius saith, that if it grow in a place full of sinews, so as it can not be conveniently cut away with a hot iron, than it is good to eat out the core with the powder of Resalgar, and then to stop the hole with flax dipped in the white of an egg, for a day or two, and lastly, to dry it up with the powder of unsleict lime, and honey as before is taught.   

Of wounds. The. Clix. Chapter.  
WOunds cometh by means of some stripe or prick, and they are properly called wounds, when some whole part is cut, or broken. For a wound according to the Physicians is defined to be a solution, division, or parting of the hole. For if there be no such solution or parting, then me thinks, it ought rather to be called a browse, than a wound. And therefore wounds are most commonly made, with sharp, or piercing weapons, and brouses, with blunt weapons. Notwithstanding, if by such blunt weapons, any part of the hole be evidently broken, than it ought to be called a wound as well as the other. Of wounds some be shallow, and some be deep, & hollow. Again, some chance in the fleshy parts, and some in the bonye, and sinew places. And those that chance in the fleshy parts, though they be very deep, yet they be not so dangerous, as the others, and therefore we will speak first of the most dangerous. If a horse have a wound newly made, either in his head or in any other place, that is full of sinews, bones, or gristles. First Martin would have you to wash the wound well with white wine warmed. That done, to search the bottom of the wound with some instrument, meet for the purpose, suffering it to take as little wind in the mean while as may be. Then having found the depth, stop the hole close with a clout, until your saluebe ready. Then take of Turpentine, of Mel Rosatum, of Oil of Roses, of each a quartern and a little unwrought wax, and melt them together, stirring them continually that they may be well mingled together, and if it be a cut, make a handsome roll of clean picked toaw, so long, and so big as may fill the bottom of the wound, which for the most part is not so wide, as the mouth of the wound, then make an other roll greater than that, to fill up the rest of the wound, even to the hard mouth, and let both these rolls be anointed with the ointment aforesaid lukewarm. But if the hurt be like a hole made with some prick. Then make a stiffe-taynt, such a one as may reach the bottom, anointed with the foresaid ointment, and bolster the same with a little toaw. And if the mouth be not wide enough, so as the matter may easily run forth, if it be in such place, as you may do it without hurting any sinew, then give it a pretty slit, from the mouth downward, that the matter may have the freer passage. And in any wise have a special regard, that the taint may be continually kept in, by one means or other, as by binding or staying the same, with the ends of a shoemakers thread, as is aforesaid. And if the hole be deep, and in such place, as you may not cut it, then make your taint of a sponge, and so long as it may reach the bottom, and the taint being made some what full, with continual turning and wrying of it, you shall easily get it down, and then dress the wound with this, twice a day, cleansing the wound every time with a little white Wine luke warm. For this sponge anointed with the ointment aforesaid will both draw, and suck up all the filthy matter, and make it so fair within as is possible, & as it beginneth to heal, so make your taint every day lesser and lesser, until it be ready to close up, and never leave tainting it, so long as it will receive a taint, be it never so short. For hasty healing of wounds breedeth fistulas, which properly be old wounds, and therefore must be cured like Fystulas.   

Of wounds in the fleshy parts. The. Clx. Chapter.  
Use the same ointment, and manner of proceeding as before, & if the wound be very large, then to keep in the taint or rolls, you shall be fain to put two or three shoemakers ends on each side of the sore, leaving them so long as you may tie them together, and lousen them when you will, like laces.   

Of a Hurt with an arrow. The. Clxi Chapter.  
IF the horse be hurt with an arrow, taint the hole with Hog's grease, and Turpentine melted together, renewing it every day once until it be whole.   

Of pulling out shyvers or thorns. The. Clxij. Chapter.  
MArtin saith, that if it be not very deep, Soap being laid unto it all night, will make it to appear, so as you may pull it out with a pair of nippers. But if it be very deep, than you must open the place with a knife or lancet, and get it out, and afterward heal up the wound, as have been taught you before. Russius saith, the the roots of reed being stamped and mingled with honey will draw out any thorn, or shiver, and so will snails. as he saith being stamped and wrought with fresh butter, and if the place be swollen, he saith it is good to mollify it, with a plaster made of wormwood, Paretory, Bears foot, Hogs grease, and Honey, which will assuage any new swelling, that cometh by stripe, or otherwise.   

Of bruisings or swellings. The. Clxiij. Chapter.  
MArtin. First prick it with a phlegm. Then take of wine Lees a pint, as much wheat flower as will thicken it, and an ounce of Comyn. Boil them together, & lay this somewhat warm unto it, renewing it every day once until the swelling either depart, or else come to a head. And if it do, than lance it, and heal it up, as a wound.   

Of sinews cut, pricked, or bruised. The. Clxiiij. Chapter.  
TAke of Tar and bean flower, and a little Oil of Roses, and lay it hot unto the place, and if this do no good, then take worms and salad Oil fried together, or else the ointment of Worms, which you shall have at the Apothecaries, and one of these will knit it again, if it be not clean a sunder.   

How to cure a wound made with Hargabush shot. The. Clxu. Chapter.  
MArtin. First seek with an instrument whether the pellet remain within or not, and if it do, you must get it out with an instrument meet for the purpose. Then to kill the fire. Take a little varnish, and thrust it into the wound with a feather, anointing it well within with the feather, and after that, stop the mouth fair and softly with a little soft flax, to keep the wind out, and on the outside charge all the swelling with this charge. Take of bull Armenia a quartern, of linseed beaten into powder, half a pound, of bean flower as much, and three or four eggs, shells and all, and of Turpentine a quartern, and a quart of Vinegar, and mingle them well together over the fire, and being somewhat warm charge all the sore place with part thereof, and immediately clap a cloth or a piece of leather upon it, to keep the wound from the cold air, continuing both to anoint the hole within with varnish, and also to charge the swelling without, the space of four or five days, and at the five days end, leave anointing of it, and taint it with a taint reaching to the bottom of the wound, and dipped in turpentine and Hogs grease melted together, renewing it every day twice, until the fire be thoroughly killed, which you shall perceive by the mattering of the wound, and by falling of the swelling, for so long as the fire hath the upper hand, no thick matter will issue out, but only a thin yellowish water, neither will the swelling assuage. And then take of Turpentine, washed in nine several waters, half a pound, and put thereunto three yolks of eggs, and a little saffron, and taint it with this ointment, renewing it every day once, until the wound be whole.   

Of burning with lime, or any other fiery thing. The. Clxvi. Chapter.  
MArtin. First wash away the Lime if there be any with warm water. Then kill the fire, with oil & water beaten together, dressing him so every day until it be all raw, and then anoint it with Hogs grease, and strow thereupon the powder of sleykid lime dressing him so every day once, until it be whole.   

Of the biting of a mad dog. The. Clxvij. Chapter.  
IF a horse be bitten with a mad dog, the venom of his teeth will not only pain him extremely, but also infect all his blood, & make him to die mad. The cure according to the old writers is thus. Take of Goat's dung, of flesh that hath laid long in salt, and of the herb Ebulus, called of some Danewort, of each half a pound, and xl Walnuts. Stamp all these things together, & lay some thereof unto the sore, and this will suck out the venom, and heal the wound. It is good also to give the Horse Treacle, and wine to drink, yea, and some would have the sore place to be fired with a hot iron.   

Of hurts by the Tusks of a Boar. The. Clxviij. Chapter.  
IF a horse be hurt with the tusk of a Boar, lay Vitriol and Corporas thereunto, and the powder of a dogs head, being burned, but let the tongue be first pulled out and cast away.   

To heal the biting or stinging of Serpents. The. Clxix. Chapter.  
LAurentius Russius. Take a good quantity of the herb called Sanicula, stamp it, and distemper it with the milk of a Cow, that is all of one colour, and give him that to drink, and that will heal him.  
another medicine for the same purpose.  
MAke a plaster of Onions, Honey, & salt, stamped, and mingled together, and lay that to the sore place, and give the horse wine, & Treacle to drink. Absirtus would have you to give him white Pepper, Rhewe, and Time, to drink with wine.   

Of drinking of Horse leeches. The. Clxx. Chapter.  
IF a horse chance to drink Horse leeches, they will continually suck his blood, and kill him. The remedy according to Absirtus, is to pour Oil into the horse's mouth, which will make them to fall away and kill them.   

Of swallowing down hens dung. The. Clxxi. Chapter.  
IF a horse swallow down hens dung in his hay, it will fret his guts, and make him to void filthy matter at the fundament. For remedy whereof, Absirtus would have you to give him a drink made of Smalladge seed, wine, and honey, and to walk him thoroughly upon it, that he may empty his belly.   

Of Lice, how to kill them. The. Clxxij. Chapter.  
THey be like Geese Lice, but somewhat bigger, they will breed most about the ears, neck, and tail, and over all the body. They come of poverty, and the horse will be always rubbing, and scratching, and will eat his meat, and not prosper withal, and with rubbing he will break all his Main, and tail. The cure according to Martin is thus. Anoint the place with Soap and quick silver, well mingled together, and to a pound of Soap, put half an ounce of quick silver.   

How to save horses, from the stinging of Flies in Summer. The. Clxxiij. Chapter.  
Anoint the horses coat with Oil, and Bay buries, mingled together, or tie to the headestall of his colour a sponge dipped in strong Vinegar, or sprinkle the stable with water, wherein herb grace hath been laid in stepe. Or perfume the stable with ivy, or with calamint, or with Gith, burned in a pan of coals.   

Of bones being broken or out of joint. The. Clxxiiij. Chapter.  
Few or none of our Ferrer do intermeddle with any such griefs, but do refer it over unto the bone setter, whose practised hand, I must needs confess, to be needful in such business. Notwithstanding, for that it belongeth to the Ferrer art, and also for that the old writers do make some mention thereof, I thought good not to pass it over altogether with silence. Albeit, they speak only of fractures, in the legs beneath the knee. For they make little mention or none, of bones above the knee, taking them to be uncurable, unless it be a rib or such like. If any bone then be broken in the leg, it is easy to perceive, by feeling the roughness & inequality of the place grieved, one part being higher than an other. The cure whereof, according to Absirtus, and Hierocles, is in this sort. First, put the bone again into his right place. That done, wrap it about with unwashed will, binding it fast to the leg with a smooth linen roller, soaked before in oil & Vinegar mingled together. And let that roller be laid on, as even as is possible, and upon that, lay again more will, dippeth in oil and Vinegar, and then splent it with three splents, binding them fast at both ends with a thong, & let the horses leg be kept strait, and right out, the space of xl days, and let not the bonds be lousened above three times in twenty days, unless it shrink, & so require to be new dressed, and bound again. But fail not every day once, to pour on the sore place, through the splents, oil and Vinegar, mingled together, & at the xl days end, if you perceive that the broken place be sowdered together, again with some hard knob or gristle: Then lousen the bonds, so as the Horse may go fair and softly, using from that time forth to anoint the place with some soft grease or ointment.   

Of bones out of joint. The. Clxxu. Chapter.  
IF a Horse's knee, or shoulder be clean out of joint, and no bone broken. Martin saith the readiest way is, to bind all the four legs together, in such sort as have been taught before, in the Chapter of Incording, and then to hoist the horse somewhat from the ground, with his heels upward, so shall the weight and poise of his body, cause the joint to shoot in again, into his right place, for by this means, he pleasured not long since a friend, and neighbour of his, who going with his Cart from Saint Albon, towards his house, his Thyller fell, and put his shoulder clean out of joint, so as he was neither able to rise, nor being helped up, could stand on his legs. To which mischance, Martin being called, made no more a do, but taking his friends Cart rope, bound the horses legs all four together, and with a leaver thrust betwixt his legs and body, and the one end of the leaver being stayed upon the Cart wheel, they putting their shoulders to the other end, hoist up the horse clean from the ground, the poise of whose body, made the bone to return into his right place, with such a loud knack, as it mought be hard a great way of, and the Horse immediately had the use of of his leg, so as he drew in the Cart, and went safe home, without complaining thereof ever after.   

Certain receipts of plasters, very good for broken bones, taken out of the old Authors, writing of horse leech craft. The. Clxxvi. Chapter.  
TAke of Spuma argenti, of Vinegar, of each one pound, of Salad oil, half a pound, of Amoniacum, and of Turpentine, of each three ounces, of wax, of Rosen, of each two ounces, of Bitumen, of Pitch, and of Uerdygrease, of each half a pound. Boil the vinegar, oil, and Spuma argenti together, until it wax thick, then put thereunto the pitch, which being melted, take the pot from the fire, and put in the Bitumen, without stirring it at all, and that being also melted, put in then all the rest, & set the pot again to the fire, and let them boil all together, until they be all united in one. That done, strain it, and make it in plaster form, and this is called Hierocles plaster.   

Another receit for broken bones, The. Clxxvij. Chapter.  
TAke of liquid Pitch one pound, of wax two ounces, of the purest and fineh part of Frankincense one ounce, of Amoniacum four ounces, of dry Rosen, & of Galuanum of each one ounce, of Vinegar two pints. Boil first the Vinegar and pitch together, then put in the Amoniacum, dissolved first in vinegar, & after that all the rest of the foresaid drugs, and after they have boiled all together, & be united in one, strain it, and make it plaster wise, & this is called Emplastrum slaws, that is to say, the yellow plaster▪   

An ointment for broken bones. The. Clxxviij. Chapter.  
TAke of old salad oil a quart, and put thereunto of Hog's grease, of Spuma nitri, of each one pound, and let them boil together, until it begin to bubble above, and let this ointment be very warm, when you use it.  
HItherto of all the diseases belonging to a horse. Now therefore my promise made unto you, in the beginning of this book, to speak of those things wherein the cure of all diseases do consist, that is to say, in letting blood, in taking up of veins, in purging, and in giving the fire, yea, and also order itself bindeth me to treat of the said things presently, and first of letting blood.   

In how many veins a Horse may be let blood in, and to what end. The. Clxxix. Chapter.  
AS touching the order, time of the year, Moon & day and other circumstances belonging to letting of blood, we have sufficiently spoken already in the keepers office, in the xxij. Chapter. It resteth therefore here to show you what veins should be opened when the horse is sick of any disease, according to Vegetius opinion. But first, I will rehearse unto you once again, in how many veins a horse may be let blood in, and the rather for that in following Vegetius, I left out in the vij Chapter of the keepers office, the two temple veins, which be the two first and principal veins of the head. A horse than may be let blood in the two temple veins. Item, in the two eye veins, which are easy to find in the face of the horse, somewhat beneath the eyes. Item, in the two palate veins, of the mouth. Item, in the two neck veins. Item, in the two plat veins which be in the breast. Item, in the two forthyghe veins. Item, in the four shackle veins before. Item, in the two toe veins before. Item, in the two side veins, which may be otherwise called flank veins. Item, in the tail vain. Item, in the two haunch veins. Item, in the two hough veins. Item, in the four shackle veins behind. Item, in the two toe veins behind, so that by this account a horse may be let blood in xxxi veins. All which veins are easy enough to know, because that every one lieth in a little gutter, which by feeling softly with your finger, you shall find immediately. And Vegetius saith, that if a horse be pained with any grief in his head, ache, heaviness, frenzy, falling evil, or such like, than it is good to let him blood in the temple veins with a phlegm. If his eyes be waterish, blood shotten, or grieved, with pin, web, or haw, than it is good to strike the eye vain with a phlegm. If he have any heaviness or weariness of body, or be diseased in the throat with the stranguillon, quynzy, or swelling of the arters, either within or without, than it is good to let him blood in the mouth, in the palate veins with a cornette. If he be vexed with an ague, or with any other disease, universally hurting his body, then let him blood in the neck veins. If his grief be in the lungs, liver, or in any other inward member, then let him blood in the breast veins, which we called before the plat veins. If he be grieved in the shoulder, then let him blood in the forethighe veins, above the knee with a lancet, and that very warily, because that place is full of sinews, and if he be grieved in his joints, them let him blood in the shackle veins, and that warily, because that place is also full of sinews. And if he be foiled on his forefeet by foundering or otherwise, then let him blood in the toe veins, making way first with your drawer, or ronet in the hoof to come to the vain. If he be diseased in the kidneys, reins, back, or belly, then let him blood in the flank veins, and in his tail, if he hath any grief in his hips, or houghes, then let him blood in the hip, or houghe veins, and if his hinder legs, joints, or feet, be grieved, then let him blood in the shackle veins, and toe veins, as is before said.   

The order of taking up veins, and wherefore it is good. The. Clxxx. Chapter.  
THe order observed by Martin is in this sort. First, if the horse be very cursed and shrewd, then cast him upon a dounghill, or some straw, then having found the vain, that you would take up, mark well that part of the skin which covereth the vain, & pull that somewhat aside from the vain, with your left them be, to the intent you may slit it with a razor, without touching the vain. And cut no deeper than only through the skin, and that longstwise, as the vain goeth, and not above an inch long. That done, take away your thumb, and the skin will return again into his place, right over the vain, as it was before. Then with a cornet uncover the vain and make it bare, and being bore thrust the cornet underneath it, and raise it up, so as you may put a shoemakers thread underneath, somewhat higher than the coronet, to knit the vain when time is, and if your cornet had a hole in the small end thereof to put in the thread, it should be the easilier done. Then the cornet standing so still, slit the vain longstwayes that it may bleed, and having bled somewhat from above, then knit it up with a sure knot, somewhat above the slit suffering it to bleed only from beneath, and having bled sufficiently, then knit up the vain also beneath the slit with a sure knot, and fill the hole of the vain, with salt, and then heal up the wound of the skin with Turpentine, and Hog's grease melted together, and laid on with a little flax. The taking up of veins is very necessary, and doth ease many griefs in the legs, for the taking up of the forethighe veins easeth Farcyns, and swellings of the legs, the taking up of the shakel veins before, easeth the quitterbone, and swelling of the joints, scabs, & cratches. The taking up of the hinder veins, helpeth the farcyn, swellings, & both the spavens. The taking up of the shackle veins behind, helpeth swelling of the joints, the pains, and kibed heels and such like diseases.   

Of purging with purgation or glister. The. Clxxxiij. Chapter.  
PUrgation is defined by the Phisians to be the emptying or voiding of superfluous humours annoying the body with their evil quality. For such humours breed evil juice and nutriment called of the Physicians Cachochimia, which, when it will not be corrected or helped with good diet, alteration, nor by the benefit of nature and kindly heat, than it must needs be taken away by purgation, vomit, or glister. But for so much, as horses are not wont to be purged by vomit as men be, I will speak here only of glisters, and purgations. And first because a horse is grieved with many diseases in his guts, and that nothing can purge the guts so well as a glister, and specially the thick guts, I wish that our ferrers would learn to know, the diversity of glisters, to what end they serve, and with what drugs or simples they should be made, for as the disease requireth, so must the glister be made, some to ease griefs, & to alley the sharpness of humours, some to bind, some to lousen, some to purge evil humours, some to cleanse ulcers, but our ferrers do use glisters, only to lousen the belly, and for no other purpose, yea few or none do that, unless it be Martin, and such as he hath taught, who is not ignorant that a glister is the beginning of purgation, for a glister by cleansing the guts, refresheth the vital parts, and prepareth the way before. And therefore, whensoever a horse is surfeited, and full of evil humours needing to be purged, and specially being painted in the guts, I would wish you to begin first with a glister, lest by purging him with medicine upon the sudden, you stir up a multitude of evil humours, which finding no passage downward, because the guts be stopped, with wind and dregs, do strike upwards, and so perhaps put the horse in great danger. But now you shall understand that glisters be made of four things, that is to say, of decoctions, of drugs, of oils, or such like unctuous matters, as butter or soft grease, and four, of divers kinds of salt to provoke the virtue expulsive. A decoction is as much to say, as the broth of certain herbs or simples boiled together in water, until the third part be consumed, and sometime in steed of such decoction, it shall be needful perhaps to use some fat broth, as the broth of Beef, or of a sheeps head, or milk, or whey, or some other such like liquor, and that perhaps mingled with honey and sugar, according as the disease shall require, the glister to be either lenitive, that is to say, easing pain, or glutinative, that is joining together, or else abstersive, that is to say, cleansing, or wiping away filthy matter, of which decoction or broth being strained, you shall need to take three pints, or a quart at the least. And then into that, you may put such drugs, as shall be needful, to the weight of three or four ounces, according as the simples shall be more or less violent. Of oil at the least half a pint, and of salt two or three Dragmes, and then to be ministered lukewarm with a horn, or pipe made of purpose, when the horse is not altogether full paunched, but rather empty, be it in the fore noon or after noon. And as touching the time of keeping glisters in the body, you shall understand, that to glisters abstersive, half an hour or less may suffice, to glisters lenitive a longer time, if it may be, & to glisters glutinatyve, the longest time of all is most needful.   

Of Purgations. The. Clxxxiiij. Chapter.  
PUrgations for men may be made in divers sorts and forms, but horses are wont to be purged only with pills, or else with purging powders, put into Ale, wine, or some other liquor. But the simples whereof such pills or powders be made, would be chosen with judgement, and aptly applied, so as you may purge away the hurtful humours, and not the good. Learn first therefore to know with what humour or humours the Horse is grieved, be it choler, Flame, or melancholy, and in what part of the body, such humours do abound, than what simples are best to purge such humours, and with what property, quality, and temperament they be endued. For some be violent, and next cousins to poison, as Scamony, or Coloquintida. Some again are gentle, & rather meat than medicines, as Manna, Cassia, Whey, Prunes, and such like. And some again be neither to violent, nor to gentle, but in a mean, as Rhewbarb, Agaricke, seen Aloes. The old men did use much to purge Horses with the pulp of Coloquintida, sometime with the roots of wild Coucumbre, and sometime with the broth of a sodden whelp mingled with Nitrum, and divers other things, whereof I am sure I have made mention before in the curing of horses diseases. Notwithstanding, I would not wish you to be to rash in purging a horse, after the old men's example. For as their simples many times be very violent, so the quantities thereof by them prescribed are very much, & dangerous for any horse to take in these days, in the which neither man nor beast as it seemeth, is of such force or strength, as they have been in times past. And therefore whensoever you would purge a horse of any value, I would council you to purge him with such kinds of purgations as Martin useth, whereof you have had examples before in divers places. And whensoever you lift for knowledge sake, to deal with other simples, to prove them first upon such jades, as may be well spared. For who so mindeth to purge a horse well, that is to do him good, and no hurt, had need to consider many things, as the nature of the horses disease, and the horses strength. Also the nature, strength, and quantity of the medicine, that he ministereth, the Region, or Country time of the disease, the time of the year, and the day. For as the diseases, and evil humours causing such diseases be divers, so do they require to be purged with divers medicines, diversly compounded, wherein consisteth a point of art to be learned at the physicians hands, and not at mine. Again, weak, delicate, and tender horses, may not be purged in such sort, as those that be of a strong sturdy nature. And therefore in such cases, the quality, and quantity of the simples is not a little to be considered, neither is the hotness, or coldness of the Region to be neglected, nor the time of the disease. For some require to be purged in the very beginning, some not until the matter be thoroughly digested. And though the disease proceed perhaps of cold, and cold humours, yet a man may not minister such hot things in Summer, as he would do in Winter, nor in the contrary case, such cold things in Winter, as he would do in Summer. And therefore the time and season of the year is also to be observed, yea, & the day, and time of the day. For the more temperate the day be, the better, not an extreme hot day, for making the horse to faint, nor yet when the wind bloweth cold in the North, for that will stop and hinder the working of the medicine, but rather in a temperate moist day, when the wind is in the South, if it may be, for that will further and help the working of the medicine, and make the body louse, and soluble. Again, for a horse whither you purge him with pills or drink, it is best for him as Martin saith, to take them in the Morning, after that he hath fasted from meat and drink all the night before. And having received his medicine, let him be walked up and down, one hour at the least, and then set up, and suffered to stand on the bit, two or three hours without any meat, but in the mean time see that he be well littered, and warm covered, and at the three hours end, offer him a little of a warm mash made with wheat meal, or with bran, or else with ground malt. give him little meat or none, until he be purged, all which things have been showed you before in divers places, and therefore I think it not good to be tedious unto you with often recital thereof.   

Of Cauterization, or giving the fire aswell actual as potential. The. Clxxxu. Chapter.  
FOr so much as the fire is judged of all the old writers to be the chiefest remedy, and as it were the last refuge in all diseases almost whereunto a horse is subject. I thought good therefore, to talk of it in this place, and the rather for that few or none of our Ferrer, unless it be Martin or such as he hath taught, do know how to give the fire or to what end it serveth. But first you shall understand, that according to the learned Chirurgeons, yea also according to my old Authors there be two kinds of Cautery, the one actual and the other potential. The Cautery actual is that which is done only by fyering of the grieved place with a hot iron. The potential Cautery is done by applying unto the grieved place, some medicine corrosive, putrifactive or caustique. But we will speak first of the actual cautery showing you wherefore it is good then of what metal and fashion your instruments should be made, and finally, how, and when to use them. Avicen saith, that an actual Cautery moderately used, is a noble remedy to stop corruption of members, to rectify the complexion of the same, and also to staunch blood. How be it you must beware (saith he) that you touch not the sinews chords, or ligaments, lest the member be weakened, or that the cramp ensueth. Vegetius also writing of horseleech craft praiseth the actual cautery very much, speaking in this sort. The actual cautery (saith he) bindeth together parts loosened. It doth attenuate parts blown, & puffed up, it drieth up superfluous moisture, it looseneth, disperseth and divideth evil matter gathered together into knots, it assuageth old griefs. It rectifyeth those parts of the body that are corrupted by any manner of way reducing them to their pristine estate, and suffereth no superfluity to grow or increase, for the skin being opened with a hot iron, all kind of corruption by virtue of the fire is first digested, and rypened, and then dissolved so as the matter doth issue out at the holes, whereby the member or part before offended, is now healed, and eased of all pain and grief. Yea, the holes being once closed, and clean shut up, that place is stronger and better knit together, and covered with a tougher skin than ever it was before. Now as touching the instruments whereof, & of what fashion they should be made. You shall understand, that Vegetius and the other old writers would have them to be made of Copper, praising that metal to be far better to burn with then iron. The Chirurgeons for man's body do praise Gold and Silver, but as for the fashion of the irons, it is to be referred to the kind of sore, and place grieved, wherewith you have to deal, according to the diversity whereof, the instruments are to be made of divers fashions, as some like searing irons with sharp edges, and some with blunt & broad edges, some like right, & some like crooked bodkyns, some like hooks or sickles, and some with a great button, & some with a small button at the one end, in making whereof the ferrers judgement is most needful, who ought to be so skilful, as he may be able to make all manner of irons that he should occupy, & to alter them according as need shall require. And therefore I thought good only here to set forth the shape of the common drawing iron, and of the button iron, like in form to those that Martin useth, referring all the rest to your own judgement and specially, sith you have been fully instructed before, of what sort they should be made meet to serve your turn in any disease. Now as touching the use of the instruments two things are specially to be considered, that is, the heating of the iron, and the bearing of the hand. For the back of the iron may not be red hot, but only the edge, for fear of yielding to much heat, And therefore though it be made red hot at the first, yet it shall be good before you do occupy it, to cool the back of the instrument in water, and as touching the bearing of the hand, the more evenly and lightly it be done, the better, and that according as the fineness or thickness of the skin shall require, which is to be judged by the hair. For if the hair be short and fine, than it is a sign of a fine skin, if long and rough, than it betokeneth a thick skin. The fine skin requireth the lighter hand, and not to be burned so deep as the thick skin, yet both must be burned until they look yellow. But the fine skin will look yellow with lesser burning than the thick skin. For the thick skin with his long hair doth choke the fire, and therefore requireth a more heavy hand, yea, and more often heating of the instrument than the thin skin doth, and be sure to draw always with the hair, and not against the hair, in what form, and with what manner of lines hath been taught you before, for those must be made either long, short, deep, shallow, right, crooked, or overthwart, according as the disease doth require. You have learned also how to allay the heat of the fire, after such drawing. And therefore I have no more to say here, but only to admonish you according to Vegetius precepts, not to fire any sinew place, nor bone, that is broken, or out of joint, for fear of weakening the whole member, nor to bear so heavy or uneven hand, as you should thereby deform, or misfashion any part of the horse, nor to be to hasty in giving the fire, but to attempt first all other convenient remedies, and when nothing else will help, to make the fire your last refuge, and yet not so much to neglect it, and abhor it, like the ignorant sort, as you will not use it when need requireth, for lack whereof, many horses go lame, and uncured of divers diseases. practise yourselves therefore in giving the fire at needful times with judgement and discreatyon, so shall you do it to the Horse's benefit, and to your own great praise and profit.   

Of Cauteris Potential. The. Clxxxvi. Chapter.  
CAuteris Potential as johannes vigo saith, are medicines corosive, putrefactive, & caustic. This word corosive, is derived of the latin word Corrodo, which is as much to say, as to gnaw and fret, and of such coresyves, some be simple and some compound. The simple as Vigo saith, be such as these, Roch alom. as well burnt as not burnt, sponge of the sea somewhat burnt, lime, red Coral, powder of Mercury. Compound Corosyves be these unguentum apostolorum, Vnguentium aegiptiacum, unguentum Ceraceun. Medicines putrefactive, called of the learned sort Septica, according to Avicen, be those that have strength to corrupt the complexion of the member, and to induce an escharr like dead flesh, causing great pain, yea and fevers, and therefore ought not to be ministered, but to strong bodies and in strong diseases, as in Carbuncles, cankerous, ulcers, and such like, and they be these. Arsnike sublimat, resalgar, and other medicines compound therewith. Silvius also addeth thereunto Sandaracha chrysocolla, and Aconitum, but he doth not agree with Avicen in the description of the putrefactive medicines. For he saith that they cause little pain or none, neither be they so hot and dry, as those that are called Escharotica, that is to say Crustive, which be hot in the fourth degree, & do breed a crust and scar and cause great pain, as unslect lime and the burned dregs of wine: wherefore it seemeth that Auicens description belongeth rather to the crustive, than to the putryfactyve medicines. Not withstanding I must needs say that our Chirurgeons, and also ferrers, do find both Arsenik, and Resalgar, to be so sharp, hot, and burning things, as when they minister the same to any part of the body, they are forced to allay the sharpness thereof, the Chirurgeons with the juice of Plantain, or Daffadyll, or else of Houseleek, the ferrers with hog's grease.  
medicines Caustike that is to say burning, are those whose operation is most strong, and inclineth to the nature of fire, and yet more easily allayed as Vigo writeth, than the medicines putrifactyve, and therefore may be more safely used. They be made as he saith of strong lie, called Capitellum, or Magistra, of Vitriol Roman, Sal vitre, Aqua fortis, of this sort be all those which Vigo calleth the blistering medicines, as Apium, Cantharides, Ciclamine, Onions, strong Garlic, Melanacardinum, the stones or grains of vitis Alba, otherwise called Brionye. Moreover Vigo maketh every one of these Cauteris potential, to excel one an other, as it were by certain degrees, saying that corrosives be weaker than Putrifactives, and Putrifactives weaker than caustic, and therefore corrosives work in the upper part, and in soft flesh. Putrifactives in hard flesh and deep. But caustics have power to break the skin in hard flesh, and do enter most deeply. The use of the most part of which things, hath been taught you before, in sundry places according to Martin's experience. And therefore I leave to trouble you any further, wishing you that are desirous to know any more of these matters, to read Taugantius writing, De piroticis the xi Chapter, in his first book of Surgery. And Silvius de medicament. comp. ratione. And john Vigo writing of Surgery englished but few years since. But the old writers so far as I can judge by the words of Absirtus, Pelagonius, and others that writ of Horseleech craft, do apply this word caustic, to such medicines as are astrictive and binding, called of Martin and other Ferrer in these days, binding charges, as may well appear by the composition and use thereof here following, recited by Vegetius in this sort.   

The receit of a caustic used by Chiron to dry up superfluous moisture, and to bind parts loosened, and to strengthen parts weakened. The. Clxxxvij. Chapter.  
TAke of Bitumen judaicum, two pound of Bitumen Apolonii two pound, of the purest part of Frankincense six ounces, of Bdellium Arabitur ij. ounces, of dears suet ij. pound, of Propuleun two ounces, of Galbanum two ounces, of the drops of Storax two ounces, of common wax two pound, of Resin Cabial one pound, of Viscus Italicus three ounces, of Apoxima two ounces, of the juice of Hyssop two ounces, of the drops of armoniac two ounces, of Pitch one pound.   

Another caustic used by Pelagonius, to dry up swellings, bladders, wingals, and splents, in the legs and joints. The. Clxxxviij. Chapter.  
TAke of virgin wax one pound, of Rosen two pound and a half, of Galbanum three ounces, of Asphaltum judaicum two pound, of Myrrh secondary two pound, of Bitumen one pound, of armoniac six ounces, of Costus six ounces. Boil all these things together in an earthen pot, saving the Asphaltum, ammoniac, and Costum, which being first ground like fine flower, must be added unto the other things, after that they have been boiled and cooled, and then boiled altogether again, and well stirred, so as they may be incorporated together, and made all one substance. These kinds of emplasters or ointments, aught in my judgement, to be called as I said before, rather binding charges, then caustic medicines, because there be no such extreme corrosive or burning simples in these, as are before recited. Notwithstanding, I refer my judgement to those that be better learned, and so end, for fear of being over tedious. For if I would, I could take very good occasion here to speak of divers other medicines whereof some are called Anodiva, that is, easing pain and grief. Martin calleth them Lynoges, which are made of linseed, Camomile, soft grease, & such like things, as are hot in the first degree. Some again are called Narcotica, that is to say, astonying or bringing to sleep, as those that are made of Opium, Mandragora, poppy, and such like cold and gross things. And some are called Sarcotica, that is breeding flesh, as Barley flower, & Frankincense. And many other kinds of emplasters, ointments, waters, and salves, which would occupy a Book of no small volume, to be written hereafter by some other perhaps, if not by myself. And in the mean time, let this that I have already written suffice.   
Here endeth the order of curing of Horse's diseases, and here followeth the true Art of paring, and shoing all manner of hooves.   

The true Art of Paring, and shooing all manner of hooves together, with the shapes and figures of divers shoes, very necessary for divers hooves.  

¶ In what points the Art of shooing doth consist. The first Chapter.  
THe Art of shoeing consisteth in these points, that is to say, in paring the hoof well, in making the shoe of good stuff, in well fashioning the web thereof, & well pearring the same, in fitting the shoe unto the horse's foot, in making nails of good stuff, and well fashioning of the same, and finally, in well driving of the said nails, and clenching of the same. But sith neither paring nor shoeing is no absolute thing of itself, but hath respect unto the foot, or hoof, (for the shoe is to be fitted to the foot, and not the foot to the shoe) and that there be divers kinds of hooves both good and bad, requiring great diversity as well of paring, as shoeing: It is meet therefore that we talk first of the diversity of hooves, and then show you how they ought to be pared and shod.   

Of hooves, and divers kinds thereof. The second Chapter.  
OF hooves some be perfect, and some unperfect. The perfect hoof is that which is round, smooth, tough, and short, so as the horse may tread more on the toe than on the heel, and also right, and somewhat hollow within, but not over hollow, having a narrow frush, and broad heels. The unperfect hoof, is that which lacketh any of these properties beforesaid, belonging to a perfect hoof. 
Broad hooves.  For as touching the first point. If the hoof be not round but broad, and spreading out of the sides or quarters, that horse for the most part hath narrow heels, and in continuance of time will be flat footed, which is a weak foot, & will not carry a shoe long nor travel far, but soon surbate, and by treading more on his heels, than on his toes, will go low on his pasterns, and such feet through their weakness be much subject to false quarters, and to gravelling, which is most commonly seen in Flaunders horses, and such as are bred in moist ground.  

Brittle & rugged hooves.  Secondly, if the hoof be not smooth, but rugged, and full of circles, like Rams horns, than it is not only unseemly to the eye, but also it is a sign that the foot is in no good temper, but to hot and dry, and thereby perhaps maketh the hoof to be brittle, which defect is often seen in our English Horses.  
thirdly if it be long, 
Long hooves.  than it will cause the horse to tread all upon the heels, and to go low on his pasterns, and thereby to breed windgalles, whereunto the jennettes of Spain be much subject, by reason of their long hooves.  
fourthly, 
Crooked hooves.  if the hoof be not right, but crooked, that is to say, broad without, and narrow within, whereby the Horse is splay footed, than it will cause the Horse to tread more inward, than outward, and to go so close with his joints together, as he can not well travel without interfering, or perhaps striketh one leg so hard against an other, as he becometh lame. But if he be broad within, and narrow without, that is not so hurtful. Notwithstanding, it will cause him to gravel sooner on the outside than on the inside.  
Fifthly if the hoof be flat and not hollow within, 
Flat hooves.  which is most commonly seen in Frezous and Flaunders horses, than it breedeth, such inconveniences, as are before declared in the first unperfect hoof. And again if it be over hollow, than it will dry the faster, 
Over hollow hooves.  and cause the horse to be hovebound. For the over hollow hoof is a strait narrow hoof, and groweth upright, whereby though the horse treadeth upright, and not on his heels, yet such kind of hooves will dry over fast, unless they be continually stopped, and cause the horse to behove bound, which lameth them, making them to halt, whereunto the gennets and barbary horses are much subject.  
sixthly, 
Broad frushes.  if the frush be broad, than the heels be weak, and so soft as you may almost bend them together, and then the horse will never tread boldly on the stones, or hard ground.  

narrow heels.  Seventhly and lastly▪ if the heels be narrow, they be tender, and the horse will grow to behove bound, to which defect the gennets are most commonly subject.   

Of paring the perfect hoof and fore foot. The third Chapter.  
FIrst pare the seat of the shoe, so even and plain as may be, to the intent that the shoe may sit close, and not bear in one place more than in an other, & take more of the toe then of the heel, to the intent that the heels be higher than the toe, because all the weight of the horses fore-body lieth upon the quarters and heels of the forefeet. And therefore those parts should be most maintained, and taken off with the butter as little as may be. For the paring of the heels, being naturally thinner, and more tender than the toe, doth greatly weaken them: but the toe being naturally thick and hard, would be pared so thin almost as the edge of a knife. But in paring the hinder feet, clean contrary order is to be observed, as shall be said hereafter in his proper place, whereof the French Ferrer have a proverb, which saith Devant dariar, dariar devant, in English, before behind, behind before, that is to say, spare the forefoot behind, and the hinder foot before, as well in paring, as in piercing the shoe.   

Of shoeing the perfect hoof and foreféete, and how the shoe, piercing, and nail, should be made. The fourth Chapter.  
MAke your shoe of spruce or spanish iron, with a broad web, fitting it to the foot, and let the sponges be thicker, & more substantial than any other part of shoe, yea, and also somewhat broad, so as the quarters on both sides may disbord, that is to say, appear without the hoof a straws breadth, to guard the coffin, which is the strength of the hoof, and only beareth the shoe, and when you come to the piercing thereof, spare not to pierce it from the quarter to the hard toe, but not backwards toward the heel, and pierce it so, as the holes may be wider on the outside then on the inside, & that the circle of the piercing may be more distant from the edge of the toe, then from the edge of the quarter, whereas it beginneth, because the hoof is thicker forward then backward, and therefore more hold to be taken. And as touching the nails make them also of the same iron beforesaid, the heads whereof would be sovare and not fully so broad beneath as is above, but answerable to the piercing holes, so as the head of the nails may enter in and fill the same, appearing above the shoe no more than the breadth of the back of a knife, so shall they stand sure without shogging, and endure longer, and to that end the stamp that first maketh the holes, and the preschell that pierceth them, and also the necks of the nails, would be of one square fashion and bigness, that is to say, great above and small beneath▪ which our common Smiths do little regard▪ for when they pierce a shoe, they make the holes as wide on the inside, as on the outside, and their nails with so great a showldering by driving them over hard upon the nail tool, as the heads or rather necks of the said nails, can not enter into the holes, for to say the truth, a good nail would have no shouldering at all, but be made with a plain and square neck, so as it may iusty fit and fill the piercing hole of the shoe. For otherwise the head of the nail standing high, and the neck thereof being weak, either it breaketh off, or else bendeth upon every light occasion, so as the shoe thereby standeth lose from the hoof and is quickly lost. Moreover the shanks of the nails would be somewhat flat, and the points sharp without hollowness or flaw, and stiffer towards the head above, than beneath. And when you drive, drive at the first with soft strokes, and with a light hammer, until the nail be somewhat entered, and in shoeing fine delicate horses, it shall not be amiss to grease the points of the nails with a little soft grease, that the nails may enter the more easily, and drive the two talon nails first. Then look whether the shoe standeth right or not, which you shall perceive in beholding the frush, for if the sponges on both sides, be equally distant from the frush, than it standeth right, if not, then amend it and set the shoe right, and standing right, drive in another nail, that done, let the horse set down his foot again, & look round about it, to see whether it fitteth the horses foot in all places, and whether the horse treadeth even and just on it or not. And if you see that the shoe doth not furnish every part equally, but perhaps appeareth more of one side than of an other. Then make the horses other foot to be lifted up, to the intent he may stand the more stedely upon that foot, and so standing strike him on the hoof with your hammer on that side that the shoe is scant, and that shall make the shoe to come that way. The shoe then standing strait and just, drive in the rest of all the nails to the number of eight, that is to say four on one side and four on another, so as the points of the nails may seem to stand in the outside of the hoof even and just one by an other, as it were in a cyrculer line, and not out of order like the teeth of a saw whereof one is bend one way and an other an other way. That done, cut them off & clinch them so as the clinches may be hidden in the hoof, which by cutting the hoof with the point of a knife, a little beneath the appearing of the nail you may easily do. That done with a rape, pare the hoof round, so as the edge of the shoe may be seen round about.   

Of paring the unperfect hooves every one according to their kinds, and first of the broad hoof. The fift Chapter.  
Abroad hove not being as yet grown to be flat, may be greatly helped and kept from being flat, by the skill and diligence of the ferrer, in well paring and shoeing it. And therefore to pair it well, let him take as much off the toe with his butter, as he can possibly, keeping it always under, but let him not touch the quarters nor the heels at all, unless it be to make the seat of the shoe plain, & let that be done so superficially or overly as may be, so shall the hooves remain always strong.   

Of shoeing the broad hoof. The vi Chapter.  
MAke a good strong shoe with a broad web, and broad sponges, and pierced as is aforesaid, fitting it to the foot, being first pared as is above said, and from the talon nail towards the heel, let the shoe appear a straws breadth without the hoof, and set it on in such order and with such nails as appertaineth to the perfect hoof, saving that you shall set five nails on the outside of this hoof, and four on the inside, because he weareth more without than within.   

Of paring the rough and brittle hoof. The vij Chapter.  
This kind of hoof is most commonly weaker without than within, and because it is for the most part hotter than the other hooves be, the heels thereof may be somewhat more opened than the other, to the intent it may be more easily stopped with cow dung, or other ointment to keep it moist, & also the raggedness on the outside of the coffin would be filed away with a rape, and made smooth, and also more often anointed than other hooves with the hoof ointment hereafter described in the end of this treatise, & as for the rest of the hoof, it must be pared as the perfect hoof.   

Of shoeing the rough and brittle hoof. The eight Chapter.  
MAke his shoe neither to light, but so as it may well bear the horse, nor yet to heavy, for then the hoof being weak will soon cast it, and pierce this shoe to be set on with nine nails, five without and four within.   

Of paring the long hoof. The ix Chapter.  
THe long hoof may be helped by cutting away the toe with his butter, for the shorter foot a weak and slender leg hath, the better. And to say the truth, it is the short foot that maketh the strong leg, and the long foot maketh the weak leg, being forced thereby, to tread all upon the heel, and on the pastorne, and let the rest of the hoof be pared like the perfect hoof.   

Of shoeing a long hoof. The ten Chapter.  
MAke this shoe as round as you can at the toe, that the breadth may take away the evil sight of the length, and if the foot be very narrow, then let the shoe disborde with out the hoof, & pierce the shoe the deeper, and set the shoe backward enough, because such kind of feet do tread most on the heels, and set the shoe on with eight nails like the perfect hoof.   

Of paring the crooked hoof. The xi Chapter.  
FIrst look on what side the hoof is highest and least worn, then pare all that away and make it equal with the lower side which is most worn, without touching the worn side at all, unless it be to make the seat of the shoe plain, and as for the rest, pare it like the perfect hoof.   

Of shoeing the crooked hoof. The twelve Chapter.  
MAke an indifferent strong shoe with a broad web, fitting it to the foot, and pierce it not until you have laid the shoe unto the foot, to the intent you may pierce it to the horses most commodity, which shall be done if you pierce the scant side (which most commonly is the inside) more towards the toe, than the fuller or stronger side. And where as the hoof is weakest, there always make the shoe strongest, and set on this shoe with nine nails, that is to say, five on the stronger side, and four on the weaker side.   

Of paring the flat hoof, otherwise called the pomised hoof. The xiij Chapter.  
MAke the seat of the shoe plain, and take somewhat off the toe, but touch not the heel nor the ball of the foot, but leave both them so strong as you can.   

Of shoeing the flat hoof, or pomised hove. The xiiij Chapter.  
MAke this shoe with a very broad web, for the more it cover the weak sole, the better, and let the mid part of the web that covers the ball of the foot be much thicker, than the outsydes where the pearcing be, and let it be so hollow as it touch no part of the ball of the foot, and let it be large and long enough in all places, so as the horse may go at ease, and let it be pierced round about the toe, to favour the heels, and make ten holes for ten nails, that is to say, five on each side.   

Of paring the over hollow hoof. The xu Chapter.  
PAre this hoof round about, and specially the seat of the shoe, that is to say round about by the edges, to the intent that the concavity or hollowness of the hoof within may not be so deep, but more shallow than it was before, and let it be always kept moist with stopping it, for fear of hoof binding, observing in your paring so even a hand as may be, in all points like unto the perfect hoof.   

Of shoeing the over hollow hoof. The xvi Chapter.  
MAke a light shoe in such order and form as was said before to serve the perfect hoof.   

Of paring a hove that hath a broad frush. The xvij Chapter.  
Broad Frushes do cause weak heels, and therefore had need of little or no paring at all, & for that cause pare only the toe, and also the seat of the shoe, so much as shall be needful to the even standing of the shoe, leaving the heels so strong as may be.   

Of shoeing the hoof that hath a broad frushe. The xviij Chapter.  
MAke this shoe stronger towards the heel than towards the toe, and also let the web be somewhat broad towards the heels to save them from the ground, and set on this shoe with nine nails, because most commonly it is a great foot, and in all other points make it like the shoe for the perfect hoof.   

Of paring the hoof that hath narrow heels. The xix Chapter.  
PAre the toe short, and make the seat of the shoe fair & plain, and open only so much, as there may be some little space betwixt the frushe and the heel. For the less you take off the heel, the better.   

Of shoeing the hoof that hath narrow heels. The twenty Chapter.  
MAke a trim light shoe, with a broad web, and let the sponges be so broad as they may almost meet together, to defend the heel from the ground, and pierce it all towards the toe, sparing the heel so much as you can, and let the shoe be long enough towards the heels, and set it on with eight nails, like the shoe that fytteth the perfect hoof.   

Of paring and shoeing the hinder feet. The xxi Chapter.  
Hitherto we have spoken of the paring and shoing of the forefeet, now therefore, let us speak somewhat of paring and shoeing the hinder feet. For the paring of the hinder feet is clean contrary unto the forefeet, for the weakest part of the hinder foot is the toe, and therefore in paring the hinder foot, the toe must be always more spared than the heels, but in all other points, observe the order of paring, according to the perfection or imperfection of the hooves before declared.   

Of shoeing the hinder feet. The xxij Chapter.  
MAke the shoe fit for the hoof in such sort as is before said, saving that it would be always strongest towards the toe, and it must be pierced nigher the heel than the toe, because as I have said before, that the toe is always the weakest part of the hinder foot. Also let the outsyde of the hinder shoe be made with a Calkyn, not over high, but let the other sponge be agreeable unto the Calkin, that is to say as high in a manner as the Calkin, which Calkin is to keep the horse from sliding. But than it may not be sharp pointed, but rather flat and handsomely turned upward, as is presented in the figure of hinder shoes hereafter following, which kind of Calkin is named by Cesar Fiaschi in his book of Riding, Rampone alla Ragonesa, who utterly rejecteth all other kinds of Calkins as things hurtful and unprofitable, as we shall show you hereafter when we come to speak of shoes with Calkins, rings, and such like engines.   

Of shoeing the hoof that hath a false quarter. The xxiij Chapter.  
IF the horse halt, then make him a shoe fitted to his foot, lacking one quarter on that side that his false quarter is, in such form as you shall see in the end of this book. If he do not halt, then make him a shoe with a button, or shouldering on the inside of the shoe, and next to the sole of the foot, somewhat distant from the false quarter towards the toe, in such form as you shall have in the end of this book, and that shall defend the sore place, so as the shoe shall not touch it. And let it be pierced like unto the figure hereafter expressed, and with this kind of shoe, you may boldly travel your horse where you will.   

Of paring and shoeing for interfering. The xxiiij Chapter.  
THose hooves that interfere, are most commonly higher on the outside, than on the inside, and therefore the outside would be the more taken off with the butter, to the intent that the inside may be somewhat higher (if it will be) than the outside, & then make him a shoe fit for his foot, which would be thicker on the inside than on the outside, and let that shoe never have any Calkin, for that will make the Horse to tread awry, and the sooner to interfere, and let it be pierced in such sort, as you see the figure hereafter expressed. But to be sure. First cause the horse to be ridden before you, and mark well where he toucheth most, and there remedy the shoe, by making it the straighter in that place.   

Of paring and shoeing the foot that is hovebound. The xxv Chapter.  
FIrst pare his toe so short as may be, and pair the sole somewhat thin, and open the heels well, and make him a half shoe like a half Moon, fashioning & piercing it like unto the figure hereafter expressed.   

Of making the planch shoe, or pauncelet. The xxvi Chapter.  
THe planch maketh a good foot, and evil leg, because it maketh the foot to grow beyond the measure of the leg. Notwithstanding for a weak heel, it is marvelous good, and it will last longer than any shoe, and it is borrowed from the Moil, that hath weak heels and frushes, to keep the foot from stones and gravel. Notwithstanding, woe be unto that horse that hath need of such a shoe. The figure of this shoe is also in the end of this book.   

Of shoes with Calkins, rings, welts, and turning vices, and of the Paten shoe. The xxvij Chapter.  
Besides all these kinds of shoes before recited, there be divers others, whereof some are made with high Calkins, some with Rings, some with welts or borders about, and some with vices. Some with the toes turned upward, some with the heels turned upward, and of many other fashions, which though they be not so needful, yet I thought good to speak somewhat of them, and also to set forth some of their shapes. And first, as touching shoes with Calkins, Cesar Fiaschi saith, that though such Calkins be made to keep the horse from sliding. Yet they do the horse more harm than good, in that the horse by means thereof can not tread evenly upon the ground, whereby he many times wryncheth his foot, or straineth some sinew, and specially when he traveleth in stony places, and on the mountains, whereas the hardness of the stones perhaps not suffering the Calkins to catch sure hold, the foot slippeth with the more violent stress, and so taketh harm, and specially the heel if it be weak. And therefore to travel on the Mountains he praiseth much the Turkey manner of shoeing, which for that purpose make their horses shoes with the heels turned upward, in such sort as you see the planch made, setting them on with nails having heads like little buttons, but not standing, so high above the shoe as our frost nails commonly do, whereby the Horse treadeth evenly and surely, so shall he not do having Calkins, which besides the discommodities before alleged, be very dangerous at any time that you would manage your horse. For by crossing in his turning, one foot perhaps may hurt an other with the Calkin, so as it may make the horse to halt, yea, & perhaps lame him for ever▪ And besides that, the Calkins being high behind, the hoof can not be pared so much before at the toe, as it ought to be, whereby the horse treadeth lower on his heels, than he should do, being well pared and shod without Calkins, & so becometh weak heeled. Notwithstanding, some never think their horses to be well shod, unless all the shoes be made with Calkins, either single or double. Yet of two evils double is the less. For the Horse shall tread evener with double, than with single Calkins. But then such Calkins would not be over long, or sharp pointed, but rather short and flat, as hath been before taught, and is expressed in the figure of hinder shoes hereafter following, which as I said before Cesar Fiaschi calleth Ramponi alla Ragonesa. Thus much of shoes with Calkins.   

Of shoes with rings. The xxviij Chapter  
SHoes with Rings were first invented, to make a horse lift his feet high, but Cesar Fiaschi saith, that such shoes be more painful than helpful to the horse, and in wearing such shoes he lifteth more for pain and grief, and specially being trotted upon a hard ground, than for any pleasure or good that they do him, which thing is incident to many horses, that have not sound hooves. For though they be well shod, and have no rings at all, yet being trotted upon a hard ground, they will lift higher than upon a soft ground, for having tender hooves, they be afeard to touch the hard ground, even like a man that hath some grief in the sole of his foot, which will rather twitch up his leg, than offend the sore place, by setting it to the ground. And if that man should also wear a straight shoe, it would grieve him the worse. Even so it fareth with the horse, which perhaps having naturally tender heel's, some for lack of discretion do add thereunto also high Calkins, or else rings, and thereby cause him to have weaker heels, than he had before. Wherefore leaving aside such unprofitable devices, I would wish you make all your shoes, & specially your foreshoes with sponges, in such order as hath been before taught. And as for making the Horse to lift his feet, that is to be helped chief by the Art and skill of the Rider. And whilst the horse is in scooling, I think it were not amiss, to let him wear continually very heavy shoes, to the intent that being afterward shod with lighter shoes, when he should be managed to the shoawe, or otherwise traveled, he may feel his feet to be lighter, and thereby he shall lift the higher, and move his legs and shoulders with the more pleasure and better grace.   

Of shoes with swelling welts, or borders about, The xxix Chapter.  
IN Germany and high Almany, the Smiths do make their shoes with a swelling wealth round about the shoe, which being as high as the heads of the nails or rather higher, do save the nails from wearing, which kind of shoe for lasting, I must needs praise. For I myself have traveled, my horse being shod with those shoes, in those Countries above five hundredth miles right out, upon very stony ground, yea, and upon the mountains, without removing shoe, or driving nail. For the shoe being made of well tempered stuff, weareth equally in all parts, and the horse also treadeth evenly upon them, and specially his feet being before well pared. Cesar Fiaschi praiseth also this shoe very much, to be used when a horse should run for a wager, to keep him from sliding. But then he would have the welt to be indented▪ having sharp pointed teeth like a Saw, and that the sponges behind be as thick as the welt. And that the welt be of a tough hard temper, for fear of wearing over fast. And if you list to hollow the said shoe in the midst, yet let not the embossed side rise so high as the welt, but lie somewhat lower. With these kind of shoes they use in Italy to show such Barbary horses, gennets, and Turks, as are appointed to run for the best game at some public triumph, or for any other private wager. And therefore sith this kind of shoe is so good to keep a horse from sliding, Cesar Fiaschi thinks it best to be used to that end, utterly disallowing both Calkins, frost nails, crests, spurs and all such like devices, as are often used by the ignorant sort, to keep their horses from sliding, not considering the great discommodity and hurt, that may redound thereof to the horse, by means that he can not tread even upon the ground. Or in stead of this shoe, they may use the Turkey shoe, and button nails before mentioned, and that shall keep their horses from sliding better than any of the other devices, and with less harm to the horse.   

Of shoes with turning vices, and also of joint shoes. The xxx Chapter.  
SOme that use to pass the mountains where smiths are not readily to be found, to show a horse if need be, do carry about with them certain shoes made with vices, wherewith they make the shoe fast to the horses foot without help of hammer or nail, the shape whereof is hereafter expressed. Notwithstanding such shoes, are more for the show than for any good use or commodity. For though it save the horse's foot from stones, yet it so pincheth his hoof, as he goeth with pain, and perhaps doth his hoof more hurt than the stones would do. And therefore it were better in such needful times to use the joint shoe, which is made of two pieces, with a flat rivet nail joining them together in the toe, so as you may make it both wide and narrow, as you will yourself, to serve any foot, but this shoe must be set on with nails, and therefore it is needful that the rider learn to drive a nail if need be, whereof he must have always store about him together with Hammer, Pynsons, & Butter, handsomely made, and meet for carriage, without the which the horsemen of Almany do never travail, neither is there any gentleman that loveth his horse, but can use those instruments for that purpose, as well as any Smith. Cesar Fiaschi calleth these kinds of shoes Disferre praising them very much to be used to such purpose as is before said, and so doth Martin. And therefore I thought good to set out the shape thereof amongst the rest of the figures of shoes.   

Of the Paten shoe. The xxxi Chapter.  
Because every Smyth knoweth the use of this shoe, and how to make it, I shall not need to use many words, but only show you that it is a necessary shoe for a horse that is hurt in the hip, or stifle, to be put on upon the contrary foot, to the intent that the sore leg may hang, and not touch the ground.   

How to keep the hooves of a horse moist in the stable. The xxxij Chapter.  
AS horse's hooves do many times take harm through the negligence or unskilfulness of the Ferrer, in evil paring or shoing the same, even so they take no less harm many times through the negligence of the keeper for lack of stopping, and keeping the forefeet moist, for the hinder feet most commonly are kept to moist, by means that the dung and stale is suffered to lie continually at their heels. But the forefeet stand continually dry, whereby the horse becometh brittle hoved, yea, and many times hovebounde, which a good keeper will not suffer, but be mindful to stop them often, either with horse dung or Cow dung, yea, & also to wash them clean without with water, and then to anoint them with some good suppling ointment as this here following prescribed by Martin, which will not only supple the hooves, and make them tough, but also cause them to shine and glistre, which is counted a beautiful thing amongst the Spaniards, Italians, and such as love to have their horses finely kept.   

The receit of the ointment. The xxxiij Chapter.  
TAke of turpentine, of sheeps suet, of each half a pound, of unwrought wax half a quartern, and of Salad oil half a pint. Boil all these things together in a pot, stirring them continually until they be thoroughly mingled together. Then take it from the fire and let it cool, and being cold, preserve it in the same pot, or else in some other, to the intent that you may have it ready every second day, to anoint all the coffins of the horses hooves round about, but first wash their hooves fair and clean, and suffer no dirt to remain upon them, then being dried with a cloth anoint them.   
Thus endeth the treatise of Paring and shoeing all manner of hooves.   

divers shapes of Shoes.  
 
  

Imprinted at London, by William Seres, dwelling at the West end of Paul's, at the sign of the Hedgehog, and are to be sold at his shop.